4699 - DB1 - OpsMan - R0a 3.7.14

TITLEPAGEANDDESCRIPTIONOFEQUIPMENT
TITULODEPGINAYDESCRIPCINDEEQUIPO
PURCHASER/COMPRADOR: DRILLMEC
PROJECTTITLE/TITULODEPROYECTO: 120692
TAGNUMBER/NUMERODEETIQUETA: 40392602
P.O.NUMBER/NUMERODEORDEN: POB2002194
DESCRIPTION/DESCRIPCIN: KingpostMarineCrane
SUPPLIER/PROVEEDOR: Seatrax,Inc.
MODELNUMBER/NUMERODEMODELO: S7226
SERIALNUMBER:/NUMERODESERIE: 4699
CONTACT/CONTACTO: ServiceDepartment/DepartamentodeServicio
P.O.Box840687
Houston,TX77284
UnitedStatesofAmerica
+1713.896.6500(7:30AM5:30PMCentralU.S.A.)
+1713.940.8794(AfterHours)
+1713.896.6611(Fax)
http://www.seatrax.com/parts.html
DataBook1Installation,OperationandMaintenance
Librodedatos1Instalacin,operacinymantenimiento
TableofContents/Tabladecontenido
Section/Seccin1 ________________________________
IntroductionandDesignFeatures Introduccinycaractersticasdediseo
Introduction Introduccin
Fail Safe Prueba de fallas
Support & Slew Soporte y giro
Anti-Two Block System Sistema de doble bloque
Section/Seccin2 ________________________________
OperatingInstructions Instruccionesdeoperacin
Basic Operating Instructions Instrucciones bsicas de operacin
Hand Signals for Crane Operators Seales manuales para operadores de gras
Specific Operating Instructions Instrucciones de operacin especficas
Boom Lock Operation Funcionamiento de bloqueo de la pluma
Section/Seccin3 ________________________________
InspectionandMaintenance Inspeccinymantenimiento
Initial Start-Up and Commissioning Puesta en funcionamiento y puesta en
Procedure marcha
Commissioning Checklist Puesta y lista de verificacin
(English-only) (Solamente en ingls)
Inspection Check List Inspeccin y lista de verificacin
Bolt Installation and Inspection Procedure Instalacin de tornillos y procedimiento de
inspeccin
Specifications for Large Diameter Nuts and Especificaciones para tuercas y tornillos de
Bolts dimetro grande
Main Block and Overhaul Ball Inspection Inspeccin del bloque de carga y bola de
carga
Wedge Sockets Terminacin de cua
Hydraulic Boom Hoist Limit System Sistema de limite del malacate de la pluma
Hydraulic System Adjustments Ajustes del sistema hidrulico
Hoist Drum Brake Maintenance Mantenimiento de freno de tambor del
malacate
Hoist Brake Test Procedure Procedimiento para prueba de freno de los
malacates
Section/Seccin3(Continued/ Continuacin) __________
Hoist Spline Inspection Procedure Inspeccin de ranuras de eje de malacate
Boom Inspection, Repair and Welding Procedimiento de inspeccin, reparacin y
Procedure soldadura de la pluma
Swing Bearing System Service Servicio del sistema de cojinete de giro
Collector Rings Anillos colectores
Emergency Slewing Procedure Procedimiento de giro de emergencia
Emergency Load Lowering Procedure Procedimiento para bajar una carga en
emergencia
Section/Seccin4 ________________________________
GeneralDocumentation Documentacingeneral
General Assembly Asamblea general
C.G. Components Componentes de centro de gravedad
Boom General Arrangement Disposicin general de la pluma
Electrical One-Line Diagram Esquema elctrico
Electrical Schematic and Bill of Material Esquema elctrico y lista de materiales
Hydraulic Schematic Esquema hidrulico
Hydraulic Hose Diagram and Bill of Esquema hidrulico y lista de materiales
Material
Kingpost Interface Dibujo de interfase del poste central
Preservation Procedure Procedimientos de preservacin
Two Year Spares List Lista de partes de repuesto para dos aos
Section/Seccin5 ________________________________
PerformanceData Datosderendimiento
Data Sheet Commentary Pagina de comentario de datos
Crane Data Sheet Package Pagina de datos de la gra
Load Test Procedures Procedimiento de prueba de carga
Function and Load Test Report (Completed Funcin y reporte de prueba de carga
on Site) (Completo en el sitio)
Section/Seccin6 ________________________________
Lubrication Lubricacin
General Information Informacin general
Lubricant Types and Change Schedule Tipo de lubricantes, programas y puntos de
lubricacin
Lubrication Points Puntos de lubricacin
Lubrication Chart Grafica de lubricacin
Gearbox Arrangements Disposiciones de caja de engranes
Slew Bearing Arrangements and Boom Disposicin de cojinete de giro y pernos de
Heel Pins pivote de la pluma
Grease Points on Typical Hoists Puntos de grasa en los malacates
Engine and Gear Oils Aceites de motor y caja de engranes
Grease and Hydraulic Oil Grasa y cceite hidrulico
Service Bulletin SB26003 Boletn de servicio SB26003
Service Bulletin SB25001R Boletn de servicio SB25001R
Section/Seccin7 ________________________________
Rigging Aparejo
Wire Rope Specifications Especificaciones de cable de acero
Reeving Diagrams Diagramas de instalacin del cable de
acero
Hoist Drum Shimming Nivelacin de tambor del malacate
Erection and Installation Procedure Montaje y procedimiento de instalacin
Section/Seccin8 ________________________________
PrimeMoverManual Manualdemotor
Caterpillar C15 Diesel Engine Motor diesel Caterpillar C15
Section/Seccin9 ________________________________
LoadIndicator Indicadordecarga
Seatrax CCM7000 Seatrax SLI
Section/Seccin10 _______________________________
GeneralBillofMaterialsand Listadematerialgeneralydatosde
ComponentData componentes
General Bills of Material Lista de material general
Component Data Datos de componentes
o Slew Bearings o Cojinetes de giro
o Hoist Assemblies o Ensamblaje de malacates
o Hoisting Block, Load and Overhaul o Bloque de elevacin, carga y bola
o Sheaves o Poleas
o Brakes, Slew and Hoist o Frenos, giro y malacates
o Gearboxes o Cajas de engranes
o Pumps o Bombas
o Filters o Filtros
o Motors o Motores
o Starters o Motores de arranque
o Valves o Vlvulas
o Controls o Controles
o Additional Equipment o Equipo adicional
Section/Seccin1 ________________________
IntroductionandDesignFeatures Introduccinycaractersticasdediseo
Introduction Introduccin
Fail Safe Prueba de fallas
Support & Slew Soporte y giro
Anti-Two Block System Sistema de doble bloque
P.O. Box 840687, Houston, Texas 77284
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04deabrilde2004
Introduccin
Leaelmanualdeinstruccionesynormasdeseguridadcuidadosamente
Este manual ha sido elaborado para dar al operador y al personal de mantenimiento la
informacin sobre el cuidado, operacin y mantenimiento de Seatrax gras marinas
hidrulicas.
Las graficas de carga, montadas cerca de la consola del operador, definen los lmites de
elevacin de la gra en particular. Se debe entender que en una gra montada en un pedestal
de elevacin, las cargas mximas establecidas en la placa de carga estn limitadas por
factores distintos de inflexin, tales como la resistencia estructural, el cable de alambre, etc.
A pesar de que la gra puede parecer capaz de levantar cargas mayores de las que estn
incluidas en las listas de capacidad de carga, no exceda las cargas y / o las condiciones
mencionadas en estas placas.
Para mayor comodidad, este manual ha sido escrito en secciones. Familiarcese con este
manual para que pueda encontrar fcilmente la informacin necesaria.
Las normas de seguridad contenidas en este manual representan un conjunto mnimo de
normas para un funcionamiento seguro. Cada operador debe estar familiarizado con estas
reglas y seguirlas en todo momento. Las reglas escritas sin embargo, no pueden cubrir todas
las situaciones que pueden surgir en el trabajo. En consecuencia, los operadores deben
completar las normas de buen juicio y experiencia.
Operacin
Esta es el rea ms importante en relacin con la seguridad, ya que implica la mayor
frecuencia de exposicin a los riesgos. El operador debe estar en su sano juicio y el cuerpo y
capaz de comprender y aplicar las normas de seguridad de funcionamiento establecidas.
Adems, el operador debe estar en condiciones de ejercer un buen juicio para hacer frente a
las mltiples situaciones que no pueden preverse y cubiertas en este documento. Dado que el
fabricante no tiene control directo sobre la operacin o aplicacin de la gra, el
cumplimiento de las buenas prcticas de seguridad en esta rea es responsabilidad del
usuario y el personal operativo.
Clasificacindecapacidad
Nunca exceda las calificaciones del fabricante. Las disposiciones pertinentes de estas
clasificaciones deben ser siempre cuidadosamente observadas. Si las condiciones requeridas
no estn presentes, las calificaciones completas de capacidad estndar no se pueden utilizar y
calificaciones deben ajustarse por debajo para compensar los riesgos especiales.
Clasificacinbasadaencompetenciaahidrulicoyestructura
Todas las notas que aparecen en las graficas de ndices de carga se basan en las competencias
hidrulicas y estructurales de la gra en lugar de estabilidad. No es seguro aplicar cualquier
carga que es mayor que la carga nominal a la que se muestra en la tabla para ese radio y
condiciones.
Introduction_R02_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
Inspeccinymantenimiento
Componentes en cualquier equipo estn sujetos a desgaste, deterioro o daos, lo que limita su
vida til. Cuando es nuevo, todas las partes se han incorporado en la fuerza de reserva frente
a condiciones desconocidas y prdida razonable de la fuerza debido al deterioro gradual. Sin
embargo, si el mantenimiento y la lubricacin se descuidan, estas partes pueden finalmente
llegar a una condicin en la que se convierten en un peligro para la seguridad. Si no se
mantiene correctamente los ajustes de los distintos mecanismos para asegurar el
funcionamiento adecuado de la gra tambin puede ser un peligro para la seguridad. Ajustes
de la vlvula de seguridad hidrulica no debe superar nunca la presin especificada sin el
consentimiento del fabricante. Re-ajuste, en caso necesario, debe ser realizada por una
persona competente y calificada. Dado que el fabricante no tiene control directo sobre la
inspeccin de campo y el mantenimiento, la seguridad en esta rea es responsabilidad del
usuario y su personal operativo.
Un programa regular de inspeccin y mantenimiento preventivo debe establecerse de manera
que cualquier problema aparente sea descubierto y corregido antes de que se dae la gra.
Directrices se proporcionan en la seccin de Inspeccin y Mantenimiento de este manual
(Libro de Datos 1), pero la amplia variacin en el uso y las condiciones ambientales hacen
que sea imposible para nosotros desarrollar un programa de control aplicable a todas las
gras. Por lo tanto, es la responsabilidad del propietario para asignar personal con
experiencia la tarea de desarrollar e implementar un programa de mantenimiento adecuado
para cada gra particular, inspeccin y control.
Lubricacin
Lubricacin regular y sistemtica debe mantenerse de acuerdo con las tablas de lubricacin y
recomendaciones generales contenidas en la seccin Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1.
Detenga toda la gra al lubricar, salvo en los casos en que la gra est en movimiento y las
instrucciones en estado de la gra. Antes de reanudar las operaciones, reinstale las guardias o
los paneles que se deben quitar para acceder a algunos puntos de lubricacin o inspeccin.
Ajustes,reemplazamientos,yreparaciones
Todas las condiciones dadas a conocer por las exigencias de la inspeccin sobre el que se
considera que constituyen riesgos para la seguridad, deben ser corregidas antes que la
mquina se reanude y sea puesta en operacin.
Reemplazamientodepartes
Todas las piezas de repuesto deben ser obtenidas de los fabricantes de equipos originales con
el fin de que se puedan mantener la fuerza y la calidad de la mquina original.
Herramientademantenimiento
Herramientas de mantenimiento de rutina deben estar disponibles en todo momento y deben
estar limpias y en buen estado.
Introduction_R02_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04deabrilde2004
Introduccin
Leaelmanualdeinstruccionesynormasdeseguridadcuidadosamente
Este manual ha sido elaborado para dar al operador y al personal de mantenimiento la
informacin sobre el cuidado, operacin y mantenimiento de Seatrax gras marinas
hidrulicas.
Las graficas de carga, montadas cerca de la consola del operador, definen los lmites de
elevacin de la gra en particular. Se debe entender que en una gra montada en un pedestal
de elevacin, las cargas mximas establecidas en la placa de carga estn limitadas por
factores distintos de inflexin, tales como la resistencia estructural, el cable de alambre, etc.
A pesar de que la gra puede parecer capaz de levantar cargas mayores de las que estn
incluidas en las listas de capacidad de carga, no exceda las cargas y / o las condiciones
mencionadas en estas placas.
Para mayor comodidad, este manual ha sido escrito en secciones. Familiarcese con este
manual para que pueda encontrar fcilmente la informacin necesaria.
Las normas de seguridad contenidas en este manual representan un conjunto mnimo de
normas para un funcionamiento seguro. Cada operador debe estar familiarizado con estas
reglas y seguirlas en todo momento. Las reglas escritas sin embargo, no pueden cubrir todas
las situaciones que pueden surgir en el trabajo. En consecuencia, los operadores deben
completar las normas de buen juicio y experiencia.
Operacin
Esta es el rea ms importante en relacin con la seguridad, ya que implica la mayor
frecuencia de exposicin a los riesgos. El operador debe estar en su sano juicio y el cuerpo y
capaz de comprender y aplicar las normas de seguridad de funcionamiento establecidas.
Adems, el operador debe estar en condiciones de ejercer un buen juicio para hacer frente a
las mltiples situaciones que no pueden preverse y cubiertas en este documento. Dado que el
fabricante no tiene control directo sobre la operacin o aplicacin de la gra, el
cumplimiento de las buenas prcticas de seguridad en esta rea es responsabilidad del
usuario y el personal operativo.
Clasificacindecapacidad
Nunca exceda las calificaciones del fabricante. Las disposiciones pertinentes de estas
clasificaciones deben ser siempre cuidadosamente observadas. Si las condiciones requeridas
no estn presentes, las calificaciones completas de capacidad estndar no se pueden utilizar y
calificaciones deben ajustarse por debajo para compensar los riesgos especiales.
Clasificacinbasadaencompetenciaahidrulicoyestructura
Todas las notas que aparecen en las graficas de ndices de carga se basan en las competencias
hidrulicas y estructurales de la gra en lugar de estabilidad. No es seguro aplicar cualquier
carga que es mayor que la carga nominal a la que se muestra en la tabla para ese radio y
condiciones.
Introduction_R02_spamx.doc Page1of2
Inspeccinymantenimiento
Componentes en cualquier equipo estn sujetos a desgaste, deterioro o daos, lo que limita su
vida til. Cuando es nuevo, todas las partes se han incorporado en la fuerza de reserva frente
a condiciones desconocidas y prdida razonable de la fuerza debido al deterioro gradual. Sin
embargo, si el mantenimiento y la lubricacin se descuidan, estas partes pueden finalmente
llegar a una condicin en la que se convierten en un peligro para la seguridad. Si no se
mantiene correctamente los ajustes de los distintos mecanismos para asegurar el
funcionamiento adecuado de la gra tambin puede ser un peligro para la seguridad. Ajustes
de la vlvula de seguridad hidrulica no debe superar nunca la presin especificada sin el
consentimiento del fabricante. Re-ajuste, en caso necesario, debe ser realizada por una
persona competente y calificada. Dado que el fabricante no tiene control directo sobre la
inspeccin de campo y el mantenimiento, la seguridad en esta rea es responsabilidad del
usuario y su personal operativo.
Un programa regular de inspeccin y mantenimiento preventivo debe establecerse de manera
que cualquier problema aparente sea descubierto y corregido antes de que se dae la gra.
Directrices se proporcionan en la seccin de Inspeccin y Mantenimiento de este manual
(Libro de Datos 1), pero la amplia variacin en el uso y las condiciones ambientales hacen
que sea imposible para nosotros desarrollar un programa de control aplicable a todas las
gras. Por lo tanto, es la responsabilidad del propietario para asignar personal con
experiencia la tarea de desarrollar e implementar un programa de mantenimiento adecuado
para cada gra particular, inspeccin y control.
Lubricacin
Lubricacin regular y sistemtica debe mantenerse de acuerdo con las tablas de lubricacin y
recomendaciones generales contenidas en la seccin Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1.
Detenga toda la gra al lubricar, salvo en los casos en que la gra est en movimiento y las
instrucciones en estado de la gra. Antes de reanudar las operaciones, reinstale las guardias o
los paneles que se deben quitar para acceder a algunos puntos de lubricacin o inspeccin.
Ajustes,reemplazamientos,yreparaciones
Todas las condiciones dadas a conocer por las exigencias de la inspeccin sobre el que se
considera que constituyen riesgos para la seguridad, deben ser corregidas antes que la
mquina se reanude y sea puesta en operacin.
Reemplazamientodepartes
Todas las piezas de repuesto deben ser obtenidas de los fabricantes de equipos originales con
el fin de que se puedan mantener la fuerza y la calidad de la mquina original.
Herramientademantenimiento
Herramientas de mantenimiento de rutina deben estar disponibles en todo momento y deben
estar limpias y en buen estado.
Introduction_R02_spamx.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-156. Rev 2. 06/04/2013
FailSafeHoistFeatures
These Seatrax hoists are individual hydraulic motor driven
units, which consist of the following major components:
High speed, fixed displacement, low torque hydraulic
motor either of the gear, vane, or axial piston type,
depending on crane and hoist models.
Fail-safe spring-applied, pressure-released dynamic brake
valve direct connected to the inlet port of each hydraulic
motor.
Gear reduction connecting the hydraulic motor to the
drum shaft.
One-piece, solid drum shaft supported on both ends by
anti-friction bearings, which drives the hoist drum
through a hardened spline connection.
Fail-safe spring-applied, pressure-released static parking
brake acts directly on the hoist drum.
Seatrax cranes use open loop hydraulic systems. The hoist
portion of this hydraulic system schematic is demonstrated in
Figure 1. The system consists of the following major
components: Figure1
Fixed or variable displacement pumps. Individual pumps are provided for each of the three primary
crane motions of hoist, luff and slew. These pumps take oil directly from the hydraulic reservoir
after passing through inlet strainers and then discharge to the pressure relief valves.
Pressure relief valves are fitted in each circuit between the pumps and the directional control
valves. These valves bypass the pump flow to the hydraulic reservoir whenever the preset pressure
is exceeded.
Four-way, three-position, spring-centered, spool-type directional control valves control each
primary motion. These valves select either up or down depending on control input. Lack of control
input causes the springs to automatically center the valve to the neutral or stopped position, which
makes these directional control valves fail-safe. These valves come equipped with motor spools,
which connect both up and down hoist lines to each other and to the hydraulic reservoir whenever
the spool is in the neutral position.
A return line filter is fitted between the discharge port of the slew directional control valve and the
oil cooler. The discharge ports of both hoist directional control valves directly connect to the
hydraulic reservoir.
An oil cooler is fitted between the return line filter and the hydraulic reservoir.
FailSafeHoistFeatures_STDFM156_R02.doc Page1of4
On Seatrax hoists, the dynamic brake valve accomplishes dynamic braking duties. This two-way, two-
position, normally closed, spring offset, throttling spool valve directly bolts to the up port of the
hydraulic motor and consists of the following major components:
Free flow check valve Pilot orifice
Throttling spool Spring cavity vent
Return spring
This dynamic brake valve functions as follows:
When the directional control valve spool moves into the up or hoist position, fluid flows from the
directional control valve through the check valve section and rotates the hydraulic motor in the up
or hoisting direction. The check valve allows the fluid to bypass the throttling spool, and the
system behaves as if the dynamic brake valve is not present.
When the directional control valve spool returns to the neutral or stopped position, the up and
down hydraulic lines are connected together and to the hydraulic reservoir. The pressures in these
hydraulic lines then tend to equalize at a very low value. At this time, the load on the hoist cable
will try to fall. As the load tries to fall, the hydraulic motor will attempt to rotate in the down
direction as the load drives the drum. For this rotation to occur, fluid must escape past the dynamic
brake valve. This escape of fluid or reverse flow is prevented by both the check valve and the
throttling spool, which is in its normal or closed position.
When the directional control valve spool moves into the down or lowering position, the pump
attempts to force fluid to flow from the directional control valve through the hydraulic motor;
however, the hydraulic motor cannot rotate in the down direction because of the check valve and
the position of the throttling spool. The pressure in the down side of the circuit increases and is
then transmitted through small pilot line connecting the down side of the circuit to the pilot orifice.
This pilot orifice permits this pressure signal to push on the end of the throttling spool, which
attempts to open the dynamic brake valve by compressing the return spring. As the throttling spool
moves, the fluid trapped in the spring chamber flows to the low-pressure side of the circuit through
the spring cavity vent. As the throttling spool opens, the load on the hoist cable rotates the
hydraulic motor in the down direction, which permits the load to lower. The speed of this rotation
increases as the load tries to fall. As this happens, the load will try to overrun the system by
attempting to force more fluid through the hydraulic motor than is being supplied through the
directional control valve by the pump. This action causes the pressure in the down side of the
circuit to decay as the hydraulic motor tries to suck more fluid than supplied. This reduction in
pressure allows the return spring to move the throttling spool toward its closed position, which
slows the rotation of the hydraulic motor by reducing the fluid flow from the dynamic brake valve
and causes the rate of descent of the load to decrease.
This modulation action of the dynamic brake valve then keeps the loads speed of descent in step
and proportional to the flow rate of the fluid passing through the directional control valve. The
energy absorbed by slowing the speed of descent of the load is converted to heat in the hydraulic
fluid as fluid is forced past the throttling spool. This heat is then removed from the hydraulic fluid
by the oil cooler.
The dynamic brake valve is fail-safe because it bolts directly to the port of the hydraulic motor
without the use of pipes, tubes or hoses. If the pressure in the down side of the circuit is lost for any
reason, the return spring closes the throttling spool and stops the descent of the load.
This means that the load will stop if any of the following events occur in any combination:
The spool in the directional control valve returns to the neutral position.
The prime mover stops, which stops fluid flow from the pump.
A hose or pipe ruptures. This applies to all hoses, pipes and tubes in the system.
A pressure-containing device, other than the hydraulic motor or the dynamic brake valve, ruptures.
If the dynamic brake valve or other system components are contaminated by dirt or other foreign
materials.
The design and construction of the dynamic brake valve also makes it impervious to changes in
temperature and fluid viscosity.
Seatrax hoists are also furnished with a static parking brake. This brake is a fail-safe, spring-applied,
pressure-released, non-self energizing, external band type of brake, which acts directly on the hoist
drum. This brake will hold more torque, even with wet and oil soaked linings, than the hoist drive can
develop. This brake system consists of the following major components:
Brake band lined with conventional, non-asbestos lining and constructed with a rotary bearing on
the low tension end and a threaded anchor on the high tension end.
One-piece camshaft used to apply force to the low tension end of the brake band.
Lever arm applies torque to the cam shaft.
Link bar connects the lever arm to the output rod of the brake actuator.
Brake actuator consists of a conical spring, an output rod and a hydraulic release cylinder.
Three-position, spring-centered, pilot-operated, shuttle valve controls the operation of the brake
actuator.
This static parking brake functions as follows:
When the directional control valve spool is in the neutral or stopped position, the up and down
sides of the circuit connect together and to the hydraulic reservoir. At this time, the pressures in
both sides of the circuit will be roughly equal and of a low value. The pilot sections of the shuttle
valve are connected one to the up and one to the down side of the circuit. The approximately equal
pressures, acting in combination with the centering springs, hold the spool of the shuttle valve in
the center position, thereby connecting the pressure side of the hydraulic release cylinder to the
hydraulic reservoir. The conical spring can then apply its full force to the output rod and the lever
arm. This applies torque to the cam shaft resulting in a tension load being applied to the low
tension end of the brake band, which sets the brake.
When the directional control valve spool moves to the up or down positions, the difference in
pressures between the two sides of the circuit causes the spool in the shuttle valve to shift to one
side or the other. This shift causes fluid to flow from the higher pressure side of the circuit to the
hydraulic release cylinder. This cylinder will retract and cage the conical spring and release the
static parking brake.
The pressure required to release the static parking brake is normally less than that required to open
the dynamic brake valve. This ensures the static parking brake will release first and set last.
Therefore, in normal operation, this static parking brake does not operate against a moving drum,
so there is little or no lining wear.
However, this static parking brake can stop a runaway load in the unlikely event that a failure in
the drive train connecting the drum to the hydraulic motor occurs. Because this brake is not self-
energizing, it can perform this function in a controlled manner without inducing undue shock loads
into the crane structure.
This static parking brake is also fail-safe because the conical spring automatically sets the brake
whenever positive pressure is not present in the hydraulic release cylinder.
Seatrax hoists have dual load paths. Note that the two fail-safe braking devices on Seatrax hoists
operate through two distinctly separate load paths. The dynamic brake connects to the hoist drum
through the drive train. The static parking brake acts directly on the hoist drum. This means that there
is no mode of failure that can render both braking systems inoperative at the same time.
Certifying Authority and Regulatory Compliance:
The above fail-safe braking systems fully comply with API Specification 2C, Seventh Edition,
2012.
The U.S. Coast Guard, Eighth District, reviewed this system and concluded it would be classified
as fail-safe, so our hydraulic system and all attendant hydraulic plumbing can be classified as a
Miscellaneous fluid power system under the requirements of 46 CFR Subchapter F.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-156. Rev 2. 06/04/2013
Caractersticasdemalacateapruebadefallas
Estos malacates Seatrax son unidades con motores Figura 1
hidrulicos individuales, que consisten de los siguientes
componentes principales:
Alta velocidad, desplazamiento fijo, bajo torque de
motor hidrulico de engranes, paletas o de pistones
axiales, dependiendo de la gras y modelos de
malacates.
Aplicado por resorte a prueba de falla, la presin libera
la vlvula de freno dinmico conectado directamente al
puerto de entrada de cada motor hidrulico.
Reduccin de engranes que conecta el motor hidrulico
con el eje del tambor.
Una sola pieza, de eje slido del tambor apoyado en
ambos extremos por cojinetes antifriccin, que acciona
el tambor del malacate a travs de una conexin
ranurada endurecida.
Aplicado por resorte a prueba de falla, la presin libera el
freno actuador de estacionamiento esttico directamente
sobre el tambor del malacate.
Las gras Seatrax utilizan sistemas hidrulicos de circuito abierto. La porcin de malacate de este
esquema del sistema hidrulico se demuestra en la Figura 1. El sistema consta de los siguientes
Bombas de desplazamiento variable o fijo. Bombas individuales que proporcionan a cada uno de
los tres principales movimientos de la gra de elevacin, radio y giro. Estas bombas suministran el
aceite directamente del depsito hidrulico despus de pasar por filtros de entrada y luego se
descarga a las vlvulas de alivio de presin.
Vlvulas de alivio de presin estn montadas en cada circuito entre las bombas y las vlvulas de
control direccional. Estas vlvulas permiten dejar pasar el flujo de la bomba al depsito de aceite
hidrulico cada vez que se excede la presin preestablecida.
Cuatro vas, tres posiciones, resortes centrados en el eje de las vlvulas de control direccional
controlan cada movimiento primario. Estas vlvulas se selecciona ya sea hacia arriba o hacia abajo
dependiendo de la entrada de control. La falta de entrada de control hace que los resortes centren
automticamente la vlvula a la posicin de punto neutral o detenido, lo que hace que estas
vlvulas de control direccional sean a prueba de fallas. Estas vlvulas estn equipadas con motores
con eje, que se conectan en direccin tanto hacia arriba y hacia abajo del malacate con mangueras
entre s y despus para el depsito hidrulico cada vez que el eje est en posicin neutral.
FailSafeHoistFeatures_STDFM156_R02_spamx.doc Pgina1of4
Un filtro de lnea de retorno est instalado entre el puerto de descarga de la vlvula de control de
direccin de giro y el radiador de aceite. Los puertos de descarga de ambos malacates vlvulas de
control direccional se conectan directamente al depsito hidrulico.
Un enfriador de aceite est instalado entre el filtro de lnea de retorno y el depsito hidrulico.
En los malacates Seatrax, la vlvula de freno dinmico cumple funciones de frenado dinmico. Esto de
dos vas, de dos posiciones, normalmente cerrada, resorte compensado, estrangulando la vlvula del
eje directamente a los tornillos hasta el puerto del motor hidrulico y se compone de los siguientes
vlvula de retencin de flujo libre Orificio Piloto
Eje de Limite Cavidad de Ventilacin del Resorte
Resorte de Retorno
Este freno de vlvula dinmica funciona como sigue:
Cuando el eje de la vlvula de control direccional se mueve a la posicin hacia arriba o elevacin,
el fluido fluye desde la vlvula de control direccional a travs de la seccin de la vlvula de
retencin y hace girar el motor hidrulico en la direccin hacia arriba o elevacin. La vlvula de
retencin permite que el fluido pase por el eje de lmite de estrangulacin, y el sistema se comporta
como si la vlvula de frenado dinmico no est presente.
Cuando el eje de la vlvula de control direccional vuelve a la posicin de punto muerto o detenido,
las lneas hidrulicas hacia arriba y abajo estn conectados entre s y con el depsito hidrulico.
Las presiones en estas lneas hidrulicas a continuacin, tienden a igualarse a un valor muy bajo.
En este momento, la carga en el cable de levantamiento tratar a caer. A medida que la carga
intenta a caer, el motor hidrulico intentar girar en la direccin hacia abajo como la carga acciona
el tambor. Para que se produzca esta rotacin, el lquido debe escapar ms all de la vlvula de
freno dinmico. Este escape de fluido o el flujo inverso se previene por tanto la vlvula de
retencin y el eje de lmite de estrangulamiento se encuentra en su posicin normal o cerrada.
Cuando el eje de la vlvula de control direccional se mueve en la posicin hacia abajo o bajar, la
bomba intentara forzar que el fluido fluya de la vlvula de control direccional al motor hidrulico,
sin embargo, el motor hidrulico no puede girar en la direccin hacia abajo debido a la vlvula de
retencin y la posicin del eje de limite de estrangulacin. La presin en el lado negativo del
circuito aumenta y se transmite a travs de la lnea piloto pequeo que conecta el lado negativo del
circuito al orificio piloto. Este orificio piloto permite que esta seal de presin empuje el eje de
lmite hasta el extremo de estrangulacin, que intenta abrir la vlvula de freno dinmico mediante
la compresin del resorte de retorno. Como el eje de lmite se mueva, el fluido atrapado en la
cmara de resorte fluye hacia el lado de baja presin del circuito a travs de la ventilacin de la
cavidad del resorte. Como se abre el eje de estrangulamiento, la carga en el cable de levantamiento
gira el motor hidrulico en la direccin hacia abajo, lo que permite que la carga baje. La velocidad
de esta rotacin aumenta a medida que la carga intenta a caer. Mientras esto sucede, la carga tratara
de invadir el sistema al intentar forzar ms fluido a travs del motor hidrulico que est siendo
suministrado a travs de la vlvula de control direccional por la bomba. Esta accin hace que la
presin en direccin hacia abajo del circuito decaiga, haciendo que el motor hidrulico intente
aspirar ms lquido del que se suministra. Esta reduccin de presin permite que el resorte de
retorno mueva el eje de lmite de estrangulacin hacia su posicin cerrada, lo que hace ms lenta la
rotacin del motor hidrulico mediante la reduccin del flujo de fluido desde la vlvula del freno
dinmico y hace que la velocidad de descenso de la carga a disminuya.
Esta accin de modulacin de la vlvula de freno dinmico a continuacin, mantiene la velocidad
de la carga en el paso de descenso y proporciona la velocidad de flujo del fluido que pasa a travs
de la vlvula de control direccional. La energa absorbida por la desaceleracin de la velocidad de
descenso de la carga se convierte en calor en el fluido hidrulico, como el fluido es forzado ms
all del eje de lmite de estrangulacin. Este calor es removido a continuacin del fluido hidrulico
por el radiador de enfriamiento del aceite.
La vlvula de frenado es a prueba de fallas porque se fija directamente al puerto del motor
hidrulico sin el uso de tuberas, tubos o mangueras. Si la presin en el lado de direccin hacia
abajo del circuito se pierde por cualquier razn, el resorte de retorno cierra el eje de lmite de
estrangulamiento y se detiene el descenso de la carga.
Esto significa que la carga se detendr en cualquiera de los eventos siguientes en cualquier
combinacin:
El eje de la vlvula de control direccional vuelve a la posicin neutral.
Si el motor de fuerza primaria se detiene, se detiene el flujo de fluido desde la bomba.
Si una manguera o tuberas se rompe. Esto se aplica a todas las mangueras, tubos y tuberas en el
sistema.
Un dispositivo contenedor de presin, que no sea el motor hidrulico o la vlvula de freno
dinmico, sufre rupturas.
Si la vlvula de freno dinmico u otros componentes del sistema estn contaminados por la
suciedad u otros materiales extraos.
El diseo y la construccin de la vlvula de frenado dinmico tambin hace que sea impermeable a
los cambios en la temperatura y la viscosidad del fluido.
Los malacates Seatrax tambin estn equipados con un freno de estacionamiento esttico. Este es un
freno a prueba de fallas el cual es aplicado por un resorte y presin para liberar, un tipo de banda
externa, que acta directamente sobre el tambor del malacate. Este freno tendr ms par, incluso si el
revestimiento esta hmedo y empapado de aceite el elevador de accionamiento puede desarrollarse.
Este sistema de freno consta de los siguientes componentes principales:
Banda de freno forrada con revestimiento convencional, sin asbesto y construido con un cojinete
giratorio en el extremo de baja tensin y un ancla roscada en el extremo de alta tensin.
Una sola pieza de perno excntrico se utiliza para aplicar fuerza en la parte de baja tensin de la
banda del freno.
El brazo de leva aplica par al perno excntrico.
Una varilla de empuje conecta el brazo de la leva a la varilla de salida del freno actuador.
El freno actuador consta de un resorte cnico, una varilla de salida y un cilindro hidrulico de
liberacin.
Tres posiciones, centrada por resorte, operada por piloto, vlvula de doble efecto controla el
funcionamiento del actuador del freno.
Este freno de parqueo esttico funciona como sigue:
Cuando el eje de la vlvula de control direccional est en la posicin neutral o detenido, los lados
del circuito de arriba y abajo se conectan entre s para el depsito hidrulico. En este momento, las
presiones en ambos lados del circuito ser ms o menos igual y de un valor bajo. Las secciones
piloto de la vlvula de doble estn conectados uno a uno y en el lado negativo del circuito. Las
presiones aproximadamente iguales, que acta en combinacin con el centrado de resortes, que
sostiene el eje de la vlvula doble en la posicin central, conectando de este modo el lado de
presin del cilindro de liberacin hidrulico al depsito hidrulico. El resorte cnico en este
momento puede aplicar su fuerza a la varilla de empuje y el brazo de palanca. Esto aplica par al
perno excntrico que resulta en una carga de tensin que se aplica al extremo de baja tensin de la
banda de freno, que establece el freno.
Cuando el eje de la vlvula de control direccional se mueve a las posiciones hacia arriba o hacia
abajo, la diferencia de presin entre los dos lados del circuito hace que el eje de la vlvula de
lanzadera se desplace hacia un lado o el otro. Este cambio hace que el fluido fluya desde el lado de
presin ms alta del circuito para el cilindro de liberacin hidrulica. Este cilindro retraer la jaula
del resorte cnico y soltara el freno de estacionamiento esttico.
La presin requerida para liberar el freno de estacionamiento esttico es normalmente menor que la
requerida para abrir la vlvula de freno dinmico. Esto asegura que el freno de estacionamiento
esttico se accionara primero y se establecer despus. Por lo tanto, en el funcionamiento normal,
este freno de estacionamiento esttico no funciona contra un tambor en movimiento, por lo que hay
poco o ningn desgaste del revestimiento.
Sin embargo, este freno esttico puede detener una carga fuera de control en el caso improbable de
que se produzca un fallo en el tren de la caja de engranes que conecta el tambor con el motor
hidrulico. Debido a que este freno no es auto-energizante, que puede realizar esta funcin de una
manera controlada sin inducir cargas de choque indebidas en la estructura de la gra.
Este freno de estacionamiento esttico tambin es a prueba de fallas debido a que el resorte cnico
establece automticamente el freno siempre que la presin positiva no est presente en el cilindro
de liberacin hidrulica.
Los malacates Seatrax tienen rutas de doble carga. Tenga en cuenta que los dos dispositivos de frenado
a prueba de fallas en malacates Seatrax operan a travs de dos rutas de carga claramente separados. El
freno dinmico se conecta al tambor de levantamiento a travs del tren de la caja de engranes. El freno
de estacionamiento esttico acta directamente sobre el tambor del malacate. Esto significa que no hay
ningn modo de falla, lo cual ambos frenan los sistemas de frenado operativo al mismo tiempo.
Autoridad de Certificacin y Cumplimiento Normativo:
Lo anterior, prueba de fallas el sistemas de frenado cumple plenamente con la Especificacin API
2C, sptima edicin, 2012.
La Guardia Costera de EE.UU., Distrito Octavo, revis este sistema y concluy que sera
clasificado como a prueba de fallas, por lo que nuestro sistema hidrulico y toda la plomera
hidrulica se pueden clasificar como un "Sistema miscelneo de fuerza de fluido " bajo los
requisitos de 46 CFR subcaptulo F.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-160. Rev. 1. 03/13/2009
MethodofSupportandSlewBearingArrangement
Figure1
Kingpost
RevolvingSuperstructure
All Seatrax cranes are based on the well-proven kingpost concept. This basic design consists of a
stationary or fixed kingpost and a revolving superstructure, which fits over and revolves around the
stationary post as shown in Figure 1. The boom, machinery house, operators cabin, hoists and slewing
machinery are all fitted to the revolving superstructure.
With this design, the overturning moment is resolved by means of two vertically- spaced radial bearing
assemblies. Each carries an equal and opposite horizontal (radial) load. All vertical loads (self weight
of crane plus lifted load) are carried into the stationary kingpost by means of a concentric thrust
bearing.
One way to visualize this concept is to consider a simple ballpoint pen with a cap as shown in Figure 2.
Imagine that the pen is the kingpost and that the cap is the revolving superstructure.
The cap cannot detach itself from the pen because of the application of an overturning moment and a
vertical load. The bearings only provide a means of support for rotating the cap about the body of the
pen.
This analogy translates into the patented Seatrax mounting concept. With this design, the structural and
bearing functions are distinctly separate. A bearing failure cannot result in separation of the revolving
superstructure from the stationary kingpost. The kingpost mounts to the platform pedestal by welding:
it does not require a bolted joint.
Support&Slew_STDFM160_R01.doc Page1of3
Figure 2. Cap and Pen Arrangement
More than 1,000 kingpost cranes have been installed on
offshore drilling rigs and production platforms since 1955.
In more than 50 years of offshore service, no incident of a
kingpost crane detaching from its mount because of an
overload has occurred. This cannot be said for any other
offshore crane design.
The Seatrax implementation of the kingpost design has
been in continuous production since 1977 with more than
500 installed worldwide. An exclusive feature of Seatrax
design is the patented non-metallic upper and lower bearing
assemblies. These bearings will last several thousand hours
with minimum maintenance before replacement is
necessary. When replacement is required, all Seatrax slew
bearings can be easily changed in place using common
hand tools and without the assist of another crane. It is
never necessary to dismount a Seatrax crane for bearing
inspection or replacement.
Seatrax cranes are also offered in a slightly different
configuration for use on liftboats or self-elevating barges.
In this patented configuration, as shown in Figure 3, the
barge jacking tower becomes the stationary kingpost, and
the crane revolves around the jacking tower at an elevation
above the jack house.
Figure 3. Liftboat Configurations
This allows the leg to pass through the center of the crane without interference. This configuration
offers several advantages, including an increase in valuable deck space. The crane can also easily slew
360 degrees without fouling a leg. Other advantages of the Seatrax slew bearing arrangement include:
The proven kingpost design ensures the crane cannot separate from its mount because of slew
bearing failure.
All bolted connections between the crane and the platform (or rig) are eliminated.
Operators have no possibility of crane separation because of a bolt failure.
The use of non-metallic bearings ensures the bearings cannot wear or degrade the structural
integrity of the kingpost or other structures they contact.
Slew bearings can be changed easily in place using common hand tools.
This design is exempt from all certifying authority requirements for periodic removal and
inspection of slew bearings.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-160. Rev. 1. 03/13/2009
Mtododesoporteydisposicinderodamientode
rotacin
Figura1
Poste centraldecarga
Superestructura giratoria
Todas las gras Seatrax se basan en el concepto de poste central de carga bien probado. Este diseo
bsico se compone de un poste central de carga estacionario o fijo y una superestructura giratoria, que
se ajusta sobre y gira alrededor del poste central de carga estacionario como se muestra en la Figura 1.
La pluma, maquinaria en la casa del motor, cabina del operador, malacates y maquinaria de giro todo
esta montado en la superestructura giratoria.
Con este diseo, el momento de giro se resuelve por medio de dos conjuntos de cojinetes radiales
espaciados verticalmente. Cada uno lleva una carga horizontal (radial) igual y opuesta. Todas las
cargas verticales (peso propio de la gra ms la carga elevada) se realizan en el poste central de carga
estacionario por medio de un cojinete de empuje concntrico.
Una manera de visualizar este concepto es considerar un simple bolgrafo con una tapa como se
muestra en la Figura 2. Imagine que la pluma es el poste central de carga y que la tapa es la
superestructura de girar.
La tapa no puede desprenderse por si sola debido a la aplicacin de un momento de giro y una carga
vertical. Los rodamientos slo proporcionan un medio de apoyo para la rotacin de la tapa sobre el
cuerpo de la pluma.
Esta analoga se traduce en el concepto de montaje Seatrax patentado. Con este diseo, las funciones
estructurales y de apoyo son claramente separadas. La falta de apoyo no puede dar lugar a la
Support&Slew_STDFM160_R01_spamx.doc Pgina1of3
separacin de la superestructura del poste central de carga estacionario. El poste central de carga esta
montado en el pedestal de la plataforma con soldadura el cual no requiere una unin atornillada.
Ms de 1.000 gras con poste central de carga se han instalado en las plataformas de perforacin mar
adentro y las plataformas de produccin desde 1955. En ms de 50 aos de servicio en alta mar, no se
ha producido ningn incidente de una gra donde el poste central de carga se desprenda de su soporte
debido a una sobrecarga. Esto no puede decirse en
Figura2.Disposicintapn ybolgrafo
cualquier otro diseo de gra para alta mar.
La aplicacin Seatrax del diseo de poste central de carga
ha estado en produccin continua desde 1977, con ms de
500 gras instaladas en todo el mundo. Una caracterstica
exclusiva de diseo Seatrax son los conjuntos de cojinetes
superior e inferior no metlicos patentados. Estos
rodamientos durarn varios miles de horas con un
mantenimiento mnimo antes de que el reemplazo sea
necesario. Cuando sea necesario reemplazar, todos los
cojinetes de giro Seatrax se pueden cambiar fcilmente en
su lugar utilizando herramientas manuales comunes y sin la
ayuda de otra gra. Nunca es necesario desmontar una gra
Seatrax para inspeccionar o reemplazar los cojinetes.
Gras Seatrax tambin se ofrecen en una configuracin
ligeramente diferente para su uso en barcos gra o barcazas
autoelevadoras. En esta configuracin patentada, tal como
se muestra en la Figura 3, la torre de elevacin de una
barcaza se convierte en el poste central de carga
estacionario, y la gra gira en torno a la torre de elevacin a
una altura por encima de la casa de giro.
Figura3.Configuracionesdebarcazas
Esto permite que la pierna pase a travs del centro de la gra sin interferencia. Esta configuracin
ofrece varias ventajas, incluyendo un incremento de valioso espacio de la cubierta. La gra puede
tambin girar fcilmente 360 grados sin tener contacto con la pierna. Otras ventajas de la disposicin
de rodamiento de giro horizontal Seatrax incluyen:
El diseo de poste central de carga garantiza que la gra no puede separarse de su soporte, debido a
alguna falta de apoyo de giro.
Todas las conexiones atornilladas entre la gra y la cubierta (o plataforma) son eliminadas.
Los operadores no tienen ninguna posibilidad de separarse de la gra, debido a una falla de
tornillos.
El uso de cojinetes no metlicos asegura que los cojinetes no pueden desgastar o degradar la
integridad estructural del poste central de carga o de otro tipo de estructura que estn en contacto.
Los cojinetes de giro se pueden cambiar fcilmente en su lugar con el uso de herramientas comunes
y manuales.
Este diseo est exento de los requisitos de la autoridad de certificacin de la eliminacin peridica
e inspeccin de los cojinetes de giro.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-174. Rev 1. 06/04/2013
PatentedAPI2CAntiTwoBlockingSystem
For many years, Seatrax has used its innovative
solution to remedy crane operations accidents caused
by the unintentional contact between the hook block
(or ball) and the boom point, often referred to as two-
blocking.
One type of two-blocking, often described as
booming down into the block, occurs on most
cranes because of the location of the hoist drum,
which is typically mounted on the revolving
superstructure. (See Figure 1). Through this
arrangement, the distance between the hoist drum and
the boom tip sheaves increases as the boom is
lowered, causing the lower block (hook block) to
move closer to the upper block (boom tip sheaves).
Seatrax fixes this common problem by locating its Figure1
hoist drums in the base section of the boom rather
than the revolving superstructure. Through Seatraxs
ground-breaking arrangement, as shown in Figure 2, the hook block cannot be drawn into the boom tip
sheaves as the boom is lowered. The hoist moves with the boom, allowing the distance between the
hoist and the boom tip sheaves to remain unchanged.
With its basic design, Seatrax cranes require no external power source, switches or valves, solutions
other conventional cranes have used to combat two-blocking. Most often, these cranes utilize a switch
or valve, which interrupts power to the load hoist and/or the boom hoist and stops the offending
motion. The switch is activated when the hook block approaches the boom tip sheaves and collides
with a weight hanging from a rope or chain. This weight
normally has a hole through which one of the lines to
the hook block passes. When the block is hoisted to a
predetermined position, it lifts the hanging weight
and activates the switch or valve.
Two-blocking may also occur when crane operators
over hoist the hook block (or auxiliary hook), regardless
of the position or angle of the boom. Seatrax, through
straightforward geometry, easily solves this problem.
This simple system - depicted in Figures 3, 4 and 5 -
takes advantage of the hydraulic motors Seatrax cranes
use to power their hoists. Unlike standard cranes,
Seatrax uses a design that limits the maximum line pull
the hoist develops to a safe value through the hydraulic
Figure2 systems pressure relief valves.
AntiTwoBlock_STDFM174_R01.doc Page1of2
MAIN LINE
LOAD SENSOR WHIP LINE IN
PARKED POSITION
As Figure 3 demonstrates, the system includes a WHIP LINE
LOAD SENSOR
swinging bumper frame that follows the angle of
the main block. Fixed to the main block is a v-
shaped bumper frame that allows the main block
to come into contact with the swinging bumper
SWING BUMPER
frame. FRAME
MAIN BLOCK IN
In a similar manner, a bumper frame is provided PARKED POSITION
on the jib to receive the auxiliary hook weight as

shown. The wedge socket is enclosed inside of,
and protected by, the overhaul ball. WEDGE SOCKET
PROTECTED INSIDE
OVERHAUL BALL
Put simply, Seatrax cranes are designed not to
produce sufficient pull to break the line. Rather
than attempting to prevent the operator from
running into the boom if the blocks are over
hoisted, the Seatrax system provides bumpers "VEE" SHAPED
BUMPER FRAM
allowing this action to occur in a controlled IN MAIN BLOCK
manner without causing any damage.

Seatraxs patented anti-two blocking system, in
Figure3
use since 1977, is accepted by international
certifying authorities, including ABS, DNV and Lloyds. This system also meets the requirements of
API Specification 2C, Seventh Edition. Its advantages include:
The prevention of damage to any component in the event that the auxiliary hook or main block is
over hoisted.
Parking places for the auxiliary hook and main block that prevent fouling of the auxiliary hook
with the main block when the auxiliary hook is not in use.
The ability to raise or lower the boom without regard to the position of the auxiliary hook or main
block.
A caged path for both the main and auxiliary lead lines, which protects the operator and other
personnel in the event of wire rope breakage.
The ability to check the weight indicator and maximum lift capability of the crane prior to each lift
by pulling the main block into its parking place. (Performance of the engine and hydraulic
Figure4 Figure5 system can be checked in the same
manner. This action will cause the
hydraulic pressure to rise to the relief
valve setting and safely place the
machinery under full load.
Simply by changing its hoists location,
Seatrax eliminates the possibility of
increasing tension in the hoist ropes by
lowering the boom. Coupled with the
patented Seatrax bumper frame, these
cranes easily prevent all two-blocking
problems associated with offshore crane
operations.
AntiTwoBlock_STDFM174_R01.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-174. Rev 1. 06/04/2013
SistemadedoblebloqueopatentadoAPI2C
Durante muchos aos, Seatrax ha utilizado su BLOQUEOSUPERIOR
(POLEASDELAPUNTA)
solucin innovadora para remediar accidentes no
intencionales en operaciones de las gras, accidentes BLOQUEOINFERIOR
causados por el contacto entre el bloque del gancho,

LINEADELA
bola y la punta de la pluma a menudo referido como PLUMADE
PARTE
dispositivo de doble bloque. LADISTANCIACAMBIA MULTIPLE
Un tipo doble bloqueo, a menudo descrito como LINEADE

auge hacia abajo en el bloque, se produce en la CARGA
SENCILLA
mayora de las gras debido a la ubicacin del aparejo
de la pluma, que est tpicamente montado en la
superestructura giratoria. (Ver Figura 1). A travs de
esta disposicin, la distancia entre el tambor de
CONTACTODEBLOQUESUNO
elevacin y las poleas de punta de la pluma aumenta a CONOTRO(BLOQUEDDOBLE)
medida que la pluma se baja, haciendo que el bloque

inferior (bloque de gancho) se acerque al bloque
superior (poleas de la punta).
Figura1
Seatrax soluciona este problema comn mediante la localizacin de los aparejos en la seccin inferior
de la pluma en lugar de la superestructura giratoria. Seatrax a travs de la disposicin innovadora,
como se muestra en la Figura 2, el bloque del gancho no pueda ser atrado hacia las poleas de la punta
cuando la pluma se baja. El elevador se mueve con la pluma, permitiendo que la distancia entre el
elevador y las poleas de punta de la pluma se mantenga sin cambios.
Con su diseo bsico, Las gras de Seatrax no requieren ninguna solucin de fuente de alimentacin
externa, interruptores o vlvulas, otras gras convencionales tienen que utilizarlos para combatir el
BLOQUEOSUPERIOR(POLEASDELAPUNTA)
doble bloqueo. Muy a menudo, estas gras utilizan un
interruptor o una vlvula, que interrumpe la potencia a
BLOQUEOINFERIOR
LINEADECARGA la carga de elevacin y / o con el brazo de elevacin y
SENCILLA
detiene el movimiento infractor. El interruptor se
LADISTANCIA
LINEADELA
PLUMADEPARTE
activa cuando el gancho se acerca a las gavillas, punta
NUNCACAMBIA
MULTIPLE de la pluma y colisiona con un peso colgado de una
TAMBOR cuerda o cadena. Este peso normalmente tiene un
LOCALIZADO
ADENTRODE agujero a travs del cual una de las lneas a la polea de
LASECCIN
DELAPLUMA gancho pasa. Cuando el bloque se levanta a una
posicin predeterminada, se levanta el peso que
cuelga y activa el conmutador o vlvula.
Doble-bloqueo tambin puede ocurrir cuando los
ELBLOQUEINFERIORNUNCA
operadores de gras sobre levantan el gancho
SEMUEVEHACIAELBLOQUE
SUPERIOR
(principal o auxiliar), independientemente de la
posicin o el ngulo de la pluma. Seatrax, a travs de
Figura2 la geometra sencilla, resuelve este problema.
AntiTwoBlock_STDFM174_R01_spamx.doc Pgina1of3
El sistema simple de doble bloqueo se representa en las figuras 3, 4 y 5 a la vez se aprovecha para
mostrar la capacidad de fuerza que tienen los MAIN LINE POSICINFIJA
SENSORDELINEADELPRINCIPAL
LOAD SENSOR WHIP LINE IN
motores hidrulicos que se utilizan en las gras DELAUXILIAR
PARKED POSITION
WHIP LINE
Seatrax para accionar sus aparejos. A diferencia SENSORDELINEADELAUXILIAR
LOAD SENSOR
de las gras estndar, Seatrax utiliza un diseo

que limita la lnea de traccin mxima del aparejo
desarrollando un valor seguro a travs de las
vlvulas de alivio de presin del sistema SWING BUMPER
MARCOPARACHOQUES
FRAME
hidrulico. OSCILATORIO
MAIN BLOCK IN
Como demuestra la Figura 3, el sistema incluye PARKED POSITION
BLOQUEPRINCIPAL
ENPOSICINFIJA
un bastidor de parachoques oscilante que sigue el
ngulo del bloque principal. Fijado al bloque
TERMINAL
principal es un bastidor de parachoques en forma DECUA
WEDGE SOCKET
PROTECTED INSIDE
PROTEGIDO
OVERHAUL BALL
de V que permite que el bloque principal entre en PORLABOLA
contacto con el bastidor de parachoques oscilante.
De una manera similar, un bastidor de
parachoques se proporciona en la pluma para
recibir el peso del gancho auxiliar, como se "VEE" SHAPED
PARACHOQUES
BUMPER FRAM
ENVDEL
muestra. El terminal de cua est encerrado IN MAIN BLOCK
BLOQUE
dentro, y estn protegidos por la bola. PRINCIPAL
En pocas palabras, las gras Seatrax estn Figura 3

diseadas para no producir traccin suficiente
para romper la lnea. Mas bien intentar de evitar que el operador no siga levantando el bloque o la bola,
el sistema Seatrax proporciona parachoques permitiendo esta accin se produzca de una manera
controlada, sin causar ningn dao.
Seatrax patento el sistema de doble bloqueo, en uso desde 1977, es aceptado por las autoridades de
certificacin internacionales, incluyendo ABS, DNV y Lloyds. Este sistema tambin cumple con los
requisitos de la Especificacin API 2C, sptima edicin. Entre sus ventajas se incluyen:
La prevencin del dao a cualquier componente en el caso de que el gancho auxiliar o bloque
principal sea sobre levantado.
"Posicin fija" para el gancho auxiliar y el bloque principal y evitar que golpeen o se enreden uno
con el otro cuando el gancho auxiliar no est en uso.
La capacidad de elevar o bajar la pluma sin tener en cuenta la posicin del gancho auxiliar o bloque
principal.
Guardia en forma de A para las lneas de cable principal y auxiliar, que protege al operador y otro
personal en caso de rotura del cable.
La capacidad de comprobar el indicador de peso y capacidad mxima de elevacin de la gra antes
de cada elevacin tirando del bloque principal en su "lugar de estacionamiento." Rendimiento del
motor diesel y sistema hidrulico se
puede verificar de la misma manera.
Esta accin har que la presin
hidrulica este a la altura de la posicin
de la vlvula de alivio y con seguridad
colocar la maquinaria a plena carga.
Simplemente cambiando su posicin de
aparejo, Seatrax elimina la posibilidad de
aumento de la tensin en las cuerdas de
levantamiento bajando la pluma. Junto con
el marco Seatrax parachoques patentado,
estas gras fcilmente evitan todos los
problemas de doble bloqueo asociados con
las operaciones de las gras.
Figure4 Figure5
Section/Seccin2 ________________________
OperatingInstructions Instruccionesdeoperacin
Basic Operating Instructions Instrucciones bsicas de operacin
Hand Signals for Crane Operators Seales manuales para operadores de gras
Specific Operating Instructions Instrucciones de operacin especficas
Boom Lock Operation Funcionamiento de bloqueo de la pluma
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
05May2009
BasicOperatingInstructions
AllMarineCraneswithDieselPrimeMover
CraneOperator
Cranes should be operated only by the following personnel:
o Operators designated by the employer.
o Trainees under the direct supervision of designated Operators.
o Maintenance / Test personnel or Inspectors in performance of their duties.
CraneOperatorQualifications
Able to read and understand instructions.
Fully qualified through training and experience.
Passed a practical examination.
20/30 through 20/50 vision or better, with good depth perception.
Able to distinguish between red, green, and yellow.
Hearing adequate for the specific operation.
A history of epilepsy or a disabling heart condition should be sufficient reason for
disqualification.
OperatorCab
Necessary clothing and personal belongings should be stored in such a manner as to not
interfere with safe crane operation.
All loose articles should be properly stored.
There should be no obstructions to clear vision
Refueling
Cranes should not be refueled with the engine running.
Fuel tanks should be filled in a manner that fuel spills or overflow will not run onto
engine, exhaust or electrical equipment on the rig.
BOISOI_Diesel_EJ_R00.doc Page1of13
FireExtinguisher
Charged fire extinguishers should be in the cab or vicinity of the crane.
Operating and maintenance personnel should be familiar with the use and care of the fire
extinguisher provided.
PreStartUpInspection
This inspection should be performed every time the crane is started up and should take less
than ten minutes to perform. It does not take the place of the required Level 1 inspection (see
Inspection Checklist in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1).
The Operator should visually check for damaged or sub-standard items as follows:
At boom tip:
o Slings to be used.
o Load block and shackle.
o Wire rope on sheaves at block and boom tip.
o Wedge socket and corresponding wire rope.
o Boom tip for any loose or hanging items.
Along full length of boom:
o Loose or hanging items.
o Loose or missing boom connection bolts.
o Leaks on Main / Aux assembly
On gantry:
o Cracked or worn sheaves.
o Broken sheave thrust washers.
o Wedge socket and corresponding wire rope.
At base of crane:
o Disconnected utilities such as electrical lines.
o Cracks or stressed paint areas in the Kingpost or Platform Pedestal.
o Oil spills
Crane Deck:
o Oil spills.
o Out of service signs.
At engine:
o Engine oil.
o Engine emergency shutdown.
o Pump Drive Oil Level.
o Oil spills.
o Out of service signs.
Start engine:
o Check engine oil pressure.
o Check Control circuit pressure.
CraneOperatingPractices
Operator should familiarize himself with the equipment and its proper care.
An operator should not operate when physically or mentally unfit.
An operator should not start crane if a "warning sign" is located on crane.
Before starting engine, operator should see that all personnel are in the clear.
Operator will test all controls at the start of a new shift.
An operator must never divert attention while operating.
The operator must have the authority to stop and refuse to handle the load until safety has
been assured. The operator is ultimately responsible for safe operation.
Before leaving cab, operator should:
o Land any attached load.
o Set the slew (swing) brake.
o Press theHyd. Pilot Control Button so the light turns off, indicating that the Pilot
Control is Disabled so the controls will not operate.
o Stop prime mover and reset the Engine Stop knob (if equipped).
Operator should report defects, adjustments, or repairs required to supervisor and next
operator upon changing shifts.
When extensions are added to the boom, the Load Rating Charts must be changed.
To reduce unnecessary stress, boom up to maximum angle before stopping the prime
mover. The boom rest should only be used during transportation or in high wind.
When setting the boom in the rest, lower the boom until it barely touches the rest.
DO NOT slacken the cables! Easing the cables risks bird nesting the rope on the
drum.
HandSignals
A hand signal chart, similar to the one included in this section, should be posted
conspicuously.
One designated person should be assigned to give signals before the load is lifted.
The operator should respond to signals only from the appointed signal man, but should
obey an "emergency stop" signal at anytime, no matter who gives it.
No response should be made unless signals are clearly understood.
For operations not covered by standard signals or for special conditions, additions or
modifications to the standard signals may be required. In such cases these signals should
be agreed on in advance by operator and signal man and should not be in conflict with
standard signals.
If instruction must be given to the operator by other than by the established signal system,
crane motions should be stopped.
Operator should never start machine movement until signal man or complete load is
within his range of vision.
AttachingtheLoad
Do not wrap hoist rope around the load.
Load should be attached to hook by means of slings or other approved devices.
All hooks should have safety latches.
Inspect slings daily.
Immediately remove defective slings from service.
Provide protection between sling and sharp surfaces.
Provide proper storage for slings while not in use.
Do not choke slings in a splice.
Unused legs of a multi-leg sling should be secured
MovingtheLoad
Before the lift, the person directing the lift should determine that:
o Hook is brought over load in such a manner as to minimize swinging.
o Hook is centered over load
o Multiple part lines are not twisted.
o Rope is properly seated on sheaves if there is a slack rope condition.
o Load is secured and properly balanced.
o Lift and swing paths are clear.
o Load is free to be lifted.
During lift, Crane Operator should ensure:
o Crane is NOT used to drag load.
o Acceleration and deceleration of moving load is accomplished in a smooth manner.
o Controls are engaged smoothly to avoid excessive stress on crane components.
o Load, boom, or other parts of crane do not contact any obstruction.
o No external force side loads the boom.
o No personnel ride on the load unless in a personnel carrier.
o NEVER carry a load over personnel.
o Hoist brakes are tested each time a load approaching the rated load is to be handled.
o A minimum of five full wraps of wire rope should remain on all hoist drums at all
times.
o Sudden starts and stops are avoided when rotating. This will reduces stress on the
structure and avoids swinging the load.
o Tag lines are used to control the load.
HoldingtheLoad
The operator will not leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended.
Do not permit personnel to stand or pass under a suspended load.
PersonnelTransfer
All hooks should have a safety latch and latch should be closed securely.
Load should be under power both up and down.
Crane should not be operated until proper pre-determined hand signals have been given.
If crane operators view of primary signal person is obstructed, an additional signal person
should be provided to relay signals to crane operator.
While transferring personnel raise personnel carrier just high enough to clear all
obstructions, swing over the water in such a manner as to minimize swinging, raise or
lower it smoothly, position it slightly above the landing area and gently lower it to the
deck.
Do not raise or lower a loaded personnel carrier directly over a vessel.
Personnel carriers should be designed for the intended purpose.
Personnel to be lifted on a personnel carrier should use an approved personnel flotation
device.
Personnel riding on a net type personnel carrier should stand on the outer rim facing
inward.
Loaded personnel carrier weight must not exceed:
o 1/3 the static rated load at the specific radius.
o 1/10 the breaking strength of the hoist rope times the parts of line used.
o Load blocks and overhaul balls are stamped with the rated personnel capacity.
OnPlatformLiftProcedure
Center load block over load
Use Onboard Load Chart to verify crane capacity at the required working radii.
Lift load slowly (about 6 to 12 inches) off deck, stop and check hoist brake
Lift load a safe height (about 3 to 4 feet) off deck
Make sure path is clear, never move load over personnel.
Move load slowly across deck
When load reaches an obstacle, lift load high enough to clear the obstacle, swing over the
obstacle and lower the load to a safe height. This reduces the possibility of excessive
damage to the load, deck, or other items if a failure was to occur.
Move load to final position
Slowly lower load to deck
PlatformtoBoatLiftProcedure
Verify crane capacity at the required working radii by reviewing the Offboard Rated Load
Chart applicable to the current operating condition.
Lift load slowly (about 6 to 12 inches) off deck, stop and check winch brake.
Lift load to a height sufficient to clear any nearby obstructions.
Make sure path is clear - never move load over personnel.
Slowly move load across deck.
Once load clears edge of platform, lower load to 20 feet above water - never lower load
over boat.
Swing load to deck of boat.
Lower load to deck.
Make sure slings have sufficient slack to avoid jerking the load back off deck in swells.
BoattoPlatformLiftProcedure
Verify weight of load
Set boom angle to safe crane capacity by using the appropriate Offboard Rated Load Chart
applicable to the current operating condition.
Increase engine speed to maximum
When boat hits valley of wave, take slack out of slings.
Increase hook speed as boat rises to peak of wave
Lift load off boat about 15 feet
Swing load clear of boat.
Lift load only high enough to safely clear edge of platform deck.
Make sure path is clear.
Swing slowly over platform
Lower load to safe height off deck.
Swing load slowly into position.
Boom out to the required radius without exceeding the maximum radius for the specific
load as indicated by the Onboard (Deck Lifts) Rated Chart in the Performance Data
section of Data Book 1.
Lower load slowly to deck.
HandSignalsforCraneOperators
The above signals are basic for operating boom equipment. Any other signals to be used
during operation should be agreed upon by the operator and signalman beforehand. These
signals should not be in conflict with the basic signals.
Any one hand signal can be modified to indicate slow or cautious movement by placing the
palm of the unused hand a short distance in front of the direction-indicating finger. No
response should be given to unclear signals.
TheOperatorIsUltimatelyResponsible
forthe
SafetyandOperationoftheCrane
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
SpecificOperatingInstructionsfor
CraneswithConsoleMountedInstruments
DieselPrimeMoverandElectronicJoysticks
PrimaryMotionControls
This crane is equipped with electronic joystick controls mounted in the armrests of the
operator's chair.
These controllers are spring-loaded to the neutral (center) position and provide independent
control of primary crane functions, with speed of movement directly proportionate to the
amount of joystick movement relative to the neutral position.
When performing simultaneous operations involving two or more of the primary motions,
the diesel engine should be operated at maximum RPM. Individual joysticks should be
used to independently control the speed of the various crane motions.
LeftHandControllerSwing/SlewandBoomHoist
The left-hand controller is a dual axis joystick with both rocker and trigger switches.
Simultaneous operation of both swing and boom motions is accomplished by moving the left
hand joystick diagonally. Speed of operation of both motions is independently proportional to
the displacement of the control lever from the center position. For example, it is possible to
raise the boom at maximum speed while the crane swings very slowly to the left.
Left-Right Axis: Move joystick to the left of center to Swing/Slew Left
(counterclockwise), or to the right of center to Swing/Slew Right (clockwise)
o Start and stop swing motion as slowly and smoothly as possible to avoid possible
damage to equipment or injury to personnel from a wildly swinging load.
o For open loop slew system, the crane is free to swing or drift when the joystick is in the
center position, provided the swing brake pedal is not depressed and swing lock lever is
not engaged.
o For closed loop slew system, the crane will hydrostatically lock once the joystick is in
the center position. If the free slew valve is activated, the crane is free to swing or drift
with a heavier load.
Forward-Back Axis: Pull back joystick to raise the boom (reduce the radius) or push
forward to lower the boom (increase the radius).
o Boom Hoist motion is always under the control of the hydraulic system and cannot
overrun or freewheel in the lowering mode. Please refer to our Description of Fail-Safe
Features document in the Introduction and Design Features section of Data Book 1 for
more information on this subject.
o The Boom Hoist brake(s) automatically set and lock the boom in position when the
control lever is centered.
Trigger: Function varies based on configuration. On some installations, squeeze the trigger
to talk on either the Radio or Loud Hailer. On other configurations, the trigger sounds the
horn mounted below the cab.
Rocker-Left: Toggles to the previous page on the CCM7000 crane management screen
terminal (if equipped.)
Rocker-Right: Toggles to the next page on the CCM7000 terminal. On some installations,
rocker-right sounds the horn mounted below the cab.
RightHandControllerMainandAuxiliaryHoists
There are two main configurations for the right-hand controller:
Two Single-Axis Joysticks: Mounted side-by-side, the inner joystick controls the Auxiliary
hoist and the outer controls the Main hoist.
Single Joystick and Load Hoist Selector Knob: A single
joystick controls either the Auxiliary or Main hoist depending
on whether the selector knob is set to AUX, OFF or MAIN
The appropriate right hand joystick is pulled back to raise the main or whip line (take in cable)
or pushed forward to lower the main or whip line (pay out cable).
Hoist motion is always under the control of the hydraulic system and cannot overrun or
freewheel in the lowering mode. Please refer to our Description of Fail-Safe Features
document in the Introduction and Design Features section for more information on this
subject.
Hoist brakes automatically set and lock drums when the joysticks are centered. In
case of a mechanical failure, releasing the controls will set the brakes and stop drum
rotation.
BoomLock
The Boom Lock has been designed to hold the boom in place during service of the motor or
gearbox.
DO NOT engage the Boom Lock while the drum is turning: it is not designed as a brake.
DO NOT engage the Boom Lock and drive the hoist in the down direction: this can
damage the lock assembly and gearbox.
Swing(Slew)Brake(s)
Dynamic braking is accomplished by cross-controlling the left-hand joystick. For
example; if the crane is swinging to the left at high speed and the joystick is then centered,
the crane will continue to coast to the left. Moving the joystick away from center to the
right will apply a braking torque to the crane motion, hence stopping rotation more quickly.
The crane and its associated swing system machinery are protected from damage during
this operation by means of torque limiting hydraulic valves. These valves will limit the
amount of swing torque available during acceleration and deceleration of the crane.
However, it is strongly recommended that swing motion should start and stop as slowly and
smoothly as possible to avoid possible damage to equipment or injury to personnel from a
wildly swinging load.
With an open loop swing system the crane and load can be held in position against the
wind by means of the Foot Pedal Brake (if equipped) or centering of the joystick, when
equipped with the hydrostatic drive. Cross-controlling, as described above, is the preferred
method for stopping rotation.
With a closed loop swing system the crane will hydrostatically lock once the slew joy stick
is centered. The crane will not move until given direction. If equipped with a free slew
valve the crane will be able to follow a heavy load minimizing a side load.
The crane may be locked in position indefinitely by means of the Swing Lock brake lever
mounted in the control console. When this lever is in the Engaged position, the crane is
locked against rotation. Any attempt to rotate the crane while the swing control lever is
engaged will stall the hydraulic swing motor against the lock. This is not harmful and will
not damage any portion of the swing machinery.
ConsoleMountedInstrumentsandControls
Following is a list of common instruments and controls, some or all of which may be found
depending on such factors as crane configuration, pneumatic vs. electrical actuation and
presence of the CCM7000 crane management system.
Air Pressure Gauge: indicates pneumatic pressure.
Pilot Circuit Pressure Gauge: displays hydraulic pressure in the Control Circuit.
Slew Pressure Gauge: shows hydraulic pressure in the Slew/Swing Circuit.
Boom Hoist Pressure Gauge: shows hydraulic pressure in the Boom Hoist Circuit.
Load Hoist Pressure Gauge: shows hydraulic pressure in the Main or Auxiliary hoist
circuit, depending on which is in use.
Swing Lock Brake Lever: engages or releases the slew shaft brake. This lever should be
placed in the lock engaged position whenever the operator leaves the cab. Place the lever
in the lock "released" position to rotate the crane.
Hyd. Pilot Control (or Hydraulic Controls) Knob: safety feature that disables the
Main/Auxiliary and Boom/Swing controls. This prevents accidents when the crane is not
being operated. Simply pull up on the knob to release/disable the controls, and push down
to engage/enable them.
Hyd. Oil Level Gauge: denotes the level of hydraulic oil in the reservoir.
Hyd. Oil Temp. Gauge: shows temperature of the hydraulic oil in the suction hoses.
Fuel Level Gauge: shows the amount of diesel available to fuel the prime mover.
Upper Wiper: Turning the control valve (pneumatic) or switch (electric) starts and stops
the windshield wiper on the upper window.
Front Wiper: Turning the control valve (pneumatic) or switch (electric) starts and stops
the windshield wiper on the upper window.
Black Horn Button: when pressed the horn - mounted below the cab - will sound. The
horn will also sound automatically shortly after shutting down the diesel prime mover,
when engine oil pressure subsides beneath a preset level.
Coolant Temp. Gauge: displays diesel engine coolant temperature.
Oil Pressure Gauge: shows pressure for the diesel engine lubricating oil.
Alarm Reset: silences the diesel engine low oil pressure alarm. The latch must be reset
immediately after the engine is shut down to prevent the horn from sounding as oil
pressure subsides. Otherwise, the horn will sound continuously until the latch is reset.
Green Engine Start Button: energizes the starting motor for the diesel engine. Press the
button to start the engine, and release it once the engine is running.
Tachometer: indicates diesel engine rpm.
Engine Stop Knob: used to stop the diesel engine under normal circumstances. When
pulled out, this prevents fuel from flowing to the injectors, properly stopping the engine
and disengaging the hydraulic controls. Push the knob to its original position after the
engine has stopped.
Engine Emergency Shutdown Knob: pulling out shuts down intake airflow to the diesel
engine turbocharger(s), thus choking the engine to a stop. This will render all of the
Primary Control Levers inoperative and lock all Hoist Brakes. This knob should only be
used in the event of an emergency, e.g., a runaway engine that will not shut down
normally.
o To restart after resolving the emergency, first push down the Engine
Emergency Shutdown knob in the operators cab, then go to the engine house
and reset the shut-off valve located between the intercooler and turbocharger.
Inline engines will have a single shutoff valve, while V-configurations will have
two.
FootOperatedSecondaryControls
Foot-Operated Throttle Pedal: on the right controls the speed of the diesel engine.
Seatrax recommends an engine speed between 1,800 and 2,170 rpm while performing
simultaneous operation of the primary crane motions.
Swing Brake Pedal: on the left - if equipped - is used to hold the crane against the wind.
Do not apply this brake suddenly, while crane is rotating.
The Emergency Hoist Brake Knob - if equipped is on the cab floor to the left of the
operators chair. If there is a failure in some part of the hoist mechanism and the load or
boom begins to free-fall, the operator should REMOVE his hands from the controls and
step on this knob.
o Letting the joysticks self-center allows the hoist brakes to engage automatically,
which can slow or stop the falling load.
o Stepping on this knob dumps pilot system pressure and automatically applies all hoist
brakes.
o The valve must be reset before the crane operations can be resumed. To do this, simply
reach down and pull the knob up (it will only move 3/4).
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
05demayodel2009
Instruccionesbsicasdeoperacin
AplicablesatodaslasgrasmarinasdeSeatrax
Operadordegra
Las gras deben ser operadas slo por el siguiente personal:
Operadores deben ser entrenados bajo la supervisin directa de un operador calificado.
Operadores en entrenamiento deben estar debajo la supervisin directa de operadores
designados.
Personal de mantenimiento o inspectores debern informar al operador las inspecciones y
las condiciones de mantenimiento de la gra.
Requerimientosdeloperadordegra
Los operadores deben de saber leer y entender las instrucciones.
Los operadores deben estar calificados completamente por sus conocimientos y su
experiencia.
Los operadores deben pasar un examen prctico.
Los operadores deben tener una visin de 20/30 - 20/50 y una buena percepcin.
Los operadores deben poder distinguir los colores rojo, verde y amarillo.
Los operadores deben tener audacia adecuada para la operacin especfica.
Antecedentes de epilepsia o problemas cardiacos que crean una incapacidad se
consideraran una razn suficiente para descalificar a un operador.
Cabinadeloperador
La ropa innecesaria y las pertenencias personales se deben guardar de modo tal que no
interfiera con la seguridad del operador.
Todos los artculos sueltos se deben guardar apropiadamente.
No debe haber obstrucciones a visin clara.
Abastecimientodecombustible
No se deben abastecer las gras de combustible con el motor encendido.
No se deben llenar los tanques de combustible de tal manera que un derrame alcance el
motor, el cao de escape o el sistema elctrico del equipo.
BOISOI_Diesel_EJ_R00_spamx.doc Pgina1of14
Extintordeincendios
Los extinguidores de incendios deben estar en la cabina o cerca de esta.
El operador y el personal de mantenimiento deben estar familiarizados con el uso y el
cuidado de los extinguidores proporcionados para los incendios.
Inspeccinantesdelarranque
Esta inspeccin se debe realizar cada vez que la gra es encendida. No substituye el Nivel 1
requerido de inspeccin (ver la Seccin 3, Lista de Control de la Inspeccin). Una inspeccin
previa al arranque debe tardar menos de 10 minutos.
El Operador debe verificar visualmente si hay elementos daados o afectados de la siguiente
manera:
En la punta de la pluma:
Eslingas, grilletes o cadenas que sern utilizados.
Bloque de carga y bola de carga.
Trayecto del cable metlico en las poleas en el bloque y la punta de la pluma.
Cable de carga, candado y cuna del cable correspondiente.
En toda la extensin de la pluma:
Artculos flojos o que cuelgan.
Derrames en el montaje del tambor principal y auxiliar.
En la base de la gra:
Poleas agrietadas / desgastadas o rondanas rotas de presin.
Partes flojas y daos del anillo colector elctrico / hidrulico / neumtico.
Candado y cua del cable de la pluma y el cable metlico correspondiente.
Servicios generales desconectados, como alambres elctricos, mangueras hidrulicas y
neumticas.
Derrames de aceite.
Estado de los cojinetes de los zapatos del pedestal.
Fugas o derrames hidrulicos y de combustible.
Avisos de fuera de servicio.
En el motor:
Nivel de aceite del motor.
Derrames de combustible, aceite o refrigerante.
Avisos de fuera de servicio.
Nivel del aceite hidrulico.
Botn de emergencia en el motor.
Motor Encendido:
Verifique el funcionamiento apropiado de los controles y las presiones.
Retire cualquier obstculo para despejar la visin.
Verifique la presin del aceite del motor.
Prcticasdeoperacindelagra
El operador debe familiarizarse con el equipo y su cuidado apropiado.
Un operador no debe operar la gra cuando no se sienta bien fsica o mentalmente.
Un operador no debe encender la gra si ve un signo de precaucin o peligro en la gra.
Antes de encender el motor, el operador debe asegurarse de que todo el personal este fuera
de peligro.
El operador debe probar instrumentos y controles antes de su nuevo turno.
Un operador nunca debe desviar la atencin mientras opera la gra.
El operador debe tener la autoridad para parar y negarse a manejar la carga hasta que se
haya garantizado la seguridad completamente. El operador es el responsable final de
una operacin segura.
Antes de salir de la cabina el operador debe:
Descargar toda la carga de la gra.
Poner el freno del giro de la gra.
Parar el motor y reiniciar el cable de detencin (si est provisto).
Jalar el botn de los Controles hidrulicos para arriba en la consola para neutralizar
todos los controles y hidrulicos en la cabina.
El operador debe informar los defectos, los ajustes o las reparaciones requeridas al
supervisor y al prximo operador antes de cambiar el turno.
Cuando se aaden extensiones a la pluma, se debern cambiar los Grficos de
Clasificacin de Carga.
Para reducir una tensin innecesaria, levante la pluma al mximo ngulo, antes de
apagar el motor. Slo se debe usar el soporte de la pluma durante el transporte o
cuando haya corrientes de viento muy fuertes.
Cuando ponga la pluma en el soporte, baje la pluma hasta que toque apenas el
soporte. No afloje los cables! Si afloja los cables, correr el riesgo de desenrollarlos
en el tambor.
Sealesdemano
Se debe mostrar visiblemente un grfico de seales de mano, semejante al incluido en
esta seccin.
Una persona designada debe ser la encargada de dar las seales antes de levantar la carga.
El operador debe responder a las seales del encargado de seales solamente, pero debe
obedecer una seal de detencin de emergencia en cualquier momento de cualquier otra
persona.
No se deber responder, a menos que se haya entendido la seal claramente.
En caso de operaciones que no estn comprendidas por las seales especficas o en caso de
condiciones especiales, se requerirn adiciones o modificaciones a las seales estndares.
En estos casos, estas seales debern ser acordadas por adelantado entre el operador y el
encargado de seales y no debern ser contrarias a las seales estndares.
Si se deben dar instrucciones al operador de manera diferente del sistema establecido de
seales, se debern suspender los movimientos de la gra.
El operador nunca debe mover la gra hasta que el encargado de seales y la carga estn al
alcance de su vista.
Conectarlacarga
No enrolle el cable alrededor de la carga.
La carga debe ser conectada al gancho por medio de eslingas u otros mecanismos
aprobados.
Todos los ganchos deben tener cierres de seguridad.
Inspeccione las eslingas diariamente.
Retire inmediatamente las eslingas defectuosas del servicio.
Proporcione una proteccin entre las eslingas y las superficies filosas.
Proporcione un almacenamiento apropiado para las eslingas mientras no estn en uso.
No una las eslingas mediante un empalme.
Las eslingas y cadenas con varios tramos debern ser aseguradas mientras no estn en uso.
Moverlacarga
Antes de realizar un levantamiento la persona que va a decidir debe determinar lo
siguiente.
Se debe llevar el gancho encima de la carga de la manera ms apropiada para aminorar
el balanceo.
Se debe centrar el gancho encima de la carga. NOTA: Segn el peso de la carga,
puede ser necesario que el gancho est hasta dos pies ms cerca del mstil cuando es
levantado. Esto tomar en cuenta la desviacin de la gra durante el levantamiento de
carga pesada.
No se deben retorcer los mltiples cables.
Se debe acomodar el cable apropiadamente en las poleas, si los cables estn flojos.
Se debe asegurar y equilibrar la carga apropiadamente.
Las rea de levantamiento y balanceo de la carga deben estar limpias.
La carga debe estar libre para ser levantada.
Durante el levantamiento, el Operador de Gra se debe asegurar de que:
La gra NO sea usada para arrastrar la carga.
La aceleracin y el frenado de la carga en movimiento debe realizarse suavemente.
Los controles se maniobren suavemente para evitar una tensin excesiva en los
componentes de la gra.
No se deben obstruir la carga, la pluma u otras partes de la gra.
No se deben ejercer cargas externas en la pluma de la gra.
Ninguna persona debe estar arriba de la carga en movimiento, nicamente si se
encuentra en la canasta de personal.
Nunca transporte una carga encima del personal.
Se deben probar los frenos de los tambores cada vez que una carga se acerca a la
capacidad mxima de carga.
Debe haber un mnimo de cinco vueltas de cable en los tambores permanentemente.
Se deben evitar los comienzos y las paradas repentinas cuando la gra est girando.
Esto reduce la tensin en la estructura y evita balancear la carga.
Los cables de cola se usan para controlar la carga.
Mantenimientodelacarga
El operador no debe abandonar su posicin en los controles cuando la carga est
suspendida en el aire.
El personal no esta autorizado pararse pasar debajo de la carga.
Trasladodelpersonal
Todo gancho debe tener un cierre de seguridad que debe ser cerrado de modo seguro.
Se debe asegurar la carga por encima y por debajo.
No se debe operar la gra hasta recibir correctamente las seales predeterminadas.
Si los operadores de gra no pueden ver al encargado de seales, se deber emplear otro
encargado para retransmitir las seales.
Durante el traslado del personal, levante la canasta del personal slo lo necesario para
evitar los obstculos, gire la gra encima del agua de modo tal que se evite un balanceo,
levntela o bjela suavemente, poniendo ligeramente encima del rea donde va a aterrizar,
y baje la canasta suavemente a la cubierta.
No levante ni baje la canasta de personal directamente encima de un buque o barco.
Las canastas de personal estn diseadas para un fin determinado.
El personal que ser trasladado en una canasta de personal deber usar un salvavidas
aprobado.
El personal transportado en una canasta tipo jaula de seguridad deber viajar en el borde
externo, mirando hacia adentro.
El peso de carga de la canasta con el personal transportado no deber exceder:
1/3 de la carga valorada constante en el radio especfico.
1/10 de la resistencia de frenado del cable de carga multiplicado por los tramos de
cable utilizado.
Los bloques de carga y bola de revisin deben indicar la capacidad estimada del
personal.
Procedimientodelevantamientoenlaplataforma
Centre el bloque de carga encima de la carga.
Use el Grfico Esttico de la Carga para verificar la capacidad de la gra en el trabajo
requerido.
Levante la carga lentamente (6 a 12 pulgadas aproximadamente) de la cubierta, pare y
verifique los frenos de la gra.
Levante la carga a una altura segura (3 a 4 pies aproximadamente) de la cubierta.
Asegrese de que el trayecto est despejado - Nunca mueva la carga encima del
personal!
Mueva la carga lentamente a travs de la cubierta.
Cuando la carga se encuentre con un obstculo, levante la carga suficientemente para
evitar un golpe, gire y baje la carga a una altura segura. Esto reducir la posibilidad de un
dao excesivo a la carga, la plataforma o a otros elementos, si llega a ocurrir una falla.
Mueva la carga a la posicin final.
Lentamente baje la carga a la plataforma.
Procedimientodelevantamientodelacargadelaplataformaalbarco
Verifique los grficos de la carga para determinar la capacidad de la gra en los radios
requeridos de trabajo en los Grficos Dinmicos de Clasificacin de Carga,
correspondiente a la condicin operativa en curso.
Levante la carga lentamente (6 a 12 pulgadas aproximadamente) en la cubierta, pare y
verifique el freno del guinche.
Levante la carga a una altura suficiente para evitar todos los obstculos cercanos.
Asegrese de que el trayecto est despejado. - Nunca mueva la carga encima del
personal!
Mueva la carga despacio a travs de la cubierta.
Una vez que la carga haya pasado el borde de la plataforma, baje la carga 20 pies encima
del agua. (nunca baje la carga encima del barco)
Gire la carga hacia la cubierta del barco.
Baje la carga a la cubierta del barco.
Asegrese de que las eslingas tengan un juego suficiente para evitar sacudir la carga fuera
de la cubierta debido al oleaje.
Procedimientodelevantamientodelacargadelbarcoalaplataforma
Verifique el peso de la carga.
Determine el ngulo de la pluma de acuerdo con la capacidad segura de la gra, utilizando
los Grficos dinmicos de Clasificacin de Carga, aplicables a las condiciones operativas
en curso.
Aumente la velocidad del motor al mximo.
Cuando el barco sea golpeado por el valle de una ola, anule el juego de las eslingas.
Aumente la velocidad del gancho, mientras el barco alcanza la altura mxima de la ola.
Levante la carga lejos del barco 15 pies aproximadamente.
Gire la carga fuera del radio de alcance del barco.
Levante la carga a una altura suficiente para atravesar de modo seguro el borde de la
cubierta de la plataforma.
Asegrese de que el trayecto est despejado.
Gire la carga suavemente encima de la plataforma.
Baje la carga a una altura segura lejos de la cubierta.
Gire la carga suavemente en posicin.
Levante la pluma hasta el radio requerido, sin exceder el mximo para el trabajo
especfico indicado en los Grficos Estticos de Clasificacin de Carga.
Baje la carga suavemente a la cubierta.
Sealesmanualesparaoperadoresdegras
Las seales son bsicas para el equipo de la gra. Cualquier otra seal que se use durante la
operacin deber ser convenida entre el operador y el encargado de seal de antemano. Estas
seales no deben estar en contrarias a las seales bsicas.
Cualquier seal de mano se puede modificada para indicar movimientos lento y cauteloso,
colocando la palma de la mano no utilizada a una corta distancia enfrente del dedo que indica la
direccin. No se debe dar una respuesta si las seales no son claras.
Eloperadoresenltimainstanciaeselresponsabledela
seguridadyoperacindelagra.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Instruccionesespecificasparaoperargrascon
instrumentosmontadosenlaconsola
Motordedieselypalancasdecontroleselctricos
Controldemovimientoprimario
Esta gra esta equipada con palancas de control elctrico montados en los apoyabrazos del
asiento del operador.
Estos controles estn bajo tensin de un resorte en posicin neutral (centro) y proporcionan
un control independiente en las funciones primarias de la gra, con la velocidad de
movimiento directamente proporcionada a la cantidad de movimiento de la palanca en
relacin con la posicin neutral.
Al realizar operaciones simultneas que implican dos o ms de los movimientos primarios,
el motor diesel debe operarse a la velocidad mxima (RPM). Palancas de control
individuales deben ser utilizadas para controlar independientemente la velocidad de los
movimientos distintos de la gra.
Controldelladoizquierdogiroyaparejodelapluma
El control de la izquierda es una palanca de mando de doble eje con los dos balancines y los
interruptores de activacin.
El funcionamiento simultneo de ambos giro y movimiento de la pluma se logra moviendo la
palanca de control hacia la izquierda en diagonal. La velocidad de funcionamiento de ambos
movimientos es independientemente proporcional al desplazamiento de la palanca de control
de la posicin neutral. Por ejemplo, es posible elevar la pluma a la mxima velocidad, mientras
que la gra se gira muy lentamente hacia la izquierda.
Eje de Izquierda-Derecha: Moviendo la palanca de control del centro hacia la izquierda
Giro el giro ser hacia la izquierda (encontra del reloj). Moviendo la palanca de control
del centro hacia la derecha Giro. (a favor del reloj)
o Empiece y termine el movimiento oscilante como lenta y suave sea posible, para evitar
posibles daos al equipo o lesiones al personal de una carga extremadamente oscilante.
o Para el sistema de giro de circuito abierto, la gra est libre para girar o desplazarse
cuando la palanca de control se encuentra en la posicin neutral, siempre y cuando el
pedal del freno de rotacin no est aplicado o la palanca de bloqueo de giro no est
enganchada.
o Para el sistema de giro de circuito cerrado, la gra hidrostticamente se bloquear una
vez que la palanca de mando est en la posicin neutral. Si la vlvula de giro se activa,
la gra estar libre de oscilar o desplazarse con una carga ms pesada.
Eje de la Pluma Arriba-Abajo: Estirar la palanca de control hacia atrs para elevar la
pluma (reducir el radio) empujar la palanca de control hacia adelante para bajar la pluma.
o El aparejo de la pluma en movimiento est siempre bajo el control del sistema
hidrulico y no puede exceder la velocidad estar libre en el descenso. Refirase a
nuestra "Descripcin de Falla-Segura (Fail-Safe) Caractersticas de documento en la
Introduccin y Caractersticas de diseo seccin del Libro de Datos 1 para obtener ms
informacin sobre este tema.
o El freno de la pluma ( frenos) automticamente se ajustan y bloquean la pluma cuando
la palanca de control esta en posicin neutral.
Gatillo: La funcin vara segn la configuracin. En algunas instalaciones, apriete el
gatillo para hablar por el radio o megfono. En otras configuraciones, el gatillo hace sonar
la corneta montada por debajo de la cabina.
Cambiar-Izquierda:( Si est instalado) Cambia a la pgina anterior en el terminal
CCM7000 en la pantalla de la gra en gestin.
Cambiar-Derecha: Cambia a la pgina siguiente en el terminal CCM7000. En algunas
instalaciones, cambiar-derecha hace sonar la bocina montada debajo de la cabina.
Controldeladoderechoaparejosprincipalyauxiliar
El control de la derecha esta formado por dos configuraciones principales:
Dos palancas independientes: palancas independientes: Montaje lado a lado, la palanca de
control interior controla el aparejo auxiliar y el exterior controla el aparejo principal.
Control Individual e Interruptor de Selector del Aparejo:
Una sola palanca controla a los aparejos auxiliar y principal
dependiendo si el selector se encuentra en AUX, OFF MAIN.
La palanca de control apropiada de la derecha se estira hacia
atrs para subir la lnea principal o ltigo (enrollar el cable) o
empujar hacia adelante para bajar la lnea principal o ltigo
(desenrollar el cable).
o El aparejo en movimiento esta siempre bajo el control del
sistema hidrulico y no puede exceder la velocidad estar
libre en el descenso. Refirase a nuestra Descripcin de
Falla-Segura (Fail-Safe) Caractersticas de documento en
la Introduccin y Caractersticas de diseo seccin del
Libro de Datos 1 para obtener ms informacin sobre este tema.
Los frenos automticamente se ajustan y bloquean los tambores auxiliar y principal cuando las
palancas de control estn en posicin neutral. En caso de una falla mecnica, libere las
palancas de control y se activaran los frenos parando la rotacin de los tambores.
Bloqueodelapluma
El bloqueo de la pluma se ha diseado para sostener la pluma en su lugar durante el servicio del
motor o caja de engranajes.
No enganche el bloqueo de la pluma mientras el tambor esta girando: no est diseado
para usarlo como freno.
No enganche el bloqueo de la pluma y opere el aparejo en direccin hacia abajo: esto
puede daar el trinquete y la caja de engranes.
Girofrenosdegiro
El frenado dinmico se logra mediante la cruz de control de la palanca de control
izquierda. Por ejemplo, si la gra est girando a la izquierda a una velocidad alta y la
palanca de control esta en posicin neutral, la gra continuara a la izquierda. Al mover la
palanca de control de posicin neutral a la derecha, se aplicara freno de torsin a la gra
en movimiento, por lo tanto se detendr el giro mas rpido.
La gra y su maquinaria estn asociadas con la oscilacin y estn protegidos de daos
durante esta operacin por medio torque de lmite de vlvulas hidrulicas. Estas vlvulas
limitan la cantidad de torque de giro disponible durante la aceleracin y desaceleracin de
la gra. Sin embargo, se recomienda que el movimiento de oscilacin debe comenzar y
parar tan lenta y suavemente como sea posible para evitar posibles daos al equipo o
lesiones al personal de una carga bruscamente oscilante.
Con un sistema de circuito de giro abierto de oscilacin de la gra y la carga puede
mantenerse en posicin contra el viento por medio del pedal de freno (Si est equipado) o
si la palanca de control esta en posicin neutral, cuando est equipado con la transmisin
hidrosttica. Cross-controlador, como se describi anteriormente, es el mtodo preferido
para detener el giro.
Con un sistema de circuito de giro cerrado de la gra hidrostticamente se bloquea una
vez que la palanca de control esta en posicin neutral. La gra no se mover hasta que
tenga una direccin con la palanca de control. Si la gra est equipado con una vlvula de
giro libre ser capaz de seguir una carga pesada minimizando una carga lateral.
La gra puede ser bloqueada en posicin indefinidamente por medio de Bloqueo de Giro
vlvula de freno montada en la consola de control. Cuando esta vlvula est en
"Enganchado", la gra estar bloqueada contra la rotacin. Cualquier intento de hacer girar
la gra mientras la vlvula de control esta en posicin enganchada el giro hidrulico, se
parar entonces el motor de giro ira contra del bloqueo. Esto no es perjudicial y no daar
cualquier parte del sistema de giro.
Instrumentosycontrolesmontadosenlaconsola
Lo que sigue es una lista de instrumentos y controles comunes, algunos o todos de los cuales se
pueden encontrar en funcin de factores tales como la configuracin de la gra, neumtica vs.
elctrica y la presencia del sistema de gestin de CCM7000 en la gra.
Presin de aire Medidor: indica la presin de aire.
Presin de Circuito Piloto Medidor: muestra la presin hidrulica en el circuito de
control.
Presin de Giro Medidor: muestra la presin hidrulica en el circuito de giro.
Presin de la pluma Medidor: muestra la presin hidrulica de levante de la pluma.
Presin del Principal y Auxiliar Medidor: muestra la presin hidrulica en el circuito
principal y auxiliar de elevacin, dependiendo de que est en uso.
Bloqueo de Giro Vlvula de Freno: Consiste en soltar el freno del eje de giro. Esta
vlvula debe de estar en posicin bloqueado cuando el operador abandona la cabina.---
Coloque la vlvula en posicin desbloqueado posicin para girar la gra.
Control Hidrulico Vlvula: dispositivo de seguridad que desactiva los controles
Principal / Auxiliar y Pluma / Giro. Esto previene accidentes cuando la gra no est en
funcionamiento. Basta con estirar de la perilla para desactivar o deshabilitar los controles,
y empuje hacia abajo para activar o habilitar los controles.
Nivel de Aceite Hidrulico Medidor: indica el nivel de aceite hidrulico en el
reservador.
Temperatura de Aceite Hidrulico. Medidor: indica la temperatura del aceite
hidrulico en el tanque.
Nivel de combustible" Medidor: muestra la cantidad de diesel disponible para alimentar
el motor primario.
Limpiaparabrisas Superior Vlvula: Girando de la vlvula de control (neumtico) o
interruptor (elctrico) se inicia y se detiene el limpiaparabrisas en la ventana superior.
Limpiaparabrisas Inferior: Vlvula: Girando de la vlvula de control (neumtico) o
interruptor (elctrico) se inicia y se detiene el limpiaparabrisas en la ventana superior.
Corneta Gatillo: cuando se presione el botn la corneta sonara, la cual esta montada por
debajo de la cabina-----. La corneta tambin sonar automticamente poco despus de
apagar el motor diesel principal, cuando la presin de aceite del motor disminuye por
debajo de un nivel predeterminado.
Temperatura refrigerante". Medidor: muestra la temperatura del refrigerante del motor
diesel.
Presin de Aceite de Motor Medidor: indica la presin del aceite lubricante del motor
diesel.
Reiniciar Alarma"Vlvula: apaga la alarma de presin de aceite del motor cuando este
est baja. El pestillo debe restablecerse inmediatamente despus de que el motor se apage
para evitar que la corneta suene cuando disminuya la presin del aceite. En caso contrario,
la alarma sonar continuamente hasta que el pestillo se restablece.
Arranque de Motor" Botn Verde: activa el motor de arranque para el motor diesel.
Presione el botn para encender el motor, y sultelo cuando el motor est en marcha.
Tacmetro: indica las revoluciones del motor RPM.
Paro de Motor Botn Negro: se utiliza para el motor diesel en condiciones normales.
Cuando se presiona el botn, esto impide que el combustible fluya a los inyectores,
apagando as el motor y desactivando todos los controles hidrulicos. Pulse el mando a su
posicin original despus de que el motor haya parado.
Paro de Emergencia del Motor" Botn Rojo: cierra el flujo de aire de admisin hasta el
turbocompresor del motor diesel (s), obligando as que el motor se detenga. Esto har que
todas las palancas de control queden inoperables bloqueando todos los Frenos de los
aparejos. Este mando slo se debe utilizar en el caso de una emergencia, por ejemplo, un
"embalamiento" el motor no se apaga normalmente.
Para reiniciar despus de resolver la emergencia, vaya a la casa del motor y restablezca la llave
de paso de admisin situada entre el enfriador interno y turbocompresor usando una llave .
Motores en lnea tendr una vlvula de cierre individual, mientras que V-configuraciones
tendrn dos. "accionado con el pie del pedal del acelerador": a la derecha controla la velocidad
del motor diesel. Seatrax recomienda una velocidad del motor entre 1.800 y 2.170 rpm
mientras se realiza la operacin simultnea de los movimientos de la gra primaria.
Controlessecundariosoperadosconlospies
Pedal del Acelerador Pedal: a la derecha controla la velocidad del motor diesel. Seatrax
recomienda una velocidad del motor entre 1.800 y 2.170 rpm mientras se realiza la
operacin simultnea de los movimientos de la gra primaria.
Pedal de Freno del Giro Pedal: a la izquierda - si est equipado - se utiliza para
mantener la gra contra el viento. No aplique el freno de repente, mientras la gra est
girando.
Freno de Emergencia de los Aparejos: Perilla - si est equipada - est en el piso de la
cabina a la izquierda de la silla del operador. Si se produce un fallo en alguna parte del
mecanismo de elevacin y la carga o la pluma empieza a cada libre, el operador debe
quitar las manos de los controles y pisar sobre este botn.
o Deje que las palancas de control se pongan en posicin neutral y as permitir que
todos los frenos se activen automticamente los cual permitir bajar despacio o parar la
carga por completo.
o Al pisar la perilla de la vlvula tirar la presin del sistema del piloto hacia el tanque
(retorno) automticamente activando todos los frenos de los aparejos en un
levantamiento.
o La vlvula se debe reiniciar antes de que las operaciones de la gra se puede reanudar.
Para ello, slo tiene que agacharse y estirar de la perilla hacia arriba (slo se mover
3/4).
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
9September2008
BoomLockOperation
Function
The Boom Lock has been designed to hold the boom in place during service of the motor or gearbox.
DO NOT engage the Boom Lock while the drum is turning: it is not designed as a brake.
DO NOT engage the Boom Lock and drive the hoist in the down direction: this can
damage the lock assembly and gearbox.
Operation
The new boom lock has been specifically designed to require two people to operate, because crane
operators tend to use it for more than a maintenance tool and forget it is engaged.
Engage the Boom Lock:
1. Have a maintenance person stand on the gearbox side of the boom hoist and locate the handle for
the Boom Lock.
2. With one hand, push the handle forward. As the handle moves forward, the latch will release.
3. With the other hand, pull the latch up against the handle. Allow the handle and latch to move to
the back under the spring pressure.
4. The operator can now very gently boom down until the boom lock is fully engaged and the boom
stops lowering (the boom point may move less than a foot).
5. DO NOT continue to drive
into the locking pawl, it is
not designed to take the
immense force generated
by a motor and gearbox.
6. Visually verify that the
pawl is fully engaged in the
ratchet mechanism.
Release the Boom Lock:
1. The operator must boom up
slowly as the maintenance
person holds the latch and
pushes the Boom Lock
Handle forward until the
latch can drop over the pin.
2. Slowly lower boom to
ensure the pawl has
released fully.
BoomLockHandle.doc Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
28deseptiembredel2008
Funcionamientodebloqueodelapluma
Funcin
El bloqueo de la pluma se ha diseado para sostener la pluma en su lugar durante el servicio del
motor o caja de engranes.
NO enganche el bloqueo de la pluma mientras el tambor est girando: no est diseado
como freno.
NO enganche el bloqueo de la pluma y no opere en direccin hacia abajo: esto puede daar
el ensamblaje de bloqueo y caja de engranes.
Operacin
El bloqueo de la pluma ha sido especficamente diseado para requerir dos personas para operar,
porque es una herramienta para uso de mantenimiento solamente y no se debe de usar en una
operacin normal.
Enganche de bloqueo de la pluma:
1. Haga que un persona de mantenimiento se pare al lado de la caja de engranes del aparejo de la
pluma y localice la palanca de bloqueo de la pluma.
2. Con una mano, empuje la palanca hacia adelante. A medida que la palanca se mueve hacia
adelante, el pestillo se liberara.
3. Con la otra mano, tire del cerrojo hacia arriba contra la manija. Permitiendo que la palanca y el
seguro se mueva a la parte posterior bajo la presin del resorte.
4. El operador puede ahora muy suavemente operar hacia abajo hasta que la pluma de bloqueo este
completamente montada en el trinquete, bajando la pluma se detendr por completo. (el punto de
la pluma puede moverse a menos de un pie)
5. NO contine operando el trinquete de bloqueo, no est diseado para tener la fuerza inmensa
generada por el motor y la caja de engranes.
6. Verifique visualmente que el bloqueo de la pluma est plenamente enganchado con el
mecanismo de trinquete.
BoomLockHandleOperation_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
Anular el bloqueo de la pluma:
1. El operador debe operar hacia arriba lentamente a medida que la persona de mantenimiento
empuje el cerrojo y la manija hacia adelante hasta que el seguro pueda caer sobre el pasador.
2. Lentamente baje la pluma para asegurar que el trinquete se ha liberado completamente.
BoomLockHandleOperation_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Section/Seccin3 ________________________
Initial Start-Up and Commissioning Puesta en funcionamiento y puesta en
Procedure marcha
Commissioning Checklist Puesta y lista de verificacin
Inspection Check List Inspeccin y lista de verificacin
Bolt Installation and Inspection Procedure Instalacin de tornillos y procedimiento de
inspeccin
Specifications for Large Diameter Nuts and Especificaciones para tuercas y tornillos de
Bolts dimetro grande
Main Block and Overhaul Ball Inspection Inspeccin del bloque de carga y bola de
carga
Wedge Sockets Terminacin de cua
Hydraulic Boom Hoist Limit System Sistema de limite del malacate de la pluma
Hydraulic System Adjustments Ajustes del sistema hidrulico
Hoist Drum Brake Maintenance Mantenimiento de freno de tambor del
malacate
Hoist Brake Test Procedure Procedimiento para prueba de freno de los
malacates
Hoist Spline Inspection Procedure Inspeccin de ranuras de eje de malacate
Boom Inspection, Repair and Welding Procedimiento de inspeccin, reparacin y
Procedure soldadura de la pluma
Swing Bearing System Service Servicio del sistema de cojinete de giro
Collector Rings Anillos colectores
Emergency Slewing Procedure Procedimiento de giro de emergencia
Emergency Load Lowering Procedure Procedimiento para bajar una carga en
emergencia
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
17September2012
InitialStartUpandCommissioningProcedure
CranewithDieselPrimeMover
InitialStartUp
The testing of all functions will commence upon satisfactory completion of all fit-out
activities. Complete all check sheets with contract-preferred items attached.
PreStartActivitiesbySection
SLEWDRIVE
1. Verify that the slew pinion(s) and kingpost bullgear have been lubricated.
2. Verify that the lube oil reservoir tank is 3/4 full.
BOOM
1. Verify that the boom point sheaves have been lubricated.
2. Verify proper installation of the main hoist wedge socket and that the wire rope is in
satisfactory condition.
3. Verify that the anti-two block frame swings without excess force.
4. Verify that all electrical connections on boom have been made.
5. Verify that all boom connection bolts have been tightened to the correct torque using
the correct torque values. (See the Bolt Installation and Inspection Procedure in the
Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1.)
6. Verify gearbox lube levels. Refer to the Lubrication section of Data Book 1.
7. Lubricate the shaft bearing on hoist ends.
8. Verify that cable anchor H blocks are tight on hoist drums.
9. Verify that all tools and debris have been removed from the boom.
10. Verify that the boom heel pins have been greased and that the safety bolts have been
installed. NOTE: Seatrax strongly recommends the use of Lubemaster Premalube
Heavy Duty NLGI #2 grease for the boom heel pins and slew bearings.
CommissProcedure_R06_Diesel.doc Page1of4
GANTRY
1. Verify that the gantry sheaves have been lubricated.
2. Verify that all ladders, safety gates and platforms have been fitted correctly and
secured.
3. Verify that the boom stop (optionally hydraulic or spring-type) bolts have been fitted
correctly, and have been tightened to the correct torque values per the Bolt
Installation and Inspection procedure in the Inspection and Maintenance section of
Data Book 1.
4. Verify that the upper bearing bolts have been tightened to the correct torque using the
values outlined in the above-referenced procedure.
5. Verify that all tools and debris have been removed from the gantry.
UPPERWORKS
1. Verify the boom hoist gearbox lube level and that the correct oil type is used.
2. Verify fuel and hydraulic tank levels.
3. Lubricate shaft bearing on hoist end.
4. Verify that the upper slew bearing and lower bearing shoes are installed and greased.
NOTE: Seatrax strongly recommends the use of Lubemaster Premalube Heavy Duty
NLGI #2 grease in the boom heel pins and slew bearings.
5. Verify that the hoist drum cable anchors are tight.
6. Verify that the access ladder has been fitted correctly and is secure.
7. Verify that all walkways have been cleared of tools and debris.
RIGGING
1. Verify that the luffing rope is reeved correctly, lubricated and that the wire rope is
undamaged.
2. Verify that the load and aux ropes are reeved correctly, lubricated and that the wire
ropes are not damaged.
3. Verify that the main block is reeved with the correct number of falls (i.e., 2, 4, 6, etc.)
4. Check that the bridle block assembly sheaves are lubricated and reeved correctly. (If
fitted)
5. Check pendant lines (if fitted) to ensure that hairpins are installed and cables are in
satisfactory condition.
6. Verify that the main block sheaves, main block bearing and aux swivel have been
lubricated.
MACHINERYHOUSE
Before starting the engine the following checks must be made:
1. Verify that the coolant in the radiator is to the correct level and contains the proper ratio
of water-to-anti-freeze for local climatic conditions.
2. Verify the engine oil is to the correct level and correct oil type is used.
3. Verify the multi pump drive lube oil level and that the correct oil type is used.
4. Check air filter for cleanliness and ensure that the plastic wrapper has been removed.
5. Verify that no personnel are present in the machinery house prior to start.
6. Verify that butterfly valves on the suction lines are fully open.
7. Check that diesel valves are fully open.
CAB
1. Check control mechanisms including function levers, throttle, and engine start and stop,
and brakes for freedom of movement and for proper operation.
2. Verify horn function.
3. Verify that cab-mounted electrical systems perform as required.
4. Check that the load indicator system is operational.
5. Check that electrical supplies are correct.
Commissioning
This following steps detail the specific actions to be performed prior to commissioning the
crane for first use. These steps are performed after those within the Initial Start-Up section.
NOTE: It is essential to verify all fluid levels before initial start-up in accordance
with the Lubrication section of Data Book 1).
1. Verify that initial start-up sections are fully complete.
2. Visually check for leakage or damage in the hydraulic system.
3. Check the pneumatic and non-mechanical systems for leakage and contamination.
4. Verify that available air supply is of sufficient pressure and volume for safe operation.
5. Visually check wire rope for evident deterioration, damage or improper reeving. Verify
that the installed rope is of the correct diameter, type and properly lubricated.
6. Visually check for loose or missing components such as walkway sections, ladders and
supports, bolts, pins, keepers or cotter pins.
7. Perform a 'walk-around' visual examination of the crane, crane boom, and support
structure to ensure no that damage exists and that structural installation has been
completed.
8. Ensure that the correct load rating charts for the current configuration and all required
alternate configurations are available for use by the crane operator at the primary
control station.
9. Check boom hoist limit and anti-two block devices for proper operation. Exercise care
to prevent damage to crane components.
10. Visually check condition of loose gear to be used, such as slings, sling hooks and
shackles.
11. Check all control locks and emergency controls.
12. Adjust the hi-low boom kickout valve after referring to the Hydraulic Boom Hoist
Limit System procedure in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1:
Installation, Operation and Maintenance:
NEVERDISCONNECTBOOMKICKOUTSYSTEM!
13. Check boom angle/radius indicators (mechanical and electronic if equipped) over full
range and verify accuracy (see the Load Indicator section of Data Book 1).
14. Inspect sheaves for damage, rope path alignment and freedom of movement.
15. Correct deficiencies as required by the above prior to use.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
17septiembre2012
Puestaenfuncionamientoypuestaenmarcha
Graconfuerzaprimariadiesel
Puestaenfuncionamiento
La prueba de todas las funciones comenzar tras la finalizacin satisfactoria de todas las
actividades. Complete todas las hojas de verificacin con contrato preferidos por los
elementos incluidos.
Actividadespreviasporseccin
Areadegiro
1. Verifique que los piones de giro y la corona de giro del poste de carga estn
lubricados.
2. Verifique que el tanque de almacenamiento de aceite lubricante es de 3/4 de su
capacidad.
PLUMA
1. Verifique que las poleas del punto de la pluma han sido lubricadas.
2. Verifique la correcta instalacin de terminal de cua del malacate principal y que el
cable de alambre est en buen estado.
3. Verifique que el dispositivo de doble bloqueo se columpie sin fuerza excesiva en la
estructura.
4. Verifique que se han realizado todas las conexiones elctricas en la pluma.
5. Verifique que todos los tornillos de conexin de la pluma han sido apretados con el par
correcto utilizando los valores de par. (Consulte la seccin 'Instalacin de Tornillos y
Procedimiento de Inspeccin "en la seccin de Inspeccin y Mantenimiento del Libro
de Datos 1.)
6. Verifique los niveles de lubricacin de cajas de engranes. Consulte la seccin
Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1.
7. Lubricar el cojinete en el extremo del eje del malacate.
8. Verifique que los bloques de anclaje del cable "H" estn apretados sobre los tambores
del malacate.
9. Verifique que todas las herramientas y escombros han sido retirados de la pluma.
10. Verifique que los pernos del pivote han sido engrasados y que los tornillos de seguridad
se han instalado. NOTA: Seatrax recomienda estrictamente el uso de grasa NLGI #2
para los pernos del pivote y los cojinetes de giro.
CommissProcedure_R06_Diesel_spamx.doc Pgina1of4
MASTIL
1. Verifique que las poleas del mstil se han lubricado.
2. Verifique que todas las escaleras, puertas de seguridad y plataformas estn bien
colocadas y aseguradas.
3. Verifique que los topes de la pluma (opcionalmente hidrulico o de resorte) los
tornillos estn bien instalados, y se han apretado con los valores de par correctos por
la Instalacin de Tornillos y Procedimiento de Inspeccin de la seccin Inspeccin
y Mantenimiento de Libro de Datos 1.
4. Verifique que los tornillos del cojinete superior han sido apretados con el par correcto
utilizando los valores indicados en el procedimiento antes mencionado.
5. Verifique que todas las herramientas y escombros han sido retirados del mstil.
SUPERESTRUCTURAGIRATORIA
1. Verifique el nivel de lubricante en la caja de engranes del malacate de la pluma y que
se utilice el tipo de aceite correcto.
2. Verifique niveles del tanque de combustible y aceite hidrulico.
3. Lubrique el cojinete del eje en el extremo del malacate.
4. Verificar que el cojinete de giro superior y los cojinetes de giro inferiores estn
instalados y engrasados NOTA: Seatrax recomienda estrictamente el uso de grasa
NLGI # 2 en los pernos del pivote y cojinetes de giro.
5. Verifique que los bloques de anclaje del cable de alambre estn ajustadas.
6. Verifique que la escalera de acceso se ha instalado correctamente y que esta segura.
7. Verifique que todas las pasarelas estn libres o limpias de las herramientas y
escombros.
APAREJO
1. Verifique que el cable de alambre de la pluma este enhebrado correctamente,
lubricado y que el cable no este daado.
2. Verifique que los cables del principal y auxiliar estn correctamente lubricados y que
los cables no estn daados.
3. Verifique que el bloque de carga principal este enhebrado con el nmero correcto de
cadas (es decir, 2, 4, 6, etc.)
4. Revise que las poleas del arns flotante estn lubricadas y enhebradas correctamente.
(Si est instalado)
5. Revise las lneas colgantes (en su caso) para asegurarse de que las chavetas se han
instalado y los cables estn en buen estado.
6. Verifique que las poleas del bloque principal de carga, cojinete del bloque principal
de carga y la unin de la bala auxiliar giratoria estn lubricados.
CASADELMOTOR
Antes de arrancar el motor, se deben hacer las siguientes comprobaciones:
1. Verifique que el lquido refrigerante en el radiador est al nivel correcto y contiene la
proporcin adecuada de agua-anticongelante para las condiciones climticas locales.
2. Verifique el nivel de aceite del motor si es correcto y el tipo de aceite que se utiliza
tambin sea correcto.
3. Verifique el nivel de aceite de la unidad de caja de engranes de bomba mltiple y que el
tipo de aceite que se utiliza sea correcto.
4. Revise el filtro de aire de entrada y asegurarse de que el envoltorio de plstico se ha
eliminado o retirado.
5. Verifique que no haya ninguna persona adentro de la casa del motor antes de arrancar.
6. Verifique que las vlvulas de mariposa en las lneas de succin estn completamente
abiertas.
7. Revise que las vlvulas de diesel estn completamente abiertas.
CABINA
1. Compruebe los mecanismos de control que incluyen palancas de funcin, el acelerador,
arranque y paro de motor, y los frenos a la libertad de circulacin y su correcto
funcionamiento.
2. Verificar funcionamiento de corneta.
3. Verificar que los sistemas elctricos montados en la cabina funcionen segn lo
requerido.
4. Compruebe que el sistema indicador de carga est en funcionamiento.
5. Compruebe que los cables elctricos suministrados estn correctos.
Puestaenmarcha
Estos siguientes pasos detallan las medidas concretas que deben realizarse antes de la puesta
en marcha de la gra para el primer uso. Estos pasos se realizan despus de la seccin de
Arranque Inicial y Procedimiento de Puesta en Marcha.
NOTA: Es esencial verificar todos los niveles de lquidos y lubricantes antes de la
primera puesta en marcha, en conformidad con la seccin de Lubricacin de Libro
de Datos 1).
1. Verifique que las secciones iniciales de puesta en marcha se completen en su totalidad.
2. Revise visualmente si hay fugas o daos en el sistema hidrulico.
3. Revise el sistema neumtico y no mecnico de fugas y contaminacin.
4. Verifique que el suministro de aire es suficiente de presin y volumen para una
operacin segura.
5. Inspeccione visualmente el cable de alambre de evidente deterioro, dao o enhebrado
incorrecto. Verifique que el cable de alambre instalado es del dimetro correcto, el tipo
y este adecuadamente lubricado.
6. Inspeccione visualmente los componentes flojos o faltantes como pasarelas de
secciones, escaleras y tornillos, pernos, pasadores, cuidadores o chavetas.
7. Realizar una 'vuelta a su alrededor' examen visual en la gra, pluma de la gra, y la
estructura de soporte para asegurar que no que existe dao estructural y que la
instalacin se ha completado.
8. Asegrese de que las graficas de carga de estn correctas para la configuracin actual
y todas las configuraciones alternativas necesarias estn disponibles para su uso por el
operador de la gra en la estacin de control principal.
9. Revise el lmite de la pluma y dispositivos anti-doble bloqueo para su correcto
funcionamiento. Tenga cuidado para evitar daos en los componentes de la gra.
10. Revise visualmente condiciones de accesorios de manipulacin que se utilizar, como
eslingas, ganchos y grilletes.
11. Revise todos los bloqueos de control y controles de emergencia.
12. Ajuste la vlvula de lmite hacia abajo y hacia arriba despus referirse al Sistema de
Lmite del Malacate de la Pluma procedimiento en la seccin Inspeccin y
Mantenimiento de Libro de Datos 1: Instalacin, Operacin y Mantenimiento:
NUNCADESCONECTEELLIMITEDELMALACATEDELAPLUMA!
13. Compruebe los indicadores de ngulo y longitud de la pluma (mecnico y electrnico
si est equipado) en todo el rango y verificar la precisin (mire la seccin de Indicador
de Carga en el Libro de Datos 1).
14. Inspeccione daos en las poleas, alineacin en la ruta del cable de alambre y la libertad
de movimiento.
15. Corregir las deficiencias que se le requieren por encima de lo preferente a su uso.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04October2012
CommissioningChecklistCraneswithDieselEngine
DESCRIPTION:CRANEANDRIGGINGLINES SYSTEM:MECH./HYD.
Item No. Item Description Yes No N/A

A) Slew Area
1 Slew Pinion Grease
2 Lube Oil Tank 3/4 Full
B) Boom
3 Boom Point Sheaves
4 Anti Two Block Frame
5 Boom Heel Pins
6 Connection Bolts
7 Gearbox Lube Level. (Lubrication: Data Book 1)
8 Shaft Bearing Greased
9 Tool & Debris Removal
C) Gantry
10 Gantry Sheaves
11 Ladders, Safety Cages & Platforms
12 Connection Pins
COMMENTS:
COMPLETED BY CLIENT APPROVED C.A. APPROVED

SIGNATURE
DATE
CommissChecklist_Diesel_R03.doc Page1of5
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
DESCRIPTION:CRANEANDRIGGINGLINES SYSTEM:MECH./HYD.
Item No Item Description Yes No N/A

D) Upperworks
14 Ensure Hydraulic Tank Suctions are Open (Overhead
Tanks)
15 Gearbox Lube Level. (Lubrication: Data Book 1)
16 Hyd. Tank Level (2 3 Below Top of Tank)
17 Fuel Tank Level 1/4 1/2 3/4 Full

18 Lower Bearings
19 Drum Anchors
20 Access Ladder
21 Handrails (Removable)
E) Rigging
23 Luffing Rope
24 Load & Auxiliary Rope
25 Main Block Assembly
26 Headache Ball Assembly
27 Release Lines
28 Hold Lines
COMMENTS:

SIGNATURE
DATE
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
DESCRIPTION:ENGINE/CABAREA SYSTEM:MECH./HYD.

A) Pre-Start Up
1 Radiator Coolant Full
2 Engine Oil Level (Check Dipstick)
3 Pump Drive Fluid Level (Check Dipstick)
B) Cab
4 Slew Left
5 Slew Right
6 Main Hoist Lever Pull, Load Up
7 Main Hoist Lever Push, Load Down
8 Auxiliary Hoist Lever Pull, Load Up
9 Auxiliary Hoist Lever Push, Load Down
10 Slew Brake Parking Brake (Console-Mounted)
11 Slew Brake Dynamic (Foot Pedal (If Equipped)
12 Engine Start Switch
13 Engine Throttle Control
14 Engine Stop Handle
15 Horn Function
16 Up and Down Limit Switches, Main
17 Up and Down Limit Switches, Aux
COMMENTS:

SIGNATURE
DATE
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
DESCRIPTION:PREFERREDITEMS SYSTEM:MECH./E&I

1 Slew Pinion Guard
2 Bridle Block Assembly
3 Pendant Lines
4 Air Receiver (If Equipped)
5 Windshield Wipers
6 Safe Load Indicator (CCM7000, MIPEG, etc.) Function
7 Hoist Limit Switch Function
8 Slew Limit Switch Function
9 Machinery Guards
10 Safety Guards
11
Electrical System
12 Telephone/Alarm System Function
13 Radio Antennas Damage
14 VHF/UHF Radio Function
15 Loud Hail Amp Function
16 Deck Lighting
17 Flood Lights
18 Aircraft Warning Lights
COMMENTS:

SIGNATURE
DATE
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
DESCRIPTION:PREFERREDITEMS SYSTEM:MECH./E&I

20 Emergency Lights
21 Cab Lights
22 Engine Compartment Lights
23 Power Supplies
24 Circuit Breakers, Function
25 Heater Fan, Function
26 Hydraulic Oil Heater
27 Annunciator Function
28 Audible Alarm Function
29 Fire Alarm System
30 Fire System
31 Smoke Detector
32 Fire Detector
33 Earth Connections
34 Earth Continuity Test
35 A/C Unit Function
36 Load Indicator Function
COMMENTS:

SIGNATURE
DATE
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
22October2008
InspectionChecklist
DieselPrimeMover
InspectionFrequency
The "Duty Cycle," or frequency of operation of Offshore Cranes varies from almost continuous
use (MODUS) to sitting idle for months at a time (unmanned production platforms). Therefore it is
not possible or practical for the crane manufacturer to provide universal inspection programs,
based on frequency of use, which are applicable to all possible situations.
Therefore, the following Inspection Checklist is to assist owners and operators in the development
of an appropriate Preventative Maintenance Program applicable to their unique application.
All items should be checked by a qualified inspector.
Records of every inspection, modification, or repair, should be kept to formulate any
maintenance trends that may develop. These records are to be kept for at least two years.
This list does not include items covered in the Lubrication section of Data Book 1.
For torque specifications please refer to the Bolt Inspection Procedure in the Inspection and
Maintenance section of Data Book 1.
Cracked/chipped paint or rust can signify hidden structural deterioration.
Level1 RegularInspection (PreUse)
Level2 PeriodicInspection (Monthly) Level1plustheseitems
Level3 IntensiveInspection (Quarterly) Levels1and2plustheseitems
Level4 AnnualInspection (Yearly) Levels13plustheseitems
InspectorVerifytheFollowing:
CabArea
Level1
Out of service signs.
Remove any obstructions to clear operator vision (includes cleaning windows if necessary).
All instruments/gauges function properly
Crane functions for proper operation.
o Throttle operates smoothly, from idle (950 rpm) to wide open throttle (WOT) (2,170 rpm).
o Control levers operate freely and return to neutral when released.
o All hoists operate smoothly.
InspectionChecklist_Diesel_R03.doc Page1of10
Level2
Document console mounted Hour Meter reading and verify function. (If equipped)
Load charts are in place and legible.
Fire extinguisher is accessible and charged. (If equipped)
Air conditioner / heater function. (If equipped)
Cab lights and electrical equipment. (If equipped)
Safety alarms for proper function. (If equipped)
Windshield wipers function and condition. (If equipped)
Window pivot mechanism. (If equipped)
Crane functions for proper operation:
o Swing brake pedal holds.
o Boom limit system set at the correct positions.
o Console mounted controls operate as described.
o Floor mounted Emergency Hoist Brake disables all hydraulic controls. (If equipped)
o Load indicator display. (If equipped)
o Engine Start Button: press and hold until engine starts.
o Engine Stop Knob: pull to stop prime mover under normal situations by cutting fuel flow.
Push knob to reset.
Level3
Remove inspection plate beside seat and check for leaks.
Joysticks and console controls for leaks.
Engine Emergency Shutdown Knob: pull to stop prime mover rapidly in an emergency
situation by blocking airflow to the engine. (Reset after Test: Push down on the knob, then go
to the Engine House and reset the shut-off valve located between the intercooler and
turbocharger.)
Level4
Load Indicator accuracy.
Vibration dampeners in good shape.
Rear/WingDeck
Level1
Hydraulic or fuel leaks / spills.
Fuel level.
Level2
Boom hoist cable.
Boom dog function.
Brake band wear and condition.
Clevis pin installed on brake linkage and eccentric shaft.
Gearbox oil level(s) and condition.
Hose abrasion.
Level3
Gearbox mounting bolts.
Motor mounting bolts.
Hoist frame to upperworks mounting bolts.
Frame, drum, and turntable structure for deterioration.
o Brake to brake drum core welds.
o Inside of brake drum area (where cable anchors are located).
o Spline hub to drum weld.
o Complete hoist frame.
o Boom hoist platform.
Wire rope H blocks on hoist drum are tight.
Brake and boom lock retaining bolts.
Bearings and seals for visible wear.
Eccentric shaft and bushings for visible wear.
Proper adjustment of brake linkage and condition.
Hoist brake test:
o Disconnect brake actuator pressure to release line.
o Run hoist in the down direction at full power to ensure brake holds.
o While testing brake, check the maximum hoist pressure.
o Turntable structural welds from gantry pin connections to boom pin connections.
Level4
Remove outer bearing cover to inspect bearings and seals.
Welds and structure for deterioration.
Fuel and hydraulic level gauges for accuracy. (If equipped)
Fuel and hydraulic tanks for water.
Grating condition and loose or missing retainers.
Handrail connections.
ValveCabinet(42and60Seriesonly)
Level1
Valves, hoses, and filter for leaks.
Filter indicator is green.
Level2
Electrical cable or hose abrasion.
Level3
No additional inspection required
Level4
No additional inspection required

EngineHouse
Level1
Engine oil level.
All engine instruments/gauges operate properly.
Pump Drive fluid level. (if applicable)
Suction hoses are completely open. (if applicable)
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Out of service signs.
Level2
Document Hour Meter reading and verify function. (If equipped)
Condition of engine oil.
Condition of pump drive lubricant. (If applicable)
Condition and level of engine coolant.
Air cleaner condition.
Filter indicators are green.
Electrical cable or hose abrasion.
Hydraulic oil is approximately six (6) inches below top of tank.
Engine-mounted starter button operation.
Engine-mounted shut-down knob operation
Level3
Engine mounting bolts.
Engine belt tightness and condition.
Engine Emergency Shutdown Knob operation
Drain air line dryer of water accumulation. (If equipped)
Air line lubricator level. (If equipped)
Exhaust system for leaks.
Level4
Pump drive vent for contamination. (If applicable)
Suction hose deterioration or leaks
Engine shut-down linkage and operation. (in cab)
Engine mounted kill operation. (at engine)
Oil cooler and radiator, clean as required to ensure proper airflow.
Vibration dampeners for deterioration.
Air receiver for water, leaks or corrosion. (If equipped)
Handrail connections.
SwingArea
Level1
Hydraulic leaks around swing motor and boom hoist limit assembly.
Condition of front shoe bearings and retainers.
Level2
Boom butt pin bushings and retainers.
Condition of all shoe bearings.
Lube oil level in reservoir (1/2- 3/4 full).
Boom Kick-out valve for leaks.
Hose abrasion.
Level3
Pinion gears and bolts.
Level4
Lubricate pinion gear and inspect splines.
Slew retaining bolts (clean bolt and threads, apply Loctite 271, and torque to 600 ft. lbs.)
MainandAuxiliaryHoists
Level1
Hydraulic leaks.
Level2
Hoist wire rope for wear or damage.
Brake band wear and condition.
Proper adjustment of brake linkage and condition.
Clevis pin installed on brake linkage and eccentric shaft.
Gearbox oil level and condition.
Hose abrasion.
Level3
Gearbox mounting bolts.
Motor mounting bolts.
Hoist frame to boom mounting bolts.
Wire rope H blocks on hoist drum are tight.
Seals for visible wear.
Eccentric shaft and bushings for visible wear.
Hoist brake test:
o Disconnect brake actuator pressure to release line.
o Run hoist in the down direction at full power to ensure brake holds.
o While testing brake, check the maximum hoist pressure.
Level4
Remove outer bearing cover to inspect bearings and seals.
Brake Actuator retaining bolts.
Frame, drum, and boom butt structure for deterioration.
o Brake to brake drum core welds.
o Inside of brake drum area (where cable anchors are located).
o Spline hub to drum weld.
o Complete hoist frame.
BoomBaseandStraightSections
Level1
Visually inspect for attachment flanges that do not touch.
Missing bolts or nuts.
Level2
No additional inspection necessary.
Level3
Boom chords and lacing for damage, deformation or corrosion.
Bolts torque to correct values without stretching.
Level4
Welds at connection plates (between boom sections).
Boom base vertical foot plates (plates where pivot pins attach).
Rub rails have at least 1/8 material remaining.
Walkways/grating condition and mounting bolts. (If equipped)
BoomPointandJibExtension
Level1
Loose gear (slings, hooks, and shackles).
Main rope at dead end for broken strands.
Level2
All sheaves in point area for obvious damage or split thrust washers.
Boom suspension and load support plates for deformation or deterioration.
Bridle and bridle sheaves are in acceptable condition. (If equipped)
Pendant lines and spelter sockets for deterioration. (If equipped)
Load block:
Sheaves for obvious damage.
o Shackle for missing hairpin or nut. (If equipped)
o Shackle, or hook, for excess wear or deformation.
o Grease seal is undamaged.
o Hook eyelet (stinger pin), or hook, rotates freely.
o Latch closing properly. (If equipped)
Aux line
o Auxiliary hook for cracks in throat or deformation.
o Hook safety latch for damage and proper operation.
o Stinger cable for broken strands or deterioration.
o Free rotation of swivel joint.
o Latch closing properly.
Level3
Point rub rails have at least 1/8 material remaining.
Bolts torqued to correct values without stretching.
Suspension wire rope.
Unbolt and lift overhaul ball to inspect dead end, bushing, swivel, and pins.
Anti-two block frame for damage and freedom of movement.
Aircraft warning light illuminates (typically with engine running).
Level4
Jib extension structure.
Dead-end connection welds.
Remove shafts and sheaves on point and load block to clean and inspect bearings.
Gantry
Level1
Gantry sheaves for obvious damage
Air swivel for damage or leakage. (If equipped)
Electric swivel for freedom of movement and damage. (If equipped)
Boom hoist cable dead end.
Level2
Dead end plate connection.
Sheaves for damage, wear, cracks, or split thrust washers.
All gantry mounted electrical equipment working properly.
Upper bearing for excessive wear.
Jib crane is secured. (If equipped)
Level3
Gantry to upperworks flange bolts.
o Lower flanges
o Bearing area
o Sheave area
o Rear beam splices at angle
Boom spring stops in good condition. (If equipped)
Level4
Ladder and handrails for damage or missing bolts.
Walkways/grating condition and mounting bolts.
Remove shaft and sheaves to clean and inspect bearings.
Kingpost
Level4Only
Welds and structure.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
22octubre2008
Inspeccinylistadeverificacin
Paragrasconmotordiesel
Frecuenciadeinspeccin
El Ciclo de trabajo o la frecuencia de operacin de gras marinas varan por el uso casi continuo
con diferencia cuando la gra esta estacionada durante meses a la vez (plataformas no tripuladas de
produccin). Por lo tanto, no es posible o prctico para el fabricante de la gra proporcionar
programas universales de inspeccin, basado en la frecuencia de uso, que son aplicables a todas las
situaciones posibles.
Por lo tanto, la lista de inspeccin que sigue es ayudar a los propietarios y operadores en el
desarrollo de un programa de mantenimiento preventivo adecuado aplicable a su aplicacin
especfica.
Todos los artculos deben ser revisados por un inspector calificado.
Registros de cada inspeccin, modificacin o reparacin, debe mantenerse al formular las
tendencias de mantenimiento que se pueden desarrollar. Estos registros se conservarn durante
al menos dos aos.
Esta lista no incluye los artculos incluidos en la seccin Lubricacin del Libro de Datos 1.
Para conocer las especificaciones de torque, consulte el Procedimiento de Inspeccin de
Tornillos en la seccin de Inspeccin y Mantenimiento del Libro de Datos 1.
Agrietada / pintura descascarada o moho puede significar el deterioro estructural oculto.
Nivel1 Inspeccinregular PreUso

Nivel2 Inspeccinperidica Mensual Nivel1msestosartculos
Nivel3 Inspeccinintensiva Trimestral Losniveles1y2,ademsde
estosartculos
Nivel4 InspeccinAnual Anual Niveles13artculosmsestos
artculos
Inspeccionaroverificarlosiguiente:
Areadecabina
Nivel1
Anuncios de fuera de servicio.
Elimine todas las obstrucciones para que el operador tenga una visin clara. (incluye limpieza
de ventanas si es necesario)
InspectionChecklist_Diesel_R03_spamx.doc Pgina1of9
Todos los instrumentos y medidores funcionen correctamente.
Funciones de la gra para una operacin correcta.
o El acelerador debe operar suavemente en mnimo rpm (950 rpm) hasta el mximo rpm.
(2,170 rpm)
o Palancas de control debern actuar libremente y volver a la posicin neutral cuando sean
liberadas.
o Todos los aparejos deben operar suavemente.
Nivel2
Documente la lectura del cronometro montado en la consola y verifique el funcionamiento.
(si est equipado)
Grficos de carga estn en su sitio y sean legibles.
Extintor de incendios accesible y cargado. (si est equipado)
Aire acondicionado / calentador en funcionamiento. (si est equipado)
Luces de cabina y equipos elctricos. (si est equipado)
Alarmas de seguridad para su correcto funcionamiento. (si est equipado)
Limpiaparabrisas en funcin y buena condicin. (si est equipado)
Ventana y mecanismo de pivote. (si est equipado)
Funciones de la gra para una operacin correcta:
o Pedal del freno de giro pare por completo.
o Sistema de lmite de la pluma este ajustado en posicin correcta.
o Controles montados en la consola operen como describe.
o El freno de emergencia de los aparejos debe deshabilitar todos los controles hidrulicos.
o Verifique el indicador de carga de visualizacin. (si est equipado)
o Botn de arranque del motor: mantenga pulsado hasta que el motor arranque.
o Paro de motor: pulse el botn en situaciones normales para cortar el flujo de combustible.
Nivel3
Retire la placa de inspeccin al lado del asiento y compruebe si hay fugas.
Palancas y controles de la consola que no haya fugas.
Paro de emergencia del motor: pulse para detener el motor rpidamente en caso de
emergencia al bloquear el flujo de aire al motor. (Reinicio despus de la prueba ir a la casa del
motor y reajuste la vlvula de cierre con una llave situada entre el enfriador interno y
turbocompresor.)
Nivel4
Precisin de indicador de carga.
Amortiguadores de vibracin en buena forma.
Plataformadeatrs
Nivel1
Derrames o fugas de aceite hidrulico y combustible.
Nivel de combustible.
Nivel2
Cable de acero de la pluma.
Funcin de bloqueo de la pluma boom dog(para uso en caso de mantenimiento de la pluma)
Desgaste y condicin de banda del freno.
Perno de fijacin oscilante instalado en la varilla del freno y el eje excntrico.
Nivel de aceite de caja de engranes y condicin.
Abrazaderas de las manguera.
Nivel3
Tornillos de montaje de la caja de engranes.
Tornillos de montaje del motor.
Tornillos de aparejo a la estructura de la mesa giratoria de la gra.
Deterioro de la estructura, tambores, y la estructura giratoria.
o Soldaduras bsicas en el freno de tambor.
o Dentro de la zona del freno de tambor (donde se encuentran los anclajes de cable).
o Ranuras o dientes del eje al cordn de soldadura del tambor.
o Estructura completa del aparejo.
o Plataforma del aparejo de la pluma.
Los bloques de anclaje H del cable de acero del tambor estn bien apretados.
Tornillos retenedores de freno y bloqueo de la pluma.
Rodamientos y sellos estn visibles de desgaste.
Eje excntrico y bujes estn visibles de desgaste.
El ajuste correcto del varillaje del freno y condicin.
Prueba de freno de los aparejos:
o Desconectar la lnea de presin del freno para liberar el freno.
o Opere el aparejo en la direccin hacia abajo a plena potencia para asegurar que el freno se
mantenga.
o Durante la prueba de freno, compruebe la presin mxima.
o Soldadura de estructura de la mesa giratoria entre la conexin del los pernos del mstil y los
pernos de la seccin inferior.
Nivel4
Remueva la tapa del cojinete exterior para inspeccionar los rodamientos y sellos.
Soldaduras y deterioro de la estructura.
Lecturas de medidores de nivel de combustible y aceite hidrulico precisas.(si esta equipado)
Tanque de combustible y aceite hidrulico drene en por condensacin.
Condicin de las rejas de la plataforma y revise si faltan o estn flojos los sujetadores.
Conexiones de los barandales.

Gabinetedevlvulas(Series42y60solamente)
Nivel1
Fugas de aceite en vlvulas, mangueras y filtros.
Indicadores de filtros en verde.
Nivel2
Abrazaderas de mangueras y cables elctricos.
Nivel3
No requiere de inspeccin adicional.
Nivel4
No requiere de inspeccin adicional.
Casadelmotor
Nivel1
Nivel de aceite de motor.
Todos los instrumentos y medidores del motor deben funcionar correctamente.
Nivel de aceite de la caja de engranaje de las bombas. (si est equipado)
Mangueras de succin abiertas. (si esta equipado)
Fugas de combustible, aceite o lquido refrigerante.
Fuera de servicio de anuncios.
Nivel2
Documente lectura del cronmetro y verifique la funcin. (si est equipado)
Condicin de aceite del motor.
Condicin de lubricante de la caja de engranes de las bombas. (Si es aplicable)
Condicin y el nivel de lquido refrigerante del motor.
Condicin del filtro de aire.
Filtro indicadores estn en verde.
Abrazaderas de mangueras y cables elctricos.
Aceite hidrulico es de aproximadamente seis pulgadas (6) por debajo de la parte superior
del tanque.
Funcionamiento del botn de encendido montado en el motor.
Funcionamiento del botn de paro montado en el motor.
Nivel3
Bandas del motor apretadas y buena condicin.
Botn de paro de emergencia est en operacin.
Drene secador de la lnea de aire de la acumulacin de agua. (si est equipado)
Lnea de aire lubricadora de nivel. (si est equipado)
Fugas en el sistema de escape.
Nivel4
Contaminacin en la ventilacin de la caja de engranes de las bombas. (Si es aplicable)
Deterioro y fugas en las mangueras de succin.
Paro de motor est en operacin. (en la cabina)
Motor de paro de emergencia en operacin. (en el motor)
Enfriador de aceite y radiador, limpie segn sea necesario para garantizar la correcta
circulacin del aire.
Amortiguadores de vibraciones el deterioro.
Recibidor de aire, drene el agua fugas de aire y corrosiones. (si est equipado)
Conexin de barandales.

Areadegiro
Nivel1
Fugas hidrulicas en los motores de giro y vlvula de lmite de la pluma.
Condicin de los rodamientos delanteros y retenedores.
Nivel2
Bujes de la seccin inferior y retenedores.
Condicin de todos los rodamientos delanteros.
Nivel de aceite en el tanque de reserva. (1/2 a 3/4 de lleno)
Fugas de aceite en la vlvula de lmite.
Abrazaderas de mangueras.
Nivel3
Pin de engranajes y tornillos.
Nivel4
Lubricacin de pin de engranaje e inspeccin de ranuras.
Tornillos de caja de engranajes de giro. (Limpiar tornillos y roscas, aplique Loctite 271 y
torque de 900 ft-lbs)

Aparejosprincipalyauxiliar
Nivel1
Fuga de aceite hidrulico.
Nivel2
Desgaste de cable de acero y daos.
Condicin y desgaste de banda de freno.
El ajuste correcto del varillaje del freno y condicin.
Perno de fijacin oscilante instalado en la varilla del freno y el eje excntrico.
Nivel de aceite de caja de engranes y condicin.
Abrazaderas de las manguera.
Nivel3
Tornillos de montaje de la caja de engranes.
Tornillos de aparejo a la estructura de la mesa giratoria de la gra.
Los bloques de anclaje H del cable de acero del tambor estn bien apretados.
Rodamientos y sellos estn visibles de desgaste.
Prueba de freno de los aparejos.
o Desconectar la lnea de presin del freno para liberar el freno.
o Opere el aparejo en la direccin hacia abajo a plena potencia para asegurar que el freno se
mantenga.
o Durante la prueba de freno, compruebe la presin mxima.
Nivel4
Quite la tapa del cojinete exterior para inspeccionar los rodamientos y sellos.
Tornillos retenedores de frenos del tambor.
Deterioro de la estructura, tambores y la estructura de la seccin inferior.
o Soldaduras bsicas en el freno de tambor.
o Dentro de la zona del freno de tambor (donde se encuentran los anclajes de cable).
o Ranuras o dientes del eje al cordn de soldadura del tambor.
o Estructura completa del aparejo.

Basedelaplumayseccionesintermedias
Nivel1
Una inspeccin visual para las almohadillas que no se tocan.
Faltan tornillos o tuercas.
Nivel2
No inspeccin adicional necesaria.
Nivel3
Acordes de la pluma y armadura de la pluma, malformaciones, o corrosin.
Torque de tornillos para corregir los valores sin estirar.
Nivel4
Soldaduras en conexiones de las almohadillas.(entre las secciones)
Placas verticales de la base de la pluma (placas donde se conectan los pernos del pivote).
Rieles de plstico tengan por lo menos 1/8 de material restante.
Condicin de pasarelas / estado de rejilla y los tornillos de montaje. (si est equipado)

Seccinsuperioryextensindelapluma
Nivel1
Levantamientos (eslingas, ganchos y grilletes).
Extremo de terminacin de aparejo principal condicin de hilos quebrados en el cable
.Nivel2
Todas las poleas en el rea del punto, daos obvios o rondanas partidas o dobladas.
Placas de suspensin de la pluma y placas de carga de apoyo deformacin o deterioro.
Arns y poleas del arns estn en condiciones aceptables. (si est equipado)
Lneas colgantes y terminales cnicos en deterioro. (si est equipado)
Bloque de carga:
Daos obvios en las poleas.
o Grillete faltan tornillo o la tuerca. (si est equipado)
o Grillete o gancho, por el desgaste o deformacin.
o Sellos daados.
o Ojal de gancho (perno de aguijn), o gancho, gire libremente.
o Pestillo de seguridad cierre correctamente. (si est equipado)
Linea Auxiliar
o Gancho auxiliar grietas en la garganta o deformacin.
o Daos en pestillo de seguridad del gancho y un funcionamiento correcto.
o Hilos rotos o deteriorados en el aguijn del cable.
o Libre de rotacin de la articulacin giratoria.
o Pestillo de seguridad cierre correctamente.
Nivel3
Rieles de plstico de la punta tengan por lo menos 1/8 de material restante.
Tornillos apretados a los valores correctos sin estirar.
Condicin de cable de acero de la suspensin.
Desatornille la bola y levntela para inspeccionar el extremo de terminacin, buje, plataforma
giratoria y pernos.
Daos en el marco anti-bloqueo y la libertad de movimiento.
Advertencia de iluminacin area. (normalmente con motor en marcha)
Nivel4
Estructura de la extensin de la pluma.
Soldaduras en el extremo de terminacin.
Remueva los ejes y poleas en el punto y el bloque de carga para limpiar e inspeccionar los
rodamientos.
Mstil
Nivel1
Poleas del mstil
Daos o fugas en el aire giratorio. (si est equipado)
Giratorio elctrico libertad de movimiento y daos. (si est equipado)
Extremo de terminacin del cable de acero de la pluma.
Nivel2
Plato del extremo de terminacin.
Daos en poleas, desgaste, grietas o arandelas partidas.
Todo equipo elctrico montado en el mstil funcionando correctamente.
Desgaste excesivo en el rodamiento superior.
Gra para mantenimiento est asegurada. (si est equipado)
Nivel3
Tornillos de las placas inferiores que atornillan el mstil con las placas de la estructura
superior.
Las soldaduras y estructura en deterioro.
o Placas inferiores.
o Area de rodamiento superior.
o Area de poleas.
o Angulo que une las placas inferiores.
Topes de la pluma en buenas condiciones. (si est equipado)
Nivel4
Daos en escaleras y barandales o tornillos faltantes.
Pasarelas / estado de rejilla y los tornillos de montaje.
Remueva el eje y las poleas para limpiar e inspeccionar los rodamientos.
Postecentral
Nivel4solamente
Soldadura y estructura.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-254 Rev. 1 03/29/10
BoltInstallationandInspectionProcedure
Installation
Ensure all bolts, nuts and flat washers comply with Seatrax Specifications for Large Diameter
Nuts & Bolts found in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1.
Visually check that boom section connector pads are flush (N/A on SB Series). These are
designed as heavy, non-precision joints. The components have been welded out using jigs,
which hold the fabrications in position, but due to weld draw, the bolted splice connections may
not be an exact fit. Although a majority of the pad will be touching, small gaps are common.
These gaps are NOT critical and do NOT affect the stability of the connection provided the bolts
have been torqued to the correct value.
Install all bolts with the threads down so water will not collect between the threads and nuts.
Boom bolt heads must face the boom point.
Under the Bolt head and Nut of each bolt fit a hardened flat washer that is in accordance to the
Seatrax Specification for Specifications for Large Diameter Nuts & Bolts( Ref : Seatrax Form
STDFM 253 ). Torque all bolts according to size and grade (see chart on next page).
SubsequentInspections
Visually check that boom connector pads are flush. There may be some gap due to uneven
surfaces between the two pads, but the gap should not be continuous throughout the entire pad
area. A good way to check the bottom bolts is to raise the boom slightly out of the boom cradle
before checking for gaps. Check to see if gap closes when boom is set back in the cradle.
Check the torque by applying proper torque with a torque wrench. If the nut turns, record this
condition and recheck after 12 - 24 hours of operation. If the nut turns again, change the bolt,
nut and hardened flat washer.
POINT
Square Tube Boom With

2, 4, 6 or 8 Bolt Pad
STDFM254Rev1BoltInspectionProcedure.doc Page1of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-254 Rev. 1 03/29/10
RecommendedTorque
*TEFLONCOATED
GRADE8
(BLUE)
BOLTSIZE
DRYTORQUE WETTORQUE DRYTORQUE
FTLBS FTLBS FTLBS
2 10,000 6,400 7,500
2 7,300 4,700 5,500
2 5,000 3,235 3,750
1 3,325 2,152 2,500
1 2,185 1,414 1,600
1 1,200 777 900
1
1 /8 860 557 650
1 600 388 450
7
/8 400 260 300
275 175 190
5
/8 160 100 110
80 50
3
/8 32 20

*DONOTUSELUBRICANTONTEFLONCOATEDBOLTS
All bolts 1 and larger must comply with Seatrax Specifications for Large Diameter Nuts &
Bolts. All others are Grade 8.
NOTES:
1. For wet torque, Molybdenum Disulfide Grease is the only approved lubricant. Other
lubricants require different torque values. DO NOT USE ANY LUBRICANT ON TEFLON COATED
BOLTS)
2. The torque figures listed above are lower than the maximum allowable for each respective bolt
size due to the low load requirement in this particular application.
3. Stainless steel bolts are typically used on non-structural items where specific torque is not
required, therefore they are not included in this table.
Please direct all questions concerning this procedure to:
Service Manager, Seatrax Inc.
13223 Spencer Rd. (FM 529)
Houston, Texas 77041 U.S.A.
Tel.: (713) 896-6500
Fax: (713) 896-6611
STDFM254Rev1BoltInspectionProcedure.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-254 Rev. 1. 03/29/2010
.
Instalacindetornillosyprocedimientodeinspeccin
Instalacin
Asegrese de que todos los tornillos, tuercas y rondanas planas cumplan con las especificaciones
de Seatrax, Especificaciones para Tuercas y Tornillos de Dimetro Grande encontrado en la
seccin de Inspeccin y Mantenimiento del Libro de Datos 1.
Compruebe visualmente que las almohadillas de la pluma conecten seccin con seccin al ras
(N/A para SB Series). Estos estn diseados como pesados, no son articulaciones de precisin.
Los componentes han sido soldadas a cabo usando plantillas, que sujetan al fabricarse en
posicin pero debido al soldar los empalmes atornillados puede ser no estn ajustados exactos.
Aunque la mayora de las almohadillas se tocan, pequeos huecos son comunes. Estas
diferencias NO son crticas y NO afectan a la estabilidad de la conexin siempre que los tornillos
se han apretado con el valor de torque correcto.
Instale todos los tornillos con los hilos hacia abajo para que el agua no se colecte entre las roscas
y tuercas. Las cabezas de los tornillos deben de estar frente al punto de la pluma.
Bajo la cabeza del tornillo y la tuerca de cada tornillo instale una rondana plana endurecida que
es conforme a la especificacin Seatrax "Especificaciones para Tuercas y Tornillos de Dimetro
Grande" (Ref: Seatrax STDFM Formulario 253). Apriete todos los tornillos de acuerdo al
tamao y grado (ver tabla en la pgina siguiente).
POINT
TuboCuadradodelaPlumacon2,4,6o8TornillosenlaAlmohadilla
Inspeccionesposteriores
Compruebe visualmente que las almohadillas de la pluma del conector queden al ras. Puede
haber alguna diferencia debido a las superficies irregulares entre las dos pastillas, pero la
diferencia no debe ser continua en toda el rea del colchn. Una buena manera de comprobar los
tornillos inferiores es elevar la pluma ligeramente fuera de la cuna antes de buscar huecos.
Regrese la pluma a la cuna y revise si los huecos se cerraron cuando la pluma est sentada
nuevamente en la cuna.
Compruebe el grado de torsin mediante la aplicacin adecuada con una llave de torque. Si la
STDFM254Rev1BoltInspectionProcedure_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
tuerca gira, marque y vuelva a comprobar esta condicin despus de 12 - 24 horas de operacin
de la gra. Si la tuerca vuelve a girar, cambie el tornillo, tuerca y rondana plana endurecida
Torquerecomendado
*
*RECUBRIMIENTO
GRADO8
DETEFLON(AZUL)
MEDIDADE
TORNILLO TORQUEEN TORQUEEN
TORQUEENSECO
SECO MOJADO
FTLBS
FTLBS FTLBS
2 10,000 6,400 7,500
2 7,300 4,700 5,500
2 5,000 3,235 3,750
1 3,325 2,152 2,500
1 2,185 1,414 1,600
1 1,200 777 900
1
1 /8 860 557 650
1 600 388 450
7
/8 400 260 300
275 175 190
5
/8 160 100 110
80 50
3
/8 32 20
NOUSELUBRICANTEENTORNILLOSCONRECUBRIMIENTODETEFLON
Todos los tornillos de 1y mayores deben cumplir con las especificaciones de Seatrax"
Especificaciones para Tuercas y Tornillos de Dimetro Grande. Todos los dems son de grado 8.
NOTAS:
1. Para torque mojado, grasa de disulfuro de molibdeno es el nico lubricante aprobado. Otros
lubricantes requieren diferentes valores de torque. NO use ningn lubricante en los tornillos con
recubrimiento de tefln.
2. Las cifras de torque mencionadas anteriormente son menores que el mximo permitido para cada
tamao de tornillo respectivo debido a los requisitos de carga bajo en esta aplicacin particular.
3. Para tornillos de acero inoxidable tpicamente no son usados en componentes de estructura y no
requiere de especificacin de torque por lo tanto no estn incluidos en la tabla.
Por favor, dirija todas las cuestiones relativas a este procedimiento a:
Departamento de Servicio, Seatrax Inc.
13223 Spencer Rd. (FM 529)
Houston, Texas 77041 U.S.A.
Tel.: (713) 896-6500
Fax: (713) 896-6611
STDFM254Rev1BoltInspectionProcedure_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-253 Rev. 4 11/10/10
SpecificationsforLargeDiameterNutsandBolts
ForHoistMounting,GantryConnections&BoomConnections
All nuts and bolts one inch (1) diameter and larger must be ordered as follows:
Bolt
ASTM A 354 (current issue) Grade BD Hex Head Bolts
Dimensions to be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B18.2.1
Specification for Surface Discontinuities of Bolts ASTM F788/F 788M-08.
Threads to be Unified National Coarse per ANSI B1.1
Finish to be Fluorokote #1, blue.
Grade Marking to be six (6) radial lines on the head per ASTM A 354 Section 15
Certification per ASTM A 354, Section 14 is required. (Includes Mill Certs)
Nuts
ASTM A 194 (current issue) Grade 2H Heavy Hex Nuts
Specification for Surface Discontinuities of Nuts ASTM F812/F812M-07
Dimensions to be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B18.2.2 for Heavy Hex Series
Grade Marking to be 2H per ASTM A 194 Section 11
Certification per ASTM A 194, Section 13 is required. (Includes Mill Certs)
Washers
ASTM F 436 Hardened Flat Washers (1 ea. under each nut)(1 ea. under each bolt head)
Acceptable alternative for bolts with 1 to 1 diameters is as follows:
Bolts
SAE J429 (current issue) Grade 8 Hex Head Bolts
Dimensions to be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B18.2.1
Grade Marking to be six (6) radial lines on the head per ASTM A 354 Section 15
Mill Certs are required
NutsandWashers
No Acceptable alternative
NOTE 1: QC Inspection required on Bolts 1 and above to ASTM F788/F 788M-08.
NOTE 2: QC Inspection required on Nuts as 1 and above to ASTM F812/F812M-07
NOTE 3: Not Accepted Suppliers: Mainland China, India, Russia, Cardinal Brand Fasteners.
Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-253 Rev. 4 11/10/10
Especificacionesparatuercasytornillosdedimetrogrande
Paramontajedeaparejos,unionesdeprticoyconexionesdelapluma
Todas las tuercas y tornillos de una pulgada (1) de dimetro y medidas ms grandes deben ser
ordenados de la siguiente manera:
Tornillos
ASTM A 354 (edicin actual) Grado BD Tornillo de Cabeza Hexagonales
Dimensiones estando en conformidad con ANSI/ASME B18.2.1
Especificaciones para Discontinuidades en la superficie de los Tornillos ASTM F788/F 788M-08.
Hilos de acuerdo a Unified National Coarse (UNC) por ANSI B1.1
Acabado debe ser Fluorokote #1, azul.
Grado Marcado con seis (6) lneas radiales en la cabeza por ASTM A 354 Seccin 15
Certificacin por ASTM A 354, Seccin 14 es requerido (Incluye Mill Certs)
Tuercas
ASTM A 194 (edicin actual) Grado 2H Tuercas Hexagonales Pesadas
Especificaciones para Discontinuidades en la superficie de las tuercas ASTM F812/F812M-07
Dimensiones estando en conformidad con ANSI/ASME B18.2.2 para Series Hexagonales Pesadas
Acabado debe ser Fluorokote #1, azul
Grado Marcado con 2H por ASTM A 194 Seccin 11
Certificacin por ASTM A 194, Seccin 13 es requerido (Incluye Mill Certs)
Rondanas
ASTM F 436 Rondana Plana Endurecida (1 debajo de cada tuerca)(1 debajo de cada cabeza de
tornillo)
Alternativa aceptable para tornillos con 1 a 1 de dimetro son las siguientes:
Tornillos
SAE J429 (edicin actual) Grado 8 Tornillo de Cabeza Hexagonales
Dimensiones estando en conformidad con ANSI/ASME B18.2.1
Grado Marcado con seis (6) lneas radiales en la cabeza por ASTM A 354 Seccin 15
Mill Certs son requeridas
Tuercasyrondanas
Alternativas no aceptables
NOTA 1: Inspeccin de control de calidad requiere en Tornillos de 1 para arriba por ASTM F788/F
788M-08.
NOTA 2: Inspeccin de control de calidad requiere en Tuercas de 1 para arriba por ASTM
F812/F812M-07
NOTA 3: Proveedores No Aceptados: Mainland China, India, Rusia, Marca de sujetadores Cardinal
STDFM253Rev4SpecforLargeDiaNut&Bolts_spamx.doc Pgina1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
4April2001
LoadBlockandOverhaulBallInspection
General
Never use a hook whose throat opening has increased, or whose tip has bent to the point
that the locking pin cannot be inserted through the locking latch and hook body. Inspect
the shackle eyelet in the hook for deformation or damage. If it is significantly deformed,
the hook should be taken out of service. Latches will not work properly on hooks with
bent or worn tips.
Always visually inspect any shackle before using and verify it is the correct rating (tons)
for that load, and that it is not visibly deformed or missing the nut or cotter pin. Inspect the
bolt of the shackle to insure it is not bent or damaged.
Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by welding, heating, burning, or bending.
Non-conforming hooks should be replaced.
LoadBlockInspection
Visibly verify that the load block sheave(s) have been properly greased, are in good
condition and rotate freely. There should be no visible cracks in the load block weldment.
The load block bearing should be properly greased and rotate freely.
During the annual inspection, the shaft and sheaves must be removed, cleaned and
thoroughly inspected.
OverhaulBallInspection
Visually inspect the stinger line (from overhaul ball to hook) checking for broken wires,
damaged hook or loose/missing bolts/pins.
During the quarterly inspection, remove the bolts at the bottom of the overhaul ball and
slide it up. Inspect the bushing (at the top of the block), swivel, pins, wedge socket and
wire rope.
See the Rigging section of Data Book 1 for proper methods of inspecting wire rope (stinger
cable).
LoadBlockandOverhaulBall.doc Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04deabrildel2001
Inspeccindelbloquedecargayboladecarga
Generales
Nunca use un gancho cuya abertura se ha incrementado, o cuya punta se ha doblado hasta el
punto de que el pasador de bloqueo no se puede insertar a travs del pestillo de bloqueo y el
cuerpo de gancho. Inspeccione el ojo del grillete en el gancho por la deformacin o daos. Si
se deforma significativamente, el gancho debe ser puesto fuera de servicio. El pestillo de
bloqueo no cerrara correctamente en los ganchos con puntas dobladas o desgastadas.
Siempre inspeccione visualmente cualquier grillete antes de usar y verificar que es la
clasificacin correcta (toneladas) para esa carga, y que no est visiblemente deformado o
falten tuercas o pasadores de chaveta. Inspeccione el perno del grillete para asegurarse de que
no est doblado o daado.
No trate de reparar, alterar, hacer de nuevo o reforme un gancho por medio de soldadura,
calentamiento, quemando o doblando. Ganchos disconformes deben ser reemplazados.
Inspeccindelbloquedecarga
Visiblemente verificar que las poleas del bloque de carga han sido debidamente engrasadas,
se encuentran en buenas condiciones y giren libremente. No debe haber grietas en la
soldadura del bloque de carga. El cojinete del bloque de carga debe estar bien engrasado y
girar libremente.
Durante la inspeccin anual, el eje y las poleas deben ser removidas, para limpiarlas e
inspeccionarlas a fondo.
Inspeccindelaboladecarga
Inspeccione visualmente la lnea de aguijn de la bola hasta el gancho) la comprobacin de
los cables rotos, daados o pernos de gancho suelto / faltante / pins.
Durante la inspeccin trimestral, quite los tornillos de la parte inferior de la bola de carga y
deslcela hacia arriba. Inspeccionar el casquillo (en la parte superior de la bola), plataforma
giratoria, pins, terminal de cua y el cable.
Vea la seccin Aparejo de libro de datos 1 para los mtodos apropiados de inspeccin de
cable de acero. (cable de aguijn)
LoadBlockandOverhaulBall_spamx.doc Pgina1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
1August1999
WedgeSockets
SecuringRopeDeadEndinaWedgeSocket
Wedge socket will be installed with the live load side of the wire rope in line with the wedge socket
pin. One wire rope clamp is to be used in conjunction with the wedge socket (on the Terminator
style).
This style wedge socket is assembled by attaching a clamp through the wedge, and securing to the dead
end of the line.
Wherever a cable clamp is used, it MUST be torqued to the manufacturers specifications.
WedgeSockets.doc Page1of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
OtherAllowableMethodsForSecuringDeadEnds
(PerAPIRP2D)
Usewiretoloosely
attachrope
Minimum 7 times
rope diameter
Maximum3times
ropediameter
CableClips
CrosbyG450
Rope Seatrax ClipTorque
Diameter PartNo. (Ft.Lbs)
5
/8 95
3
/4 10005 130
7
/8 10006 225
1 10007 225
11/8 10019 225
1
1 /4 10025 360
3
1 /8 10049 360
NOTE:Torquevaluesshownarebaseduponthe
threadsbeingclean,dryandfreeoflubricant.
WedgeSockets.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
01deagostodel1999
Terminacindecua
Asegurarcuadecableenunterminalconcua
La terminacin de cua se instalar en el lado de la carga viva del cable de alambre de acuerdo con el
pin del terminal de la cua. Una abrazadera de cable de alambre se va a utilizar conjuntamente con el
terminal de cua. (en la terminacin del cable muerto)
Este estilo de terminal de cua se monta uniendo una abrazadera a travs de la cua, asegurando la
terminacin de cable muerto en la lnea.
Dondequiera que una abrazadera de cable se utilice, se deben apretar segn las especificaciones del
fabricante.
CARGA
TERMINACINDE
CABLEMUERTO
LADODECARGAVIVA
7VECESELDIAMETRO
DELCABLE(MIN.)
CUA
ABRAZADERA
WedgeSockets_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Mtodospermitidosparalaseguridaddeterminacindelcablemuerto
(PorAPIRP2D)
Useelalambrepara
sujetarlacuerda
Mnimo7vecesel
dimetrodelcable
Mximo3vecesel
dimetrodelcable
Abrazaderasdecable
CrosbyG450
Torquede
Dimetrode Seatrax
Abrazadera(Ft.
Cable No.deParte
Lbs)
5
/8 95
3
/4 10005 130
7
/8 10006 225
1 10007 225
1
1 /8 10019 225
1
1 /4 10025 360
13/8 10049 360
NOTA:Eltorqueestabasadoestandolasroscas
limpias,secasylibredelubricante.
WedgeSockets_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
20August2010
HydraulicBoomHoistLimitSystem
JoystickControlledCranes
General
Seatrax cranes equipped with joystick controls use a mechanically-actuated hydraulic boom
hoist limit system also known as a boom kickout system - to limit the maximum and
minimum angles (minimum and maximum radii, respectively) of boom movement.
The boom limit system consists of a boom kickout weldment which rotates about the boom
pivot point, with an extension lever that attaches to the boom so it moves up and down in
tandem with the boom. Mounted on the circular section of the kick-out are two cam plates,
each with a ramped surface. Each plunger slide actuates a piston, which in turn operates a
cartridge-mounted hydraulic control valve. These valves are mounted inside the valve body,
which is bolted to the upperworks at the boom pivot point.
THISSYSTEMISASAFETYFEATUREAND
SHOULDNEVERBEDISCONNECTED.
Operation
When the left hand joystick is pulled back, hydraulic oil from the control circuit is sent to the up
side of the boom control valve, passing through the boom kick-out. As the boom is raised, the
arm of the kick-out also raises until the MAX UP plunger slide contacts its piston. This
actuates the cartridge valve and dumps pilot pressure from the joystick to the tank, therefore the
control valve no longer receives the signal to boom up. As the boom is lowered, the arm of the
kick-out moves down until the MIN DOWN plunger slide contacts its piston, again causing oil
pressure to dump back to the tank.
Adjustment
The illustration on the following page points out primary components of the boom kickout valve
assembly after its cover has been removed. Refer to the General Bill of Materials and
Component Data section of Data Book 1 for a drawing of the specific model boom kick-out
system installed in the crane being serviced.
MIN and MAX limits settings each have a plunger slide plate with two curved slots. These slots
allow the plate to move back and forth along a fixed radius, corresponding to a range of
different boom positions.
CAUTION
OncranesequippedwiththeCCM7000cranecontrolmanagementsystem,hoistlimitswhich
aresetinthetouchscreenMUSTbedisabledpriortoadjustingthehydraulicboomkickouts.
Failuretodothiscanresultinimproperadjustmentofthehydraulicboomkickouts.Formore
informationrefertoCCM7000OperationsandMaintenance.
HydBoomLimitAdjust_R04.doc Page1of2
KickoutArm
MIN DOWN Cam

MAXUPCam
Maximum Angle: The MAX plunger slide should typically be adjusted to provide a
minimum of 12" of clearance between the boom and the boom stops when the valve kicks out at
maximum angle. If the distance is not correct, loosen the two 1/4 bolts attaching the plunger
slide, and move it in the proper direction to increase or decrease the maximum allowable angle.
NOTE: For cranes equipped with counter-luffing boom stops, this adjustment should be limited
to six to eight inches of full compression on the boom stop cylinders.
The boom hoist kick-out should be tested several times while raising the boom - first low speed
and then full speed - to ensure that the boom does not contact the boom stops with excessive
force.
Minimum Angle: The next step is to adjust the low angle limit on the kick-out system. The
MIN plunger slide should be adjusted so that the valve kicks out when the boom is horizontal,
12 below the boom cradle. Adjust the plunger slide as necessary, and re-tighten the bolts.
TheKickOutMayRequirePeriodicReadjustmentThroughouttheLife
oftheCrane
HydBoomLimitAdjust_R04.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
20deagostode2010
Sistemadelimitedelmalacatedelapluma
Palancadecontroldelagra
Generales
Las gras de Seatrax estn equipadas con una palanca de control que permite mecnicamente
accionar un sistema de lmite hidrulico de la pluma, se le conoce como -kickout- este sistema
limita el ngulo mnimo y el ngulo mximo de la pluma. (Radio mnimo y mximo
respectivamente).
El sistema de limite de la pluma consiste en una vlvula hidrulica ensamblada a un mecanismo
de rotacin, la cual gira alrededor del perno del pivote con una extensin de brazo que se
engancha en la seccin inferior de la pluma con un tornillo de rosca seguida 1- 8 de 12 de
largo, el cual al momento del levantamiento descenso se mueve hacia arriba hacia abajo al
mismo tiempo de la pluma. Montado a una pieza circular del ensamblaje -kickout- se
encuentran dos levas cada una con una superficie en forma de rampa. El mecanismo consiste
que las levas se deslizan cuando se lleva a cabo un levantamiento descenso de la pluma, y
presionan los mbolos para despus accionar el pistn del cartucho de la vlvula de control
hidrulico. Estos cartuchos estn montados el la vlvula hidrulica que se encuentra atornillada
con una base al lado del perno del pivote (lado opuesto de la cabina).
ESTEESUNSISTEMADELIMITEDESEGURIDADYNUNCADEBEESTAR
DESCONECTADO
Operacin
Cuando la palanca de control de la izquierda se estire hacia atrs la presin de control del
circuito ser enviada hacia arriba (up), en la vlvula direccional de la pluma la cual despus
pasara por la vlvula de limite (kickout). Cuando la pluma se este levantando el brazo de limite
rotar en direccin con la pluma hasta que la leva alcanc el limite mximo hacia arriba y
presione el mbolo (up). Este accionara el pistn de limite de la vlvula y la presin de control
del circuito ser enviada hacia el tanque (retorno) esto ocasionara que la vlvula direccional de
la pluma no reciba mas seal de presin y pare por completo (up). Cuando la pluma este en
descenso el brazo de limite rotar en direccin con la pluma hasta que la leva alcance el limite
mnimo hacia abajo y presione el mbolo (dn). Este accionara el pistn de limite de la vlvula y
la presin de control del circuito ser enviada hacia el tanque (retorno) esto ocasionara que la
vlvula direccional no reciba mas seal de presin y pare por completo (dn).
Ajuste
En la figura de la pgina siguiente se pueden ver los componentes primarios de la vlvula de
lmite de la pluma (kickout), despus que se remueva la cubierta tapa. Consulte la lista general
de material y componente de datos, en la seccin de libro de datos 1. Consulte y refirase a el
dibujo del modelo especifico de limite de la vlvula de la pluma (kickout) sistema instalado
HydBoomLimitAdjust_R04_spamx.doc Pgina1of3
para el servicio de la gra (para ajustar y mantenimiento). Para realizar el ajuste del lmite
mnimo y lmite mximo cada uno tiene una leva con una ranura en forma de curva. Estas
ranuras permiten que la leva se mueva hacia enfrente y hacia atrs y ajustar el radio de la pluma
en posiciones diferentes que correspondan.
CUIDADO
EngrasequipadasconCCM7000(sistemadecontrolyadministracindelagra)loslmites
demalacatedelaplumaseencuentransentadosenlapantalladecontacto,elcualdebeestar
deshabilitadoantesdeajustarloslmitesdelapluma(kickout).Sisecometeunafallaesto
puederesultarunajustenoapropiadodelavlvuladelmitehidrulico.Paramasinformacin
consulteoperacinymantenimientodelCCM7000.
Brazo
Leva (abajodn) Min

Leva(arribaup)Max
Angulo mximo: El mbolo y leva del mximo tpicamente se ajusta para proveer una distancia
minima de 12 pulgadas de claro, entre la seccin de la pluma y los topes de la pluma cuando la
vlvula de limite alcance el ngulo mximo. Si la distancia no es correcta, afloje los tornillos de
1/4 que atornillan la leva de desplazamiento y muvala en direccin correcta para incrementar
disminuir al mximo el ngulo permitido.
NOTA: Para gras equipadas con topes de cilindros hidrulicos, este ajuste debe realizarse a un
limite de 6 a 8 pulgadas de compresin, despus que haga contacto la pluma con los topes de los
cilindros hidrulicos.
El limite de la pluma (kickout) debe de probarse varias veces levantando la pluma. Asegrese
que la seccin intermedia no haga contacto de fuerza excesiva en los topes de la pluma.
Angulo mnimo: El prximo paso para ajustar, es el lmite de ngulo hacia abajo. El mbolo y
leva del mnimo tambin se ajustan, a una distancia de 12 pulgadas antes del descanso cuna de
la pluma cuando este en posicin horizontal. Ajuste las levas de deslizamiento lo que sea
necesario y asegrese que los tornillos de 1/4 estn bien apretados.
Lavlvuladelimitepuederequerirdereajustesperidicosalolargo
delavidadelagra
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
09March2009
HydraulicSystemAdjustments
HighPressureCraneswithOpenLoopSlew
PressureReliefValves
Pressure relief valves are installed in a circuit to make certain that system pressure does not
exceed safe pre-set limits. Relief valves are intended to relieve occasional excess pressures
arising during the course of normal operation. Excess fluid is allowed to return to the
reservoir through an outlet port in the valve while full, adjusted pressure is maintained in the
system.
Check pressure by observing the gauge located on the operator's console or CCM7000
screen (if equipped).
NOTE: All hydraulic system adjustments should be performed only when the engine and
hydraulic system are at normal operating temperature. If the crane is cold and has not been
run, start the engine and run the crane to allow the hydraulic oil to warm to near normal
operating temperature.
Main/AuxiliaryandBoomHoists
Refer to the control valve and pump drawings in the Component Data section of Data Book 1.
1. Locate the pump and corresponding control valve and brake actuator.
2. On the brake actuator, disconnect and plug the line running from the brake release
valve to the brake release actuator (brake line closest to hoist frame).
3. Look at the pump from the back. Find the regulator assembly (this is located 90
clockwise from the suction pipe). There are two adjustment screws on the backside
(there may be a cone shaped cover over them that must be removed. Only adjust the
one furthest clockwise. Loosen the jam nut and turn this screw all the way in. DO
NOT ADJUST THE OTHER SCREW.
4. On the control valve, locate the pressure relief valve (this may be covered by a
disposable orange cap). Loosen the jam nut and back out the screw one full turn.
5. Start the engine and let it run for five minutes.
6. Have the operator drive the corresponding hoist in the full down position at full
throttle. This should be held during the complete adjustment process. (Since the
brake release line has been disconnected the hoist should not move.)
7. Read the pressure on the corresponding pressure gauge in the cab. It should be about
2,000 psi.
8. On the control valve, slowly turn the screw in until the pressure reaches 6,000 psi.
Lock the jam nut at this pressure.
HydraulicAdjustHP_OLS_R2.4.doc Page1of3
9. Return to the pump and back out on the adjustment screw until the pressure drops to
5,800. Lock down the jam nut.
10. Reconnect the brake release line. Pressure adjustment on the pump and valve is now
complete. For Safety, DO NOT SET OPERATING PRESSURES ABOVE 5,800
PSI.
NOTE: Since the main and auxiliary hoists share the same pump, control valve and relief
valve, all auxiliary hoist relief valve adjustments are completed using the main hoist, as
detailed above.
SwingSystemReliefValve
NOTE: All adjustments are done at full throttle with the slew joystick full right or left.
1. Start engine and let run for five
minutes.
2. Engage swing lock on console. Swing
motor must not turn during adjustment.
3. Move control lever to the right and
slowly increase engine speed to
maximum RPM.
4. Read pressure relief valve setting on
Swing System Pressure gauge in
console. Pressure should read 2500psi.
(2,000psi on single slew applications)
Repeat step (3) but to the left.
5. If pressure is not correct, locate the
crossover relief valve bolted atop the
swing motor. Remove the plugs in the
end of the relief valve cartridges (fluid
will slowly leak out; this is normal).
6. Insert an Allen wrench into the end of
the cartridge and screw the plunger
into the cartridge (clockwise) until it
bottoms out. Do this for all cartridges.
Now the crossover relief valves are
closed.
7. Slowly move the left-hand joystick fully to the left or right while increasing engine
speed to maximum. The Slew Pressure should read 2,800 psi 50 (2,200 psi on single
slew applications). If the pressure is correct, move to step 11. If pressure needs
adjustment, continue to step 8.
8. Locate the slew control valve (usually on the floor of either valve cabinet or engine
house).
9. Remove the acorn nut and brass washer (if equipped). Loosen the jam nut and slowly
turn the set screw into valve (clockwise) to increase pressure, or unscrew (counter
clockwise) to reduce pressure.
10. Once 2,800 (2,200) psi has been achieved, lock the jam nut and replace the brass washer
and acorn nut (if removed). NOTE: On worn pumps 2,800 psi may not be
achievable. In this case, turn the setscrew in a few turns. Next, watch the pressure as
the screw is backed out. Once the pressure starts to fall, stop and set the jam nut.
11. Return to the slew area and locate the front cartridge in each counterbalance valve.
12. Start with motor at the end of the pressure hoses. With the joystick in the full right
position and the throttle fully depressed, slowly unscrew the plunger in the front
cartridge until the pressure drops to 2,500 (2,000) psi. (For some cranes, full left of the
joystick corresponds to the front cartridges.) For single slew motor units, move to step
14, for multiple slew motor units, continue to step 13.
13. Move to the next motor and front cartridge. Unscrew the plunger until the pressure just
drops below 2,500 psi then screw it back in slightly. Repeat this step for any remaining
front cartridges.
14. Move the joystick to the full left position and repeat steps 12 and 13 for the rear
cartridges.
15. Replace all plugs into cartridge ends.
ControlSystemReliefValve
1. Start the engine and let it idle for five minutes.
2. Allow the engine to warm up and the engine to idle (about 950 RPM). Read the
Control System pressure gauge while the engine is idling. The gauge should read
approximately 600 psi 50 psi with the crane at normal operating temperature.
3. If the pressure is not correct, find the control system pressure relief valve. Loosen the
rear knurled jam nut and screw the front knob into valve (clockwise) to raise pressure,
or unscrew (counter-clockwise) to lower pressure until gauge reads 600 psi. If the
pressure does not increase, the control system filter may require replacement if
installed in the line before the relief valve. (Refer to the hydraulic schematic under the
General Documentation section of Data Book 1.)
4. Raise engine to maximum RPM and check the pressure gauge: it should read no
higher than about 700 psi. If the pressure is substantially higher, this may indicate a
problem with the relief valve. Long term usage in this condition can artificially
shorten the life of seals in the control system. Contact the Seatrax service department
for assistance in resolving this problem.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
09deMarzode2009
Ajustesdelsistemahidrulico
Grasdealtapresinconcircuitoabiertodelsistemadegiro
Vlvulasdealiviodepresin
Las vlvulas de alivio de presin son elementos instalados en los circuitos para mantener una
presin segura y constante en el sistema y nunca exceda los lmites de seguridad de presin que
se le establece a un circuito, en las cuales en ocasiones puede ocurrir un exceso de presin
durante el curso normal de operacin de la gra. El exceso de fluido esta permitido escapar
hacia el tanque por el puerto de salida de la vlvula mientras se mantiene la presin ajustada del
sistema.
Revise la presin que se requiera observando el medidor de presin localizado en la consola del
operador CCM7000 (si est equipado).
NOTA: Todos los ajustes de presin del sistema hidrulico, deben realizarse cuando el motor y
el sistema hidrulico se encuentren a una temperatura normal de operacin.
Principal/auxiliarypluma
Consulte los dibujos de la bomba y vlvula de control en el Libro de Componentes en la seccin de
Libro de Datos 1.
1. Localice la bomba, vlvula de control y el cilindro del freno.
2. En el cilindro del freno, desconecte e instale un tapn en la lnea que conecta la vlvula que
libera el freno y el cilindro del freno (lnea cerca hacia el malacate).
3. Mire la bomba por la parte de atrs. Busque el ajustador de ensamblaje (este se encuentra
localizado a 90 grados de la manguera de succin en direccin de las manecillas del reloj).
Encontrara dos tornillos ajustadores en la parte de atrs (posiblemente tengan tapones en
forma de cono remuvalos). Solamente ajuste el que se encuentra ms lejos hacia la derecha
con las manecillas del reloj). Afloje la contratuerca y ajuste el tornillo todo hasta adentro.
NO AJUSTE EL OTRO TORNILLO.
4. En la vlvula de control, localice la vlvula de alivio (posiblemente este cubierta con una
tapa de color naranja desechable). Afloje la contratuerca y afloje el tornillo una vuelta hacia
afuera.
5. Arranque el motor y djelo correr por cinco minutos.
6. El operador deber operar el malacate correspondiente, moviendo la palanca de control
toda hacia abajo y con el pedal del acelerador hasta el fondo. Esta operacin deber
mantenerse hasta que se complete el proceso de ajuste de presin. (Mientras que la lnea
hidrulica no sea desconectada el tambor del malacate no debe de dar vuelta).
7. Lea la presin correspondiente en el medidor de presin en la cabina. Esta deber de leer
alrededor de 2.000 psi.
HydraulicAdjustHP_OLS_R2.4_spamx.doc Pgina1of3
8. En la vlvula de control, apriete el tornillo despacio hacia adentro hasta que alcance una
presin de 6.000 PSI.
9. Regrese a la bomba correspondiente y regrese hacia afuera el tornillo de ajuste hasta que la
presin descienda a 5.800 PSI.
10. Reconecte la lnea para liberar el freno. El proceso de ajuste de presin en la bomba y la
vlvula de control hasta este punto ha sido terminado. Por Seguridad, NO SOBREPASE
LA PRESION DE OPERACION DE 5.800 PSI.
NOTA: El malacate principal y el malacate auxiliar comparten el mismo circuito, bomba,
vlvula de control y vlvula de alivio, por lo tanto todas las presiones ajustadas con el
malacate principal pueden ser usadas en el malacate auxiliar como se detall arriba.
Vlvuladealiviodelsistemadegiro
NOTA: Todos los ajustes deben de realizarse con el pedal del acelerador hasta el fondo con la
palanca de control toda hacia la izquierda
derecha. TAPON
CARTUCHO
1. Arranque el motor y djelo correr por cinco
ENSAMBLAJEDE
minutos.
LAVALVULADE
2. Enganche el bloqueo de giro en la consola. ALIVIODECRUCE
Los motores de giro no deben de girar durante
el ajuste de presin.
3. Mueva la palanca de control hacia la derecha y
despacio incremente la velocidad mxima del
motor (RPM).
4. Lea la presin de la vlvula de alivio en el
sistema de giro en el medidor de presin en la
consola CCM7000. La presin deber leer
2.500 PSI (en aplicaciones de un 1 motor de
giro deber leer 2.000 PSI). Realize El Paso
(3) pero para la izquierda.
5. Si la presin no es correcta localice la vlvula
de alivio de cruce que se encuentra atornillada
en la parte de arriba del motor de giro.
Remueve el tapn (boss) que se localiza al MOTORDEGIRO
final de la vlvula de alivio del cartucho,
(saldr un poco de aceite pero es normal).
6. Inserte una llave exagonal (Allen) hasta el fondo del cartucho y apriete el mbolo del
cartucho todo hacia adentro (con las manecillas del reloj). Realice lo mismo con todos los
cartuchos. Entonces ahora todas las vlvulas de alivio de cruce estn cerradas.
7. Despacio mueva la palanca de control del lado izquierdo hacia la izquierda y derecha mientras
incrementa la velocidad mxima del motor a lo mximo (RPM).La presin de giro deber leer
2.800 PSI 50 (en aplicaciones de 1 motor de giro deber leer 2.200 PSI). Si la presin es
correcta contine al paso 11. Si la presin necesita ajustarse contine al paso 8.
8. Localice la vlvula de control (usualmente en la cabina de vlvulas, en el piso en la casa del
motor).
9. Remueva la tuerca y la rondana de bronce (si esta equipada). Afloje la contratuerca y despacio
apriete el tornillo de la vlvula (con las manecillas del reloj) para incrementar la presin
afloje el tornillo de la vlvula (encontra de las manecillas del reloj) para reducir la presin.
10. Una vez logrado el ajuste de 2.800 PSI, apriete la contratuerca e instale la rondana de bronce
y la tuerca (si fueron removidas). NOTA: En bombas desgastadas es posible que no se
alcance una presin de 2.800. En dado caso, apriete el ajustador varias vueltas hacia adentro.
Despus mire la presin y afloje el tornillo del ajustador y cuando la presin empiece a
decender pare y apriete la contratuerca.
11. Regrese al rea de los motores de giro y localice el cartucho enfrente de cada una de las
vlvulas de alivio de cruce.
12. Empiece con el motor donde terminan las mangueras de presin. Con la palanca de control
toda en posicin hacia la derecha y el pedal del acelerador hasta el fondo, lentamente afloje el
mbolo del cartucho hasta que la presin descienda a 2.500 (2.000) PSI. (Para algunas gras,
la palanca de control toda hacia la izquierda corresponde a el cartucho de enfrente). Para las
gras de un solo motor muvase al paso 14, para gras con mltiples motores, contine al
paso 13.
13. Muvase al prximo motor en el cartucho de enfrente. Afloje el mbolo del cartucho hasta
que la presin descienda por debajo de 2.500 PSI, entonces apriete ligeramente hasta que
nuevamente alcance una presin de 2.500 PSI. Repita este paso para todos los cartuchos
restantes.
14. Mueva la palanca de control toda en posicin hacia la izquierda y repita los pasos 12 y 13
para los cartuchos de la parte de atrs.
15. Reinstale todos los tapones en los cartuchos.
Vlvuladealiviodelsistemadecontrol
1. Arranque el motor y djelo correr por cinco minutos.
2. Permita que el motor alcance una temperatura normal de operacin a una velocidad minima
(950 RPM). Lea el medidor de presin del sistema de control mientras el motor este a la
velocidad minima (950 RPM). El medidor de presin deber leer aproximadamente 600 PSI
50 PSI cuando la gra este a una temperatura normal de operacin.
3. Si la presin no es correcta, localice la vlvula de alivio del sistema de control. Afloje la
contratuerca y apriete el tornillo (con las manecillas del reloj) este tiene una tuerca fija,
grela hacia adentro de la vlvula para incrementar la presin afloje el tornillo (encontra
de las manecillas del reloj) para disminuir la presin hasta que el medidor lea 600 PSI. Si la
presin no incrementa, posiblemente el filtro del sistema de control tendr que ser
reemplazado si este fue instalado en la lnea antes de la vlvula de alivio. (Refirase al
esquema hidrulico en la Documentacin General del libro de datos 1)
4. Acelere el motor al mximo (RPM) y revise la presin en el medidor: esta presin no deber
estar ms de 700 PSI. Si la presin es considerada alta, esto posiblemente indica un
problema en la vlvula de alivio. El uso de un trmino largo en estas condiciones puede
daar los sellos del sistema de control. Para asistencia contctese al departamento de
servicio de Seatrax.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
23April2013
HoistDrumBrakeMaintenance
Inspection,Adjustment,TestingandReplacement
General
The main, auxiliary and boom hoists on Seatrax marine cranes are equipped with drum type brakes
utilizing external brake bands. The brake band is tightened around a drum via by the force of a brake
actuator acting on a linkage. The exact arrangement differs based on crane model and customer
configuration, however the principles of inspecting, adjusting, testing and replacing the brakes are the
same.
When a hoist is not being operated, its brake actuator holds tension on the brake band by use of an
internal spring(s) extending a piston rod. This is attached to a brake push rod connected to a brake
lever, which tightens the brake band to set the brake.
When a hoist is operated, hydraulic pressure to the brake actuator forces an internal piston to retract the
piston rod compressing the spring(s) acting on the brake push rod and brake lever to release the
brake.
HoistDrumBrakeMaint_R01.doc Page1of4
Inspection
The brake band and associated components should be periodically inspected for wear or deformation:
Brake band: Should have a jam nut and lock washer on the inside - toward the band - with a flat
washer and adjusting nut on the outside.
Brake band lining: Sufficient thickness, i.e., the rivets are not wearing into the drum.
Band weldment: Check for cracks or deformation
Nuts: Tight and properly torqued
Brake band bushing (eccentric pin rotates within it): Check for wear this is the most commonly
worn part.
Eccentric pin:
o Check for wear damage can occur once the brake band bushing wears through.
o Orientation: the pin MUST be at the point nearest the drum while the brake is engaged. Having
the eccentric pin in the wrong position will cause the brake to apply improperly and/or result in
excessive wear and eventual failure.
Brake arm: The brake lever arm must be near vertical while the brake is engaged: a 90 angle (
5) to the brake pushrod.
Brake actuator and associated hoses: Check for leaks
Shoulder bolts and cotter pins: Check condition and tightness.
Brake: Holds when tested.
Testing
To test that a brake will hold when applied:
1. Disconnect brake actuator pressure to release line.
2. Run hoist in the down direction at full power to ensure brake holds.
3. If brake squeals or does not hold, see ADJUSTMENT.
4. If the drum does not turn, re-attach all hoses: testing is complete.
Adjustment
All adjustments and testing should be done with no load unless otherwise stated. Follow these steps to
adjust the tension on a drum brake:
1. Inspect each brake assembly as noted previously under INSPECTION
2. If the eccentric pin or brake arm on each brake assembly are not positioned correctly, they must
first be reset to the positions described under INSPECTION.
2.1.Loosen the jam nut several turns.
2.2.Back out the adjusting nut until it is at the end of the threads.
2.3.Release the joystick to reset the brake and fully engage/extend the brake actuator; at this point
there should be no tension on the brake band.
2.4.Adjust the eccentric pin and brake arm to the point nearest their correct position
2.5.Gently push joystick in the down direction while tightening the adjusting nut: this will cause
the brake to release before the motor has sufficient pressure to turn, easing adjustment of the
brake band nuts.
WARNING:Keepbodypartsandclothingawayfromrotatingdrum.

2.6.Periodically release the joystick and check the angle of the brake arm (it should remain near
vertical, i.e., at a 90 angle ( 5) to the brake pushrod.
2.7.Tighten the jam nut and test the brake in the down direction.
2.8.If the brake holds, adjustment is complete, if not, go to the next step.
3. Loosen jam nut, release brake, and tighten the adjusting nut 1 turns.
4. Tighten jam nut and test brake.
5. If brake fails to hold, repeat steps 3 and 4 only one more time.
6. If the brake still fails to hold, then either the brake band or actuator is faulty (assuming that all parts
are installed correctly.)
6.1.Remove the brake band and inspect the lining. If the rivets are not wearing against the drum
and the band is not oil soaked, then reinstall the band. Otherwise, replacement is necessary.
6.2.Remove and disassemble the brake actuator: the most common causes of failure are worn seals
or broken springs. If the piston cylinder is not scarred, then the actuator can be rebuilt, but
replacement is suggested.
NewBrakeBandInstallation
NOTE: If the joystick is gently moved forward, the brake will release before the motor has enough
pressure to turn. This will make it easier to adjust the nuts holding the brake band.
1. Remove band nut and flat washer.
2. Remove cotter pin from eccentric pin.
3. Slide the threaded end of the brake band out of the hoist frame.
4. Remove band eyelet hole from eccentric pin.
5. Remove bolt and retainer cap from brake arm.
6. Remove eccentric pin from hoist frame.
7. Inspect the complete eccentric pin for grooves or excessive wear. A pin should be replaced if there
are any grooves in the small pin portion.
8. Inspect the two eccentric pin bushings in the hoist frame. Replace as needed.
9. Clean and install eccentric pin (do not lubricate pin or bushings).
10. Rotate eccentric pin to correct position and install brake arm, retaining cap, and bolt with lock
washer. Coat bolt threads with Loctite 242.
11. Remove the jam nut and lock washer from the old band and install them on the new band (if new
parts are not supplied). If new nuts or washers are installed, they must adhere to the Seatrax
Specifications for Large Diameter Bolts and Nuts in the Inspection and Maintenance section of
Data Book 1.
12. Install brake band over drum and insert the eyelet over the eccentric pin.
13. Insert cotter pin through the eccentric pin, and threaded portion of band through the hoist frame.
14. Install the flat washer and band nut.
15. Now you MUST burn-in the new band.
NewBrakeBandBurnIn
If the brake band must be replaced, it is necessary to burn-in the new band to prepare the brake
lining for operation and to conform the band assembly to that particular drum. Once a band is
burned-in to a drum, do not use it on a different drum: IT MAY NOT HOLD. When burning-in a
new band, the hoist must rotate in the UP direction only.
1. Lower the hoist to its lowest position.
2. While raising the hoist at wide-open throttle, tighten the band nut until the hoist begins to strain but
does not stop. Hydraulic pressure should be within the 1,800 to 2,000 psi range as indicated by the
Hoist Pressure Gauge in the operators console.
3. When the hoist is at its highest point, loosen the nut slightly.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 until the band starts to smoke.
5. Once the band is smoking, leave the band nut tight and wait until the band cools down.
6. After the band has cooled, follow the steps in the preceding ADJUSTMENT section.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
23deabrilde2013
Mantenimientodebandadefrenodemalacate
Inspeccin,prueba,ajuste,yreemplazo
Generales
Los malacates principal, auxiliar y la pluma de las gras marinas Seatrax estn equipados con frenos
de tambor que utilizan bandas de freno externas. La banda de freno se aprieta alrededor de un tambor a
travs de la fuerza de un accionador de freno que acta sobre un enlace. La disposicin exacta difiere
basado en modelo de gra y la configuracin del cliente, sin embargo los principios de la inspeccin, la
prueba, el ajuste y el reemplazo de los frenos son los mismos.
Cuando un malacate no est en funcionamiento, su accionador de freno mantiene la tensin en la banda
de freno mediante el uso de un resorte(s) interno que se extiende a un vstago de pistn. Este est
unido a una varilla de empuje del freno conectado a una palanca del freno, que tensa la banda de freno
para ajustar el freno.
Cuando un malacate es accionado, la presin hidrulica acciona un pistn interno para retractar el
vstago del pistn (comprimiendo el o los resorte) que acta sobre la varilla de empuje del freno y la
palanca de freno para liberar el freno.
HoistDrumBrakeMaint_R01_spamx.doc Pgina1of4
Inspeccin
La banda de freno y componentes asociados deben ser inspeccionados peridicamente por el desgaste
o deformacin:
Banda de freno: Debe de tener una tuerca y una rondana de presin en el interior (hacia la banda)
con una rondana plana y tuerca de ajuste en la parte exterior.
Revestimiento de la banda de freno: espesor suficiente, es decir, los remaches no estn rozando en
el tambor.
Soldadura de la banda: Comprobar si hay grietas o deformaciones
Tuercas: Asegurarse estn debidamente apretadas.
Buje de la banda del freno (perno excntrico que gira en el interior): Revisar el desgaste, esta es la
parte ms comn que se desgasta.
Perno excntrico:
o Revisar el desgaste - dao que puede ocurrir cuando se desgasta por completo el buje y se daa
el perno.
o Orientacin: El perno DEBE estar en el punto ms cercano del tambor mientras que el freno se
acciona. Tener el excntrico en la posicin incorrecta provocara que el freno se aplique
incorrectamente y / o dar como resultado un desgaste excesivo y fallo eventual.
Brazo de freno: El brazo de palanca de freno debe estar cerca de vertical, mientras que la banda del
freno debe estar enganchada o apretada: en ngulo de 90 ( 5 ) con la varilla del freno.
Aaccionador del freno y las mangueras asociadas: Compruebe si hay fugas
Pernos de hombro y chavetas: Comprobar el estado y la tensin.
Freno: Debe mantenerse cuando se prueba.
Prueba
Para probar el freno, se debe mantener cuando est aplicado:
1. Desconecte la manguera del cilindro del freno "para liberar la presin" de la lnea.
2. Opere el malacate en direccin hacia abajo a toda la potencia para asegurar que el freno se
mantiene.
3. Si el freno rechina o no se mantiene, ver AJUSTES.
4. Si el tambor no se mueve, vuelva a conectar todas las mangueras: la prueba esta completa.
Ajuste
Todos los ajustes y las pruebas deben realizarse sin carga a menos que se indique lo contrario. Siga
estos pasos para ajustar la tensin de un freno de tambor:
1. Inspeccione cada conjunto de freno como se ha sealado anteriormente bajo INSPECCION
2. Si el perno excntrico o el brazo de freno de cada conjunto de freno no estn colocados
correctamente, deben ponerse a las posiciones descritas bajo INSPECCION primero.
2.1.Afloje la tuerca que tiene la rondana de presin varias vueltas.
2.2.Regrese la tuerca de ajuste hasta que est en el extremo de las roscas, lado de rondana plana.
2.3.Suelte la palanca de control para reajustar la banda del freno la cual estar en posicin
enganchada / el accionador del freno se extender totalmente, en este punto no debe haber
tensin en la banda del freno.
2.4.Ajuste el perno excntrico y el brazo del freno hasta el punto ms cercano a su posicin
correcta
2.5.Empuje suavemente la palanca de control en la direccin hacia abajo mientras aprieta la tuerca
de ajuste: esto har que el freno libere antes que el motor tenga suficiente presin para girar, lo
que facilita el ajuste de las tuercas de la banda del freno.
ADVERTENCIA: Mantenga el cuerpo y la ropa fuera del tambor giratorio.

2.6.Peridicamente libere la palanca de mando y compruebe el ngulo del brazo de freno (que
debe permanecer en posicin casi vertical, es decir, en un ngulo de 90 ( 5 ) a la varilla de
empuje del freno.
2.7.Apriete la tuerca de seguridad lado de la rondana de presin y pruebe el freno en la direccin
hacia abajo.
2.8.Si el freno se mantiene, el ajuste esta completo, en caso contrario, vaya al siguiente paso.
3. Afloje la tuerca de bloqueo lado de rondana de presin, libere el freno y apriete la tuerca de ajuste
1 vueltas.
4. Apriete la tuerca de seguridad y pruebe el freno.
5. Si el freno no se detiene, repita los pasos 3 y 4 slo una vez ms.
6. Si el freno sigue fallando y no se mantiene, entonces o bien la banda de freno o actuador est
defectuoso (suponiendo que todas las piezas estn instaladas correctamente).
6.1.Remueva la banda del freno e inspeccione el revestimiento. Si los remaches no estn rozando
en contra del tambor o la banda no esta empapada de aceite, a continuacin, vuelva a instalar
la banda. De lo contrario, reemplace la banda si es necesario
6.2.Remueva y desensamble el cilindro de freno: las causas ms comunes de fallas son sellos
desgastados o resortes rotos. Si el cilindro de pistn no est marcado, entonces el actuador
puede ser reconstruido, pero se sugiere el reemplazo.
Instalacindebandadefrenonueva
NOTA: Si la palanca de control se mueve ligeramente hacia adelante, el freno se soltar antes de que
el motor tenga suficiente presin para girar. Esto har que sea ms fcil ajustar las tuercas que sujetan
la banda del freno.
1. Remueva la tuerca de la banda y la rondana plana
2. Remueva la chaveta del perno excntrico.
3. Remueva el extremo roscado de la banda de freno fuera del malacate.
4. Remueva el agujero de la banda fuera del perno excntrico.
5. Remueva el tornillo de y el retenedor del brazo del freno.
6. Remueva el perno excntrico del marco del malacate.
7. Inspeccione el perno excntrico por completo, de ranuras o desgaste excesivo. Un perno debe ser
reemplazado si hay desgaste o ranuras en la parte del perno donde entra la banda del freno.
8. Inspeccione los dos bujes del perno excntrico en el marco del malacate. Reemplace segn sea
necesario.
9. Limpie e instale el perno excntrico (no lubricar el perno o bujes).
10. Gire el perno excntrico para corregir su posicin e instale el brazo de freno, tapa de retencin, y el
tornillo con la rondana de presin. Aplique sellador de rosca Loctite 242 en el tornillo.
11. Remueva la tuerca y la rondana de presin de la banda de freno vieja e instlela en la banda nueva
(si las nuevas piezas no se suministran). Si se han instalado nuevas tuercas y rondanas, deben
cumplir con "Especificaciones para tuercas y tornillos de Dimetro Grande en la seccin
Inspeccin y mantenimiento de Libro de Datos 1.
12. Instale la banda de freno sobre el tambor y colquela en el ojal sobre el perno excntrico
13. Inserte la chaveta a travs del perno excntrico, y la parte roscada de la banda a travs del marco
del malacate, se recomienda lubricar la rosca contra la corrosin.
14. Instale la rondana plana y la tuerca de la banda del freno.
15. Ahora usted debe quemar la banda nueva.
Bandadefrenonuevaquemar
Si la banda de freno debe ser reemplazada, es necesario "quemar" la banda nueva para preparar el
revestimiento de freno para la operacin y para conformar el conjunto de la banda con el tambor en
particular. Una vez que una banda se quema en un tambor, no la utilice en un tambor diferente:
POSIBLEMENTE NO SE MANTENGA. Al quemar una banda nueva, el malacate debe girar
nicamente en la direccin hacia arriba.
1. Baje el malacate a la posicin ms baja.
2. Mientras levanta el malacate a su mxima aceleracin, apriete la tuerca de la banda hasta que
empiece a poner tensin, pero no se detenga. La presin hidrulica debe estar dentro del rango de
1,800 a 2,000 PSI como indica el manmetro de levantamiento en la consola del operador.
3. Cuando el malacate se encuentre en su punto ms alto, afloje la tuerca ligeramente.
4. Repita los pasos 1 al 3 hasta que la banda comience a ahumar.
5. Una vez que la banda de freno esta quemada, deje la tuerca de la banda apretada y espere hasta que
la banda se enfre.
6. Despus que la banda se haya enfriado, siga los pasos de la seccin de AJUSTE anterior.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
28March2011
HoistBrakeTestProcedure
ForAllSeatraxCraneswithOptionalHoistBrakeTestValves
Introduction
Seatrax cranes may be equipped optionally with three-way test valves for the hoist drum brakes.
Depending on design, each hoist will have one of the following brake configurations:
Shaft-only Drum-only Both shaft and drum
TestValveLocation
Drum Brake: Machinery house, below the hydraulics breadboard attached directly to its
respective brake shuttle valve space permitting or nearby via a hose. Each main, auxiliary and
boom hoist brake will have its own test valve.
Shaft Brake: Attached to its respective hoist, marked with a tag.
Refer to the cranes hydraulic schematics for recommended test pressures. NOTE: if measured
hydraulic pressure is either more or less than required, refer to the Hydraulic System Adjustment
procedure in Data Book 1 prior to performing the brake test.
NOTE:Thefollowingproceduresshouldonlybeperformedcautiously
byanexperiencedcraneoperatororinspector.
DrumBrakeOnlyorShaftBrakeOnly
1. Ensure that the engine is in good operating condition and that all hydraulic relief valves are
properly adjusted. The drum brake bands (if equipped) must also be adjusted properly: refer to
the Hoist Drum Brake Maintenance procedure in Data Book 1 as necessary.
2. Turn the brake test valve for the hoist to be tested to the TEST position as shown on the valve
placard.
3. Mark the hoist drum flange and the side plate with a marker for movement reference as shown.
4. Throttle engine to full RPM and ease the hoist control lever/joystick in the down direction
watching until hydraulic gauge reading equals the recommended setting found in the hydraulics
schematics.
5. Hold for a few seconds and release lever/joystick to the centered neutral position.
6. Note any movement in hoist drum by comparing marks on drum flange and side plate.
7. Return the brake test valve to the RUN position.
8. Repeat steps 1-7 for all hoists.
HoistBrakeTest_R01.doc Page1of2
BothDrumandShaftBrakes
1. Ensure that the engine is in good operating condition and that all hydraulic relief valves are
properly adjusted. The drum brake bands must also be adjusted properly: refer to the Hoist Drum
Brake Maintenance procedure in Data Book 1 as necessary.
2. Turn the drum brake test valve for the hoist to be tested to the TEST position as shown on the
valve placard.
3. Ensure that the shaft brake test valve for the hoist to be tested is in the RUN position as shown in
the valve placard.
4. Mark the hoist drum flange and the side plate with a marker for movement reference as shown.
5. Throttle engine to full RPM and ease the hoist control lever/joystick in the down direction
watching until hydraulic gauge reading equals the recommended setting found in the hydraulics
schematics.
6. Hold for a few seconds and release lever/joystick to the centered neutral position.
7. Note any movement in hoist drum by comparing marks on drum flange and side plate.
8. Return the drum brake test valve to the RUN position.
9. Turn the shaft brake test valve for the hoist to be tested to the TEST position.
10. Test the shaft brake by repeating steps 5 through 7. If results are OK then return the shaft brake
test valve to RUN and proceed to the next step.
11. Repeat steps 1-10 for all hoists.
HoistBrakeTest_R01.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
28demarzode2011
Procedimientoparapruebadefrenodelosmalacates
ParatodaslasgrasdeSeatraxconopcindevlvuladeprueba
defreno
Introduccin
Las gras de Seatrax tienen la opcin de estar equipadas con vlvulas de prueba de tres vas para
los tambores de los frenos en los malacates. Dependiendo en el diseo, cada malacate tiene que
tener una de las siguientes configuraciones en los frenos:
Eje solamente Tambor solamente Ambos eje y tambor
Locacindelasvlvulasdepruebadelfreno
Freno del Tambor: En la casa del motor, por debajo del tablero de componentes hidrulicos se
encuentran las vlvulas de prueba, conectadas directamente con las vlvulas lanzadera de flujo
en ocasiones conectadas con mangueras cerca del tablero de componentes hidrulicos. Cada
malacate, Principal, Auxiliar y Pluma tendr que tener su propia vlvula para prueba.
Freno del Eje: Ensamblado con el respectivo malacate y marcado con una placa.
Refirase a los esquemas hidrulicos de la gra para la presin de prueba recomendada. NOTA:
si la presin hidrulica a sido medida y esta por debajo sobre de lo que se requiere, refirase a el
procedimiento de Ajuste del Sistema Hidrulico en el Libro de Datos 1, antes de la prueba del
freno.
NOTA:Lossiguientesprocedimientosdebendellevarseacabocautelosamente
poreloperadordelagraconexperienciauninspector
Frenodeltamborsolamentefrenodelejesolamente
1. Asegrese que el motor este en buenas condiciones de operacin y que todas las vlvulas de
alivio estn ajustadas correctamente. Las bandas de los frenos (si estn equipados) tambin deben
de estar ajustadas correctamente: refirase al procedimiento de Mantenimiento del freno de los
tambores en los malacates en el Libro de Datos 1 cuando sea necesario.
2. Gire la vlvula de prueba del freno en el malacate que ser probado en posicin de TEST la cual
lo indica en la placa de la vlvula.
3. Marque en la pestaa del tambor y en el plato de al lado con un marcador, para ver si hay un
movimiento de referencia.
4. Acelere el motor al mximo RPM y mueva la palanca de control en la cabina en direccin hacia
abajo, mire el medidor de presin y revise que sea igual de acuerdo a lo recomendado con los
esquemas hidrulicos.
5. Detenga la palanca por pocos segundos y sultela para que vuelva en posicin neutral.
HoistBrakeTest_R01_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
6. Revise algn movimiento en el tambor del malacate, comparando con las marcas de la pestaa
del tambor y el plato de al lado.
7. Regrese la vlvula de prueba del freno en posicin RUN.
8. Repita los pasos 1 al 7 en todos los malacates.
Ambostambordelfrenoyejedelfreno
1. Asegrese que el motor este en buenas condiciones de operacin y que todas las vlvulas de
alivio estn ajustadas correctamente. Las bandas de los frenos tambin deben de estar ajustadas
correctamente: refirase al procedimiento de Mantenimiento del freno de los tambores en los
malacates en el Libro de Datos 1 cuando sea necesario.
2. Gire la vlvula de prueba del freno del tambor en el malacate que ser probado en posicin de
TEST lo cual lo indica en la placa de la vlvula.
3. Asegrese que la vlvula del freno del eje en el malacate que ser probado est en posicin de
RUN lo cual lo indica en la placa de la vlvula.
4. Marque en la pestaa del tambor y en el plato de al lado con un marcador, para ver si hay un
movimiento de referencia.
5. Acelere el motor al mximo RPM y mueva la palanca de control en la cabina en direccinhacia
abajo,mireelmedidordepresinyrevisequeseaigualdeacuerdoalorecomendadoconlos
esquemashidrulicos.
6. Detenga la palanca por pocos segundos y sultela para que vuelva en posicin neutral.
7. Revise algn movimiento en el tambor del malacate, comparando con las marcas de la pestaa
del tambor y el plato de al lado.
8. Regrese la vlvula de prueba del freno del tambor en posicin de RUN.
9. Gire la vlvula de prueba del freno del eje en el malacate que ser probado en posicin de TEST
lo cual lo indica en la placa de la vlvula.
10. Pruebe el freno del eje repitiendo los pasos 5 al 7. Si el resultado es positivo entonces regrese el
freno del eje en posicin RUN y proceda al siguiente paso.
11. Repita los pasos del 1 al 10 para todos los malacate.
HoistBrakeTest_R01_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
31May2013
HoistSplineInspectionProcedure
ForBoomandLoadHoistsPlanetaryorParallelShaft
Overview
Seatrax utilizes fixed, over-sized splines in their hoist assemblies. Spline wear will be negligible if
lubricated in accordance with Seatrax instructions. Refer to the Lubrication section of Seatrax Data Book
1: Installation, Operation and Maintenance for information regarding lubricants and grease points.
This procedure provides a means to test that adequate lubrication has been applied to the hoist drum/shaft
splines and check for corrosion or corrosive fretting. It is recommended that this test be included as part
of the annual periodic inspection schedule, and it applies to boom and load hoists using either planetary or
parallel shaft-style gearboxes.
Procedure
1. Place boom in rest; ensure that there is no load on hooks and hooks are not two-blocked.
2. Perform the brake band check following the Hoist Drum Brake Maintenance procedure in Section 3
of Data Book 1. Leave the brake actuator isolated for steps 3-6.
3. Remove the encoder assembly if installed.
4. Visually inspect for corrosion at the drum/shaft spline; follow the steps in the table below:
ParallelShaft Planetary

1. Removetwoboltsandlockwashersholding 1. Removetwoboltsandlockwashersholding
squarelocknuttohoistdrum. retainerplatetohoistdrumandmoveretainer
2. Turnsquarelocknutcounterclockwiseasfar aside.
aspossible. 2. Usehammerandpunch/drifttoloosenretainer
nutandunscrewuntilsplinesarejustvisible.
HoistSplineInspection_R00.doc Page1of3
a. If no rust is visible: proceed to step 5.
b. If significant rust is visible: I.e., if joint has clearly not been lubricated for an extended period of
time, then contact Seatrax service department for recommendations.
5. Fabricate a pointer using a bar, stick or welding rod that can be secured to the drum shaft using a 1
bolt in the shaft bolt hole. The pointer must extend 12 from tip to center of the shaft. Figure 2 shows
one possible setup.
Figure1.ExampleofPointerInstallation Figure2.SplineWearToleranceMarks
12
Measure
Distance
Between
Marks
Note:Apointerwasfabricatedtoillustratethisexample,butanythingreadilyavailableissuitableifit
canbecapturedbyaboltattheendoftheshaftandwillnotdeflect.
6. Perform the following at low pressure (<1,500psi):

a) Slowly power the hoist against the drum brake in the UP direction and mark where the pointer
indicates.
b) Now power the hoist against the drum brake in the DOWN position and mark where the pointer
indicates.
7. Measure between the two marks made in step 6 and compare to the maximum allowable distance
based on hoist type shown in the below table:
MaximumDistanceBetweenMarks
HoistSeries
(atdistanceof12fromshaftcenter)
3,000 1/8
1,600 5/32
1,000 7/32
700,800 7/32
250,375,400,500 1/4
a) Greater than the maximum figure: Contact the Seatrax service department.
b) Equal to or less than maximum: Reassemble and return to service by following the instructions
in the table on the following page:
ParallelShaft Planetary
1. Ifpossiblebrushathinlayerofantiseize 1. Brushbackofdrumretainernutwithantiseize
compoundontobackofsquarelocknutand compound,thenusehammerandpunch(or
tightenuntilitbottomsout. drift)totightencompletelyuntilitbottomsout.
2. Turnsquarelocknutcounterclockwiseuntilits 2. Installdrumretainerplate:driftretainernut
boltholesalignwiththoseondrum. counterclockwiseifnecessaryuntilboltholes
3. Installandtorquetwoboltsandlockwashers onretainerplatealignwiththoseondrum.
whichmountsquarelocknuttodrum. 3. Installandtorquebothboltsandlockwashers.
4. Reconnecthoistbrake
5. Reinstallencoderassembly(ifequipped).
6. Confirmthatwireropeisstilltightondrums.Confirmationofadequatewireropetensioniscritical
toavoidcablecrushing,especiallywithboomhoistwirerope.RefertoRiggingsectionofDataBook
1forguidelines.
7. ForcranesequippedwithaCCM7000,drumcountersmustberezeroed;refertoCalibratingDrum
CounterssectionofCCM7000OperationsandMaintenanceinDataBook1.
8. Craneisnowreadyforservice.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
31mayo2013
Procedimientodeinspeccinderanurasdeejedemalacate
Parapluma,principalyauxiliarplanetariooejeparalelo
Introduccin
Seatrax utiliza ranuras fijas, de gran tamao en sus ensamblajes de malacates. El desgaste en las ranuras
ser insignificante si se lubrica de acuerdo con las instrucciones Seatrax. Consulte la seccin Lubricacin
de Seatrax en el Libro de Datos 1: Instalacin, Operacin y Mantenimiento para obtener informacin
sobre los lubricantes y los puntos de engrase.
Este procedimiento proporciona un medio para probar que la lubricacin adecuada ha sido aplicada al
tambor y ranuras de eje del malacate y revisar la corrosin por desgaste o corrosivos. Se recomienda que
esta prueba se incluya como parte del programa anual de inspeccin peridica, y se aplica en malacates de
la pluma, principal y auxiliar ya sea utilizando cajas de engranes de estilo paralelo o de eje planetario.
Procedimiento
1. Poner la pluma en el descanso: asegrese de que no hay carga en ganchos y que los ganchos no estn
bloqueados con el dispositivo de doble bloqueo.
2. Revise la banda del freno siguiendo el procedimiento de "Mantenimiento de freno del tambor" en la
Seccin 3 del Libro de Datos 1. Deje el cilindro de freno aislado para los pasos 3-6.
3. Remueva el conjunto del codificador si est instalado.
4. Realice una inspeccin visual de corrosin en las ranuras del tambor y eje siga los pasos en la tabla de
la siguiente pgina:
HoistSplineInspection_R00_spamx.doc Pgina1of4
EjeParalelo Planetario

1. Remuevalosdostornillosyrondanasde 1. Remuevalosdostornillosyrondanasdepresin
presinquesostienenlatuercacuadradadel quesostienenlaplacaderetencindeltambor
tambordelmalacate. delmalacateymuvalahaciaunlado.
2. Girelacontratuercacuadradaalaizquierdaen 2. Utiliceunmartilloyunpunznparaaflojarla
lamedidaqueseaposible. tuercaderetencinydesenrosquehastaque
apenasseavisibleslasranuras.
a. Si no tiene oxido visible: contine con el paso 5.

b. Si el xido significativo es visible: es decir, si el conjunto claramente no ha sido lubricado por un
perodo prolongado de tiempo, pngase en contacto con el departamento de servicio Seatrax para
recomendaciones.
5. Fabrique un punta mediante una placa, varilla o barra soldada que pueda ser fijado al eje del tambor
utilizando un tornillo de 1 pulgada en el agujero del eje. La punta debe ser de 12 pulgadas de largo
desde la punta hasta el centro del eje. La figura 2 en la siguiente pgina muestra una configuracin
posible.
6.
Figura1.Ejemplodelainstalacindelapunta Figura2.Marcadetoleranciadedesgastedelaranura
12
Asegure
la
distancia
entrelas
marcas
Nota:Unpuntasefabricparailustraresteejemplo,perocualquiercosafcilmentedisponiblees
adecuadasipuedesersujetadaporuntornilloenelextremodelejeynosedesviar.
7. Realice lo siguiente a baja presin (<1500 PSI):

a) Despacio aplique fuerza contra el freno del malacate del tambor en la direccin hacia arriba y
marque donde la punta indica.
b) Ahora aplique fuerza contra el freno del malacate del tambor en la direccin hacia abajo y marque
donde la punta indica.
8. Mida la distancia entre las dos marcas hechas en el paso 6 y comparar con la distancia mxima
permitida sobre la base de tipo de malacate que se muestra en la siguiente tabla:
Distanciamximaentremarcas
Seriesdemalacates
(distanciade12delcentrodeleje)
3,000 1/8
1,600 5/32
1,000 7/32
700,800 7/32
250,375,400,500 1/4
a) Mayor que la cifra mxima: Contactar con el departamento de servicio Seatrax.

b) Igual o inferior a la cifra mxima: Vuelva a montar y volver al servicio siguiendo las
instrucciones que aparecen en la tabla de la siguiente pgina:
EjeParalelo Planetario
1. Siesposibleapliqueunafinacapade 1. Limpieyapliqueantiaferranteenlaparte
lubricanteantiaferrantealaparteposterior posteriordelatuercaderetencindeltambor,
delatuercacuadradayaprietehastaque acontinuacin,utilizarunmartilloyunpunzn
toquefondo. paraapretarporcompletohastaquetoque
2. Girelacontratuercacuadradahaciala fondo.
izquierdasiesnecesariohastaquelos 2. Instalelaplacaderetencineneltambor:
agujerossealineanconlosdeltambor. aprietelatuercaderetencinhacialaizquierda
3. Instaleyaprieteconparlosdostornillosy siesnecesariohastaquelosagujerosdelos
rondanasdepresinenelmontajedela tornillosenlaplacaderetencinsealineancon
tuercacuadradadeltambor. losdeltambor.
3. Instaleyaprietelosdostornillosyrondanasde
presin.
4. Reconectelosfrenosdelosmalacates.
5. Reinstaleloscodificadores(siestaequipado).
6. Confirmequeelcableestsiendoapretadoeneltambor.Laconfirmacindelatensindelcablede
alambreadecuadoesfundamentalparaevitaraplastarelcable,sobretodoenelcabledealambre
delmalacatedelapluma.ConsultelaseccindeAparejodeLibrodeDatos1dedirectrices.
7. ParalasgrasequipadasconCCM7000,contadoresdetambordebenserrepuestosacero;consulte
laseccindeCalibracindelosContadoresdelTambor'CCM7000OperacionesyMantenimiento
"en"LibrodeDatos1.
8. Lagraestlistaparaelservicio.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDWPI - 69
Work Place Instruction for
Boom Inspection and Repair
Boom Inspection and Repair Introduction
The purpose of this procedure is to provide information pertaining to the inspection and repair of
damaged lacing and chords on boom sections manufactured by Seatrax Incorporated. This procedure is
for information purposes only.
It is important to keep the supporting lattice and diagonals on a boom section in good condition. The
lattice works supports the chords of a boom section. The chords are the main load bearing member and
allowing deflection of the chords while under load jeopardizes their structural integrity.
All maintenance, inspection, and repair work is to be done by qualified personal. All welding and
structural members is to be continuous and of professional quality.
Lattice or diagonals with uniform curvature not exceeding 1 deflection in 3 of length may be
straightened. Lattices or diagonals with curvature greater than this will require replacement.
If two adjacent sections of lattice or diagonals are damaged in one boom section the crane should be
taken out of service and should be repaired immediately before the crane is returned to service. If more
than any two independent lacings or diagonals are damaged or missing then Seatrax should be
contacted for recommendations.
Chords with a uniform curvature not exceeding 1 deflection in 4 of length may be straightened.
Chords with a non uniform curvature or any other damage, requires that the crane be taken out of
service and should be repaired immediately before the crane is returned to service.
Corrosion should be addressed when found to mitigate further damage.
PROCESS OWNER: Fred Klein ISSUE DATE :06/22/10
Rev: 0 DISTRIBUTION: N/A

APPROVED BY:
Page 1 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
General Instructions
Before work begins, personnel should record the following information pertaining to the damaged
boom section as part of the crane records:
The serial or section number.

The nature of the work to be performed.
The date of the repair.
The names and certification number of the welders and inspector making the repair.
The environmental condition while making the repair shall be satisfactory. The conditions should not
hinder performance of the work by creating unfavorable working conditions such as rain or extreme
cold. Proper tooling, welding, inspection, and safety equipment in good working order shall be used
while making any repairs.
Boom chord materials include structural angle ASTM A 572 Gr. 50, and structural tubing ASTM A500
Gr. C. Boom Lacing material is Steel pipe ASTM A53 Gr. B. Proper size and thickness for each
individual crane model can be verified by contacting the Seatrax Service Department.

APPROVED BY:
Page 2 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
At a minimum, the same pipe with a wall thickness equal to or greater than, but in no case less than,
the existing wall thickness shall be used. Welding of boom lacing to the boom chord shall be
performed using E7018 low-hydrogen electrodes with reverse polarity, direct current.
Please consult with Seatrax Service Department for additional information concerning repair of chords,
frames, or any additions to the chords.
Straightening of Lattice and Diagonals
The straightness of the chords must be checked before the lattice or diagonal can be straightened. If the
chords have a slight bend in them, proper distance between the inside of the chords must be obtained
and maintained before any repair can be made.
Clamping a 4X4 timber against the bent lattice or diagonal pipes draws out bends. It may be
necessary to block away from the pipe to allow for over bend and spring back.
Lattice or Diagonal pipe should be at 32 F (0 C) or warmer when attempting to straighten a

member.
Do not use a hammer or other tool to strike the pipe. This can result in localized structural
damage to the pipe.
Do not use heat while straightening. Heat may effect the physical properties on the steel in the
areas it is directly applied.
Applying a jacking or pulling mechanism is acceptable as long as heat is not used.
After repair inspect the lattice to chord weld for any cracking or distortion. If the welds have
been damaged in any way, the lacings will need to be removed and replaced.
Complete Replacement of Lattice or Diagonal Lacing
If a lattice or diagonal pipe is damaged beyond the point of straightening, the pipe will have to be
removed and replaced.
Check the chords for any damage. If the chords have experienced a slight bending, the proper distance
between the inside of the chords must be obtained and maintained before any repair can be made.
Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the lattice or diagonal pipe by cutting the pipe just above the welds, which attach the
pipe to the tubing chords. A hack saw, band saw, or torch work well for this procedure. Care
should be exercised to not damage the boom chords.

APPROVED BY:
Page 3 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
2. Carefully, grind the remaining pipe and weld down to within approximately 1/16 of the chord
surface.
3. Using a fine (80-100 grit) disc, remove the remaining pipe material and polish the area to be
welded to a bright clean metal surface leaving most of the polish marks running parallel with
the chords length.
4. Check the chord area for any divots or impressions. Minor divots or impressions can be fixed
by covering the divot with filler weld before replacing the lacing or diagonal. Chords with
heavier damage than discussed above may have to be replaced.
5. Mark where the lattice will be placed and cut a piece of the recommended size pipe to fit in the
opening.
6. Check to ensure the replacement lattice or diagonal will fit snugly between the two chords,
paying close attention to the proper position and alignment. If necessary, contour or shape the
replacement pipe for a proper fit-up. A good fit will aid in heat and weld size control, resulting
in a better repair job.
7. Clamp the replacement pipe into place. Do not tack weld. Again, check the fit and ensure that
all grease, paint, and oil are removed from the area to be welded.
8. Apply proper weld.
Welding Instructions
Welding should be performed by a welder who is certified, according to AWS, to make fillet welds in
all positions using the base material and electrodes specified. The welding procedure specification,
procedure qualification record, and welder qualifications should be included in the crane repair record.
1. Preheat the chord in the area to be welded to 100 F (min) to 250 F (max). Temperature sticks
should be used to determine the temperature of the material. It is important not to over heat or
under heat the material.
2. Use 3/32 or 1/8 electrodes of AWS E7018 class for welding. Use the manufactures
recommended amperage, voltage, and travel speed to obtain a one-pass fillet weld of 3/16
thickness.
3. Following the above instructions, weld in the replacement pipe making all welds continuous.
4. Complete the welding without letting the temperature of the steel drop below 100 F.

APPROVED BY:
Page 4 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
5. After welding is complete, clean the welded area and inspect the weld. After inspection, the
welded area and pipe should be primed and painted.
Post Weld Inspection
It is recommended by Seatrax that one of the following inspection procedures be performed to verify
the integrity of the weld:
(1) Magnetic Particle wet or dry
(2) Dye penetrant visible or fluorescent
Each weld should be individually inspected for any cracks or inclusions.
Weld Repair Procedure
All cracks, porosity, lack of fusion, slag, and any other defects found in a weld after completion shall
be repaired using the following procedure:
1. Using a grinder or gouging tool, remove any defective portion of the weld.
2. Inspect the weld with some type of NDE examination to determine that the defective portion
has been removed and that sound metal has been reached.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all defects have been removed from the weld.
4. Repair the weld using the weld procedure previously discussed in the document.
Boom Chord Repair
The following procedure is for repairing damage to boom chords. This procedure is not for boom
chords that are bent, have holes in them, are corroded or if the damaged area is longer than twice the
chord tube size. In this case contact Seatrax with detailed information about the size and location of the
damage. Boom chords are made of ASTM A500 Grade C. Repair plate material is to be API 2H Grade
50 or equivalent with 50 ksi minimum yield and minimum average Charpy of 25 ft-lbs @ -40 deg F
with a minimum single value of 20 ft-lbs @ -40 deg F. Material certificates and this repair procedure
must be kept together for each repair. The plate to be used must be marked to match the material
certificates.

APPROVED BY:
Page 5 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
1. Measure the basic length of the damaged area to the boom chord. It must be no greater than
twice the boom chord size. Contact Seatrax if the damage is greater than twice the boom chord
size.
2. Identify if the damage is limited to 1, 2 or 3 faces of the boom chord. If damage extends into
the radius of the chord then a plate on the adjacent chord face must be used.
3. Measure the size of the boom chord.
4. Identify plate thickness and weld size using the table below.
5. Burn the plate referencing the following drawings.
6. If damage is adjacent to lacing then trim the corresponding lacing member so that the repair
plate will fit between the chord and lacing. For areas where no damage exists in the chord the
repair plates may be trimmed to fit around the lacing members. Repair plates must be trimmed
to be no closer than 4 from a bolt pad. See the following drawings.
7. Use a hydraulic jack to flatten the boom chord face. Grind down any remaining part of the
chord faces that bulge out and would prevent the repair plates from sitting flush.
8. Weld the plates to the chord.
9. Grind both ends of the plate to provide a smooth transition to the boom chord.
10. Have a qualified inspector inspect the weld using magnetic particle wet or dry, or dye
penetrant visible or fluorescent. Keep a copy of the inspection report with the material
certificates and repair procedure.
11. Prime and paint the repaired area.
All Boom Sections
Chord Size 5x5 6x6 7x7 8x8 10x10

Plate Thickness 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8
Weld Size 5/16 5/16 7/16 7/16 7/16

APPROVED BY:
Page 6 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Example Repairs of Boom Chords
Trim back repair plate 4 from bolt

pad. Weld the plate to the chord. Grind
the end of the plate down for a smooth
transition.
Trim lacing members back to

allow for placement of the
repair plate over the damaged
area.
Repair plate may be trimmed to go around

lacing or other members if there is no damage
in the area.

APPROVED BY:
Page 7 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Repair Plate Dimensions

APPROVED BY:
Page 8 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDWPI - 69
Instrucciones de Trabajo para la Inspeccin y Reparacin de la Pluma
Inspeccin de la Pluma e Introduccin de Reparacin

El propsito de este procedimiento es proporcionar la informacin relativa a la inspeccin y reparacin
de cordones, rejas y diagonales daados en secciones de la pluma fabricados por Seatrax Inc. Este
procedimiento es slo para fines informativos.
Es importante mantener las rejas y soportes diagonales en la seccin de la pluma en buen estado. Las
rejas son soportes en el cordn de una seccin de la pluma. Los cordones son el miembro de soporte de
la carga principal y puede permitir deflexin en los cordones, mientras que bajo la carga pone en
peligro su integridad estructural.
Todo el mantenimiento, inspeccin y reparacin debe hacerse por personal cualificado. Todas las
soldaduras y elementos estructurales deben ser continuos y de calidad profesional.
Rejas o diagonales con curvatura uniforme que no exceda de 1" de deflexin en 3' de Longitud pueden
ser enderezadas. Rejas o diagonales con curvatura mayor debe ser necesario el reemplazo.
Si dos secciones adyacentes de rejas o diagonales resultan daados en una seccin de la pluma la gra
debe ser puesta fuera de servicio y debe ser reparada inmediatamente antes de que la gra sea devuelta
al servicio. Si hay ms de dos rejas o diagonales independientes daadas o faltan, contctese con
Seatrax para obtener recomendaciones.
Cordones con una curvatura uniforme que no exceda de 1" de deflexin en 4' de longitud pueden ser
enderezados. Cordones con una curvatura no uniforme o cualquier otro dao, requiere que la gra sea
puesta fuera de servicio y deba ser reparada inmediatamente antes de que la gra sea devuelta al
servicio.
Corrosin debe ser atendida cuando se encuentran para prevenir daos mayores.
PROCESS OWNER: Fred Klein ISSUE DATE: 06/22/10

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 1 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Instrucciones Generales
Antes de comenzar el trabajo, el personal debe registrar la siguiente informacin relativa a la seccin
de la pluma daada como parte de los registros de la gra:
El nmero de serie o nmero de seccin.
La manera del trabajo a realizar.
La fecha de la reparacin.
Los nombres y el nmero de certificacin de los soldadores y los inspectores que hacen la
reparacin.
La condicin del medio ambiente al tiempo que sea la reparacin debe ser satisfactoria. Las
condiciones no deben obstaculizar el rendimiento de trabajo mediante la creacin de condiciones de
trabajo desfavorables, como la lluvia o el fro extremo. Herramienta adecuada, soldadura, inspeccin y
equipos de seguridad en buen estado de funcionamiento se utilizarn al hacer cualquier reparacin.
Material del cordn de la pluma incluyen ngulo estructural ASTM A 572 Gr. 50, y tubo estructural
ASTM A500 Gr. C. En las rejas y diagonales de la pluma el material es de tubo de acero ASTM A53
Gr. B. tamao y grosor apropiado para cada modelo de gras individuales que pueden verificarse en
contacto con el Departamento de Servicio Seatrax.

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 2 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Como mnimo, el mismo tubo con un espesor de pared igual o mayor que, pero en ningn caso menor
que, se utiliza el espesor de pared existente. La soldadura entre las rejas y diagonales con el cordn de
la pluma debe realizarse con electrodos E7018 de bajo hidrgeno con polaridad inversa, corriente
continua.
Por favor, consulte con el Departamento de Servicio Seatrax para obtener informacin adicional
relativa a la reparacin de cordones, marcos o adiciones a los cordones.
Enderezado de Rejas y Diagonales
La rectitud de los cordones deben ser revisados antes que las rejas o diagonales se puedan enderezar. Si
los cordones tienen una ligera curvatura en ellos, se deber obtener la distancia adecuada entre el
interior de los cordones y mantenindolo antes de hacer cualquier reparacin.
Sujete una madera 4X4 contra la reja o diagonal de tubos doblados. Puede ser necesario bloquear fuera
de los tubos de reja y diagonales para permitir ms curva la cual se regresara en posicin derecha.
Tubos de rejas y Diagonales deben estar a 32 F (0 C) o ms caliente al intentar enderezar un
tubo.
No utilice un martillo u otra herramienta para golpear los tubos de reja o diagonales. Esto
puede resultar un dao estructural localizado en los tubos.
No utilice el calor, mientras endereza un tubo. El calor puede afectar a las propiedades fsicas
del acero en las arreas que se aplica directamente.
La aplicacin de un mecanismo de levantamiento o de traccin es aceptable siempre y cuando
no se utiliza calor.
Despus de la reparacin inspeccionar la soldadura de la reja con el cordn por cualquier
agrietamiento o deformaciones. Si las soldadura han sido daada de alguna manera, tendr que
ser eliminados y reemplazados las rejas o diagonales.
Reemplazo Completo de reja o Diagonal
Si una reja o diagonal estn daados ms all del punto de enderezamiento, el tubo deber ser
eliminado y reemplazado.
Revise los cordones de cualquier dao. Si los cordones han experimentado una ligera flexin, se debe
obtener la distancia apropiada entre el interior de los cordones y se mantiene antes de hacer cualquier
reparacin.
Procedimiento de Reemplazo
1. Remueva la reja o el tubo diagonal cortando el tubo justo encima de las soldaduras que fijan el tubo
a los cordones. Una sierra para metales, sierras de cinta, o el trabajo de antorcha esta bien para este
procedimiento. Se debe tener cuidado de no daar los cordones de la pluma.

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 3 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
2. Con cuidado, rebajar el tubo restante y soldar aproximadamente 1/16 "de la superficie del cordn.
3. El uso de un disco fino (80-100), para eliminar el material del tubo restante y pulir el rea a soldar
dejando una superficie metlica limpia brillante, la mayora de las marcas de pulido se ejecutan en
paralelo con la longitud del cordn.
4. Revise el rea del cordn por cualquier dao. Daos menores se pueden arreglar cubriendo con
soldadura, antes de cambiar el cordn o diagonal. Cordones con daos ms fuertes, como se indico
anteriormente puede que tengan que ser reemplazados.
5. Marque el lugar donde se colocar la reja y corte un tubo de tamao recomendado para entre en la
abertura.
6. Asegrese que la reja o diagonal de reemplazo entren perfectamente entre los dos cordones,
prestando mucha atencin a la posicin correcta y la alineacin. Si es necesario ajuste, el contorno
o forma del tubo de reemplazo para un adecuado ajuste en marcha. Un buen ajuste ayudar en calor
y el control de tamao de la soldadura, resultando en un trabajo de reparacin mejor.
7. Sujete el tubo de repuesto en su lugar. No soldar por puntos. Una vez ms, comprobar el ajuste y
asegurarse de que toda la grasa, pintura y el aceite se eliminan en el rea a soldar.
8. Aplicar soldadura apropiada.
Instrucciones de Soldadura
La soldadura debe ser realizada por un soldador que est certificado, de acuerdo al AWS, para hacer
soldaduras de filete en todas las posiciones utilizando el material de base y los electrodos
especificados. La especificacin de procedimiento de soldadura, ficha de cualificacin de
procedimiento, y las calificaciones del soldador deben ser incluidos en el registro de reparacin de la
gra.
1. Precalentar el cordn en el rea a soldar a 100 F (min) a 250 F (mx). Indicadores de
temperatura deben ser usados para determinar la temperatura del material. Es importante no
sobrecalentar el material o que el material este bajo en calor.
2. Utilice electrodos de 3/32" o 1/8" AWS E7018 de clase para la soldadura. Utilice las
recomendaciones de manufactura como, amperaje, voltaje y velocidad para obtener una soldadura
de filete 3/16 "de espesor en una sola pasada.
3. Siguiendo las instrucciones de arriba de soldadura en el tubo de reemplazo, debe hacer todas las
soldaduras continuas.
4. Completar la soldadura sin dejar que la temperatura baje en el acero por debajo de 100 F.
5. Despus que la soldadura este completa, limpie el rea soldada e inspeccione la soldadura. Despus
de la inspeccin, el rea soldada y tubos deben ser preparados y pintados.

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 4 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Inspeccin de Soldadura
Se recomienda por Seatrax que uno de los siguientes procedimientos de inspeccin se lleva a cabo para
verificar la integridad de la soldadura:
(1) Particula Magntica mojado o seco
(2) Tinta Penetrante visible o fluorescente
Cada soldadura debe inspeccionarse individualmente para detectar posibles grietas o inclusiones.
Procedimiento para Reparacin de Soldadura
Todas las grietas, porosidad, falta de fusin, escoria, y otros defectos que se encuentran en una
soldadura despus de la finalizacin deben ser reparados utilizando el siguiente procedimiento:
1. El uso de un esmeril o herramienta de ranurado, remueva cualquier porcin defectuosa de la
soldadura.
1. Inspeccionar la soldadura con algn tipo de prueba NDE para determinar que la porcin defectuosa
se ha eliminado y se ha llegado al sonido del metal.
1. Repetir los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que todos los defectos se han eliminado de la soldadura.
1. Reparar la soldadura utilizando el procedimiento de soldadura que se discuti previamente en el
documento.
Reparacin del Cordn de la Pluma
El siguiente procedimiento es para la reparacin de daos en los cordones de la pluma. Este
procedimiento no es para los cordones que que estn doblados, tienen agujeros en ellos, estn
corrodos o si el rea daada es superior a dos veces el tamao del cordn del tubo. En este caso,
pngase en contacto con Seatrax con informacin detallada sobre el tamao y la localizacin del dao.
Los cordones de la pluma son de ASTM A500 Grado C el material de la placa de reparacin a de ser
de API 2H grado 50 o equivalente, con un 50 ksi mnimo de rendimiento y Charpy promedio mnimo
de 25 ft-lbs @ 40 F con un valor mnimo nico de 20 ft-lbs @ 40 F certificados de materiales y este
procedimiento de reparacin deben mantenerse juntos por cada reparacin. La placa que se utilizar
debe ser marcada para que coincida con los certificados de materiales.
1. Mida la longitud de la base del rea daada del cordn de la pluma. No debe ser mayor que dos
veces el tamao del cordn de la pluma. Contctese con Seatrax si el dao es mayor que el doble
del tamao del cordn de la pluma.
2. Identificar si el dao se limita a 1, 2 o 3 caras del cordn de la pluma. Si el dao se extiende hacia
el radio del cordn a continuacin, se debe utilizar una placa en la cara del cordn adyacente.
3. Medir el tamao del cordn de la pluma.
4. Identificar el espesor de la placa y el tamao de la soldadura utilizando la tabla de abajo.
5. Cortar la placa con referencia a los siguientes dibujos.
6. Si el dao es adyacente a la reja a continuacin, recortar la placa de la reja correspondiente de
modo que la placa de reparacin se ajuste y entre el cordn y el miembro de la reja. Para las reas
donde no exista dao en el cordn las placas de reparacin pueden ser recortados para ajustarse
alrededor de las rejas del cordn. Placas de reparacin deben ser recortadas no ms cerca de 4" de
la almohadilla de conexin. Ver los siguientes dibujos.
APPROVED BY:
Pgina 5 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
7. Utilice un gato hidrulico para aplanar la cara del cordn de la pluma. Rebajar todos los bordos que
sobresalen en la cara del cordn de la pluma para que las placas de reparacin deban sentar bien al
ras en la cara del cordn de la pluma.
8. Soldar las placas al cordn de la pluma.
9. Rebajar los dos extremos de la placa para proporcionar una transicin suave en el cordn de la
pluma.
10. Tener un inspector cualificado que inspeccione la soldadura mediante partculas magnticas
mojado o seco, o un tinte penetrante - visible o fluorescente. Guarde una copia del informe de
inspeccin con los certificados de materiales y el procedimiento de reparacin.
11. Aplicar base y pintar el rea reparada.
TodaslasSeccionesdelaPluma

MedidadeCordn 5x5 6x6 7x7 8x8 10x10
GrosordePlaca 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8
MedidadeSoldadura 5/16 5/16 7/16 7/16 7/16

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 6 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Ejemplosdereparacinesdelapluma
Recorte la placa de reparacin 4

detrs de la almohadilla de
conexin. Soldar la placa al
cordn. Rebajar el extremo de la
placa hacia abajo para una
transicin suave y sin problemas.
Recorte las rejas del cordn

posterior para permitir la
colocacin de la placa de
reparacin sobre el rea daada.
La placa de reparacin puede ser recortada alrededor

de la reja o de otros miembros si no hay daos en la
zona.

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 7 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Dimensionesparaplatosdereparacin

APPROVED BY:
Pgina 8 of 8
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
07July2011
SwingBearingSystemReplacementProcedure
ForSSeriesCranes(ExceptS48&S56)
Introduction
The Seatrax Marine Crane uses a unique swing bearing system, which allows inspection or
replacement with hand tools only. The collector ring assembly bolts directly to the top of the
kingpost, so it is not necessary to remove it in the course of bearing replacement. A separate crane
is not required to lift a Seatrax crane completely off the fixed kingpost.
Operation
The bearing system on an S Series crane (except S48 and S56) consists of two sets of bearings:
The split upper bearing comprises a hemisphere of a synthetic material retained in place
atop the gantry by a bolted bearing thrust plate which is also split. When the upperworks
are installed, the rounded top of the kingpost rides inside this bearing. Due to its unique
design, the hemispherical upper bearing bears both the vertical (i.e., crane weight) and
horizontal (i.e., overturning moment of crane and load) force components, transferring
them to the fixed kingpost.
The lower bearing consists of a series of shoes faced with synthetic material; they pin
directly to the turntable at the base of the upperworks. The shoes also help transfer
horizontal force components to the kingpost.
BearingWear
The upper bearing should be replaced when no more than 50% of its thickness as measured
vertically at the top kingpost opening of the bearing - has worn away. On the following page
please see the figure illustrating the measuring point and a chart of minimum vs. maximum bearing
thicknesses based on crane model.
The lower bearing shoes should be replaced when no more than 1/4" (50%) of the 1/2 thick
material has worn away from the middle of the shoe.
If the synthetic bearing material wears away to the point of metal-to-metal contact, the crane will
make a dragging noise or may refuse to swing, especially with a heavy load. If metal-to-metal
contact occurs, the crane should be stopped immediately and the problem corrected. Continued use
of the crane can damage the kingpost-bearing surface and require extensive repairs.
ToolsRequiredforBearingReplacement
Four (4) 50-ton hydraulic pancake jacks
Four 1-8 x 5 long UNC bolts
NOTE: Prints of the upper bearing and lower shoe assemblies are located in the General BOM
and Component Data section of Data Book 1.
SwingBearingReplacement_SSeries_R04.doc Page1of6
Figure 1. Sample Upper Bearing Wear Gauge Points
Crane Model Thickness, Maximum Wear (Inches) Thickness, New (Approx. Inches)
S72 5/16 5/8
S90 3/8 3/4
S108 7/16 7/8
S126 7/16 7/8
LowerBearingShoeReplacement
1. Put the boom in the boom rest with slacked lines to decrease the load on the bearing shoes.
2. Remove rear shoes to allow movement.
3. Center the upperworks on the kingpost by placing four 50-ton pancake jacks on the ring gear
below the upperworks (two on the sides, one in front and one at the rear). S-Series cranes
have diagonal gussets/jack supports beneath the bull gear: place the jacks over these
supports or risk bending the bull gear.
4. Remove the front shoe retaining pins and pull the shoe assemblies straight up.
5. Remove the four screws, which mount the plastic shoe to the steel shoe support.
6. Install the new shoes to the steel shoe support and tighten the mounting screws.
7. Apply a liberal amount of Lubemaster Premalube Heavy Duty NLGI #2 grease to the bearing
surface of the new shoe and the bearing surface of the kingpost.
8. Install the front shoe assemblies to the turntable and reinstall the retaining pins.
9. Release hydraulic jack to allow the front shoes to come to rest against the kingpost.
10. Install the rear shoes.
11. Grease each bearing with a grease gun per guidelines within the Lubrication section of Data
Book 1. The crane is now ready to operate.
NOTE: The side and rear shoes wear more slowly than the front shoes. In an emergency they
may be rotated with the front shoes until new ones arrive.
UpperBearingReplacement
1. Lower the boom to the boom rest and slacken the boom suspension lines.
2. Raise the upper works about 1 using four 50-ton pancake jacks. The jacks should be placed on
the ring gear below the upper works: two on the sides, one in front and one at the rear. As
required, use the jacks to lift and center the kingpost in the upper bearing. S-Series cranes
have diagonal gussets/jack supports beneath the bull gear: place the jacks over these
supports or risk bending the bull gear.
Figure 2. Jack Placement (Front and Right Sides Shown)
3. Unbolt and remove the four (4) post retainer blocks. Remove all the bolts from the bearing
thrust plate.
Post
Retainer Bearing
Blocks ThrustPlate
4. The bearing thrust plate and bearing are each split into halves. Make sure that each split is
aligned for easy removal. Place the post retainer blocks under the bearing thrust plate
(making sure NOT to let the block extend over the bearing) and insert four 1-
1/2-6 x 4 bolts on the outside of the plate.
5. Pull the upper bearing up by replacing four bolts (1-8 x 4 1/2 UNC threads) through the top
of the bearing thrust plate and screw into the bearing. Make sure the bolts are tightened evenly
to ensure that the bearing will pull up straight.
6. Begin tightening the four bolts (1-8 x 5) and the bearing will begin to pull out.
BearingPartiallyRaised
7. Continue tightening the bolts until the bearing is touching the thrust plate.
BearingAgainstBottomof
CoverPlate
8. Now remove all the bolts and the bearing thrust plate cover and set to the side.
9. These cranes have a two piece upper bearing. The bearing is split at the 3 oclock and 9 oclock
position (for reference the boom is at 12 oclock.) Screw the four 1 bolts into the bearing and
lift it out. If the top of the kingpost is resting against the front or back of the bearing, ensure
that the boom suspension lines are slack and use the jacks to make adjustments as-needed.
10. It may be necessary to stack spacers and repeat steps 6 thru 9. If the bearing cannot be pulled
by hand then note the position of the kingpost in the hole. Reposition with jacks to remove the
load off the bearing. Repeat for second half of bearing.
11. Clean any rust and old grease from the kingpost top and inspect it for any noticeable wear or
damage per API RP 2A.
KingpostTop
12. Coat the new bearings with Lubemaster Premalube Heavy Duty NLGI #2 grease and set them
into the gantry in the same position from which they were removed.
13. Bolt the bearing thrust cover plate and the post retaining blocks down and torque to
specifications. (See the Bolt Installation and Inspection Procedure under the Inspection and
Maintenance section of Data Book 1.)
14. Remove the four 50-ton pancake jacks from beneath the upperworks.
15. Per guidelines within the Lubrication section of Data Book 1, lubricate the bearing via the
grease fittings recessed in the bearing thrust plate. The crane is now ready to use.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
07dejuliode2011
Procedimientodereemplazodecojinetesdelsistemadegiro
ParaGrasSeriesS(ExceptoS48yS56)
Introduccin
Las gras marinas Seatrax utilizan un sistema de cojinete de giro nico, que permite la inspeccin
o sustitucin con slo herramientas de mano. Los tornillos de montaje de anillo colector
directamente en la parte superior del poste de carga, no es necesario retirarlos en el curso de la
sustitucin del cojinete. No se requiere de otra gra para levantar la gra Seatrax completamente
fuera del poste central fijo.
Operacin
El sistema de cojinete en una gra Serie S (excepto S48 y S56) se compone de dos juegos de
cojinetes:
El cojinete superior partido en dos comprende de un hemisferio de un material sinttico
retenido en su lugar por encima del mstil con una placa de cojinete de empuje con tornillos
que tambin se divide en dos. Cuando se instalan las superestructuras, la parte superior
redondeada (hemisferio) del poste central gira dentro de este cojinete. Debido a su diseo
nico, el cojinete superior semiesfrico lleva tanto lo vertical (es decir, la gra de peso) y
horizontal (es decir, del momento de vuelco de la gra y la carga) componentes de fuerza, que
se transfieren al poste central.
El cojinete inferior se compone de una serie de zapatos de cojinete que estn cubiertos con
material sinttico, montados con un perno directamente a la mesa giratoria en la base de la
estructura superior. Los zapatos tambin ayudan a transferir componente de fuerza horizontal
en el poste de carga.
Desgastedeloscojinetes
El cojinete superior debe ser reemplazado cuando no ms de 50% de su espesor (como medida
verticalmente en la abertura del poste central de carga superior del cojinete) se ha desgastado. En la
siguiente pgina, por favor consulte la figura que ilustra el punto de medicin y una grfica de
espesores mnimos o a lo mximo segn el modelo de gra.
Los zapatos de cojinete inferior deben ser reemplazados cuando no ms de 1/4 (50%) de la 1/2 de
material grueso que se ha desgastado desde el centro del zapato.
Si el material de apoyo sinttico se desgasta hasta el punto de contacto de metal a metal, la gra har
un ruido como arrastrando o puede negarse a girar, sobre todo con una carga pesada. Si se produce el
contacto de metal a metal, la gra debe ser detenida de inmediato y corrija el problema. El uso
continuo de la gra puede daar la superficie de soporte del poste central de carga y requiere
reparaciones extensas.
SwingBearingReplacement_SSeries_spamx_R04.doc Pgina1of6
Herramientasnecesariasparareemplazarelcojinetesuperior
Cuatro (4) gatos hidrulicos de baja altura de 50 toneladas.
Cuatro tornillos de 1-8 x 5 UNC de largo.
NOTA: Dibujos del cojinete superior y de zapatos de cojinetes inferiores se encuentran en la Lista
general de materiales y componentes seccin a Libro de Datos 1.
Figura1.EjemplodelPuntodecalibracindeDesgastedelcojinetesuperior
Modelode Gruesodedesgastemximo(pulgadas) Gruesonuevo(pulgadasaprox.)

Gra
S72 5/16 5/8
S90 3/8 3/4
S108 7/16 7/8
S126 7/16 7/8
Reemplazodezapatosdecojineteinferior
1. Baje la pluma al descanso y afloje los cables para disminuir la carga en los zapatos de cojinete.
2. Remueva los zapatos de cojinete traseros para permitir el movimiento.
3. Centre la estructura superior en el poste central de carga mediante la colocacin de cuatro gatos
hidrulicos de baja altura de 50 toneladas en el engranaje de anillo por debajo de la estructura
superior (dos en los lados, uno en frente y uno en la parte trasera). Gras de la serie S tienen
refuerzos diagonales (si esta equipado)/ apoye los gatos hidrulicos debajo de la rueda de
engrane de giro sobre donde estn localizados los soportes diagonales o si no corre riesgo de
doblar el engranaje principal.
4. Remueva los pasadores de retencin delanteros y tire de los zapatos de cojinete hacia arriba.
5. Remueva los cuatro tornillos de metal que sujetan el zapato de cojinete con el zapato de acero.
6. Instale los zapatos de cojinete nuevos en el soporte de acero y apriete los tornillos de montaje.
7. Aplique una cantidad generosa de grasa multiuso Lubemaster Premalube Heavy Duty grasa NLGI
# 2 en la superficie de apoyo del nuevo zapato de cojinete y la superficie de apoyo del poste central
de carga.
8. Instale los zapatos de cojinete delanteros en la estructura giratoria y vuelva a instalar los pasadores
de retencin.
9. Afloje el gato hidrulico para permitir que los zapatos de cojinete inferiores delanteros regresen a
su posicin contra el poste central de carga.
10. Instale los zapatos de cojinete traseros.
11. Engrase cada cojinete con una pistola de engrase segn los procedimientos dentro de la seccin
Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1. La gra est ahora lista para funcionar.
NOTA: Los zapatos de cojinete de al lado y traseros tienden a gastarse mas lentamente que
los zapatos de cojinete delanteros. En una situacin de emergencia se pueden cambiar los
zapatos de cojinete delanteros por los zapatos de cojinete traseros hasta que los nuevos
lleguen.
Reemplazodelcojinetesuperior
1. Baje la pluma al descanso y afloje los cables de la suspensin de la pluma.
2. Levante la estructura superior alrededor de 1" utilizando cuatro gatos hidrulicos de baja altura de
50 toneladas. Los gatos hidrulicos deben colocarse en la corona de giro debajo de la estructura
superior: dos en los laterales lado de la casa del motor, uno en frente y uno en la parte trasera.
Segn sea necesario, utilice los gatos hidrulicos para levantar y centrar el poste central de carga
en el cojinete superior. Gras de la serie S tienen refuerzos diagonales (si esta equipado)/
apoye los gatos hidrulicos debajo de la rueda de engrane de giro sobre donde estn
localizados los soportes diagonales o si no corre riesgo de doblar el engranaje principal.
Figura2.Posicinparalosgatoshidrulicos(Enfrenteyloslados)
3. Desatornille y quite los cuatro (4) bloques posteriores de retencin. Retire todos los tornillos de la
placa de cojinete de empuje.
Bloques
Retenedores Platode
Empujede
Cojinete
4. La placa de cojinete de empuje y el cojinete

cada una se separan en dos mitades.
Asegrese de que cada una se separe alineada
para facilitar su extraccin. Coloque los
bloques posteriores de retencin bajo la placa
del cojinete de empuje (teniendo cuidado de
NO dejar que el bloque obstruya sobre el
cojinete) e inserte cuatro 1-1/2-6 x 4
tornillos en la parte exterior de la placa.
5. Tire del cojinete superior por sustitucin de

cuatro tornillos (1-8 x 4 1/2 roscas UNC) a
travs de la parte superior de la placa de
cojinete de empuje y atornllelos en el
cojinete. Asegrese de que los tornillos estn
apretados uniformemente para asegurar que el
cojinete se tire derecho hacia arriba.
6. Comience apretando los cuatro tornillos (1-8
x 5) y el cojinete comenzar a salir.
CojineteParcialmente
Levantado
7. Contine apretando los tornillos hasta que el

cojinete este en contacto con la placa de
empuje
CojineteContralaPlaca
deEmpuje
8. Ahora, remueva todos los tornillos y mueva la

placa de cojinete de empuje hacia un lado.
9. Estas gras tienen dos piezas de cojinete

superior. El cojinete se divide en las
posiciones 3 y las 9 en punto con el reloj (con
referencia de la pluma es a las 12 h.) Atornille
los cuatro tornillos de 1 en el Cojinete y tire
hacia arriba. Si la parte superior del poste
central de carga se apoya contra la parte
delantera o trasera del soporte, asegrese de
que las lneas de suspensin de la pluma
estn flojas y utilice los gatos hidrulicos para
hacer los ajustes necesarios.
10. Puede que sea necesario empalmar
espaciadores y repita los pasos 6-9. Si el
rodamiento no se puede extraer con la mano a
continuacin, mire la posicin del poste
central de carga en el agujero. Vuelva a
colocar los gatos hidrulicos para eliminar la
carga del cojinete. Repita para la segunda
mitad del cojinete.
11. Limpie cualquier resto de xido y grasa vieja

de la parte superior del poste central de carga
y compruebe que no haya ningn desgaste
notable o dao por API RP 2A.
ParteSuperiordelPoste
CentraldeCarga
12. Cubra los nuevos cojinetes con Lubemaster

Premalube Heavy Duty NLGI grasa # 2 y
pngalos en el mstil en la misma posicin de
la que fueron removidos.
13. Atornille la placa del cojinete de empuje e instale los bloques retenedores hacia abajo y apriete a
las especificaciones. (Consulte la seccin 'Instalacin de Tornillos y Procedimiento de inspeccin
bajo la Inspeccin y Mantenimiento en seccin de de Libro de Datos 1.).
14. Retire los cuatro gatos hidrulicos de 50 toneladas por debajo de la estructura superior.
15. Por instrucciones dentro de la seccin Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1, lubrique el cojinete a travs
de los puntos de engrase empotrados en la placa de empuje del cojinete. La gra ya est listo para
su uso.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04May2011
Slip/CollectorRingAssembly
InstallationandMaintenance
PartNos.TN4092&TN4107
GeneralInformation
This operations manual is intended as a guide to the use, maintenance
and servicing of the above-referenced Seatrax part numbers. The
differences between part numbers lie mainly in the total number of
rings and the capacity in amps of each ring.
Only trained maintenance people who have read and understood this
manual should be permitted to maintain and/or do work on or inside
the collector. Refer at all times to the following General Warnings
and Safety Precautions.
Warnings&SafetyPrecautions
GeneralPrecautions
Maintenance people should be trained and understand the risks
before working on or inside the collector.
Before removing the covers of the collector be sure that the power
has been switched off and that the main power cables have been
connected to earth with proper grounding devices.
There should be a dedicated person responsible for disconnecting
the power and ensuring that it is not reconnected while work is
done inside the collector.
Before touching any conductive parts (e.g., slip rings, bus-bars,
brushes), always check with an appropriate instrument that there
is no power in the system.
HIGH VOLTAGE warning signs are placed on the covers to warn of the danger
The covers can be padlocked if required.
If heaters or limit switches are delivered in the collector enclosure, these can still have power on
the terminals even if the main power is switched off.
When working with or inside the slip ring unit, be sure that the crane or machine can not rotate.
Note the risk for squeezing when the machine rotates. If during maintenance the collector must be
rotated, stay away from all moving parts.
SlipRing_TN4092TN4107_R00.doc Page1of7
ElectricalWarnings
The collector ring should be interfaced with the unit on which it is installed and the entire unit
grounded in accordance with the National Electric Code and local codes and ordinances.
DANGER: Hazard of electrical shock or burn. Always disconnect or remove the power to the
collector ring before attempting to perform any service function.
Do not use this collector ring with electrical loads greater than the rated current and voltage of the
collector ring.
OperationalandMaintenanceWarnings
Collector rings must be enclosed or otherwise protected from contact by any personnel. Means for
the provision of this protection is the responsibility of the user.
All fasteners or hardware should be cheeked periodically to assure tightness. Care should be
exercised when handling the collector ring while servicing, adjusting or during operation.
WARNING: Modification of this equipment may cause excessive wear and void warranty.
Modification may cause safety and fire hazards. Contact manufacturer regarding change or
modifications of equipment that could affect reliability or safety.
Operation
1. Collector rings may be installed with either the brush stud assembly or the slip ring core rotating.
One of these two units should be stationary.
Installation
1. Install the slip ring assembly on a shaft and lock it in place with set screws in the drive collar.
2. On a standard collector ring installation, screw the brush stud in place at proper center distance.
Place the brush assembly in place and secure the clamp bolt. Be sure the brush box is located so
that the top of the brush is parallel with the top of the brush box. Brush sides should not be in
contact with the walls of the insulator ring.
3. Make connections at lugs on brush holders and ends of lead wires or bus bar. Be sure
connections on brush assemblies do not interfere with or exert tension on the brush holders. It is
recommended that flexible wire be used for brush and core terminations.
Maintenance
1. General
(a) Periodic inspection and adjustment are essential to the maintenance of a collector ring
assembly. Proper care of brushes, brush rigging, rings and current collection parts is a
fundamental necessity for satisfactory performance of a collector ring assembly.
(b) Environmental conditions affect the performance of the collector ring. Periodic
inspection of the enclosure is essential maintenance of the collector ring assembly.
(c) The upper and lower bearings of the enclosure should be greased every 40 hours of
operation.
2. CollectorRingInspectionandAdjustment
(a) Brush Rigging
(1) Brush studs are supported between (2) outboard bearings. The brush studs extend
through the outboard bearings and a setscrew in the outboard bearing secures them.
The setscrews prevent rotation of the brush stud. The setscrews should be checked
for tightness. Some collector ring assemblies are furnished with additional brush
stud anti-rotation devices. These devices are located on the outboard side of the
outboard bearings. They incorporate an additional setscrew to prevent brush stud
rotation. The additional setscrew must also be checked for tightness.
(2) The spacing between the outboard bearings is critical to assure the free rotation of
the brush rigging. The brush stud insulator sleeves are cut to length in order to
provide the proper spacing. The outboard bearings should be located snuggly against
the insulator sleeve without any deformation of the materials. Hand tighten the
outboard jam nuts and then secure the brush stud with the setscrews referred to in
2.(a)(1). CAUTION: Do not over-tighten the outboard jam nuts. Overtightening can
preload the bearings and cause excessive rotation friction. A final check should be
made to assure no binding of outboard brush rigging or binding of brushes with
insulator barriers.
(b) Brush Holders
(1) Inspect brush holders for proper alignment. Brush holders should be located so that
the entire brush contact surface rides squarely on the ring with the brush moving
freely in the brush box. The top of the brush should be parallel with the top of the
brush box.
(2) Brush holder clamps should be checked for tightness. Clamp bolts should be set at
40-45 lbs.-in (75 lbs.-in maximum). Loose clamps will allow the brush holder to
rotate, causing the brush to lift from the surface of the ring. Brush lift will cause
arcing and excessive heat concentration.
(3) Brush terminations at the holder should be inspected to assure that no external force
is imposed on the holder that would cause rotation of the holder on the stud. Flexible
or soft wire leads are recommended for these terminations. External clamps should
be used to support the entire weight of the leads.
(4) A final check should be made to assure that the brush studs cannot rotate. See 2(a).
(c) Brushes
(1) Inspect for wear. If the distance from the top of the brush to the top of the brush
box is over half the depth of the brush box, the brush should be replaced.
(2) Inspect brush contact surface by removing the brush and checking the brush surface
for dirt, oxidation, pitting or other contaminants, Remove any large particles and
follow seating instructions in paragraph 2.(c)(3).
(3) Check brush contact surface for proper seating. If the seating is not proper, the
contact surface will be tracked differently in different areas. To reseat the brushes,
lay a piece of sandpaper between the ring and the brush. Install the brush in the
brush holder in proper alignment and rotate the core while applying pressure on the
brush. If the core cannot be rotated, the sandpaper must be pulled across the brush
surface. Wrap sandpaper at least 180 around the ring to prevent rounding of the
brush edges. Recheck the brush contact surface and repeat the sanding process if
necessary until the entire contact surface appears uniform and without pits.
CAUTION: Do not use emery paper or cloth to seat brushes: the emery will
become embedded in the brush and continue abrading the ring and brush. Also,
emery and many other abrasives are conductive, and so must not be used.
(d) Brush Springs
(1) Inspect and test springs for proper tension. The brush tension springs should be set
at 1.5-3.0 lbs. per spring and as uniform as possible. Uniform settings for each
brush prevent selective action by which certain brushes carry more or less than their
share of the load. Insufficient brush pressure can cause loss of contact and
overtension can cause excessive brush and ring wear.
(2) The spring tension should be periodically tested on all brushes to assure uniform
brush tension. Test for tension as shown in Figure 1. See paragraph 5(b) for spring
tension adjustment.
(e) Rings
(1) Inspect the ring surface for dirt, oxidation or other contaminants. A properly
operating ring will have a film that appears burnished in color where the brushes
track with a darker surrounding color. If this condition does not exist, cleaning will
be necessary.
(2) The ring should be cleaned with a non-conductive abrasive such as Ideal Industries'
Flexible Abrasive for collector rings. Hold the abrasive against the ring with a
medium amount of pressure while turning the core. If the core cannot be turned, the
abrasive must be rubbed over the ring. Continue this process until the ring surface
is polished without any dirt or contaminants left on the surface. To prevent abrasive
from being lodged in the brushes, they should be lifted off the ring.
(3) Inspect rings for pitting. Pitting of the ring must be corrected since pits will produce
arcing, leading to the development of larger and more pits. Small pits can be
removed by hand stoning of the area. If large pits and/or a considerable amount of
pits are present on the surface, the surface must be machined. Machining is also
necessary if concentricity of the surface is questionable. When stoning or
machining rings, remove only enough material to eradicate the pits. Again, the
brushes should be lifted from the surface when stoning or machining. Finish the
ring surface to a 16-32 micro finish as described in 2(e)(2).
(f) Electrical Connections
(1) Inspect all electrical connections for corrosion and tightness. Clean corroded parts
with a wire brush and/or muriatic acid. Loose and/or corroded terminations will
cause a concentration of excessive heat.
3. EnclosureInspection
(a) Moisture is a major cause of collector ring deterioration. Corrosion of parts and insulation
breakdown can be attributed to the presence of water. Dust and dirt present within the
enclosure will affect the proper operation of the assembly. Most dusts cause excessive
brush and collector ring wear and conductive dusts, if allowed to accumulate, will form a
path for short-circuiting.
(b) The Seatrax enclosure is dust and watertight; however, condensation may still form on the
walls of the enclosure. In some environments, condensation can be eliminated with the
addition of a breather or drain. In other environments, particularly offshore, a
thermostatically controlled heater - or a even a simple light bulb - can be used to eliminate
condensation.
(c) Periodic inspection should include removing the enclosure and checking for condensation,
water and dust collection. If contaminants are found, the enclosure and the assembly
should be wiped down with a lint free cloth. If the problem persists, steps should be taken
to remedy the leakage or condensation problem.
4. FrequencyofInspections
(a) The first inspection should be made shortly after installation and before operation.
Continuing inspections should be made on a regular basis after every 200-400 hours
of operation under normal conditions.
5. RemovingandReplacingBrushesAndSpringTensionScrews
(a) Brush holders with non-adjustable spring tension (Figure 2)
(1) Pull spring free end (B) out of brush holder recess and slide spring off of fixed
hub (A).
(2) Unscrew binder screw (C) and take off brush shunt connector (D) and remove
brush (E). Install new brush, reversing above procedure.
(b) Brush holders with adjustable spring tension (Figure 3)
(1) Release spring tension on the brush spring by holding the spring tension screw
with a screw driver at slot (A) and loosening spring tension nut on opposite
side. Do not completely remove the nut, just loosen it. Screws can be adjusted
with 9/32 wrench without removal from stud.
(2) Pull spring (B) up and out of the way and unscrew binder screw (C). Take off
brush shunt connector (D) and remove brush (E).
(3) Install new brush, reversing above procedure.
(4) Tension is applied on brush spring by holding nut with wrench and turning
screw with screw driven clockwise until inner coils are tight. Back off 1/4
turn, then tighten the nut. Spring should have a minimum of one (1) pound
pull at the brush. See paragraph 2.(d)(1).
(5) To replace brush spring tension screw (A), simply take spring tension screw
nut off and pull the screw and spring out of the holes in brush holder (F). Use
above steps in reverse order to replace spring tension screw.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04mayo2011
Ensamblajedelanillocolector/deslizamiento
Instalacinymantenimiento
Nos.deParteTN4092yTN4107
Informacingeneral
Este manual de operaciones pretende ser una gua para el uso,
mantenimiento y administracin de los nmeros de parte Seatrax
mencionadas anteriormente. Las diferencias entre los nmeros de
pieza se encuentran principalmente en el nmero total de anillos y la
capacidad en amperios de cada anillo.
Personal de mantenimiento debidamente entrenado que han ledo y
entendido este manual deben ser autorizados a mantener y / o hacer
un trabajo sobre o dentro del colector. Consulte en todo momento a
los siguientes "Advertencias y precauciones generales de seguridad".
Advertenciasyprecaucionesdeseguridad
Precaucionesgenerales
Personas de mantenimiento deben ser entrenadas y entender los
riesgos antes de realizar cualquier trabajo en el interior del
colector.
Antes de retirar las tapas del colector estar seguros de que el poder
se ha apagado y que los principales cables de alimentacin estn
conectados a tierra con dispositivos de puesta a tierra.
Debe haber una persona especfica responsable de desconectar la
alimentacin y la garanta de que no se vuelva a conectar,
mientras que el trabajo se realiza en el interior del colector.
Antes de tocar componentes de conductores (por ejemplo, anillos deslizantes, barras conductoras,
cepillos de carbono), siempre revise con un instrumento adecuado para asegurarse que no hay
poder en el sistema.
Seales de advertencia "High Voltage" se colocan en las portadas para advertir del peligro.
Se puede usar un candado en las cubiertas si es necesario.
Si los calentadores o interruptores de lmite se suministran por el anillo colector, stos an pueden
tener poder en los terminales, incluso si el interruptor principal est apagado.
Cuando se trabaja con o dentro de la unidad del anillo deslizante, asegrese de que la gra o
SlipRing_TN4092TN4107_SPAMX_R00.doc Pgina1of7
mquina no se puedan girar. Tenga en cuenta el riesgo de exprimir cuando la mquina gira. Si
durante el mantenimiento del colector debe girar, mantngase alejado de las partes mviles.
Advertenciaselctricas
El anillo colector debe ser conectado con la unidad en la que est instalado y toda la unidad a tierra de
acuerdo con el Cdigo Elctrico Nacional y los cdigos y ordenanzas locales.
PELIGRO: Riesgo de descarga elctrica o quemaduras. Siempre desconectar o quitar el poder al
anillo colector antes de intentar realizar cualquier funcin de servicio.
No use este anillo colector con carga elctrica mayor que la corriente y la tensin del anillo
colector nominal.
Advertenciasdeusoymantenimiento
Anillos colectores deben estar encerrados o no protegidos del contacto con cualquier miembro del personal.
Los medios para la prestacin de esta proteccin es responsabilidad del usuario.
Todos los sujetadores o tornillos deben revisarse peridicamente para asegurar que estn
debidamente apretados. Se debe tener cuidado al manipular el anillo colector, mientras se le da
mantenimiento, ajuste o durante el funcionamiento.
ADVERTENCIA: La modificacin de este equipo puede causar un desgaste excesivo y anular la
garanta. La modificacin puede causar riesgos de seguridad y contra incendios. Comunquese con
el fabricante sobre el cambio o modificacin del equipo que puedan afectar la fiabilidad o
seguridad.
Operacin
1. Anillos colectores se pueden instalar, ya sea con el conjunto de perno del cepillo de carbono o el
ncleo del anillo deslizante giratorio. Una de estas dos unidades debe estar sin movimiento.
Instalacin
1. Instale la unidad de anillo deslizante en un eje y fijarlo en su lugar con tornillos de fijacin
(Opresores Allen) en el cuello duro.
2. En una instalacin estndar de anillo colector, atornille el perno del cepillo de carbono en su
lugar a una distancia del centro adecuado. Coloque el conjunto del cepillo de carbono en su lugar
y asegure el tornillo de la abrazadera. Asegrese de que la caja de escobillas este situada de
manera que la parte superior del cepillo de carbono es paralela a la parte superior de la caja de
escobillas. Lados del cepillo de carbono no deben estar en contacto con las paredes del anillo
aislante.
3. Haga las conexiones a los terminales en los porta escobillas y extremos de cables o barras.
Asegrese de que las conexiones en conjuntos de escobillas no interfieran con o ejercer la tensin
en los porta escobillas. Se recomienda cable flexible se utiliza para el cepillo de carbono y el
ncleo de terminaciones.
Mantenimiento
1. Generales
(a) La inspeccin y los ajustes peridicos son esenciales para el mantenimiento de un
conjunto de anillo colector. El cuidado adecuado de los cepillos de carbono, escobillas,
anillos y piezas de coleccin actuales es una necesidad fundamental para la buena
ejecucin de un conjunto de anillo colector.
(b) Las condiciones ambientales afectan el rendimiento del anillo colector. Inspeccin
peridica de la caja es el mantenimiento esencial del conjunto de anillo colector.
(c) Los cojinetes superior e inferior de la caja deben engrasarse cada 40 horas de
funcionamiento.
2. Inspeccinyajustedelanillocolector
(a) Levantamiento de cepillo de carbono
(1) El perno del cepillo de carbono esta soportado entre (2) rodamientos exteriores. El
perno del cepillo de carbono se extiende a travs de los rodamientos exteriores y un
tornillo (Opresores Allen) en el rodamiento exterior los asegura. Los tornillos
(Opresores Allen) de sujecin evitan la rotacin del perno de cepillo de carbono. Los
tornillos se deben revisar para asegurarse que estn apretados. Algunos conjuntos de
anillos colectores estn equipados con dispositivos adicionales de antirotacin para
el perno del cepillo de carbono. Estos dispositivos se encuentran en el lado exterior
de los rodamientos exteriores. Se incorpora un tornillo (Opresores Allen) adicional
para evitar la rotacin del perno del cepillo de carbono. El tornillo (Opresores Allen)
de ajuste adicional tambin se debe revisar para asegurarse que estn apretados.
(2) El espacio entre los rodamientos exteriores es crtico para asegurar la libre rotacin
de porta escobillas. Las mangas aisladores del perno del cepillo de carbono se cortan
a la longitud con el fin de proporcionar la separacin adecuada. Los cojinetes
exteriores deben estar situados cmodamente contra la manga aislante sin ninguna
deformacin de los materiales. Apriete a mano las tuercas de bloqueo fuera de borda
y luego asegure el perno del cepillo de carbono con los tornillos (Opresores Allen)
de fijacin que se refiere el 2. (A) (1). PRECAUCIN: No apriete demasiado las
tuercas de fuera de borda. El apriete excesivo puede sobrecargar los rodamientos y
causar friccin excesiva de rotacin. Una revisin final debe hacerse para asegurar
que no haya ataduras de escobillas fuera de borda o ataduras de cepillos de carbono
con barreras aislantes.
(b) Sujetadores de cepillos de carbono
(1) Inspeccione los sujetadores de cepillos de carbono para la alineacin apropiada. Los
sujetadores de cepillos de carbono deben estar situados de forma que toda la
superficie del cepillo de carbono tenga un buen contacto directamente sobre el anillo
movindose libremente en la caja de escobillas. La parte superior del cepillo de
carbono debe ser paralela a la parte superior de la caja de escobillas.
(2) Las abrazaderas de los sujetadores de cepillos de carbono deben revisarse que estn
bien apretados. Tornillos de las abrazaderas deben fijarse en 40-45 lb.-in ( 75-in
mximo). Abrazaderas sueltas pueden permitir que los sujetadores de cepillo paren
de rotar, haciendo que el cepillo de carbono se levante de la superficie del anillo. Si
el cepillo se levanta causar chispas y concentracin de calor excesivo.
(3) Las terminaciones en los sujetadores de cepillo de carbono deben ser inspeccionados
para asegurar que ninguna fuerza externa se impone que podra causar la rotacin del
sujetador del perno. Se recomiendan cables flexibles o hilos suaves para estas
terminaciones. Abrazaderas externas se deben utilizar para soportar todo el peso de
las terminaciones.
(4) Una comprobacin final debera hacerse para asegurar que el perno del cepillo de
carbono no pueda girar. Ver 2 (a).
(c) Cepillos de carbono
(1) Inspeccione si hay desgaste. Si la distancia desde la parte superior de la escobilla a
la parte superior de la caja de escobillas es ms de la mitad de la profundidad de la
caja de escobillas, el cepillo debe ser reemplazado.
(2) Inspeccione la superficie de contacto de la escobilla quitando la maleza y el control
de la superficie del cepillo como suciedad, oxidacin, picaduras u otros
contaminantes, eliminar las partculas grandes y siga las instrucciones de asientos en
el prrafo 2. (C) (3).
(3) Revise la superficie de contacto del cepillo de carbono para el asiento adecuado. Si
los asientos no son correctos, la superficie de contacto realizar un seguimiento de
manera diferente en diferentes reas. Para volver a colocar las escobillas, coloque un
trozo de papel de lija entre el anillo y el cepillo de carbono. Instale el cepillo en el
sujetador del cepillo en la alineacin adecuada y gire el ncleo, mientras que la
aplicacin de presin este sobre el cepillo. Si el ncleo no se puede girar, el papel de
lija debe ser tirado a travs de la superficie del cepillo. Envuelva el papel de lija al
menos 180 alrededor de la pista para evitar el redondeo de los bordes del cepillo.
Vuelva a comprobar la superficie de contacto del cepillo y repetir el proceso de
lijado si es necesario hasta que la superficie de contacto aparece uniforme y sin
pozos.
PRECAUCIN: No use papel de lija de rollo o de tela para asentar las escobillas:
la lija ser incrustada en el cepillo y continuara lijando el anillo y el cepillo.
Adems, este tipo de lija y muchos otros abrasivos son conductores, por lo que no
deben ser utilizados.
(d) Resortes de cepillo de carbono
(1) Inspeccionar y probar resortes de la tensin adecuada. Los resortes de tensin del
cepillo deben ajustarse al 1.5-3.0 lbs. por resorte y lo ms uniforme posible. Valores
uniformes para cada cepillo de carbono impiden accin selectiva por el cual ciertos
cepillos llevan ms o menos parte de la carga que otros. Presin del cepillo
insuficiente puede causar la prdida de contacto y sobretensin puede causar el
desgaste excesivo de los cepillos y anillos.
(2) La tensin del muelle debe ser probado peridicamente en todos los cepillos para
asegurar la tensin del cepillo uniforme. Prueba de tensin como se muestra en la
Figura 1. Vase el prrafo 5 (b) para el ajuste de la tensin del resorte.
(e) Anillos
(1) Inspeccione la superficie del anillo como suciedad, oxidacin u otros contaminantes.
Un anillo que funcione correctamente tendr una pelcula que aparece como bruido
donde los cepillos rotan con un color oscuro alrededor. Si esta condicin no existe,
ser necesario limpiarlo.
(2) El anillo debe ser limpiado con un abrasivo no conductor, como abrasivo flexible
Ideal para la industria de anillos colectores. Mantenga el abrasivo contra el anillo
con una cantidad media de la presin mientras se gira el ncleo. Si el ncleo no se
puede rotar, el abrasivo se debe frotarse al anillo. Continuar este proceso hasta que
la superficie del anillo se pula sin ninguna suciedad o contaminantes a la izquierda
en la superficie. Para evitar que el abrasivo se presente en los cepillos de carbono,
deben ser levantados del anillo.
(3) Inspeccione los anillos de picaduras. Las picaduras del anillo deben ser corregidas
desde que empieza a producirn chispas, lo que lleva al desarrollo de picaduras
mucho ms grandes. Las picaduras pequeas pueden ser removidas por lapidacin
en el rea. Si grandes picaduras y / o una cantidad considerable de picaduras estn
presentes en la superficie, la superficie debe ser maquinada. El maquinado tambin
es necesario si la concentricidad de la superficie es cuestionable. Cuando se haga
una lapidacin o maquinado en los anillos, debe eliminarse slo el material
suficiente para erradicar las picaduras. Una vez ms, los cepillos de carbono deben
ser levantadas de la superficie cuando se haga la lapidacin o un maquinado.
Finalizar la superficie del anillo a acabado de 16-32 de micro como se describe en 2
(e) (2).
(f) Conexiones elctricas
(1) Inspeccione todas las conexiones elctricas de la corrosin y que todo este
debidamente apretado. Limpie las piezas corrodas con un cepillo de alambre y / o
cido muritico. Terminaciones sueltas y / o corrodas provocar una concentracin
de calor excesivo.
3. Inspeccindecaja
(a) La humedad es una de las principales causas del deterioro de anillo colector. La corrosin de las
piezas y la rotura del aislamiento se pueden atribuir a la presencia de agua. El polvo y la suciedad
presente en el recinto afectarn el funcionamiento del ensamblaje. La mayora de los polvos que
causan desgaste excesivo de las escobillas y anillos colectores y polvos conductores, si se
acumulan, se puede formar un cortocircuito.
(b) Las tapas de las cajas Seatrax estn selladas y apretadas para prevenir la entrada de polvo y
agua, sin embargo, an puede formar condensacin en las paredes de la caja. En algunos
entornos, la condensacin puede ser eliminada con la adicin de un respiradero o drenaje.
En otros ambientes, todo en alta mar, un calentador con termostato o incluso una simple
bombilla con luz se puede utilizar para eliminar la condensacin.
(c) La inspeccin peridica debe incluir remover la caja y revisar si hay condensacin, el agua
y recoleccin de polvo. Si se encuentran los contaminantes, la caja y el montaje se deben
limpiar con un pao sin pelusa. Si el problema persiste, se deben tomar medidas para
remediar el problema de las fugas o condensacin.
4. Frecuenciadeinspeccin
(a) La primera inspeccin debe hacerse poco despus de la instalacin y antes de la operacin.
Continuas inspecciones deben hacerse en forma regular despus de cada 200-400 horas de
funcionamiento en condiciones normales.
5. Removimientoyreemplazodecepillosdecarbonoytornillode
tensindelresorte
(a) Sujetadores de cepillo de carbono con la tensin del muelle no ajustable (Figura 2).
(1) Tire el resorte de lado de terminacin (B) tire hacia afuera del descanso del
sujetador deslizando el resorte fuera del cubo fijo (A).
(2) Remueva el tornillo, (C) remueva el terminal del cepillo de carbono (D) y remueva
el cepillo de carbono (E). Instale el cepillo de carbono nuevo, invirtiendo el
procedimiento anterior.
(b) Sujetadores de cepillo con tensin de resorte ajustable (Figura 3)
(1) Afloje la tensin del resorte en el cepillo de carbono con en el resorte de la

escobilla sujetando el tornillo de tensin del resorte con un destornillador en la
ranura (A) y afloje la tuerca de tensin del resorte en el lado opuesto. No quite
completamente la tuerca, solo afljela. Los tornillos se pueden ajustar con una
llave 9/32 " sin la eliminacin del perno.
(2) Tire del muelle (B) hacia arriba y squelo del lugar y desenrosque el tornillo
(C) remueva el terminal del cepillo de carbono (D) y remueva el cepillo de
carbono (E).
(3) Instale el cepillo de carbono nuevo, invirtiendo el procedimiento anterior.
(4) Se aplica tensin en el resorte del cepillo sujetando la tuerca con la llave y
girando el tornillo en direccin del reloj hasta que las bobinas interiores estn
bien apretados. Regrese el tornillo 1/4 de vuelta y apriete la tuerca. El resorte
debera tener un mnimo de una (1) libra de tiro en el cepillo. Vase el punto 2.
(D) (1).
(5) Para reemplazar el tornillo de tensin del resorte (A), simplemente remueva la
tuerca del muelle de tensin y desenchufe el tornillo y el resorte de los agujeros
en el soporte del cepillo (F). Utilice los pasos anteriores en orden inverso para
sustituir el tornillo de tensin del resorte.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
23June2010
EmergencySlewingProcedure
ForAllSeriesCranes
This Seatrax crane is capable of being rotated without power from the prime mover. This
emergency slewing process is very slow and should only be used if no other method is available.
Seatrax offers an Emergency Lowering Device which provides emergency back-up power for load
lowering and slewing in the event of a prime mover failure. The E.L.D. system may be retrofitted to
any crane; please contact our Service Department for details.
1. Remove all slew motors and all but one brake (each brake assembly is directly below the motor)
from the slew gearboxes. In most instances, all hoses may remain connected.
2. On the remaining slew brake, locate the top hose fitting. Disconnect the existing hose and attach a
hand pump with gauge to the brake.
3. Insert a splined hand crank (available from the Seatrax parts dept.) into the spline on top of each
gearbox.
NOTE: For cranes equipped with a pancake gear reducer (P/N 20078 in the General Bill of
Materials section of Data Book 1), removing it will decrease the number of revolutions required
but significantly increase the torque required to slew the crane.
Figure 1. Revolutions Required to Slew Crane Through 90 Rotation

CraneSeries Revolutions CraneSeries Revolutions
S48 550 42 491
S56 601 48 576
S72 805 60 592
S90 944 72,80 826
S108 1,165 90 582
S126* 2,367 105* 2,000
S127* 1,358 115 1,020
70P 616 126* 2,367
90P 761 36SB,42SB 491
S140P,S230P 805 7200DR 1,468
*Duetothehighnumberofrevolutionsorsubstantialeffortrequiredfora90rotation,Seatraxsuggestsattachingan
auxiliaryhydraulicpowerunittoonemotorandremovingtheremainingmotorsandbrakes.
4. Release the slew brake by pumping 300 to 500 psi into the line.
5. Turn all hand cranks clockwise for slewing to right, and counterclockwise to slew left.
6. The required torque in mild conditions will be approximately 25-50 ft. lbs. In high wind or listing
conditions, a slew torque of 75 to 100 ft. lbs. could be required.
7. When the desired position is reached, release the pressure at the hand pump to set the slew brake.
8. Reinstall and check all items that were removed once slewing becomes possible.
EmerSlewAll_R07.doc Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
23dejuniode2010
Procedimientodegirodeemergencia
Paratodaslasseriesdegras
Las gra Seatrax son capaces de girar sin alimentacin de la mquina motriz. Este proceso de giro de
emergencia es muy lento y slo se debe utilizar si no hay otro mtodo disponible.
Seatrax ofrece un dispositivo de descenso de emergencia que proporciona energa de emergencia de respaldo
para reducir la carga y la orientacin en el caso de fallo de motor primario. El sistema E.L.D. puede ser
adaptado a cualquier gra, por favor pngase en contacto con nuestro Departamento de Servicio para los
detalles.
1. Remueva todos los motores de giro y todos los frenos menos uno (cada conjunto de freno est directamente
debajo del motor) en las cajas de engrane de giro. En la mayora de los casos, todas las mangueras pueden
permanecer conectados.
2. En el freno de giro restante, localice la conexin de la manguera superior. Desconecte la manguera existente
y conecte una bomba manual con manmetro para el freno.
3. Inserte una manivela ranurada (disponible en Seatrax departamento de partes.) En la ranura en la parte
superior de cada caja de engranaje.
NOTA: Para las gras equipadas con un reductor de engranajes (P/N 20078 en la Lista general de
materiales seccin de Libro de Datos 1), quitndolo disminuir el nmero de revoluciones requerido pero
aumenta significativamente el torque necesario para mover la gra.
Figura1.Lasrevolucionesrequeridasparamoverlagra90derotacin
Seriesdegra Revoluciones Seriesdegra Revoluciones
S48 550 42 491
S56 601 48 576
S72 805 60 592
S90 944 72,80 826
S108 1,165 90 582
S126* 2,367 105* 2,000
S127* 1,358 115 1,020
70P 616 126* 2,367
90P 761 36SB,42SB 491
S140P,S230P 805 7200DR 1,468
*Debidoalaltonmeroderevolucionesoesfuerzosustancialparaunarotacinde90,Seatraxsugiereconectaruna
unidaddepotenciahidrulicaauxiliarparaelmotoryeliminarremoverlosrestantesmotoresyfrenos.
4. Suelte el freno de giro mediante el bombeo de entre 300 y 500 psi en la lnea.
5. Gire todas las manivelas hacia la derecha para girar a la derecha y hacia la izquierda para girar a la
izquierda.
6. El torque necesario en condiciones suaves ser de aproximadamente 25-50 lbs. En condiciones de fuerte
viento o perfil, un torque de giro de 75 a 100 lbs. podra ser necesario.
7. Cuando se alcanza la posicin deseada, libere la presin de la bomba de mano para fijar el freno de giro.
8. Vuelva a instalar y comprobar todos los artculos que fueron retirados una vez que se hace posible el giro.
EmerSlewAll_R07_spamx.doc Pgina1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
29July2008
EmergencyLoadLoweringProcedure
VariableDisplacementLoadHoistPump
In the event of power loss leaving a load suspended, Seatrax crane hoists utilizing a variable
displacement system are equipped to allow emergency load lowering.
TOOLS: (2x) 1-1/8 & (1x) 1-1/2 wrench, (1) hammer, (2) 10mm Allen wrenches (hex key), and
proper safety equipment
Retrieve the Brake Release Tool attached to the lower left side of the boom hoist frame. NOTE: If tool is
missing, a 3/4" UNC threaded rod about 1 foot long with a flat washer and nut may be substituted.
PROCEDURE Brake
1. Close all hydraulic suction shut off valves. Release
2. Go to hoist that need to be lowered and ensure that the brake band is fully FlatWasher
Tool
set. And
3. Remove spring side cap of motor control valve (on rear of hydraulic motor) Nut
4. Remove spool assembly from motor control valve.
5. Reinstall spring side cap.
6. Ensure that all hydraulic hoses are connected. Plugged hoses or fittings can
be harmful to personnel or equipment!
7. Open all hydraulic suction shut off valves.
8. Remove Boss plug in top of brake actuator cylinder.
9. Install nut and flat washer on Brake Release Tool. Insert brake release tool into BossPlug
brake cylinder and thread into hole in top of brake piston.
10. Slide down flat washer, and thread nut down until snug.
11. Hold rod from rotating while turning nut clockwise. This will pull the piston
and rod up, thereby releasing the brake. CAUTION:Duringthisstep,tapbrake
bandwithahammertoavoidasuddenrelease.
12. As hoist begins to turn, turn nut counterclockwise to slow it down or stop. Turn
it clockwise to release or increase the speed. DO NOT LOWER LOAD
RAPIDLY; lower it slowly, at a rate of approximately 1 to 3 drum revolutions
per minute.
13. When load has been lowered and released, remove tool and replace Boss plug.
14. Close all hydraulic suction shut off valves.
15. Remove spring side cap of motor control valve and reinstall spool assembly.
16. Reinstall spring side cap of motor control valve.
17. Open all hydraulic suction shut off valves.
18. Once the crane is back in service ensure that there are no hydraulic leaks.
Figure 1. Motor Control Valve
EmerLoadLower_Variable_R03.doc Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
29dejuliodel2008
Procedimientoparabajarunacargaenemergencia
Sistemadedesplazamientovariable
Si se pierde la fuerza de energa y la carga se queda suspendida los aparejos de carga de Seatrax estn equipados
para permitir bajar la carga en una emergencia.
La herramienta para liberar el freno se encuentra atornillada en el lado inferior izquierdo de la
estructura del aparejo de izaje de la pluma. NOTA: Si la herramienta falta, puede sustituirla por una
varilla roscada de 3/4 UNC de 12 pulgadas de largo, una tuerca y una rondana plana.
Herramienta
Herramientas necesarias: (2x) 1 1/8 (1x) 1 1/2 llaves, (1x) martillo, (2x) Rondana paraLiberarel
10mm (1x) llaves Allen (exagonales) y equipo de seguridad apropiada. Planay Freno
1. Cierre todas las vlvulas de succin del tanque hidrulico. Tuerca
2. Dirjase al aparejo que necesita bajar la carga.
3. Remueva la tapa cuadrada lateral del resorte en la vlvula de control del motor.
(parte posterior del motor).
4. Remueva el eje de ensamblaje de la vlvula de control del motor.
5. Reinstale la tapa lateral cuadrada del resorte. Tapn
6. Asegrese que todas las mangueras estn conectadas.
7. Abra todas las vlvulas de succin del tanque hidrulico.
8. Remueva el tapn Boss en la parte superior del cilindro del freno.
9. Instale la tuerca y la rondana plana en la Herramienta para liberar el freno. Inserte
la herramienta por la parte superior del cilindro del freno y enrsquela en la parte
superior del pistn del freno.
10. Deslice la rondana plana hacia abajo y enrosque la tuerca hacia abajo, hasta que
este ajustada.
11. Sujete la varilla roscada para evitar que de vuelta, mientras gira la tuerca con las
manecillas del reloj. El mecanismo consiste en estirar el pistn hacia arriba para
entonces liberar el freno. PRECAUCION: En este paso, golpee con un
martillo la banda del freno en el tambor para evitar una liberacin
repentina.
12. Cuando el aparejo de izaje empiece a girar, gire la tuerca encontra de las
manecillas del reloj para hacer girar el tambor lentamente y despus parar el
tambor por completo. Gire la tuerca con las manecillas del reloj para liberar el
freno e incrementar la velocidad. No baje la carga muy rpido. Baje la carga
despacio de 1 a 3 revoluciones por minuto.
13. Cuando la carga este abajo y liberada, reemplazca la herramienta por el tapn.
14. Cierre todas las vlvulas de succin del tanque hidrulico.
15. Remueva la tapa lateral cuadrada, al lado del resorte en la
vlvula de control del motor y reinstale el eje de
ensamblaje.
16. Reinstale la tapa cudrada del resorte al lado del motor.
17. Abra todas las vlvulas de succin del tanque hidrulico.
18. Una vez que este la gra en servicio, asegrese no tenga
ninguna fuga de aceite hidrulico.
PROCEDIMIENTOSPARABAJARCARGAENEMERGENCIAPOR
DEBAJODELASGRAFICASDECARGA
EmerLoadLower_Variable_R03_spamx.doc Pgina1of1
Section/Seccin4 ________________________
GeneralDocumentation Documentacingeneral
General Assembly Asamblea general
C.G. Components Componentes de centro de gravedad
Boom General Arrangement Disposicin general de la pluma
Electrical One-Line Diagram Esquema elctrico
Electrical Schematic and Bill of Material Esquema elctrico y lista de materiales
Hydraulic Schematic Esquema hidrulico
Hydraulic Hose Diagram and Bill of Esquema hidrulico y lista de materiales
Material
Kingpost Interface Dibujo de interfase del poste central
Preservation Procedure Procedimientos de preservacin
Two Year Spares List Lista de partes de repuesto para dos aos
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-301 Rev. 1 01/10/13
PreservationProcedureNEWCraneDirecttoStorage
DieselPrimeMover
Introduction
Newly-built Seatrax cranes that will be stored for less than nine (9) months require no special
preservation steps other than disconnecting batteries and charging them periodically.
NOTE: refer to the engine manufacturers manual for any preservation steps or timetables specific
to the prime mover.
Cranes which will be stored for nine (9) months or more require certain preservation steps, periodic
monitoring and remediation as-necessary. Sunlight (UV), moisture and dust do not affect the crane
during normal operation, but inactivity for long periods can cause deterioration of various items.
The below table summarizes preservation steps for less than nine months vs. nine months or longer:
Action
StorageDuration Crane PrimeMover
Disconnectorremovebatteriesandcharge
Lessthannine(9) weekly
months Refertoengine
Nootheractionrequired.
manufacturersmanual
Followguidelineswithinthisdocument forpreservation
Nine(9)monthsor Inspectmonthlyfortarpplacementand information.
longer signsofdeteriorationordamage.Repeat
preservationproceduresasneeded.
The following procedures and recommendations govern the preservation of Seatrax cranes for periods
of nine months or longer.
Reference
Please refer to the following sections of Data Book 1:
Operating Instructions
Inspection and Maintenance
Prime Mover Manual Engine manufacturers maintenance manual.
Lubrication
Page1of4
EquipmentNeeded
Volatile corrosion inhibitor (VCI) oil (Customer Preference)
Cosmoline and brush
Grease gun & grease (Customer Preference)
Desiccant (e.g., silica gel) bags
Cheese cloth
General hand tools
Tarps, as required
PreparationforStorage
Make a master packing list of all items being prepared for storage. Any item removed must have a
tag noting its original position. Specifically note what has been done and where removed parts
have been placed. Place this list in a safe and conspicuous place so it can be used to prepare the
crane for its return to service.
Kingpost
If kingpost has not yet been welded to platform, then store it on two cradles made of 12 timbers.
Prior to any preservation of the machined areas, the steel should be prepared to remove any surface
rust. This process is done using buffing and Scotch-Brite to restore the metal finish leaving no
evidence of corrosion or contaminants.
Once this process is completed, brush apply a liberal coat of anti-corrosion (Cosmoline) Rust-Veto
342 or equivalent (Daubert Cromwell) - Non Rust 3100G.
Shrink wrap using (Daubert Cromwell) PMG XO wrap on both hemisphere hemi-head and 14
bearing surface machined onto bullgear, then seal outer edges of shrink wrap using (Dr Shrink)
heat shrink tape.
DieselEngine/EngineHouse
Engine preservation requirements and timetables vary by manufacturer. Refer to the engine
manufacturers storage procedure in the Prime Mover Manual section of Data Book 1 for
guidelines specific to your engine.
Engine radiator: check capacity coolant system and - if required - add supplemental coolant
additive (SCA) by volume. NOTE: some manufacturers discourage introducing SCA into a
cooling system that already contains an extended life coolant.
Engine air inlet (cleaner): remove cover, place one (1) desiccant bag inside and replace cover.
Engine exhaust outlet: remove flex pipe from roof hatch, protect end with shrink-wrap and position
towards floor.
Engine house: place large desiccant bags inside. Any large openings, including the louver panel
and hatch, should be closed using a suitable crating material.
Batteries: If possible, remove the batteries and use them in another application. Alternatively, place
them in storage where they can be inspected and charged periodically. If the batteries are NOT
removed, clean the tops, charge them fully and disconnect them before covering with plastic.
Page2of4
GearboxesandPumpDrive
Remove vent caps from all gearboxes and day tanks and replace with pipe plugs.
If the crane is to be stored for nine months or more, add the correct percentage of VCI oil by
volume to the gearboxes and pump drive. If necessary, drain gear oil in order to add sufficient VCI
oil. The evaporation and condensing process of the VCI oil offers full protection to surfaces that
cannot be reached with preservatives requiring direct application. (NOTE: It is also easier to clean
when removing the crane from storage. Simply run the crane to operating temperature and VCI oil
vaporizes, leaving the mineral oil base.)
LubeOilTank
Top-off the hydraulic tank (4 below top/6 below filler neck) per the Lubrication section of Data
Book 1; no VCI oil is necessary.
HydraulicHoses
All hydraulic hoses must remain sealed with corresponding SAE J514 male JIC plug/female
JIC cap. Covering hoses with waterproof tarps will protect them against long-term exposure to
UV rays.
Coil hydraulic hoses that run to main/auxiliary hoist in turntable front, then hood box area.
Sheaves,ShaftsandConnectionPins
Protect the Nylatron sheaves from ultraviolet (UV) damage by securing tarps over and around the
sheaves.
Use customer-preferred grease on all bearings and shafts. Rotate bearings while greasing to ensure
a thorough coating.
Coat all exposed and unpainted pins and shafts with Cosmoline or a comparable sealer.
PneumaticSystem
Drain the air tank of all air pressure and condensation. In cold environments, isopropyl alcohol - or
other water-displacing agent - should be added to prevent freezing.
ElectricalJunctionBoxes
Desiccant bags should be placed in all junction boxes or electrical cabinets to reduce moisture
build-up.
Coil and secure all external wire to keep from damage.
Rigging
Upon receipt, treat wire rope spools using the following sequence: apply Cosmoline, Jan wrap,
shrink-wrap and then wood slats around the circumference of the spool. Cover spools with a
waterproof tarp to reduce the heat on the wire rope that may melt lubricant and store elevated from
the ground.
Exterior
The cab air conditioner (if equipped) and windows should be covered with a waterproof tarp. This
will provide UV protection as well as protection from water damage in the event a window is
broken.
Page3of4
Cab enclosure: place desiccant bags inside the electrical enclosure and operators seat armrests,
and close A/C rear panel. Enclose cab using a large hood box including foam liner.
Touch-up scratched paint or rusted areas.
RemovalfromStorage
Refer to the master packing list compiled when the crane was prepared for storage. Ensure all
items on the list have been prepared for service. Reinstall any parts that were removed.
Refer to the engine manufacturers manual for any special procedures regarding removing the
engine from long-term storage.
Inspect all parts for serviceability and order replacements if required.
Ensure that any replacement bolts conform to the Seatrax Specifications for Large Diameter Nuts
and Bolts in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1.
During removal from storage, operators must be cautious not to bend or damage any boom lacing.
Use soft slings to move boom sections.
Remove all coverings from the sheaves, hoist drums, air conditioner and cab. Check all sheaves
for damage.
Reinstall and reconnect fully-charged batteries.
Replace all vents that were removed from the gearboxes and day tanks.
Lubrication
Check hydraulic tank level and inspect for water contamination.
Check all fluid levels and lubricate all grease points per the Lubrication section of Data Book 1.
Ensure that grease fittings are not damaged and take grease properly.
Make sure all sheaves turn freely and that bearings including swing bearings - are thoroughly
greased. Grease hoist bearings and inspect seals.
Upon commissioning, it is NOT necessary to drain and replace the VCI/oil mix from the pump
drive and gearboxes. The VCI oil will vaporize through the vents when the crane is run up to
normal operating temperature:
HydraulicSystem 130190F
DieselEngine 180200F(ortemperaturespecifiedbyenginemanufacturer)
During normal service intervals top off the gearboxes to replace the small amount of vaporized
VCI oil.
Commissioning
Follow the Initial Start-up and Commissioning Procedure, Commissioning Checklist and refer
to the Rigging section of Data Book 1.
When testing the hoists and before reeving rope over sheaves - burn in the brake bands to clean
any rust or scale from the brake drum surface.
Page4of4
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-301 Rev. 1 01/10/13
ProcedimientodepreservacingraNUEVAdirectoal
almacenamiento
Fuerzaprimariadiesel
Introduccin
Gras Seatrax con un ensamblado nuevo se almacenarn por menos de nueve (9) meses y no requieren
medidas especiales de conservacin distintas de desconectar las bateras y cargar peridicamente.
NOTA: Consulte el manual del fabricante del motor para cualquier medida de conservacin o
calendarios especficos para la mquina motriz.
Las gras que se almacenarn durante nueve (9) meses o ms requieren ciertas medidas de
conservacin, el control peridico y la rehabilitacin como sea necesaria. La luz del sol (UV), la
humedad y el polvo no afectan a la gra durante el funcionamiento normal, pero la inactividad durante
largos perodos puede causar deterioro de los diversos elementos.
La siguiente tabla resume los pasos de preservacin de menos de nueve meses vs. unos nueve meses
ms largos:
Duracinde Accin
Almacenamiento Gra FuerzaPrimaria
Desconecte o retire las bateras y crguelas
Menosde(9)meses semanalmente
No requiere de otra accin
Consulte el manual del
Siga las normas contenidas en este fabricante del motor para
documento obtener informacin de
Nueve(9)mesesomas Inspeccione mensualmente la colocacin de preservacin.
la lona y signos de deterioro o dao. Repita
los procedimientos de preservacin como
sea necesario.
Los siguientes procedimientos y recomendaciones rigen la conservacin de gras Seatrax por perodos
de nueve meses, o ms.
Referencia
Por favor, consulte las siguientes secciones del manual de datos 1:
Instrucciones de funcionamiento
Inspeccin y Mantenimiento
Fuerza Primaria Diesel-Manual de mantenimiento del fabricante del motor
Lubricacin
STDFM301Rev1Preservation_Diesel_NEW_spamx.doc Pgina1of5
Equiponecesario
Aceite (VCI) de corrosin voltil inhibidor (preferencia del cliente)
Inhibidor de la Corrosin, y Brocha
Bomba de grasa y grasa (preferencia del cliente)
Desecante (gel silica) bolsas
Tela o estopa absorbente de aceite
Herramienta general de mano
Lona, si require
Preparacinparaalmacenamiento
Haga una lista de empaque de todos los artculos que se estn preparando para su almacenamiento.
Cualquier elemento eliminado debe tener una etiqueta sealando su posicin original. Tenga en
cuenta especficamente lo que se ha hecho y donde se han colocado las piezas desmontadas. Ponga
esta lista en un lugar seguro y visible para que pueda ser utilizado para preparar la gra para su
retorno al servicio.
Postedecarga
Si el poste de carga an no se ha soldado a la plataforma, a continuacin almacenarlo en dos
cunetas fabricadas de madera de 12.
Antes de proceder a la conservacin de las reas maquinadas, el metal debe estar preparado para
eliminar el xido superficial. Este proceso se realiza mediante pulido con disco o almohadilla
Scotch-Brite para restaurar el acabado de metal sin dejar evidencia de corrosin o contaminantes.
Una vez completo este proceso, aplique con una brocha una capa abundante de anti-corrosin
(Inhibidor de la Corrosin,) Rust-Veto 342 o equivalente (Daubert Cromwell) - No Corrosin
3100g.
Use un revestimiento de plstico termoencogible (Daubert Cromwell) PMG envoltura XO tanto en
el hemisfrico hemi-cabeza y 14 "de la superficie de apoyo mecanizada del engrane giratorio y
selle los bordes exteriores de plstico de embalar con (Dr. Shrink) cinta termoencogible.
Motordiesel/Casadelmotor
Requisitos y calendarios de conservacin del motor varan segn el fabricante. Consulte el
procedimiento de almacenamiento del fabricante del motor en la seccin Manual del Motor de
Libro de Datos 1 de directrices especficas para su motor.
Radiador del motor: Capacidad de retencin del sistema de enfriamiento y si es necesario aditivo
de refrigerante (SCA) en volumen. NOTA: algunos fabricantes rechazan la introduccin de SCA
en un sistema de refrigeracin que ya contiene un refrigerante de larga duracin.
Entrada de aire del motor (filtro de aire): retire la tapa, coloque una (1) bolsa de desecante en el
interior y coloque la cubierta.
Escape de motor: saque el tubo flexible de la trampilla del techo, proteja el extremo final con
plstico termoencogible en posicin hacia el piso.
Casa del motor: ponga bolsas grandes de desecante en el interior. Las aberturas grandes,
incluyendo el panel de rejilla y techo de la casa del motor, deben cerrarse con un material de
embalaje adecuado.
Bateras: Si es posible, retire las bateras y utilcelas en otra aplicacin. Alternativamente,
colocarlas en almacenamiento, donde pueden ser inspeccionados y cargadas peridicamente. Si las
bateras no se eliminan, limpie la parte superior, cargue plenamente y desconectarlos antes de
cubrir con plstico.
Cajasdeengranesycajasdeengranesdelasbombas
Retire los tapones de ventilacin de todas las cajas de engranes y los tanques de reserva y
reemplazar con tapones.
Si la gra se va a almacenar durante nueve meses o ms, agregue el porcentaje correcto de aceite de
VCI en volumen a las cajas de engranes y la unidad de la bomba. Si es necesario, drene el aceite a
cambio con el fin de agregar el aceite VCI suficiente. El proceso de evaporacin y condensacin
del petrleo VCI ofrece una proteccin completa a las superficies que no se pueden alcanzar con
los preservativos que requieren la aplicacin directa. (NOTA: Tambin es ms fcil de limpiar al
retirar la gra del almacn. Basta con arrancar la gra a la temperatura de funcionamiento y se
vaporiza VCI, dejando la base de aceite mineral.).
Aceitehidrulico
Llenado de hidrulico (4 "por debajo de la parte superior / 6" por debajo de la boca de llenado) por
la seccin Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1, no es necesario un aceite de VCI.
Manguerashidrulicas
Todas las mangueras hidrulicas deben permanecer selladas con el correspondiente SAE J514 JIC
macho / hembra tapa JIC. Cubriendo las mangueras con lonas impermeables que las proteger
contra la exposicin a largo plazo a los rayos UV.
Mangueras hidrulicas del principal y auxiliar se deben enredar en la parte delantera de la mesa
giratoria.
Poleas,ejesypernosdeconexin
Proteja las poleas Nylatron de daos ultravioleta (UV), asegurando lonas encima y alrededor de las
poleas.
Utilice grasa preferente del cliente en todos los cojinetes y ejes. Gire los cojinetes mientras engrasa
para asegurar un recubrimiento completo.
Cubra los pasadores y ejes con Inhibidor de la Corrosin todos los que estn expuestos y sin
pintura o un sellador similar
Sistemaneumtico
Vaciar toda la presin del tanque de aire y la condensacin. En ambientes fros, alcohol
isoproplico u otro agente del agua que desplaza hay que aadir para evitar la congelacin.
Cajaselctricasdeunion
Bolsas desecantes deben colocar en todas las cajas de conexin o armarios elctricos para reducir la
acumulacin de humedad.
Enrolle y asegure todos los cables externos para evitar daos
Aparejo
Una vez recibido, el tratamiento de carretes de cable de acero utilice la siguiente secuencia: aplicar
Inhibidor de la Corrosin, envoltura, plstico termoencogible y tablas de madera alrededor de la
circunferencia del carrete. Cubra los carretes con una lona impermeable para reducir el calor en el
cable de acero que pueden derretir el lubricante y almacnelos a una altura elevada del suelo.
Exterior
El aire acondicionado de la cabina (si esta equipado) y las ventanas deben estar cubiertos con una
lona impermeable. Esto proporcionar la proteccin UV, as como proteccin contra daos de agua
en caso de que una ventana se rompa.
Caja elctrica en la cabina: coloque bolsas de desecante en el interior de la caja elctrica y los
descansabrazos del asiento y adentro del aire acondicionado. Cierre la cabina con una caja de
madera grande con un revestimiento de espuma.
Pintura de retoque en reas oxidadas o rayadas.
Removerdealmacenamiento
Consulte la lista de contenido principal compilado cuando la gra se prepara para su
almacenamiento. Asegrese que todos los elementos de la lista se han preparado para el servicio.
Vuelva a instalar las piezas que se han removido.
Consulte el manual del fabricante del motor para todos los procedimientos especiales en relacin
con la eliminacin del motor de almacenamiento a largo plazo.
Inspeccione todas las piezas para el servicio y para reemplazos si es necesario.
Asegrese que los tornillos de sustitucin cumplan las 'Especificaciones para Tuercas y Tornillos
de Dimetro Grande' Seatrax en la seccin Inspeccin y Mantenimiento de Libro de Datos 1.
Durante la salida del almacn, los operadores deben tener cuidado de no doblar o daar la armadura
de la pluma. Utilice eslingas suaves para mover las secciones de la pluma.
Retire todas las cubiertas de las poleas, tambores de levantamiento, el aire acondicionado y la
cabina. Revise todas las poleas de daos.
Vuelva a instalar y volver a conectar las bateras completamente cargadas.
Cambie todos los respiradores que fueron retirados de la caja de engranes y los tanques de reserva.
Lubricacin
Compruebe el nivel del depsito hidrulico y revise por contaminacin de agua.
Revise todos los niveles de lquidos y lubricar todos los puntos de engrase por la seccin
Lubricacin de Libro de Datos 1. Asegrese de que los puntos de engrase no estn daados y
tengan grasa correctamente.
Asegrese de que todas las poleas giren libremente y que los rodamientos incluyendo rodamientos
oscilantes se engrasan bien. Engrase los cojinetes de los malacates e inspeccionar los sellos.
Una vez puesta en marcha, NO es necesario drenar y reemplazar la mezcla de VCI / aceite de la
caja de engranes de las bombas y la caja de engranes. El aceite de VCI se evapora a travs de la
ventilacin cuando la gra se opera a la temperatura normal de funcionamiento:
Sistemahidrulico 130190F
Motordiesel 180200F(otemperaturaespecificaporlamanufacturadelmotor)
Durante los intervalos superiores de servicio normales de las cajas de engranes para reemplazar la
pequea cantidad de aceite de VCI vaporizado.
Puestaenmarcha
Siga el 'Procedimiento inicial de puesta en marcha "," Puesta en marcha Lista de comprobacin " y
consulte la seccin de Aparejo de Libro de Datos 1.
Al probar los malacates y antes de enhebrar el cable de acero por las poleas, quemar las bandas de
freno para limpiar el xido o la escala de la superficie del tambor de freno.
Phone: 713-896-6500 Fax: 713-896-6611
http://www.seatrax.com/parts.html
Recommended Two (2) Year Spares for Two (2) Crane(s)

Date: 19-Feb-2013 Rev. 0
Customer: DRILLMEC Model: S7226 w/ 120' Boom & S5624 w/ 120' Boom
Project: 120692 S/N: 4699 & 4700
P.O. No.: POB2002194 Contact: Ryan Schnoor x250
Doc. No.: D-019
Item Description P/N Qty. Remarks
1 Diffuser, 2" 40241 14 Both
2 Suction Strainer, 6" 40021 4 Both
3 Suction Strainer, 3" 40182 2 Both
4 Shuttle Valve 40094 1 Both
5 Brake Release Valve TC3060 1 Both
6 O-Ring 80031 20 Both
7 O-Ring 80054 20 Both
8 O-Ring Kit 80186 2 Both
9 Element, Return Filter 40133 4 Both
10 Element, Control Filter 40135 4 Both
11 Element, High Pressure Filter 40309 8 Both
12 Filter, Oil, C9 & C15 Engines 50135 12 Both
13 Filter, Fuel, C15 Engine 50029 6 4699
14 Filter, Fuel, C9 Engine 50200 6 4700
15 Filter, Fuel & Water Separator, C9 & C15 Engines 50201 12 Both
16 Filter, Air - Primary, C15 Engine 50133 4 4699
17 Filter, Air - Primary, C9 Engine 50198 4 4700
18 Filter, Air - Secondary, C15 Engine 50134 4 4699
19 Filter, Air - Secondary, C9 Engine 50199 4 4700
20 Wiper Blade, 36" 30134 8 Both
21 Brake Actuator TB4122 1 Both
22 Seal Kit, Brake Actuator, TB4122SK 2 Both
23 Brake Band, 400 Series TB4200 1 Both
24 Brake Band, 700 Series TB4187 1 Both
25 Boom Kickout Valve Assembly TC3135 1 Both
26 Slew Brake 40116 1 Both
4699&4700_TwoYearSpares_Unpriced.xls Page 1 of 1
Section/Seccin5 ________________________
PerformanceData Datosderendimiento
Data Sheet Commentary Pagina de comentario de datos
Crane Data Sheet Package Pagina de datos de la gra
Load Test Procedures Procedimiento de prueba de carga
Function and Load Test Report (Completed Funcin y reporte de prueba de carga
on Site) (Completo en el sitio)
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
05June2013
Commentaryonthe
SeatraxCraneDataSheetPackage
This Data Sheet Package is produced by the Seatrax Crane Rating Software which analyzes a
mathematical model of the Seatrax Crane Design and performs the required mathematical
calculations, thus producing the necessary documentation (Data Sheets) to assure compliance with
API Spec 2C, Seventh Edition, March, 2012, Sections 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 for each specific Seatrax
crane.
The Seatrax Crane Rating Software has been reviewed and verified by an independent third party.
This verification process also included both Strain Gage and Heavy Lift testing as required
by API Spec 2C, Sections 12, 12.1.2 and 12.1.3.
The purpose of this commentary is to explain each of the Data Sheets contained in this package.
COVERSHEET
The Cover Sheet contains the basic information identifying the Seatrax Crane Series, Model
Number, Boom Length, Method of API Rating and the Type of Facility the Crane on which
the Crane is Installed. Also included is the customer or prospective Customer's Name and
Project Identification data. This information is duplicated in abbreviated form on each data sheet
in order to maintain proper control and identification of each document.
GENERALINFORMATION
This Data Sheet provides specific dimensional data with respect to the particular crane. The
following sections are presented:
General Crane Dimensions
Component Static Weights (Dead Loads)
Wire Rope Component Data
Dimensions of the Boom Sections.
Info_DataSheetCmt_API7thEdition.doc Page1of6
API2CRATEDLOADSWLCHARTS
The Seatrax Safe Working Load Charts for Onboard and Offboard lifts are calculated in
accordance with API Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 2012, Section 8, 8.1.1 a) thru i).
Onboard and Offboard Safe Working Load Charts are presented as separate sheets.
The Yellow and White charts designate Onboard Lifts and Green and White charts
designate Offboard Lifts for Imperial Unit Data Sheets. (Blue and White Onboard
and Orange and White Offboard correspond to Metric Unit Data Sheets)
The safe working load limiting factors are indicated by the lower case letters following each
rated safe working load, and referenced in note 2, are as follows:
a) Structural Limitation other than Kingpost (based on the requirements of API

Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 2012, Section 5).
b) Structural Limitation based on the Kingpost with the 1.5 added design factor
(based on the requirements of API Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 2012, Section 5).
c) Load Line Wire Rope Strength (based on the requirements of API Spec 2C, 7th
Edition, 2012, Section 7.2.2).
d) Hoist Line Pull Limitations: (based on the requirements of API Spec 2C, 7th
Edition, 2012, Section 7.3.1 or 5.4.4).
e) Boom Hoist Line Reeving strength (based on the requirements of API Spec 2C, 7th
Edition, 2012, Section 7.2.2).
f) Boom Pendant Wire Rope Strength (based on the requirements of API Spec 2C,
7th Edition, 2012, Section 7.2.2). Note: this is not applicable to continuously-
reeved cranes.
g) Maximum Safe Working Load (SWL) Based on Available Boom Hoist Line
Pull, Considering Line Reeving Losses (based on the requirements of API Spec
2C, 7th Edition, 2012, Section 7.3.1).
i(s) Swing Mechanism Rotating Capacity (based on the requirements of API Spec 2C,
7th Edition, 2012, Section 7.4.2.1).
i(h) Swing Mechanism Holding Capacity (based on the requirements of API Spec 2C,
7th Edition, 2012, Section 7.4.1.2 and 7.4.1.3).
The rated Safe Working Loads are presented for each 5 foot increment of working radius, for
boom lengths less than 150 feet and 10 foot increments for boom lengths over 150 feet.
The basis (parameters and API Method) of these load ratings are plainly stated at the top and
side of the sheet and in the notes as required by API Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 2012, Section 4,
4.2.1.
Load ratings are presented for 3 reeving conditions applicable to the Main Hoist, normally 2
part, 4 part, and 6 part (where applicable). Additionally, the load ratings for the single part
Auxiliary Line are also presented. The Size and Type of each load rope are indicated in the
notes. This presentation of load ratings satisfies the requirements of API Spec 2C, 7th Edition,
2012, Section 8, 8.1.1.
The Personnel Rated Load is determined as required by API Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 2012,
Section 8, 8.1.2.
KINGPOSTREACTIONS
The Seatrax Data Sheet Package contains the Reactions (loadings) induced into the Purchasers
Foundation by the crane when subjected to the Onboard and Offboard Rated Loads as previously
discussed. These loadings include design moments, thrust and torque as required by API Spec 2C,
7th Edition, 2012, Section 6, 6.2.
Two Reaction Data Sheets are presented, Onboard Reactions and Offboard Reactions.
Onboard Reactions are for the reactions from Onboard SWL and Conditions, and Offboard
Reactions are for the reactions from Offboard SWL and Conditions.
These Reactions are presented for each 5 foot increment of working radius, for boom lengths less
than 150 feet and 10 foot increments for boom lengths over 150 feet and are intended to provide
the loading information to be used in the design or analysis of the purchaser's platform or rig
structure.
Reactions are based on the Summation of All Factored Vertical Loads Multiplied by the
Pedestal Load Factor (PF). It is suggested that these design reactions shall satisfy the Allowable
Stress Levels permitted by AISC without a one-third increase in stress.
The footnotes on the Data Sheet provide additional information.
CALCULATEDSPRINGCONSTANTSandCV
The Seatrax Data Sheet Package contains Data Sheets for the Calculated Spring Constants and CV
used for calculation of both Onboard and Offboard Ratings. (Note: Spring Constants are used for
Offboard CV calculations only.)
The Calculated Spring Constants and CV are presented for each 5 foot increment of working
radius, for boom lengths less than 150 feet and 10 foot increments for boom lengths over 150 feet.
The Spring Rate Factor K used in the Offboard CV computation is the Actual Vertical Spring
Rate of the crane and hoisting system based on the Hook Travel presented in the Hoist Data Sheets
of the Seatrax Data Sheet Package.
The Dynamic Coefficients used to perform the required Onboard calculations correspond to the
API Rating Method for Onboard CV per API Spec 2C, Section 5, 5.4.5.3.
The Dynamic Coefficients used to perform the required Offboard calculations are computed using
the equation given for Offboard CV in API Spec 2C, Section 5, 5.4.5.2.
The Vertical Velocity of the Cargo Deck is computed using the equation given for Vd in API
Spec 2C, Section 5, Table 3 or customer-supplied, as applicable.
The Vertical Velocity of the Hook, Vh , is obtained from the Water Level Hook Speeds
presented in the Hoist Data Sheets of the Seatrax Data Sheet Package.
The Vertical Velocity of the Boom Tip is computed using the equation given for Vc in API Spec
2C, Section 5, Table 3 or customer supplied as applicable.
TOTALOFFLEADANDSIDELEADFORCES
The Seatrax Data Sheet Package contains Data Sheets for the Total Offlead and Sidelead Forces
used for calculation of both Onboard and Offboard Ratings.
The Total Offlead and Sidelead Forces are presented for each 5 foot increment of working radius,
for boom lengths less than 150 feet and 10 foot increments for boom lengths over 150 feet.
The Total Offlead and Sidelead forces presented on this sheet include:
For Offboard Lifts, Offlead and Sidelead forces due to Supply Boat Motions are
computed as a function of the Significant Wave Height, Hsig, in accordance with the
equations given in API Spec 2C, Section 5, 5.4.6.2.
For Onboard and Offboard Lifts, Offlead and Sidelead forces due to Crane Inclinations
and Crane Motions are computed in accordance with the equations given in API Spec 2C,
Section 5, 5.4.6.3.
For Onboard and Offboard Lifts, Total Offlead and Sidelead forces due to All Causes
are computed in accordance with the equations given in API Spec 2C, Section 5, 5.4.6.4.
Wind forces are computed in accordance with the requirements of API Spec 2C, Section 5,
5.6.1.
Total Equivalent Offlead and Sidelead Angles are presented with the corresponding Sidelead and
Offlead Forces.
THEORETICALCOMPONENTFAILUREMODEANALYSIS
The Seatrax Data Sheet Package contains an Offboard (Supply Boat) Theoretical Component
Failure Mode Analysis Data Sheet.
Theoretical Component Failure Loads for the Principal Load Carrying Components of the Crane
are presented for each 5 foot increment of working radius, for boom lengths less than 150 feet and
10 foot increments for boom lengths over 150 feet.
Theoretical Component Failure Loads for the Principal Load Carrying Components of the Crane
are calculated in accordance with the requirements of API Spec 2C, Section 9.
The Theoretical Component Failure Mode Analysis Data Sheet presents the ratio of the failure
loads of the component first to fail to that of the kingpost. Note that the auxiliary hoist line is
excluded from this ratio since the main hoist line failure load will always be greater.
AUXILIARYDRUMPERFORMANCE
The Auxiliary Hoist Data Sheet presents the information necessary to evaluate the performance of
the Auxiliary Hoisting Draw-Works Unit. This information is presented in four sections as
follows:
The first section presents the physical attributes of the hoisting unit, such as the hydraulic
inputs, drum and wire rope dimensions, and mechanical outputs (speeds, torque, etc:).
The second section presents information defining the specific installation dimensional
requirements for the particular crane under consideration including:
Boom Pivot Elevation above the platform deck.
Deck Elevation above L.A.T.
Total Hook Travel (From Tip with Boom @ Max. Angle to L.A.T.)
(These dimensions are necessary to determine the capability of the hoist and to calculate the
load limits (d) shown on the Onboard and Offboard Rated Load Charts.)
The third section utilizes the data from the first section to calculate the values for Line Pull and
Line Speed, along with the accumulated Cable Capacity for each layer of cable that can be
wound on the drum without exceeding the limits specified in API Spec 2C, Section 7, 7.3.1.5.
The Line Pull and Line Speed Data represent the Maximum Line Pull at Maximum Pressure
and Maximum Speed at Maximum Flow. In many cases, depending on the prime mover and
equipment configuration, the cranes are equipped with Hydraulic Pumps with a Constant
Horsepower feature. This feature gives priority to hydraulic pressure, so heavier loads may
operate at less than maximum speeds.
The fourth section utilizes the information from the third section, in conjunction with the
dimensions computed in the second section to calculate the Hook Load and Hook Speed which
will be available from this hoist unit for the following four assumed hook elevations.
Hook at the Boom Tip (max. elevation). This value of hook load is the load limit (d)
referenced above.
Hook at the Platform or Rig Deck.
Hook at L.A.T. (min. elevation or Water Level)
MAINDRUMPERFORMANCE
The Main Hoist Data Sheet presents the information necessary to evaluate the performance of the
Main Hoisting Draw-Works Unit. This information is presented in four sections as follows:
The first section presents the physical attributes of the hoisting unit, such as the hydraulic
inputs, drum and wire rope dimensions, and mechanical outputs (speeds, torque, etc:).
The second section presents information defining the specific installation dimensional
requirements for the particular crane under consideration, including:
Boom Pivot Elevation above the platform deck.
Deck Elevation above L.A.T.
Total Hook Travel (From Tip with Boom @ Max. Angle to L.A.T.)
(These dimensions are necessary to determine the capability of the hoist and to calculate the
load limits "(d)" shown on the Onboard and Offboard Rated Load Charts.)
The third section utilizes the data from the first section to calculate the values for Line Pull and
Line Speed, along with the accumulated Cable Capacity for each layer of cable that can be
wound on the drum without exceeding the limits specified in API Spec 2C, Section 7, 7.3.1.5.
The Line Pull and Line Speed Data represent the Maximum Line Pull at Maximum Pressure
and Maximum Speed at Maximum Flow. In many cases, depending on the prime mover and
equipment configuration, the cranes are equipped with Hydraulic Pumps with a Constant
Horsepower feature. This feature gives priority to hydraulic pressure, so heavier loads may
operate at less than maximum speeds.
The fourth section utilizes the information from the third section, in conjunction with the
dimensions computed in the second section to calculate the Hook Load and Hook Speed which
will be available from this hoist unit for the following four assumed hook elevations.
Hook at the Boom Tip (max. elevation). This value of hook load is the load limit (d)
referenced above.
Hook at the Platform or Rig Deck.
Hook at L.A.T. (min. elevation or Water Level)
The above 4 values for Hook Load and Hook Speed are calculated, with due consideration of
Reeving Efficiency Losses, for each even numbered main hoist reeving configuration that can be
obtained with the length of load line supplied (2 part, 4 part, etc.).
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
04dejuniode2012
Paquetedecomentariodehojas
dedatosdegrasSeatrax
Este Paquete de Hoja de Datos se produce por el Software de Clasificacin de gra Seatrax que
analiza un modelo matemtico de Diseo de la Gra Seatrax y realiza los clculos matemticos
necesarios, lo que produce la documentacin necesaria (Hojas de Datos) para asegurar el
cumplimiento de Especificaciones con API 2C, sptima edicin, marzo del 2012, las secciones 5,
6, 7, 8 y 9 para cada gra especfica Seatrax.
El software de las Gras ha sido revisado y verificado por una tercera parte independiente. Este
proceso de verificacin tambin incluy "Medidor de estiramiento" y "Levantamiento Pesado"
pruebas como lo requiere las Especificaciones por API 2C, Seccin 12, 12.1.2 y 12.1.3.
El propsito de este comentario es explicar cada uno de los contenidos de hojas de datos en este
paquete.
PORTADAPRINCIPAL
La portada contiene la informacin bsica de identificacin de Serie de gra Seatrax, Numero de
Modelo, Largo de la Pluma, Mtodo de Clasificacin de API y el Tipo de Instalacin de la
Gra en el que la Gra est Instalada. Tambin se incluye el cliente o Nombre prospectivo del
cliente y los datos de Identificacin del Proyecto. Esta informacin se duplica en forma abreviada
en cada hoja de datos con el fin de mantener el control y la identificacin de cada documento.
INFORMACIONGENERAL
Esta hoja de datos proporciona datos tridimensionales especficos con respecto a la gra particular.
En las secciones siguientes se presentan:
Dimensiones Generales de la Gra
Pesos de Componentes Estticos (Pesos Muertos)
Componentes de Datos de Cables de Acero
Dimensiones de secciones de la Pluma.
Info_DataSheetCmt_API7thEdition_spamx.doc Pgina1of7
GRAFICASSWLNOMINALESDECARGADEAPI2C
Seatrax "Graficas de Carga Segura de Trabajo " (SWL) para los levantamientos "A Borda" y
"Fuera de Borda" se calculan de acuerdo con Especificaciones API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012,
Seccin 8, 8.1.1 a) hasta i).
"A Borda" y "Fuera de Borda" Graficas de Carga Segura de Trabajo se presentan en

hojas separadas. Las graficas de Amarillo y Blanco son designadas para levantamientos "A
Borda" y las graficas Verde y Blanco son designadas para levantamientos ""Fuera de Borda"
Hojas de Datos de Levantamientos de Unidad Imperial. (Azul y Blanco - "A Borda" y
Naranja y Blanco - "Fuera de Borda" corresponden a Hojas de Datos de Levantamientos
de Unidad Mtrica)
Las cargas seguras de trabajo factores limitantes se indican con las letras minsculas despus de
cada carga de trabajo admisible nominal, y se hace referencia en la nota 2, son los siguientes:
a) Limitacin Estructural distinta al Poste Central (basado en los requisitos de las

especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 5).
b) Limitacin Estructural basado en el Poste Central con el 1.5 del factor de diseo
agregado (basado en los requisitos de las especificaciones de API 2C, sptima
edicin, 2012, Seccin 5).
c) Fuerza de la Lnea de Carga del Cable de Acero (basado en los requisitos de las
especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.2.2).
d) Limitaciones de Tiro del Cable en el Malacate: (basado en los requisitos de las

especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.3.1 o 5.4.4).
e) Fuerza de Enhebramiento de Cable de la Pluma (basado en los requisitos de las

especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.2.2).
f) Fuerza del Arns Colgante de la Pluma (basado en los requisitos de las

especificaciones API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.2.2). Nota: esto no
aplica a gras de enhebrado continuo.
g) Carga de trabajo segura mxima (SWL) Basado en la Traccin del Cable

Disponible del Malacate de la Pluma, Teniendo en cuenta las Lneas prdidas de
Enhebrado (basado en los requisitos de las especificaciones de API 2C, sptima
edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.3.1).
i(s) Capacidad Giratoria del Mecanismo de Rotacin (basado en los requisitos de las
especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.4.2.1).
i(h) Capacidad Giratoria del Mecanismo de Detencin (basado en los requisitos de

las especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 7.4.1.2 y 7.4.1.3).
La graficas de Carga Segura de Trabajo presentan un incremento en cada 5 pies de radio de

trabajo, para plumas de menos de 150 pies de largo y cada 10 pies de incrementos para plumas
de ms de 150 pies de largo.
La base (parmetros y mtodo de API) de estas graficas de carga se dijo claramente en la parte
superior y lateral de la hoja y en las notas como lo requiere las Especificaciones API 2C,
sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 4.
Las graficas de carga se presentan en 3 condiciones de enhebrado aplicables para el Malacate

Principal, normalmente de 2 partes, 4 partes y 6 partes (en su caso). Adems, tambin se
presentan las graficas de carga de una parte de lnea para el Malacate Auxiliar. El Tamao y
Tipo de cada cable de carga estn indicados en las notas. Esta presentacin de graficas de carga
cumple los requisitos de Especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 8, 8.1.1.
La Grafica de Carga Personal se determina segn lo requiera las Especificaciones de API 2C,
sptima edicin, 2012, Seccin 8, 8.1.2.
REACCIONESDELPOSTECENTRAL
El Paquete de Hoja de Datos Seatrax contiene las reacciones (cargas) inducidos en la Fundacin de
los compradores por la gra cuando se someten a las cargas nominales a bordo y fuera de borda
como se indic anteriormente. Estas cargas incluyen momentos de diseo, empuje y apriete como lo
requiere las Especificaciones de API 2C, sptima edicin, 2012, seccin 6, 6.2.
Dos Hojas de Datos de Reaccin son presentadas, "Reacciones en borda" y "Reacciones Fuera
de Borda". "Reacciones en Borda" son para las reacciones a bordo SWL y Condiciones, y
"Reacciones fuera de borda" son para las reacciones de fuera de borda SWL y Condiciones.
Estas reacciones presentan un incremento en cada 5 pies de radio de trabajo, para plumas de menos
de 150 pies de largo y cada 10 pies de incrementos para plumas de ms de 150 pies de largo y
tienen por objeto proporcionar la informacin sobre la carga que se utilizar en el diseo o el
anlisis de la plataforma del comprador o la estructura del equipo de perforacin.
Las reacciones se basan en la suma de todo el factor de cargas verticales multiplicado por el
factor de carga del Pedestal (PF). Se sugiere que esta reaccin de diseo deber satisfacer los
niveles de estrs permitidos por AISC sin ningn tercer incremento en el estrs.
Las notas sobre las Hojas de Datos proporcionan informacin adicional.
RESORTEOCONSTANTECALCULADOyCV
El Paquete de Hoja de Datos Seatrax contiene hojas de datos de los constantes resorteos calculados
y el CV se utiliza para los clculos de las calificaciones en borda y fuera de borda. (Nota: Constantes
resorteos se utilizan fuera de borda slo clculos "CV")
Los constantes resorteos calculados y "CV" son presentados por cada incremento de 5 pies de radio
de trabajo, para una pluma con longitud inferior a 150 pies y 10 pies de incrementos para plumas
con longitud de ms de 150 pies.
El Factor de Rango de Resorteo "K" que se utiliza en el clculo fuera de borda "CV" es el Rango
Actual de Resorteo Vertical real de la gra y el sistema de levantamiento basado en el
Movimiento del Gancho presentado en las Hojas de Datos de los Malacates del Paquete de Hojas
de Datos Seatrax.
Los Coeficientes Dinmicos utilizados para realizar los clculos necesarios en borda corresponden
al API Mtodo de Clasificacin en borda "CV" dentro las especificaciones de API 2C, Seccin 5,
5.4.5.3.
Los Coeficientes Dinmicos utilizados para realizar los clculos necesarios fuera de borda se
calculan utilizando la ecuacin dada para fuera de borda "CV" dentro las especificaciones de API
2C, Seccin 5, 5.4.5.2.
La Velocidad Vertical de la Cubierta de Carga se calcula utilizando la ecuacin dado por Vd

en las especificaciones de API 2C, Seccin 5, Tabla 3 o suministrado por el cliente segn sea el
caso.
La Velocidad Vertical del Gancho, Vh, se obtiene a partir del "nivel de agua" Velocidades de
Gancho que se presentan en las hojas de datos del Malacate del Paquete de Hojas de Datos Seatrax.
La Velocidad Vertical de la Punta de la Pluma se calcula utilizando la ecuacin dada por Vc

dentro las especificaciones de API 2C, Seccin 5, Tabla 3 o suministrado por el cliente segn sea el
caso.
Las notas sobre la Hoja de Datos proporcionan informacin adicional.
TOTALDEFUERZADECARGAOSILATORIAHACIAENFRENTEYHACIAATRASYCARGA
OSILATORIAHACIALOSDOSLADOS
El Paquete de Hojas de Datos Seatrax contiene hojas de datos para el total de cargas oscilatorias
hacia enfrente y atrs y fuerzas de cargas oscilatorias hacia los lados utilizados para el clculo de
ambas calificaciones en borda y fuera de borda.
El total de cargas oscilatorias hacia enfrente y atrs y fuerzas de cargas oscilatorias hacia los lados
se presentan para cada incremento de 5 pies de radio de trabajo, para una pluma con longitud
inferior a 150 pies y 10 pies de incrementos para la pluma con longitud de ms de 150 pies.
Las fuerzas Totales de Cargas Oscilatorias hacia Enfrente y Atrs y Cargas Oscilatorias hacia
los Lados que aparecen en esta hoja son:
Para Levantamientos Fuera de Borda, Cargas Oscilatorias hacia Enfrente y Atrs y las
fuerzas de Cargas Oscilatorias hacia los Lados son debido al Movimiento que
Suministran los Barcos los cuales se calculan en Funcin de la Altura de Ola
Significante, Hsig, de acuerdo con las ecuaciones dadas por las Especificaciones del API
2C, Seccin 5, 5.4.6.2.
Para Levantamientos en Borda y Fuera de Borda, Cargas Oscilatorias hacia Enfrente

y Atrs y las fuerzas de Cargas Oscilatorias hacia los Lados son debido a Preferencias de
la gra y movimientos de la gra se calculan de acuerdo con las ecuaciones dadas por las
Especificaciones del API 2C, Seccin 5, 5.4.6.3.
Para Levantamientos en Borda y Fuera de Borda, el Total de Cargas Oscilatorias

hacia Enfrente y Atrs y las fuerzas de Cargas Oscilatorias hacia los Lados para Todas
las Causas se calculan de acuerdo con las ecuaciones dadas en las Especificaciones API
2C, Seccin 5, 5.4.6.4.
La fuerza del viento se calculan de acuerdo con los requisitos de las Especificaciones API
2C, Seccin 5, 5.6.1.
El Total Equivalente de ngulos de Cargas Oscilatorias hacia Enfrente y Atrs y Cargas

Oscilatorias hacia los Lados se presenta con el valor de fuerzas correspondientes.
MODODEANALISISDEFALLADECOMPONENTETEORICO
El Paquete de Hoja de Datos Seatrax contiene Hojas de Datos de Modo de Anlisis de Falla de
Componente Tericopara fuera de borda (suministro del barco).
Carga Terica de Falla de Componentes para la carga principal que lleva componentes de la gra
se presentan en cada incremento de 5 pies de radio de trabajo, para una pluma con longitud inferior a
150 pies y 10 pies de incrementos para pluma con longitud de ms de 150 pies.
Carga Terica de Falla de Componentes para la carga principal que lleva componentes de la gra
se calculan de acuerdo con los requisitos de las Especificaciones API 2C, Seccin 9.
Las Hojas de Datos de Modo de Anlisis de Falla de Componente Terico presenta la

proporcin de las cargas de falla del primer componente a fallar en el poste de carga. Tenga en
cuenta que la lnea del malacate auxiliar est excluida de esta relacin ya que el malacate principal
en la lnea de carga siempre ser mayor.
RENDIMIENTODELTAMBORAUXILIAR
Las Hoja de Datos del Malacate Auxiliar presenta la informacin necesaria para evaluar el
rendimiento del Levantamiento Auxiliar con las Unidades de Trabajo. Esta informacin se
presenta en cuatro secciones, son las suigientes:
La primera seccin presenta los atributos fsicos de la unidad de levantamiento, tales como las
entradas de hidrulico, dimensiones del tambor, dimensiones de cable de acero e informacin de
partes mecnicas (velocidad, par, etc.).
La segunda seccin presenta informacin que define los requisitos de dimensiones de

instalacin especficas para la gra en particular en consideracin, incluyendo:
Elevacin del Pivote de la Pluma arriba de la plataforma de la cubierta.
Elevacin de Cubierta arriba de nivel por encima del terreno.
Total de Viaje de Gancho (De la punta de la pluma, con el mximo ngulo de la pluma
del nivel por encima del terreno.)
(Estas dimensiones son necesarias para determinar la capacidad del malacate y para el
clculo de los lmites de carga "(d)" que aparecen en las Graficas de Carga en Borda y Fuera
de Borda.)
La tercera seccin utiliza los datos de la primera seccin para calcular los valores de Traccin
del Cable y de la Velocidad de Lnea, junto con la Capacidad del Cable acumulado para cada
capa de cable que se puede enrollar en el tambor sin exceder los lmites especificados en las
Especificaciones de API 2C, Seccin 7, 7.3.1.5.
Traccin de la Lnea y Datos de Velocidad de la Lnea representan la Traccin mxima de

lnea a la mxima presin y la velocidad mxima del caudal mximo. En muchos casos,
dependiendo de la mquina motriz y configuracin de los equipos, las gras estn equipadas con
bombas hidrulicas con una caracterstica de Potencia Constante. Esta caracterstica le da
prioridad a la presin hidrulica, as que cargas ms pesadas pueden operarse a menos
velocidades mximas.
En la cuarta seccin se utiliza la informacin de la tercera seccin, en conjunto con las

dimensiones calculadas en la segunda seccin para calcular la Carga en el Gancho y la
Velocidad de la Carga, que estar disponible en la unidad del malacate para las siguientes
cuatro elevaciones de ganchos asumidos.
Gancho en la Punta de la Pluma (mxima elevacin). Este valor de carga del gancho es
el lmite de carga "(d)" mencionado anteriormente.
Gancho en la Plataforma o Cubierta del Aparejo.
Gancho en nivel por encima del terreno. (Elevacin minima o Nivel del Agua)
RENDIMIENTODELTAMBORPRINCIPAL
Las Hoja de Datos del Malacate Principal presenta la informacin necesaria para evaluar el
rendimiento del Levantamiento Principal con las Unidades de Trabajo. Esta informacin se
presenta en cuatro secciones, son las suigientes:
La primera seccin presenta los atributos fsicos de la unidad de levantamiento, tales como las
entradas de hidrulico, dimensiones del tambor, dimensiones de cable de acero e informacin de
partes mecnicas (velocidad, par, etc.).
La segunda seccin presenta informacin que define los requisitos de dimensiones de

instalacin especficas para la gra en particular en consideracin, incluyendo:
Elevacin del Pivote de la Pluma arriba de la plataforma de la cubierta.
Elevacin de Cubierta arriba de nivel por encima del terreno.
Total de Viaje de Gancho (De la punta de la pluma, con el mximo ngulo de la pluma
hasta el arriba de nivel por encima del terreno.)
(Estas dimensiones son necesarias para determinar la capacidad del malacate y para el
clculo de los lmites de carga "(d)" que aparecen en las Graficas de Carga en Borda y Fuera
de Borda.)
La tercera seccin utiliza los datos de la primera seccin para calcular los valores de Traccin
del Cable y de la Velocidad de Lnea, junto con la Capacidad del Cable acumulado para cada
capa de cable que se puede enrollar en el tambor sin exceder los lmites especificados en las
Especificaciones de API 2C, Seccin 7, 7.3.1.5.
Traccin de la Lnea y Datos de Velocidad de la Lnea representan la Traccin mxima de

lnea a la mxima presin y la velocidad mxima del caudal mximo. En muchos casos,
dependiendo de la mquina motriz y configuracin de los equipos, las gras estn equipadas con
bombas hidrulicas con una caracterstica de Potencia Constante. Esta caracterstica le da
prioridad a la presin hidrulica, as que cargas ms pesadas pueden operarse a menos
velocidades mximas.
En la cuarta seccin se utiliza la informacin de la tercera seccin, en conjunto con las

dimensiones calculadas en la segunda seccin para calcular la Carga en el Gancho y la
Velocidad de la Carga, que estar disponible en la unidad del malacate para las siguientes
cuatro elevaciones de ganchos asumidos.
Gancho en la Punta de la Pluma (mxima elevacin). Este valor de carga del gancho es
el lmite de carga "(d)" mencionado anteriormente.
Gancho en la Plataforma o Cubierta del Aparejo.
Gancho en nivel por encima del terreno. (Elevacin minima o Nivel del Agua)
Los 4 valores mencionados arriba del Gancho de Carga y Velocidad del Gancho se calcula, con la
debida consideracin de prdidas de eficiencia por el enhebrado del cable de acero, para cada
configuracin principal de enhebrado el nmero que se puede obtener con la longitud de la lnea de
carga suministrada (parte 2, 4 pieza, etc.).
02-01-2013
Seatrax Inc.
P.O. Box 840687 Houston, Texas 77284
Telephone (713)-896-6500
Fax (713)-896-6611
www.seatrax.com
Seatrax Crane Data Sheet Package

Copyright 1979 - 2011 by Seatrax Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Developed for Installation on a

Fixed Structure per Spec 2C section 1(a)
by
API General Method
Significant Wave Height = 3 feet
In Compliance With
API SPECIFICATION 2C SEVENTH EDITION, MARCH 2012
Imperial Measurement Units
Seatrax Series 72 Model S7226
120 Foot Boom With Walkways
Prepared For
Drillmec Inc
Project No. 120692
Fixed Platfrom Rig Set 1
PO No. POB2002194
Seatrax Serial No 4699
(Page 1 of 18)
02-01-2013
Seatrax Crane Data Sheet
Table of Contents
For a Fixed Structure per Spec 2C section 1(a), using the API General Method
************************************************************************************************
3. General Information
Ref 4.2e), 5.4.5.2, 5.4.6.2, 8.2.2f),g)
4. ONBOARD (Deck Lift) Safe Working Load CHART
Ref 4.1a), 8.1, Limitations per 8.1.1a) thru j), 8.2.1.1a) thru h)
5. OFFBOARD (Supply Boat)Safe Working Load CHART
6. Kingpost (Pedestal) Reactions
Ref 4.1b), 6.2, Annex B, B.6.2
7. Theoretical Component Failure Mode Analysis
Ref 4.1e), 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, Annex B, B.9
8. Calculated Spring Constants and Cv
Ref 5.4.5.2, Annex B, B.5.4.5
9. Total Offlead & Sidelead Forces
Ref 5.4.6, 5.4.7, 5.6.1 Annex B, B.5.4.6.2, B5.4.6.3, B5.6.1
10. Auxiliary Hoist Performance
Ref 7.3.1, 8.1.1d)
11. Main Hoist Performance
Ref 7.3.1, 8.1.1d)
12. Boom Hoist Performance
Ref 7.3.1, 8.1.1g)
13. Boom Suspension Data
Ref 7.3.2.1, 8.1.1e)
14. Foundation & Rigging Design Factors (ONBOARD Lifts)
Ref 6.2, 7.2.2.4.1, 7.2.2.4.2, 7.2.2.6, 7.2.2.7, Annex B, B.7.2.2.4
15. Foundation & Rigging Design Factors (OFFBOARD Lifts)
Ref 6.2, 7.2.2.4.1, 7.2.2.4.2, 7.2.2.6, 7.2.2.7, Annex B, B.7.2.2.4
16. Kingpost/Pedestal Fatigue Analysis
Ref Ref 4.1e), 6.4, Annex B, B.6.4
17. Explanation of SWL letter Suffixes
Ref 8.1.1a) thru i)
18. Information CHART
Ref 4.1b), 8.2.2a) thru m)
************************************************************************************************
All paragraph references are to API SPECIFICATION 2C SEVENTH EDITION, MARCH 2012
(Page 2 of 18)
02-01-2013
General Information
Serial Number: 4699
Identification Number: 4699_
************************************************************************************************
FACILITY SPECIFIC ELEVATIONS
Boom Pivot Height Above Main Deck Level (ft.) 77.000
Main Deck Level to Lowest Hook Position ie. water level (ft.) 91.630
The Maximum Req'd Hook Travel for This Specific Crane (ft.) 288.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GENERAL CRANE DIMENSIONS
Gantry height from boom foot pivot (ft.) 48.000
Center of rotation to gantry shaft (ft.) 6.500
Center of rotation to boom foot pivot (ft.) 6.000
Center of rotation to CG. (ft.) 1.580
GF 0.980
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
KINGPOST
Kingpost yield stress (ksi) 50.000
Kingpost outside diameter (in.) 72.000
Kingpost wall thickness (in.) 1.625
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GANTRY
Gantry Leg Material Yield Strength (ksi) 50.000
Gantry Leg Square Tube Size (in) 7.870
Gantry Leg Wall Thickness (in) 0.630
Horizontal Dim CL Rot to Rear Leg @ Bottom (ft) 3.500
Horizontal Dim CL Rot to Front Leg @ Bottom (ft) 3.500
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOOM
Boom Chord Square Tube Yield Strength (ksi) 50.000
Boom Chord Square Tube Size @ Butt (in) 5.900
Boom Chord Wall Thickness @ Butt (in) 0.492
Diagonal Diameter @ Butt (in) 2.375
Diagonal Wall Thickness @ Butt (in) 0.344
Unsupported Chord Length @ Butt (in) 27.000
Height Between Chord Centers @Butt (in) 43.000
Width Between Chord Centers @ Butt (in) 84.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SLEW GEARS
Number of Bull Gear Teeth 87.000
Number of Pinion Gear Teeth 11.000
Number of Slew Pinions 2.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
WIRE ROPE COMPONENT DATA
Main hoist cable length (ft.) 1375.000
Main hoist cable diameter (in.) 1.250
Main hoist cable construction Class CH
Main hoist cable breaking strength (kips) 196.000
Aux. hoist cable length (ft.) 525.000
Aux. hoist cable diameter (in.) 1.125
Aux. hoist cable construction Class CH
Aux. hoist cable breaking strength (kips) 159.000
Boom hoist cable diameter (in.) 0.875
Boom hoist cable construction Class BL
Boom hoist cable breaking strength (kips) 96.000
Boom hoist tackle parts of line 10.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
APPROXIMATE SELF WEIGHTS
Complete Crane & Boom (kips) 204.540
Block(s) (kips) 6.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HOIST SELECTIONS
Seatrax Auxiliary Hoist Model Number 463-EJA
Seatrax Main Hoist Model Number 763-GKC
************************************************************************************************
(Page 3 of 18)
02-01-2013
ONBOARD (Deck Lifts)
Safe Working Load Chart
Windspeed = 35 knots
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Working 2 Part Line 4 Part Line 6 Part Line Single Line Personnel
Radius Main Drum Main Drum Main Drum Aux. Drum Rated
Feet API Load lbs API Load lbs API Load lbs API Load lbs API Load lbs
************************************************************************************************
25 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
30 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
35 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
40 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
45 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
50 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
55 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
60 70,305d 131,869b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
65 70,305d 118,597b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
70 70,305d 107,589b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
75 70,305d 98,325b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
80 70,305d 90,402b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
85 70,305d 83,541b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
90 70,305d 77,547b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
95 70,305d 72,258b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
100 67,558b 67,558b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
105 63,359b 63,359b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
110 59,574b 59,574b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
115 56,151b 56,151b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
120 51,622e 51,622e N/A 28,585d 14,292d
125 39,204e 39,204e N/A 28,585d 14,292d
************************************************************************************************
(1) Working Radius is measured from Main Hook to Centerline of Rotation.
(2) SWL letter Suffixes indicate Load Limiting Factor per attached data sheet 'Explanation of SWL Letter Suffixes'.
(3) Rated Loads are NET loads. Main Block & Aux Ball have been deducted.
(4) The Specified Boom Tip Velocity caused by Foundation Motions is N/A.
(5) The Specified Lateral Acceleration caused by Foundation Motions is 0 g
(6) The Specified Vertical Acceleration caused by Foundation Motions is 1g.
(7) The Specified Additional Sidelead Angle (List) from Foundation Motions is .5 deg.
(8) The Specified Additional Offlead Angle (Trim) from Foundation Motions is .5 deg.
(9) Main Drum cable is 1.25 dia. Class CH, 196 kip. nom strength, 1375 feet long.
(10) Aux. Drum cable is 1.125 dia. Class CH, 159 kip. nom strength, 525 feet long.
(11) The specified hook travel for this machine is 288 feet.
(Page 4 of 18)
02-01-2013
OFFBOARD (Supply Boat Lifts)
Significant Wave Height = 3 feet Windspeed = 35 knots
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
************************************************************************************************
25 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
30 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
35 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
40 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
45 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
50 70,305d 136,319b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
55 70,305d 122,364b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
60 70,305d 110,900b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
65 70,305d 101,287b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
70 70,305d 93,147b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
75 70,305d 86,202b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
80 70,305d 80,172b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
85 70,305d 74,933b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
90 65,975b 70,333b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
95 61,867b 66,237b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
100 58,293b 62,668b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
105 55,090b 59,452b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
110 52,302b 56,644b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
115 49,892b 54,207b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
120 47,903b 49,989e N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
125 39,107e 39,107e N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
************************************************************************************************
(4) The Specified Boom Tip Velocity caused by Foundation Motions is 0 ft./sec.
(12) The Minimum Required Hook Speed (VHmin) per API Spec 2C, 5.4 is 19 ft/min.
(Page 5 of 18)
02-01-2013
Kingpost (Pedestal) Reactions
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD
Hook Rated Vertical Primary Side Slew Vertical Primary Side Slew
Radius SWL Load Moment Moment Moment Load Moment Moment Moment
Feet (Lbs) (Kips) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft) (Kips) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft)
************************************************************************************************
25 142686 425 6209 702 142 450 8216 1092 222
30 142686 425 7411 697 171 462 9962 1130 278
35 142686 428 8721 699 202 469 11633 1150 332
40 142686 441 10468 722 241 474 13251 1158 387
45 142686 449 12117 732 279 477 14827 1157 440
50 142686 455 13723 735 315 469 15809 1115 478
55 142686 459 15308 732 351 446 15849 1021 490
60 131868 445 15832 686 367 427 15884 938 502
65 118596 426 15867 629 373 411 15913 865 513
70 107588 410 15895 577 378 397 15940 798 524
75 98324 395 15921 530 384 384 15963 738 535
80 90401 383 15944 486 389 373 15983 682 546
85 83540 371 15964 445 394 363 16000 629 558
90 77546 361 15982 405 400 354 16017 578 570
95 72257 352 15998 367 405 346 16032 529 583
100 67558 344 16012 329 410 339 16046 480 597
105 63359 337 16026 291 415 333 16059 430 613
110 59573 330 16038 251 420 327 16071 378 631
115 56150 324 16048 208 425 321 16083 319 654
120 51622 316 15732 154 424 313 15657 242 667
125 39204 292 13459 35 384 292 13509 60 657
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(2) SWLs are for ONBOARD lifts and are based on a main block reeving system of 4 parts of line.
(3) The Primary Moment is the summation of moments about an axis 90 degrees to the boom centerline.
(4) The Side Moment is the summation of moments about an axis parallel to the boom centerline.
(5) The Slew Moment (torsion) is the rotational moment about the Kingpost (Pedestal) center.
(6) The total Vertical Load is the summation of all factored vertical loads multiplied by the pedestal load
factor (PF) from Spec 2C, section 6.2, equation (26).
(7) The Primary Moment is based on all factored loads multiplied by the pedestal load factor (PF) from
Spec 2C, section 6.2, equation (26) plus dead loads and all applicable side loads.
(8) The Side Moment is based on all factored loads multiplied by the pedestal load factor (PF) from
(Page 6 of 18)
02-01-2013
Theoretical Component Failure Mode Analysis
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Based Based Based Based Based Based Based Calc Comp. Ratio
Radius on on on on on on Main on Aux Fail First to
Feet K-Post Susp Pendt Boom Gantry Cable Cable Load to Fail K-Post
************************************************************************************************
25 937 1023 N/A 372 710 784 159 372 Boom 2.5
30 814 954 N/A 372 635 784 159 372 Boom 2.2
35 720 891 N/A 368 572 784 159 368 Boom 2.0
40 644 836 N/A 364 522 784 159 364 Boom 1.8
45 583 789 N/A 359 478 784 159 359 Boom 1.6
50 532 746 N/A 355 432 784 159 355 Boom 1.5
55 490 708 N/A 351 394 784 159 351 Boom 1.4
60 453 674 N/A 347 361 784 159 347 Boom 1.3
65 421 642 N/A 343 334 784 159 334 Gantry 1.3
70 394 612 N/A 339 311 784 159 311 Gantry 1.3
75 369 585 N/A 336 290 784 159 290 Gantry 1.3
80 348 558 N/A 332 272 784 159 272 Gantry 1.3
85 329 533 N/A 329 257 784 159 257 Gantry 1.3
90 312 509 N/A 325 242 784 159 242 Gantry 1.3
95 296 486 N/A 322 230 784 159 230 Gantry 1.3
100 282 463 N/A 318 218 784 159 218 Gantry 1.3
105 269 441 N/A 314 208 784 159 208 Gantry 1.3
110 258 418 N/A 310 200 784 159 200 Gantry 1.3
115 247 394 N/A 305 191 784 159 191 Gantry 1.3
120 238 368 N/A 289 185 784 159 185 Gantry 1.3
125 230 318 N/A 240 181 784 159 181 Gantry 1.3
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) All Loads are measured in KIPS.
(2) Loads shown are calculated in accordance with Spec 2C, Section 9.2 by the methods given in section 9.3.
(3) Ratio to Kingpost is the ratio of the Component First to Fail to the Kingpost. Aux Cable is excluded from this ratio.
(Page 7 of 18)
02-01-2013
Calculated Spring Constants and Cv
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Boom 2 Falls 2 Falls 4 Falls 4 Falls 6 Falls 6 Falls Aux Line Aux Line
Radius Angle Spring Dynamic Spring Dynamic Spring Dynamic Spring Dynamic
Feet (Deg.) Constant Coef. Constant Coef. Constant Coef, Constant Coef.
************************************************************************************************
25 81.96 47.43 1.5 91.74 1.37 0 0 17.67 1.87
30 79.53 46.13 1.5 86.84 1.36 0 0 17.51 1.87
35 77.08 44.81 1.49 82.1 1.35 0 0 17.34 1.87
40 74.61 43.46 1.48 77.45 1.34 0 0 17.16 1.86
45 72.1 42.1 1.47 73.03 1.33 0 0 16.98 1.86
50 69.56 40.73 1.46 68.78 1.33 0 0 16.8 1.85
55 66.97 39.31 1.46 64.59 1.34 0 0 16.59 1.85
60 64.32 37.88 1.45 60.59 1.35 0 0 16.38 1.84
65 61.62 36.49 1.44 56.88 1.35 0 0 16.17 1.84
70 58.84 35.1 1.43 53.35 1.35 0 0 15.95 1.83
75 55.97 33.66 1.42 49.88 1.35 0 0 15.71 1.82
80 53 32.25 1.41 46.64 1.35 0 0 15.46 1.82
85 49.9 30.81 1.4 43.46 1.35 0 0 15.2 1.81
90 46.64 29.38 1.42 40.47 1.35 0 0 14.92 1.8
95 43.2 28.01 1.43 37.72 1.35 0 0 14.65 1.79
100 39.5 26.54 1.44 34.9 1.34 0 0 14.33 1.79
105 35.48 25.15 1.44 32.35 1.34 0 0 14.02 1.78
110 31 23.67 1.43 29.75 1.33 0 0 13.66 1.77
115 25.79 22.12 1.43 27.15 1.32 0 0 13.26 1.76
120 19.26 20.39 1.42 24.38 1.32 0 0 12.78 1.74
125 3.63 17.2 1.42 19.62 1.33 0 0 11.8 1.71
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) All Spring Constants are in KIPS/Foot
(2) The calculated Supply Boat Deck Velocity in ft/sec is 1.8
(3) The avaliable 1 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is 5.53
(4) The available 2 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is 2.06
(5) The available 4 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is .94
(6) The available 6 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is 0
(Page 8 of 18)
02-01-2013
Total Offlead & Sidelead Forces
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Boom ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD
Radius Angle OffLead Offlead SideLead SideLead Offlead Offlead SideLead SideLead
Feet (Deg.) Force Angle Force Angle Force Angle Force Angle
************************************************************************************************
25 81 1771 .5 4979 .5 10927 3.028 7574 1.764
30 79 1771 .5 4980 .5 10871 3.035 7539 1.768
35 77 1771 .5 4980 .5 10824 3.044 7508 1.772
40 74 1771 .5 4980 .5 10782 3.055 7481 1.778
45 72 1771 .5 4980 .5 10750 3.069 7459 1.785
50 69 1771 .5 4980 .5 10343 3.085 7218 1.793
55 66 1773 .5 4980 .5 9442 3.103 6690 1.802
60 64 1666 .5 4736 .5 8699 3.125 6252 1.813
65 61 1532 .5 4431 .5 8076 3.15 5887 1.825
70 58 1419 .5 4172 .5 7552 3.178 5578 1.839
75 55 1324 .5 3953 .5 7104 3.21 5313 1.856
80 53 1241 .5 3762 .5 6722 3.247 5085 1.874
85 49 1169 .5 3595 .5 6393 3.29 4889 1.895
90 46 1103 .5 3448 .5 6113 3.339 4722 1.92
95 43 1047 .5 3318 .5 5876 3.397 4578 1.949
100 39 996 .5 3200 .5 5681 3.465 4459 1.983
105 35 950 .5 3095 .5 5526 3.548 4361 2.025
110 31 908 .5 3000 .5 5415 3.652 4288 2.077
115 25 871 .5 2914 .5 5363 3.788 4245 2.145
120 19 822 .5 2799 .5 5236 3.987 4157 2.245
125 3 680 .5 2476 .5 4892 4.618 3924 2.562
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) All Forces are in LBS. All Angles are in DEGREES.
(2) The Effects of Offlead, Sidelead & Windspeed are calculated in accordance with Spec 2C, section 5
(3) The Sidelead & Offlead Forces acting at the boom tip due to Wind Loads are 1132 lbs per Spec 2C, section 5.6.1.
(6) The Total Offlead Force includes the effects of Wind, Supply Boat Position, Dynamic Coefficient per Spec 2C, section 5.4.6.
Foundation Trim Angle, & Lateral Foundation acceleration per section .
(7) The Total Sidelead Force includes the effects of Wind, Supply Boat Position, Dynamic Coefficient,
Foundation List Angle, & Lateral Foundation acceleration per Spec 2C, section 5.4.6.
(8) The Equivalent Offlead Angle is the Angle that the Hoistline is offset from the Vertical Plane,
inline with the Boom, due to Supply Boat Position and Foundation Trim.
(9) The Equivalent Sidelead Angle is the Angle that the Hoistline is offset from the Vertical Plane,
to the side of the Boom, due to Supply Boat Position and Foundation List.
(Page 9 of 18)
02-01-2013
Auxiliary Hoist Performance
Hoist Model 463-EJA
Serial Number: 4699
***********************************************************************************************
General Information
Hyd. Pressure (psi): 5200 Hyd. Flow (gpm): 135
Rexroth 160cc Fixed: ( 1 ) Motor Displacement (cir): 9.76
Drum Core Diameter (in): 20 Drum Flange Diameter(in): 34
Width Between Flanges (in): 63.000 Wire Rope Dia.: 1.125
Total Gear Reduction: 51.00 Gear Box Efficiency: .96
Hyd. Mtr. Torque (in-lbs) 7110 Hyd. Mtr. Speed (rpm): 3066
Drum Torque (in-lbs): 348149 Drum Speed (rpm): 60
************************************************************************************************
Installation Dimensions (ft)
Boom length: 120 Boom pivot to deck 77
Deck to water level 91.63 Required hook travel 288.63
Cable length supplied 525 Max. cable on Drum 405
***********************************************************************************************
Hoist Performance - Single Line
Layer Line Line Cable
of Pull Speed Capacity
Cable (lbs) (FPM) (Feet)
***********************************************************************************************
1 32960 332 309
2 30177 363 641
3 27827 393 1008
4 25817 424 1397
***********************************************************************************************
Performance Auxiliary Line (lbs @ fpm)
Max Hook Load @ Boom Tip 29585 Hook Speed @ Boom Tip 363
Max Hook Load @ Deck Level 29585 Hook Speed @ Deck Level 363
Max Hook Load @ Mid Travel 32314 Hook Speed @ Mid Travel 332
Max Hook Load @ Water Level 32314 Hook Speed @ Water Level 332
***********************************************************************************************
(Page 10 of 18)
02-01-2013
Main Hoist Performance
Hoist Model 763-GKC
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
General Information
Rexroth 180cc: ( 1 ) Motor Displacement (cir): 10.98
Drum Core Diameter (in): 24 Drum Flange Diameter (in): 40
Width Between Flanges (in): 63.000 Wire Rope Dia. (in): 1.250
************************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
Cable (lbs) (FPM) Feet
***********************************************************************************************
1 48762 229 330
2 44911 248 682
3 41624 268 1069
4 38785 287 1476
***********************************************************************************************
Performance 2 part line (lbs @ fpm)
***********************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
(Page 11 of 18)
02-01-2013
Boom Hoist Performance
Hoist Model 423-DJA
Serial Number: 4699
***********************************************************************************************
General Information
************************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
1 36882 297 128
2 34141 321 261
3 31779 344 411
4 29723 368 564
5 27916 392 734
6 26317 416 907
7 24891 440 1097
***********************************************************************************************
(Page 12 of 18)
02-01-2013
Boom Suspension Data
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Max Boom Static Factored Available Unloaded Maximum Unloaded Rope on
Radius SWL Angle Tension Tension Tension Tension Pressure Pressure Hoist Drum
Feet (Lbs.) (Deg.) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips) (psi) (psi) (feet)
************************************************************************************************
25 142,686 81.96 114 140 250 16 2,371 332 643
30 142,686 79.54 131 160 250 18 2,724 374 630
35 142,686 77.09 146 178 250 21 3,036 436 616
40 142,686 74.61 160 195 250 23 3,328 478 601
45 142,686 72.11 173 211 250 25 3,598 520 584
50 142,686 69.56 186 226 250 26 3,868 540 567
55 142,686 66.97 198 241 266 28 3,870 547 548
60 131,869 64.33 197 241 266 30 3,851 586 528
65 118,597 61.62 190 234 266 32 3,714 625 508
70 107,589 58.84 185 229 266 33 3,616 645 485
75 98,325 55.97 181 225 266 35 3,538 684 462
80 90,402 53.00 178 222 266 37 3,479 723 437
85 83,541 49.90 176 220 266 39 3,440 762 411
90 77,547 46.65 175 218 285 41 3,192 748 384
95 72,258 43.20 174 217 285 43 3,174 784 354
100 67,558 39.51 175 218 285 46 3,192 839 322
105 63,359 35.49 176 219 285 48 3,211 875 287
110 59,574 31.00 178 221 306 51 3,024 866 249
115 56,151 25.80 181 226 306 54 3,075 917 204
120 51,622 19.27 184 228 306 58 3,126 985 150
125 39,204 1.10 179 221 331 68 2,812 1,068 9
************************************************************************************************
(Page 13 of 18)
02-01-2013
Foundation & Rigging Design Factors
ONBOARD LIFTS
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Max Factored OnBoard Pedestal Total Factor Factor Factor Limiting
Radius SWL Load Dynamic (kingpost) Support Hoist Boom Standing Member
Feet (Lbs.) (Kips) Coef. Factor Factor Rope Rope Rigging
************************************************************************************************
25 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 7.462 N/A Hoist
30 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 6.516 N/A Hoist
35 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 5.848 N/A Hoist
40 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 5.341 N/A Hoist
45 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 4.937 N/A Hoist
50 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 4.603 N/A Hoist
55 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 4.317 N/A Hoist
60 131,869 172 1.256 1.403 1.763 5.453 4.348 N/A Post
65 118,597 157 1.267 1.418 1.797 6.038 4.490 N/A Post
70 107,589 144 1.277 1.430 1.826 6.629 4.608 N/A Post
75 98,325 133 1.285 1.441 1.851 7.223 4.703 N/A Post
80 90,402 123 1.291 1.450 1.872 7.823 4.777 N/A Post
85 83,541 115 1.297 1.457 1.890 8.429 4.831 N/A Post
90 77,547 107 1.302 1.464 1.906 9.041 4.865 N/A Post
95 72,258 101 1.307 1.470 1.921 9.660 4.879 N/A Post
100 67,558 95 1.311 1.475 1.933 10.286 4.871 N/A Post
105 63,359 90 1.314 1.480 1.945 10.918 4.840 N/A Post
110 59,574 85 1.318 1.484 1.955 11.558 4.782 N/A Post
115 56,151 81 1.321 1.488 1.964 12.205 4.688 N/A Post
120 51,622 75 1.324 1.493 1.977 13.181 4.620 N/A Susp
125 39,204 59 1.330 1.500 1.995 16.883 4.718 N/A Susp
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) Max SWL is a net load. The weight of the Block or Ball has been subtracted per section 8.1.1.
(3) The 'Total Support Factor' is the product of the 'Dynamic Coefficient' multiplied by the 'Pedestal Load Factor'
(PF) per section 6.2, equation (26).
(4) The Hoist Rope Factor is equal to the breaking strength of the hoist reeving system (max parts of line), adjusted for efficiency,
per section 7.2.2.5, divided by SWLH plus all applicable dead loads without regard for the Dynamic Coefficient.
(5) The Boom Rope Factor is equal to the breaking strength of the boom line reeving system, adjusted for efficiency,
per section 7.2.2.5, divided by the force induced by the SWL plus all applicable dead loads without regard for
the Dynamic Coefficient.
(6) The Standing Rigging Factor, if applicable, is equal to the breaking strength of the standing rigging components.
divided by the force induced by the SWL plus all applicable dead loads without regard for the Dynamic Coefficient.
(Page 14 of 18)
02-01-2013
OFFBOARD LIFTS
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Max Factored OffBoard Pedestal Total Factor Factor Factor Limiting
************************************************************************************************
25 142,686 204 1.379 1.391 1.919 5.053 5.583 N/A Hoist
30 142,686 202 1.369 1.391 1.905 5.053 5.213 N/A Hoist
35 142,686 201 1.359 1.391 1.891 5.053 4.877 N/A Hoist
40 142,686 199 1.349 1.391 1.876 5.053 4.584 N/A Hoist
45 142,686 198 1.338 1.391 1.862 5.053 4.328 N/A Hoist
50 136,319 189 1.338 1.399 1.871 5.281 4.264 N/A Post
55 122,364 171 1.345 1.414 1.902 5.860 4.436 N/A Post
60 110,900 157 1.350 1.427 1.927 6.439 4.581 N/A Post
65 101,287 144 1.355 1.437 1.947 7.022 4.703 N/A Post
70 93,147 133 1.357 1.447 1.963 7.604 4.802 N/A Post
75 86,202 124 1.358 1.454 1.975 8.183 4.877 N/A Post
80 80,172 116 1.359 1.461 1.985 8.762 4.932 N/A Post
85 74,933 108 1.357 1.467 1.991 9.337 4.965 N/A Post
90 70,333 102 1.355 1.472 1.995 9.907 4.977 N/A Post
95 66,237 96 1.353 1.476 1.997 10.476 4.971 N/A Post
100 62,668 91 1.348 1.480 1.996 11.029 4.939 N/A Post
105 59,452 87 1.343 1.484 1.993 11.579 4.886 N/A Post
110 56,644 82 1.337 1.487 1.988 12.107 4.804 N/A Post
115 54,207 79 1.328 1.490 1.979 12.605 4.683 N/A Post
120 49,989 73 1.326 1.494 1.981 13.572 4.633 N/A Susp
125 39,107 59 1.330 1.500 1.995 16.920 4.718 N/A Susp
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(PF) per section 6.2.
(4) The Hoist Rope Factor is equal to the breaking strength of the hoist reeving system, adjusted for efficiency,
(Page 15 of 18)
02-01-2013
Kingpost/Pedestal Fatigue Analysis
ONBOARD LIFTS
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook 50% Loaded Loaded Loaded Unloaded Unloaded Unloaded Stress Cycles
Radius SWL Moment Axial Stress Moment Axial Stress Range 50% SWL
Feet (Lbs.) (Kip-Ft) (Kips) (KSI) (Kip-Ft) (Kips) (KSI) (KSI) (millions)
************************************************************************************************
25 71,343 2,452 425 4.77 592 211 1.15 3.62 146
30 71,343 2,929 425 5.70 713 211 1.39 4.31 76
35 71,343 3,406 428 6.62 834 211 1.62 5.00 44
40 71,343 3,884 441 7.55 955 211 1.86 5.69 27
45 71,343 4,360 449 8.48 1,077 211 2.09 6.39 17
50 68,160 4,837 455 9.41 1,198 211 2.33 7.08 12
55 61,182 5,314 459 10.33 1,319 211 2.56 7.77 8
60 55,450 5,460 445 10.62 1,440 211 2.80 7.82 8
65 50,643 5,471 426 10.64 1,560 211 3.03 7.61 9
70 46,573 5,497 410 10.69 1,681 211 3.27 7.42 10
75 43,101 5,534 395 10.76 1,802 211 3.50 7.26 11
80 40,086 5,578 383 10.85 1,923 211 3.74 7.11 12
85 37,467 5,629 371 10.95 2,043 211 3.97 6.97 13
90 35,167 5,684 361 11.05 2,164 211 4.21 6.85 13
95 33,119 5,743 352 11.17 2,284 211 4.44 6.73 14
100 31,334 5,806 344 11.29 2,404 211 4.68 6.61 15
105 29,726 5,871 337 11.42 2,524 211 4.91 6.51 16
110 28,322 5,938 330 11.55 2,644 211 5.14 6.40 17
115 27,103 6,006 324 11.68 2,764 211 5.37 6.31 18
120 24,994 5,990 316 11.65 2,882 211 5.61 6.04 21
125 19,554 5,449 292 10.60 2,997 211 5.83 4.77 52
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) The number of Load Cycles has been divided by 1,000,000. ie: Load Cycles are presented in 'millions'.
(2) Loads, Moments, Stresses, and the Stress Range have been computed in accordance with API Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 6.4.
(3) The Fatigue Curve used is the X' curve from API RP 2A-LFRD 1993, Section F, (exponent = 3.74).
(4) Unless othewise noted, the Loads & Moments are taken @ the CL of the Kingpost, @ the elevation of the lower bearing shoes.
(Page 16 of 18)
02-01-2013
Explanation of SWL letter Suffixes
Section 8.1.1,(Reproduced Below)
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
8.1.1 Crane Rated Loads
It is the intent of this specification that all load rating charts present to the
operator the Safe Working Loads (SWL) that can actually be lifted and swung (slewed) on
the specific installation, and under the specific conditions for which the charts are
applicable. If the minimum hook velocity specified in section 5.4.5.2 cannot be met a
rating shall not be given for that particular significant wave height.
Therefore, the SWLs shown on these charts shall be the least of the following:
a. Maximum load based on all structural components (except king post and pedestal)
that does not cause the allowable stresses of Section 6 to be exceeded on any
component when the crane is simultaneously subjected to vertical factored load plus
all loads due to supply boat motion, platform/vessel motion, platform/vessel
static inclination, and environmental loads as defined in Section 5
b. Maximum load based on king post or pedestal that does not cause the allowable
stresses of Section 6 to be exceeded with the same loads as item (a) above but with
the added pedestal factor given in Section 6.2
c. Maximum load based on loadline reeving and wire rope design factors in accordance
with Section 7.2.2.
d. Maximum load based on loadhoist line pull available, considering line reeving
losses with manufacturer's design reeving for a load at the boom tip, calculated in
accordance with Section 7.3.1.
e. Maximum load based on boomline reeving and wire rope design factors in accordance
with Section 7.2.2.
f. Maximum load based on boom pendant wire rope in accordance with Section 7.2.2.
g. Seventy-five percent of maximum load based on boom hoist line pull available,
considering line reeving losses with manufacturer's design reeving for boom line,
calculated in accordance with Section 7.3.1.
h. Maximum load based on Swing-circle Assembly capability, where applicable, as
defined in Section 7.4.2.1.
i. Maximum load based on swing-mechanism capability as defined in Sections
7.4.1.2 and 7.4.1.3
The published 'load chart' rated load SWL shall equal SWLH minus the weight of the hook block.
************************************************************************************************
Notes:
(1) All Section numbers refer to Specification for Offshore Pedestal Mounted Cranes API SPECIFICATION 2C,
SEVENTH EDITION, MARCH 2012.
(2) Items 'h' and 'j' are not applicable to Seatrax Kingpost Cranes.
(3) Seatrax has expanded item 'i' to include item 'is' maximum load limited by available swing (slew)
Driving torque and item 'ih' maximum load limited by available swing (slew) holding torque.
(4) Seatrax has added the designation 'v' for SWLs reduced by the cranes ability to meet the speed
required by section 5.4.5.2.
(5) Additionally, Seatrax has replaced all SWLs for reeving conditions where the speed required
by section 5.4.5.2 cannot be met, with the desigination 'N/Av'.
(Page 17 of 18)
02-01-2013
INFORMATION CHART
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Seatrax Marine Crane Operating Notes
(1) This is a Seatrax Kingpost Marine Crane. Unlike conventional cranes, It CANNOT separate from
its foundation (pedestal) due to slew bearing failure.
(2) This Seatrax Marine Crane has Hoists with Fail-Safe Drum Brakes. Releasing the controls will
set all Hoist Brakes automatically. In case of emergency, do NOT pull back on the controls
as this action signals the brakes to remain off. Release the controls to set the brakes.
(3) This Seatrax Marine Crane is equipped with a patented mechanical anti-twoblock system.
Lowering the boom will NOT cause the boom to contact the hook block(s).
(4) For optimum safety and service life, follow the operating, inspection,& maintenance
instructions in the Seatrax Operation and Maintenance Manual or CD.
************************************************************************************************
************************************************************************************************
Additional Data
Seatrax Boom Hoist Model Number 423-DJA
Auxiliary Hoist Max Available Hook Speed @ Water Level (FPM) 332.000
Main Hoist Max Available Hook Speed @ Water Level with 2 Part Reeving (FPM) 143.000
************************************************************************************************
Seatrax Marine Crane Inspection & Maintenance Notes
(1) There are no time based internal inspection or overhaul requirements for Seatrax Hoists.
(2) There are no time based replacement requirements for hydraulic hoses. Replace hoses only
as needed and based on condition.
(3) When installing wire ropes, it may be necessary to add or subtract Drum flange spacers in
order to assure proper spooling. This is because of manufacturing differences in rope
diameter. This can occur with ropes of the same construction & from the same manufacturer.
(4) Wire rope must be installed tightly on the hoist Drums and tension must be maintained at
all times during operation. Failure to do so can result in crushing and poor spooling.
(Page 18 of 18)
02-01-2013
Seatrax Inc.
P.O. Box 840687 Houston, Texas 77284
Telephone (713)-896-6500
Fax (713)-896-6611
www.seatrax.com
Seatrax Crane Data Sheet Package

Copyright 1979 - 2011 by Seatrax Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Developed for Installation on a

Fixed Structure per Spec 2C section 1(a)
by
API General Method
Significant Wave Height = 6 feet
In Compliance With
Imperial Measurement Units
Prepared For
Drillmec Inc
Project No. 120692
Fixed Platfrom Rig Set 1
PO No. POB2002194
Seatrax Serial No 4699
(Page 1 of 18)
02-01-2013
Table of Contents
************************************************************************************************
3. General Information
Ref 4.2e), 5.4.5.2, 5.4.6.2, 8.2.2f),g)
4. ONBOARD (Deck Lift) Safe Working Load CHART
5. OFFBOARD (Supply Boat)Safe Working Load CHART
6. Kingpost (Pedestal) Reactions
Ref 4.1b), 6.2, Annex B, B.6.2
7. Theoretical Component Failure Mode Analysis
Ref 4.1e), 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, Annex B, B.9
8. Calculated Spring Constants and Cv
Ref 5.4.5.2, Annex B, B.5.4.5
9. Total Offlead & Sidelead Forces
Ref 5.4.6, 5.4.7, 5.6.1 Annex B, B.5.4.6.2, B5.4.6.3, B5.6.1
10. Auxiliary Hoist Performance
Ref 7.3.1, 8.1.1d)
11. Main Hoist Performance
Ref 7.3.1, 8.1.1d)
12. Boom Hoist Performance
Ref 7.3.1, 8.1.1g)
13. Boom Suspension Data
Ref 7.3.2.1, 8.1.1e)
14. Foundation & Rigging Design Factors (ONBOARD Lifts)
Ref 6.2, 7.2.2.4.1, 7.2.2.4.2, 7.2.2.6, 7.2.2.7, Annex B, B.7.2.2.4
15. Foundation & Rigging Design Factors (OFFBOARD Lifts)
Ref 6.2, 7.2.2.4.1, 7.2.2.4.2, 7.2.2.6, 7.2.2.7, Annex B, B.7.2.2.4
16. Kingpost/Pedestal Fatigue Analysis
Ref Ref 4.1e), 6.4, Annex B, B.6.4
17. Explanation of SWL letter Suffixes
Ref 8.1.1a) thru i)
18. Information CHART
Ref 4.1b), 8.2.2a) thru m)
************************************************************************************************
All paragraph references are to API SPECIFICATION 2C SEVENTH EDITION, MARCH 2012
(Page 2 of 18)
02-01-2013
General Information
Serial Number: 4699
Identification Number: 4699_hsig_6ft
************************************************************************************************
FACILITY SPECIFIC ELEVATIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GENERAL CRANE DIMENSIONS
Gantry height from boom foot pivot (ft.) 48.000
Center of rotation to gantry shaft (ft.) 6.500
Center of rotation to boom foot pivot (ft.) 6.000
Center of rotation to CG. (ft.) 1.580
GF 0.980
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
KINGPOST
Kingpost yield stress (ksi) 50.000
Kingpost outside diameter (in.) 72.000
Kingpost wall thickness (in.) 1.625
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GANTRY
Gantry Leg Material Yield Strength (ksi) 50.000
Gantry Leg Square Tube Size (in) 7.870
Gantry Leg Wall Thickness (in) 0.630
Horizontal Dim CL Rot to Rear Leg @ Bottom (ft) 3.500
Horizontal Dim CL Rot to Front Leg @ Bottom (ft) 3.500
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOOM
Boom Chord Square Tube Yield Strength (ksi) 50.000
Boom Chord Square Tube Size @ Butt (in) 5.900
Boom Chord Wall Thickness @ Butt (in) 0.492
Diagonal Diameter @ Butt (in) 2.375
Diagonal Wall Thickness @ Butt (in) 0.344
Unsupported Chord Length @ Butt (in) 27.000
Height Between Chord Centers @Butt (in) 43.000
Width Between Chord Centers @ Butt (in) 84.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SLEW GEARS
Number of Bull Gear Teeth 87.000
Number of Pinion Gear Teeth 11.000
Number of Slew Pinions 2.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
WIRE ROPE COMPONENT DATA
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
APPROXIMATE SELF WEIGHTS
Complete Crane & Boom (kips) 204.540
Block(s) (kips) 6.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HOIST SELECTIONS
************************************************************************************************
(Page 3 of 18)
02-01-2013
ONBOARD (Deck Lifts)
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
************************************************************************************************
25 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
30 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
35 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
40 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
45 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
50 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
55 70,305d 142,686d N/A 28,585d 14,292d
60 70,305d 131,869b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
65 70,305d 118,597b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
70 70,305d 107,589b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
75 70,305d 98,325b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
80 70,305d 90,402b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
85 70,305d 83,541b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
90 70,305d 77,547b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
95 70,305d 72,258b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
100 67,558b 67,558b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
105 63,359b 63,359b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
110 59,574b 59,574b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
115 56,151b 56,151b N/A 28,585d 14,292d
120 51,622e 51,622e N/A 28,585d 14,292d
125 39,204e 39,204e N/A 28,585d 14,292d
************************************************************************************************
(4) The Specified Boom Tip Velocity caused by Foundation Motions is N/A.
(Page 4 of 18)
02-01-2013
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
************************************************************************************************
25 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
30 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
35 70,305d 142,686d N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
40 70,305d 133,956b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
45 70,305d 117,556b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
50 70,305d 104,594b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
55 70,305d 94,039b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
60 70,305d 85,390b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
65 70,305d 78,168b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
70 70,305d 72,084b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
75 65,968b 66,827b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
80 61,107b 62,335b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
85 56,883b 58,423b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
90 53,184b 54,989b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
95 49,956b 51,992b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
100 47,084b 49,307b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
105 44,644b 47,047b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
110 42,489b 45,041b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
115 40,784b 43,483b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
120 39,427b 42,264b N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
125 39,161e 39,161e N/Av 28,585d 14,292d
************************************************************************************************
(12) The Minimum Required Hook Speed (VHmin) per API Spec 2C, 5.4 is 37 ft/min.
(Page 5 of 18)
02-01-2013
Kingpost (Pedestal) Reactions
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD
Hook Rated Vertical Primary Side Slew Vertical Primary Side Slew
Radius SWL Load Moment Moment Moment Load Moment Moment Moment
Feet (Lbs) (Kips) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft) (Kips) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft) (Kip-Ft)
************************************************************************************************
25 142686 425 6209 702 142 516 10879 1640 333
30 142686 425 7411 697 171 524 12818 1669 410
35 142686 428 8721 699 202 528 14682 1679 485
40 142686 441 10468 722 241 515 15737 1604 536
45 142686 449 12117 732 279 485 15791 1453 553
50 142686 455 13723 735 315 461 15836 1325 569
55 142686 459 15308 732 351 440 15874 1214 583
60 131868 445 15832 686 367 422 15906 1116 597
65 118596 426 15867 629 373 406 15935 1030 611
70 107588 410 15895 577 378 393 15959 951 624
75 98324 395 15921 530 384 381 15982 879 637
80 90401 383 15944 486 389 370 16001 813 651
85 83540 371 15964 445 394 361 16020 750 665
90 77546 361 15982 405 400 352 16037 690 680
95 72257 352 15998 367 405 344 16051 631 696
100 67558 344 16012 329 410 337 16066 573 714
105 63359 337 16026 291 415 331 16080 515 734
110 59573 330 16038 251 420 325 16093 453 757
115 56150 324 16048 208 425 320 16104 384 786
120 51622 316 15732 154 424 316 16119 300 826
125 39204 292 13459 35 384 306 15316 83 900
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(2) SWLs are for ONBOARD lifts and are based on a main block reeving system of 4 parts of line.
(3) The Primary Moment is the summation of moments about an axis 90 degrees to the boom centerline.
(4) The Side Moment is the summation of moments about an axis parallel to the boom centerline.
(5) The Slew Moment (torsion) is the rotational moment about the Kingpost (Pedestal) center.
(6) The total Vertical Load is the summation of all factored vertical loads multiplied by the pedestal load
factor (PF) from Spec 2C, section 6.2, equation (26).
(7) The Primary Moment is based on all factored loads multiplied by the pedestal load factor (PF) from
(8) The Side Moment is based on all factored loads multiplied by the pedestal load factor (PF) from
(Page 6 of 18)
02-01-2013
Theoretical Component Failure Mode Analysis
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Based Based Based Based Based Based Based Calc Comp. Ratio
Radius on on on on on on Main on Aux Fail First to
Feet K-Post Susp Pendt Boom Gantry Cable Cable Load to Fail K-Post
************************************************************************************************
25 887 935 N/A 346 648 784 159 346 Boom 2.6
30 777 888 N/A 348 591 784 159 348 Boom 2.2
35 690 840 N/A 346 540 784 159 346 Boom 2.0
40 621 795 N/A 343 496 784 159 343 Boom 1.8
45 564 755 N/A 340 457 784 159 340 Boom 1.6
50 517 718 N/A 337 416 784 159 337 Boom 1.5
55 476 684 N/A 333 380 784 159 333 Boom 1.4
60 442 653 N/A 330 350 784 159 330 Boom 1.3
65 412 624 N/A 327 325 784 159 325 Gantry 1.3
70 385 597 N/A 324 303 784 159 303 Gantry 1.3
75 362 571 N/A 321 283 784 159 283 Gantry 1.3
80 342 547 N/A 317 267 784 159 267 Gantry 1.3
85 323 523 N/A 315 251 784 159 251 Gantry 1.3
90 307 501 N/A 311 238 784 159 238 Gantry 1.3
95 292 479 N/A 308 226 784 159 226 Gantry 1.3
100 279 457 N/A 305 215 784 159 215 Gantry 1.3
105 266 435 N/A 301 206 784 159 206 Gantry 1.3
110 255 414 N/A 297 197 784 159 197 Gantry 1.3
115 245 391 N/A 292 190 784 159 190 Gantry 1.3
120 237 366 N/A 274 184 784 159 184 Gantry 1.3
125 230 319 N/A 229 181 784 159 181 Gantry 1.3
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) All Loads are measured in KIPS.
(2) Loads shown are calculated in accordance with Spec 2C, Section 9.2 by the methods given in section 9.3.
(3) Ratio to Kingpost is the ratio of the Component First to Fail to the Kingpost. Aux Cable is excluded from this ratio.
(Page 7 of 18)
02-01-2013
Calculated Spring Constants and Cv
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Boom 2 Falls 2 Falls 4 Falls 4 Falls 6 Falls 6 Falls Aux Line Aux Line
Radius Angle Spring Dynamic Spring Dynamic Spring Dynamic Spring Dynamic
Feet (Deg.) Constant Coef. Constant Coef. Constant Coef, Constant Coef.
************************************************************************************************
25 81.96 47.16 1.75 90.73 1.62 0 0 17.64 2.12
30 79.53 45.92 1.74 86.09 1.6 0 0 17.48 2.11
35 77.08 44.62 1.73 81.46 1.59 0 0 17.31 2.11
40 74.61 43.26 1.72 76.82 1.59 0 0 17.13 2.1
45 72.1 41.89 1.71 72.4 1.61 0 0 16.95 2.1
50 69.56 40.51 1.7 68.14 1.63 0 0 16.76 2.09
55 66.97 39.17 1.68 64.21 1.64 0 0 16.57 2.08
60 64.32 37.77 1.67 60.31 1.65 0 0 16.36 2.08
65 61.62 36.36 1.66 56.57 1.66 0 0 16.14 2.07
70 58.84 34.91 1.65 52.92 1.66 0 0 15.91 2.06
75 55.97 33.53 1.67 49.6 1.66 0 0 15.68 2.05
80 53 32.09 1.69 46.3 1.66 0 0 15.43 2.04
85 49.9 30.67 1.7 43.2 1.66 0 0 15.16 2.04
90 46.64 29.27 1.7 40.27 1.65 0 0 14.89 2.03
95 43.2 27.85 1.71 37.43 1.64 0 0 14.6 2.02
100 39.5 26.51 1.71 34.85 1.64 0 0 14.32 2.01
105 35.48 25.02 1.7 32.14 1.63 0 0 13.98 1.99
110 31 23.59 1.7 29.62 1.61 0 0 13.63 1.98
115 25.79 22 1.69 26.97 1.59 0 0 13.22 1.97
120 19.26 20.37 1.67 24.35 1.57 0 0 12.77 1.95
125 3.63 17.25 1.62 19.69 1.53 0 0 11.82 1.91
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) All Spring Constants are in KIPS/Foot
(2) The calculated Supply Boat Deck Velocity in ft/sec is 3.6
(3) The avaliable 1 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is 5.53
(4) The available 2 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is 2.06
(5) The available 4 Fall Hook Speed in ft/sec is .94
(Page 8 of 18)
02-01-2013
Total Offlead & Sidelead Forces
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Boom ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD ONBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD OFFBOARD
Radius Angle OffLead Offlead SideLead SideLead Offlead Offlead SideLead SideLead
Feet (Deg.) Force Angle Force Angle Force Angle Force Angle
************************************************************************************************
25 81 1771 .5 4979 .5 16589 3.921 10574 2.212
30 79 1771 .5 4980 .5 16464 3.931 10501 2.217
35 77 1771 .5 4980 .5 16347 3.943 10432 2.223
40 74 1771 .5 4980 .5 15479 3.959 9939 2.231
45 72 1771 .5 4980 .5 13906 3.977 9046 2.24
50 69 1771 .5 4980 .5 12640 3.999 8329 2.251
55 66 1773 .5 4980 .5 11602 4.024 7741 2.263
60 64 1666 .5 4736 .5 10739 4.053 7250 2.278
65 61 1532 .5 4431 .5 10012 4.086 6835 2.294
70 58 1419 .5 4172 .5 9394 4.124 6482 2.314
75 55 1324 .5 3953 .5 8866 4.168 6181 2.335
80 53 1241 .5 3762 .5 8411 4.218 5921 2.361
85 49 1169 .5 3595 .5 8024 4.275 5697 2.389
90 46 1103 .5 3448 .5 7692 4.342 5506 2.423
95 43 1047 .5 3318 .5 7414 4.42 5342 2.462
100 39 996 .5 3200 .5 7184 4.513 5206 2.509
105 35 950 .5 3095 .5 7008 4.625 5099 2.565
110 31 908 .5 3000 .5 6888 4.765 5024 2.635
115 25 871 .5 2914 .5 6852 4.949 4992 2.728
120 19 822 .5 2799 .5 6940 5.218 5024 2.863
125 3 680 .5 2476 .5 7337 6.069 5199 3.291
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) All Forces are in LBS. All Angles are in DEGREES.
(3) The Sidelead & Offlead Forces acting at the boom tip due to Wind Loads are 1132 lbs per Spec 2C, section 5.6.1.
(6) The Total Offlead Force includes the effects of Wind, Supply Boat Position, Dynamic Coefficient per Spec 2C, section 5.4.6.
Foundation Trim Angle, & Lateral Foundation acceleration per section .
(7) The Total Sidelead Force includes the effects of Wind, Supply Boat Position, Dynamic Coefficient,
Foundation List Angle, & Lateral Foundation acceleration per Spec 2C, section 5.4.6.
(8) The Equivalent Offlead Angle is the Angle that the Hoistline is offset from the Vertical Plane,
inline with the Boom, due to Supply Boat Position and Foundation Trim.
(9) The Equivalent Sidelead Angle is the Angle that the Hoistline is offset from the Vertical Plane,
to the side of the Boom, due to Supply Boat Position and Foundation List.
(Page 9 of 18)
02-01-2013
Auxiliary Hoist Performance
Hoist Model 463-EJA
Serial Number: 4699
***********************************************************************************************
General Information
Rexroth 160cc Fixed: ( 1 ) Motor Displacement (cir): 9.76
************************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
1 32960 332 309
2 30177 363 641
3 27827 393 1008
4 25817 424 1397
***********************************************************************************************
Performance Auxiliary Line (lbs @ fpm)
***********************************************************************************************
(Page 10 of 18)
02-01-2013
Main Hoist Performance
Hoist Model 763-GKC
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
General Information
Drum Core Diameter (in): 24 Drum Flange Diameter (in): 40
Width Between Flanges (in): 63.000 Wire Rope Dia. (in): 1.250
************************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
Cable (lbs) (FPM) Feet
***********************************************************************************************
1 48762 229 330
2 44911 248 682
3 41624 268 1069
4 38785 287 1476
***********************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
(Page 11 of 18)
02-01-2013
Boom Hoist Performance
Hoist Model 423-DJA
Serial Number: 4699
***********************************************************************************************
General Information
************************************************************************************************
***********************************************************************************************
1 36882 297 128
2 34141 321 261
3 31779 344 411
4 29723 368 564
5 27916 392 734
6 26317 416 907
7 24891 440 1097
***********************************************************************************************
(Page 12 of 18)
02-01-2013
Boom Suspension Data
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Max Boom Static Factored Available Unloaded Maximum Unloaded Rope on
Radius SWL Angle Tension Tension Tension Tension Pressure Pressure Hoist Drum
Feet (Lbs.) (Deg.) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips) (psi) (psi) (feet)
************************************************************************************************
25 142,686 81.96 114 140 250 16 2,371 332 643
30 142,686 79.54 131 160 250 18 2,724 374 630
35 142,686 77.09 146 178 250 21 3,036 436 616
40 142,686 74.61 160 195 250 23 3,328 478 601
45 142,686 72.11 173 211 250 25 3,598 520 584
50 142,686 69.56 186 226 250 26 3,868 540 567
55 142,686 66.97 198 241 266 28 3,870 547 548
60 131,869 64.33 197 241 266 30 3,851 586 528
65 118,597 61.62 190 234 266 32 3,714 625 508
70 107,589 58.84 185 229 266 33 3,616 645 485
75 98,325 55.97 181 225 266 35 3,538 684 462
80 90,402 53.00 178 222 266 37 3,479 723 437
85 83,541 49.90 176 220 266 39 3,440 762 411
90 77,547 46.65 175 218 285 41 3,192 748 384
95 72,258 43.20 174 217 285 43 3,174 784 354
100 67,558 39.51 175 218 285 46 3,192 839 322
105 63,359 35.49 176 219 285 48 3,211 875 287
110 59,574 31.00 178 221 306 51 3,024 866 249
115 56,151 25.80 181 226 306 54 3,075 917 204
120 51,622 19.27 184 228 306 58 3,126 985 150
125 39,204 1.10 179 221 331 68 2,812 1,068 9
************************************************************************************************
(Page 13 of 18)
02-01-2013
ONBOARD LIFTS
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Max Factored OnBoard Pedestal Total Factor Factor Factor Limiting
************************************************************************************************
25 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 7.462 N/A Hoist
30 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 6.516 N/A Hoist
35 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 5.848 N/A Hoist
40 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 5.341 N/A Hoist
45 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 4.937 N/A Hoist
50 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 4.603 N/A Hoist
55 142,686 184 1.247 1.391 1.735 5.053 4.317 N/A Hoist
60 131,869 172 1.256 1.403 1.763 5.453 4.348 N/A Post
65 118,597 157 1.267 1.418 1.797 6.038 4.490 N/A Post
70 107,589 144 1.277 1.430 1.826 6.629 4.608 N/A Post
75 98,325 133 1.285 1.441 1.851 7.223 4.703 N/A Post
80 90,402 123 1.291 1.450 1.872 7.823 4.777 N/A Post
85 83,541 115 1.297 1.457 1.890 8.429 4.831 N/A Post
90 77,547 107 1.302 1.464 1.906 9.041 4.865 N/A Post
95 72,258 101 1.307 1.470 1.921 9.660 4.879 N/A Post
100 67,558 95 1.311 1.475 1.933 10.286 4.871 N/A Post
105 63,359 90 1.314 1.480 1.945 10.918 4.840 N/A Post
110 59,574 85 1.318 1.484 1.955 11.558 4.782 N/A Post
115 56,151 81 1.321 1.488 1.964 12.205 4.688 N/A Post
120 51,622 75 1.324 1.493 1.977 13.181 4.620 N/A Susp
125 39,204 59 1.330 1.500 1.995 16.883 4.718 N/A Susp
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(PF) per section 6.2, equation (26).
(4) The Hoist Rope Factor is equal to the breaking strength of the hoist reeving system (max parts of line), adjusted for efficiency,
(Page 14 of 18)
02-01-2013
OFFBOARD LIFTS
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook Max Factored OffBoard Pedestal Total Factor Factor Factor Limiting
************************************************************************************************
25 142,686 240 1.626 1.391 2.262 5.053 5.113 N/A Hoist
30 142,686 238 1.610 1.391 2.240 5.053 4.864 N/A Hoist
35 142,686 235 1.593 1.391 2.217 5.053 4.604 N/A Hoist
40 133,956 222 1.596 1.401 2.237 5.371 4.605 N/A Post
45 117,556 198 1.616 1.419 2.294 6.090 4.879 N/A Post
50 104,594 179 1.632 1.434 2.340 6.810 5.112 N/A Post
55 94,039 163 1.646 1.446 2.379 7.536 5.311 N/A Post
60 85,390 150 1.655 1.455 2.408 8.257 5.473 N/A Post
65 78,168 138 1.661 1.463 2.431 8.974 5.603 N/A Post
70 72,084 128 1.664 1.470 2.447 9.682 5.702 N/A Post
75 66,827 120 1.666 1.476 2.459 10.390 5.775 N/A Post
80 62,335 112 1.665 1.481 2.465 11.084 5.819 N/A Post
85 58,423 105 1.662 1.485 2.468 11.767 5.838 N/A Post
90 54,989 99 1.657 1.489 2.467 12.441 5.833 N/A Post
95 51,992 94 1.650 1.492 2.462 13.095 5.802 N/A Post
100 49,307 89 1.642 1.495 2.456 13.742 5.749 N/A Post
105 47,047 85 1.630 1.498 2.442 14.339 5.660 N/A Post
110 45,041 81 1.617 1.500 2.425 14.914 5.542 N/A Post
115 43,483 77 1.598 1.500 2.397 15.393 5.371 N/A Post
120 42,264 74 1.576 1.500 2.363 15.790 5.134 N/A Post
125 39,161 68 1.535 1.500 2.303 16.900 4.718 N/A Susp
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(PF) per section 6.2.
(4) The Hoist Rope Factor is equal to the breaking strength of the hoist reeving system, adjusted for efficiency,
(Page 15 of 18)
02-01-2013
Kingpost/Pedestal Fatigue Analysis
ONBOARD LIFTS
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Hook 50% Loaded Loaded Loaded Unloaded Unloaded Unloaded Stress Cycles
Radius SWL Moment Axial Stress Moment Axial Stress Range 50% SWL
Feet (Lbs.) (Kip-Ft) (Kips) (KSI) (Kip-Ft) (Kips) (KSI) (KSI) (millions)
************************************************************************************************
25 71,343 2,452 425 4.77 592 211 1.15 3.62 146
30 71,343 2,929 425 5.70 713 211 1.39 4.31 76
35 71,343 3,406 428 6.62 834 211 1.62 5.00 44
40 66,978 3,884 441 7.55 955 211 1.86 5.69 27
45 58,778 4,360 449 8.48 1,077 211 2.09 6.39 17
50 52,297 4,837 455 9.41 1,198 211 2.33 7.08 12
55 47,019 5,314 459 10.33 1,319 211 2.56 7.77 8
60 42,695 5,460 445 10.62 1,440 211 2.80 7.82 8
65 39,084 5,471 426 10.64 1,560 211 3.03 7.61 9
70 36,042 5,497 410 10.69 1,681 211 3.27 7.42 10
75 33,413 5,534 395 10.76 1,802 211 3.50 7.26 11
80 31,167 5,578 383 10.85 1,923 211 3.74 7.11 12
85 29,212 5,629 371 10.95 2,043 211 3.97 6.97 13
90 27,495 5,684 361 11.05 2,164 211 4.21 6.85 13
95 25,996 5,743 352 11.17 2,284 211 4.44 6.73 14
100 24,654 5,806 344 11.29 2,404 211 4.68 6.61 15
105 23,523 5,871 337 11.42 2,524 211 4.91 6.51 16
110 22,520 5,938 330 11.55 2,644 211 5.14 6.40 17
115 21,742 6,006 324 11.68 2,764 211 5.37 6.31 18
120 21,132 5,990 316 11.65 2,882 211 5.61 6.04 21
125 19,581 5,449 292 10.60 2,997 211 5.83 4.77 52
************************************************************************************************
Notes
(1) The number of Load Cycles has been divided by 1,000,000. ie: Load Cycles are presented in 'millions'.
(2) Loads, Moments, Stresses, and the Stress Range have been computed in accordance with API Spec 2C, 7th Edition, 6.4.
(3) The Fatigue Curve used is the X' curve from API RP 2A-LFRD 1993, Section F, (exponent = 3.74).
(4) Unless othewise noted, the Loads & Moments are taken @ the CL of the Kingpost, @ the elevation of the lower bearing shoes.
(Page 16 of 18)
02-01-2013
Explanation of SWL letter Suffixes
Section 8.1.1,(Reproduced Below)
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
8.1.1 Crane Rated Loads
It is the intent of this specification that all load rating charts present to the
operator the Safe Working Loads (SWL) that can actually be lifted and swung (slewed) on
the specific installation, and under the specific conditions for which the charts are
applicable. If the minimum hook velocity specified in section 5.4.5.2 cannot be met a
rating shall not be given for that particular significant wave height.
Therefore, the SWLs shown on these charts shall be the least of the following:
a. Maximum load based on all structural components (except king post and pedestal)
that does not cause the allowable stresses of Section 6 to be exceeded on any
component when the crane is simultaneously subjected to vertical factored load plus
all loads due to supply boat motion, platform/vessel motion, platform/vessel
static inclination, and environmental loads as defined in Section 5
b. Maximum load based on king post or pedestal that does not cause the allowable
stresses of Section 6 to be exceeded with the same loads as item (a) above but with
the added pedestal factor given in Section 6.2
c. Maximum load based on loadline reeving and wire rope design factors in accordance
with Section 7.2.2.
d. Maximum load based on loadhoist line pull available, considering line reeving
losses with manufacturer's design reeving for a load at the boom tip, calculated in
accordance with Section 7.3.1.
e. Maximum load based on boomline reeving and wire rope design factors in accordance
with Section 7.2.2.
f. Maximum load based on boom pendant wire rope in accordance with Section 7.2.2.
g. Seventy-five percent of maximum load based on boom hoist line pull available,
considering line reeving losses with manufacturer's design reeving for boom line,
calculated in accordance with Section 7.3.1.
h. Maximum load based on Swing-circle Assembly capability, where applicable, as
defined in Section 7.4.2.1.
i. Maximum load based on swing-mechanism capability as defined in Sections
7.4.1.2 and 7.4.1.3
The published 'load chart' rated load SWL shall equal SWLH minus the weight of the hook block.
************************************************************************************************
Notes:
(1) All Section numbers refer to Specification for Offshore Pedestal Mounted Cranes API SPECIFICATION 2C,
SEVENTH EDITION, MARCH 2012.
(2) Items 'h' and 'j' are not applicable to Seatrax Kingpost Cranes.
(3) Seatrax has expanded item 'i' to include item 'is' maximum load limited by available swing (slew)
Driving torque and item 'ih' maximum load limited by available swing (slew) holding torque.
(4) Seatrax has added the designation 'v' for SWLs reduced by the cranes ability to meet the speed
required by section 5.4.5.2.
(5) Additionally, Seatrax has replaced all SWLs for reeving conditions where the speed required
by section 5.4.5.2 cannot be met, with the desigination 'N/Av'.
(Page 17 of 18)
02-01-2013
INFORMATION CHART
Serial Number: 4699
************************************************************************************************
Seatrax Marine Crane Operating Notes
(1) This is a Seatrax Kingpost Marine Crane. Unlike conventional cranes, It CANNOT separate from
its foundation (pedestal) due to slew bearing failure.
(2) This Seatrax Marine Crane has Hoists with Fail-Safe Drum Brakes. Releasing the controls will
set all Hoist Brakes automatically. In case of emergency, do NOT pull back on the controls
as this action signals the brakes to remain off. Release the controls to set the brakes.
(3) This Seatrax Marine Crane is equipped with a patented mechanical anti-twoblock system.
Lowering the boom will NOT cause the boom to contact the hook block(s).
(4) For optimum safety and service life, follow the operating, inspection,& maintenance
instructions in the Seatrax Operation and Maintenance Manual or CD.
************************************************************************************************
************************************************************************************************
Additional Data
Seatrax Boom Hoist Model Number 423-DJA
Auxiliary Hoist Max Available Hook Speed @ Water Level (FPM) 332.000
************************************************************************************************
Seatrax Marine Crane Inspection & Maintenance Notes
(1) There are no time based internal inspection or overhaul requirements for Seatrax Hoists.
(2) There are no time based replacement requirements for hydraulic hoses. Replace hoses only
as needed and based on condition.
(3) When installing wire ropes, it may be necessary to add or subtract Drum flange spacers in
order to assure proper spooling. This is because of manufacturing differences in rope
diameter. This can occur with ropes of the same construction & from the same manufacturer.
(4) Wire rope must be installed tightly on the hoist Drums and tension must be maintained at
all times during operation. Failure to do so can result in crushing and poor spooling.
(Page 18 of 18)
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
13March2000
SeatraxStandardLoadTestProcedures
(SuspendedWeightMethod)
There are other steps involved prior to and after performing the actual lifting phase. All
qualified personnel performing or overseeing a load test should be completely familiar with the
above referenced API Spec, particularly Appendix E - Commentary on Load Testing and be
knowledgeable in the reading and interpretation of crane load rating charts.
MAIN HOIST:
Lift 100% of rated load for the main hoist at any desired radius and boom out to a radius that
will overload the cranes rating by:
25% for main hoist load ratings up to 40,000 lbs.
10,000 lbs for main hoist load ratings of 40,000 lbs to 100,000 lbs.
10% for main hoist load ratings over 100,000 lbs.
Record the Following:
1. Actual Test Weight
2. Actual Maximum Test Radius
3. Cranes Load Rating at Maximum Test Radius
4. Indicated Load (If crane equipped with a SLI)
5. Hydraulic Pressure Required to Lift the Load
AUXILIARY HOIST:
Lift 100% of rated load for the auxiliary hoist and boom out to any radius up to but not
exceeding that which will overload the cranes rating (if possible) by:
25% for cranes with auxiliary hoist load ratings up to 40,000 lbs.
10,000 lbs for cranes with auxiliary hoist load ratings of 40,000 lbs to 100,000 lbs.
10% for cranes with auxiliary hoist load ratings over 100,000 lbs.
3. Cranes Auxiliary Load Rating at Maximum Test Radius
4. Indicated Load (If equipped with a SLI)
5. Hydraulic Pressure Required to Lift the Load
LoadTestProcedure.doc Page1of2
AUXILIARY HOIST (Optional)
Position the boom at such an angle so that the desired overload of the auxiliary rated load will
not overload the cranes structural capacity. Attach the desired overload onto the auxiliary hoist
and take all slack out of the hoist line. DO NOT RAISE THE LOAD WITH THE
AUXILIARY HOIST. Lift the load until fully suspended by the crane by raising the boom.
3. Cranes Auxiliary Load Rating at Maximum Test Radius
LoadTestProcedure.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
13demarzode2000
ProcedimientoestndarSeatraxparapruebadecarga
(Mtododepesosuspendido)
Hay otros pasos necesarios antes y despus de realizar la fase de elevacin real. Todo el
personal cualificado que realizan o supervisan una prueba de carga deben estar completamente
familiarizados con especificaciones del API, en particular el Apndice E - Comentario sobre
pruebas de carga y ser informado en la lectura e interpretacin de grficas de carga de la gra de
calificacin.
MALACATEPRINCIPAL:
Levante el 100% de la carga nominal para el malacate principal en cualquier radio deseado y
mueva la pluma a un radio que se sobrecargue la clasificacin de la gra por:
25% Para malacate principal de carga clasificado hasta 40,000 lbs.
10,000 Para malacate principal de carga clasificado de 40,000 lbs a 100,000 lbs.
10% Para malacate principal de carga clasificado sobre 100,000 lbs.
Registre la siguiente:
1. Peso de prueba actual
2. Prueba de radio mximo actual
3. Clasificacin de prueba de radio mximo de la gra
4. Carga indicada (Si la gra dispone de un SLI)
5. La presin hidrulica requerida para levantar la carga
MALACATEAUXILIAR:
Levante el 100% de la carga nominal para el malacate auxiliar y la pluma a cualquier radio,
pero no exceda el malacate sobrecargar la clasificacin de la gra (si es posible) a travs de:
25% Para gras con malacate auxiliar carga clasificada Hasta 40,000 lbs.
10,000 lbs Para gras con malacate auxiliar carga clasificado de 40,000 lbs a 100,000 lbs.
10% Para gras con malacate auxiliar carga clasificado sobre 100,000 lbs.
4. Carga indicada (Si la gra dispone de un SLI)
5. La presin hidrulica requerida para levantar la carga
LoadTestProcedure_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
MALACATEAUXILIAR(opcional)
Coloque la pluma en un ngulo tal que la sobrecarga deseada de la carga nominal auxiliar no se
sobrecargue la capacidad estructural de la gra. Conecte la sobrecarga deseada sobre el malacate
auxiliar y levante toda la holgura de la lnea del malacate hasta que quede tensa. NO
LEVANTAR LA CARGA CON EL MALACATE AUXILIAR. Levante la carga hasta que est
completamente suspendida por la gra levantando la pluma.
LoadTestProcedure_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-30 Rev. 3
StandardFunctional&LoadTestProcedure/Report
DieselPrimeMover
GeneralInformation
Client: Test Date:

P.O. Number: Model Number:
Project: Serial Number:
Customer Tag No. Boom Length:
SDRL Code: Doc. No.:
All testing shall be completed under the guidance of a qualified Seatrax representative and in
accordance with Seatrax safety standards.
Complete each section and record all information where applicable. If required record
comments / punch list items on page 4. Note: sections can be run concurrently if required.
DemonstratePrimaryCraneOperations
Main &Auxiliary Hoist Seatrax Customer

Functional Operation Initial Initial
Lower main block to ground
Hoist block into two-block frame
Demonstrate anti two-block function
Lower auxiliary hoist ball to ground
Hoist auxiliary ball into boom tip
Demonstrate anti two-block function
Record Full Speed R.P.M. R.P.M. Seatrax Initial Customer Initial

Main Hoist Drum
Auxiliary Hoist Drum
Boom Hoist Drum
Swing Full Circle
STDFM30StandardLoadTest_Diesel.doc Page1of4
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-30 Rev. 3
DemonstratePrimaryCraneOperationsCont.
Boom (Luffing) Hoist Seatrax Customer

Boom up @ full speed and demonstrate high angle kick-out
Boom down @ full speed and demonstrate low angle kick-out
Engage Boom Dog and demonstrate function
Swing (Slew) Mechanism Seatrax Customer

Swing 360 deg. To the right, then free swing.
Swing 360 deg. To the left, then free swing.
Demonstrate foot brake
Demonstrate swing lock (parking brake)
Demonstrate cross over relief valves
Seatrax Customer
Engine Functional Tests Record
Initial Initial
Engine Stop (normal)
Engine Stop (emergency)
Engine alarm, on low oil pressure
VerifyRadiusIndicators
Measured Mechanical Safe Load Seatrax Customer

Radius Indicator Indicator Initial Initial
Minimum
Maximum
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-30 Rev. 3
LiftingOperationsTestRecords
Seatrax Customer
Hoist Aux. #1 Aux. #2 Main #1 Main #2 Main #3
Initial Initial
Test Radius
Rated Load (lbs.)
Test Load (lbs.)
% Overload
Hoist psi. Up
Hoist psi. Down
Luff psi. Up
Luff psi. Down
Slew psi. Right
Slew psi. Left
Seatrax Customer
Air Start Test No.1 Record
Initial Initial
Tank Capacity (Gals)
Gauge Pressure (Cab)
Number of Starts
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-30 Rev. 3
DemonstrateCustomerSpecifiedOptions
Seatrax Customer
Optional Feature
Initial Initial
Boom Tip, Warning Light
Gantry warning light
Boom Tip, Flood Lights
Slip Ring Heater
Upper Bearing light
Engine House lights
Rear Deck Light
Air Conditioning
Cab Light
Load Indicator System (SLI, Mipeg, Cranesmart, etc.)
Upper windshield wiper
Lower windshield wiper
Horn (steady)
Fuel Level Indicator
Boom Tip Camera & Monitor
Customer Comments:
Witnessed and Accepted (Subject to Above Comments)

Seatrax Representative: Date:
Customer Representative: Date:
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
STDFM-30 Rev. 3
Funcionesestndar,reporteyprocedimientodepruebade
carga
Fuerzaprimariadiesel
Informacingeneral
Cliente: Fecha de prueba:
No. de compra: Numero de modelo:
Projecto: Numero de serie:
No.de etiqueta del
Largo de la pluma:
cliente:
Cdigo SDRL: No. de documento:
Todas las pruebas se deben hacer bajo la direccin de un representante Seatrax cualificado y de
acuerdo con las normas de seguridad estndar Seatrax.
Complete cada seccin y registrar toda la informacin en su caso. Si requiere registrar
comentarios o una lista de detalles escrbalos en la pgina 4. Nota: las secciones se pueden
ejecutar al mismo tiempo si es necesario.
Demostraroperacionesprimariasdelagra
Funciones de Operacin de Malacates Principal y Auxiliar Inicial de Inicial del
Seatrax Cliente
Bajar el bloque principal hasta la posicin mas baja
Levantar el bloque principal hasta el marco de anti-doble
bloqueo
Demostrar funcin de anti-doble bloqueo
Bajar la bola del auxiliar hasta la posicin mas baja
Levantar la bala auxiliar hasta la punta de la extensin de la
pluma
Demostrar funcin de anti-doble bloqueo
Demostraroperacionesprimariasdelagra(continua)
Inicial de Inicial del
Registrar la velocidad mxima de R.P.M. R.P.M.
Seatrax Cliente
Tambor del malacate principal
Tambor del malacate auxiliar
Tambor del malacate de la pluma
Un giro completo

Funciones de operacin de malacate de la pluma
Seatrax Cliente
Levantar pluma a velocidad mxima y demostrar limite de la
pluma hacia arriba
Bajar pluma a velocidad mxima y demostrar limite de la
pluma hacia abajo
Enganchar y demostrar funcin de bloqueo de la pluma

Funciones de operacin de mecanismo de giro
Seatrax Cliente
Giro de 360 grados. Para la derecha, giro libre
Giro de 360 grados. Para la izquierda, giro libre
Demostrar pedal de freno
Demostrar bloqueo de giro (freno de parqueo)
Demostrar vlvula de alivio de cruce

Prueba de funciones del motor Registrar
Seatrax Cliente
Paro de motor (normal)
Paro de motor (emergencia)
Alarma de baja presin de aceite del motor
Verificarindicadorderadio
Indicador Indicador de Inicial de Inicial del
Medir Radio
Mecnico Carga Seguro Seatrax Cliente
Mnimo
Mximo
STDFM30StandardLoadTest_Diesel_spamx.doc Page2of4
Operacinpararegistrodepruebasdelevantamientos
Auxiliar Auxiliar Principal Principal Principal Inicial de Inicial del
Malacate
#1 #2 #1 #2 #3 Seatrax Cliente
Prueba de radio
Nominal de carga
(lbs.)
Prueba de carga
(lbs.)
% de sobrecarga
Malacate hacia
arriba psi
Malacate hacia
abajo psi
Pluma hacia
arriba psi
Pluma hacia
abajo psi
Giro para la
Derecha psi.
Giro para la
izquierda psi.

Prueba de arranque de aire No.1 Registrar
Seatrax Cliente
Capacidad de tanque (litros)
Medidor de presin (Cab)
Numero de arranques
Demostraralclienteopcionesespecificas
Caractersticas opcionales
Seatrax Cliente
Luz de advertencia de la punta de la pluma
Luz de advertencia del mstil
Luz de la punta de la pluma
Calentador del anillo colector
Luz del cojinete superior
Luces de la casa del motor
Luz de cubierta trasera
Aire acondicionado
Luz de cabina
Sistema de carga segura (SLI, Mipeg, CCM7000, etc.)
Limpiaparabrisas superior
Limpiaparabrisas inferior
Corneta (estable)
Indicador de nivel de diesel
Cmara y Monitor de la punta de la pluma
Comentarios del cliente:
Testigo y aceptado (Sujeto a los comentarios anteriores)

Representante de Seatrax: Fecha:
Representante del cliente: Fecha:
Section/Seccin6 ________________________
Lubrication Lubricacin
Lubricant Types and Change Schedule Tipo de lubricantes, programas y puntos de
lubricacin
Lubrication Points Puntos de lubricacin
Lubrication Chart Grafica de lubricacin
Gearbox Arrangements Disposiciones de caja de engranes
Slew Bearing Arrangements and Boom Disposicin de cojinete de giro y pernos de
Heel Pins pivote de la pluma
Grease Points on Typical Hoists Puntos de grasa en los malacates
Engine and Gear Oils Aceites de motor y caja de engranes
Grease and Hydraulic Oil Grasa y aceite hidrulico
Service Bulletin SB26003 Boletn de servicio sb26003
Service Bulletin SB25001R Boletn de servicio sb25001R
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611

31May2013
LubricationGuidelines
GeneralInformation
The lubrication guidelines presented in this manual are intended to represent minimum, safe lubrication
intervals under normal operating conditions. Field operating conditions vary considerably so operators
and service personnel must exercise good judgment and common sense when maintaining the Seatrax
crane or any type of machinery.
Cranes should be lubricated more frequently when they are subjected to extreme temperature changes,
prolonged operation and severe weather.
At the discretion of service personnel, lubrication periods may be extended during periods of
inactivity.
Seatrax recommends establishing a periodic lubrication schedule for each crane, and following that
schedule carefully.
WARNING
Failuretolubricatetheequipmentproperlyinaccordancewiththismanualandgeneral
goodpracticemaycauseafailureduetoexcessivewearoroverheating,resultingina
dangerousandcostlyaccident.
KeystoLubrication
When considering any oil or lubricant, verify compatibility with components and seals in the system prior
to use.
Use the correct type and quantity of lubricant - applied properly - at appropriate intervals.
Ensure that greasing equipment functions properly.
Clean grease gun and grease fittings to avoid forcing grit into zerk fittings.
Keep funnels, plugs, and oil spouts clean. Wipe off oil covers before using.
Bearings and bushings are best greased while being rotated; this is especially important for slew
bearings and the boom butt/heel pin bushings.
Avoid heavy strokes with grease gun as high pressure can damage seals.
Drain gearbox and other oil cases while hot so the drained oil will carry off any sludge.
Watch for signs of lubrication problems:
o A dry area may indicate insufficient lubrication or an overlooked point.
o Leakage or excess grease accumulation could mean a damaged seal.
Do not overlook oiling points: apply a few drops of oil periodically to all metal parts subject to wear.
StandardLubeSchedule_R10.doc Page1of17
LubricantTypes
Code Description
EO EngineOil,SeeEngineManufacturer'sRecommendations
MultiPurposeTypeGreaseWithEP(ExtremePressure)AdditiveandHigh
MPG
ResistanceToWaterWashout.
PLG Lubemaster(CertifiedLabs)PremalubeHeavyDutyGrease,NLGI#2
MPL MultiPurposeGearLubricantWithEPAdditive
CPG CouplingGrease(seeServiceBulletinSB26003)
HO HydraulicOil,PerChart
WRL WireRopeLubricant,SeeWireRopeManufacturer'sRecommendations
LubricantChangeSchedule
Interval Point Lube Level Description
HO HydraulicOilTank
5,000hoursorone 4belowtop/
DrainPlug& (SeeHydraulic
(1)year:whichever 6belowfiller
FillerCap SchematicsMaterial
comesfirst1 neck
ListforCapacity)
Gearbox,Dual
FilltoCheck Input
1,000hoursorone SeeGearbox
MarkorSight
(1)year:whichever Arrangements Gearbox,Main,
GlassLevel
comesfirst1 Aux.&Boom
Changeifanytraces MPL Hoists
ofcontamination, FilltoCheck
particlesor SeeSB25001R2 MarkorDipstick Gearbox,Pump
discoloration Level Drive
Slew/DayTank
FillerCap
1/2to3/4Full SlewDrive(s)
PerPrimeMover SeeSection8of FilltoDipstick

EO DieselEngine
Manual DataBook1 FullMark
1
Intervalsbasedonunitoperatinghours,notprimemoveroperatinghours.
LubricationPoints
M
L
H
J
C
K D
I
DutyCycleClassification
DutyCycles Heavy Medium Light
UsageinHours/Week >50hours 2150hours 20hours
LubricationChart
1
Heavy Medium Light Point #ofPoints Lube Quantity Description
SeeSlewBearingArrangement,
N 26 PLG 6shots/point UpperBearing,Slew
UpperBearing
Shift Shift Shift I 1/Shoe PLG 4shots/point LowerBearingShoes,Slew
Shift Daily Daily C 12/Pin PLG 4shots/point BoomFootPins
Shift Daily Daily K Brushorspray MPG Brushorspray BullGear
Shift Daily Daily D 1 EO Fullmark DieselEngineOilLevel2
SeeDieselPrimeMoverDriveshaft(IfEquipped) PumpDrive,Driveshaft(ifequipped)
Shift Daily Daily SeeSB25001R 1 MPL Fullmark PumpDrive,OilLevel(All)
Shift Daily Daily SeeSB25001R 4 MPL Nearfull PumpDrive,PadOilLevel3
Weekly Weekly Weekly SeeSB26003 1 CPG 1shot PumpDrive,InputShaft4
Sheaves
G Gantry
Daily Daily Weekly 1/Sheave MPG 2shots/point
E BoomPoint&Jib
A LoadBlock
Shift Daily Daily F 1/Sheave MPG 2shots/point Sheaves,BridleSystem(ifequipped)
Daily Daily Weekly A 1 MPG 2shots/point SwivelBearings,LoadBlock
Weekly Weekly Weekly WireRopes 35 WRL Brushorspray AllWireRopes(DataBook1,Section7)
4belowtop/
Daily Daily Weekly HydraulicTank Cap HO HydraulicOilLevels
6belowfillerneck
Daily Daily Weekly Gearbox Plug MPL Full
Weekly Weekly Weekly Hoist 5/Hoist MPG Untilcomesfromvent
Gearbox,HoistParallelShaft
or4shots/pointifno
vent
Daily Daily Weekly Gearbox Plug MPL Full
Weekly Weekly Weekly Hoist 2/Hoist MPG Untilcomesfromvent
Gearbox,HoistPlanetary
or4shots/pointifno
vent
Daily Daily Weekly Slew/DayTank Cap MPL 1/2to3/4full Gearbox,Slew
Daily Weekly Weekly B 1 MPG 2shots/point OverhaulBall,Swivel

LubricationChart(Continued)
1
Heavy Medium Light Point #ofPoints Lube Quantity Description
Daily Weekly Weekly L 2ea MPG 2shots/point BoomStops(Spring)
Daily Weekly Weekly D 1 MPG 2shots/point FanPulley,Engine
Daily Weekly Weekly Doors 2/Door MPG 1shot/point DoorHinges
Daily Weekly Weekly J 4 MPG 2shots/point HoistShaftBearings:Main,Aux&Boom
Weekly Weekly Weekly H 2 MPG 1shot/point ElectricSwivel
Weekly Weekly Weekly M 2 MPG 1shot/point SwingingLightBrackets
Weekly Weekly Weekly K 1/Pinion MPG 3shots/point PinionGear(s)
1
SeeLubricationPointsdiagram.
2
Changeengineoilandfilteraccordingtothemanufacturersrecommendations(SeePrimeMoverManualsectionofDataBook1)orifanoilanalysisindicates
thatchangeisrequired.
3
P/N:20135,20138,20153,20156,20173,20195,20199,20213,20214,20216,20217,20219
4
P/N:20200,20201,20224,20232,20248,20249,20255,20262,20264,20284
GearboxArrangementsParallelShaft
The series numbers listed below are for the gearbox, not the hoist. A given gearbox series may be used
in multiple hoist series, i.e., 700 series gearboxes are found in both 700 and 800 series hoists.
Fill and check points should be marked by a placard affixed to the gearbox. If not, use the plugs or
sight glasses indicated in the following diagrams to fill, check levels or drain gear oil.
The parallel shaft gearboxes may actually be filled through any of several plugs, provided they are at
or above the level of the level check plug.
Fluid capacities are approximate.
BoomHoistGearbox Main/AuxiliaryHoistGearbox
400Series Capacity:24Gallons
Fill/Check
Drain
700Series Capacity:32Gallons
Fill/Check(Boom)
Fill/Check(Main)
Fill/Check(Aux.)
Drain
GearboxArrangementsParallelShaft(Contd.)
1600Series
Capacity:82Gallons
BoomHoist
Gearbox
Fill
Check(LevelWithinSight
Glass)
Drain
Capacity:101Gallons
Main/AuxiliaryHoistGearbox
Fill
Check(Level
WithinSight
Glass)
Fill/Check
(Fillw/Either/Check
Either
w/Other)
Drain
GearboxArrangementsPlanetary
125/250/500Series Capacities
Fill 125Series:2Gallons
250Series:1Gallon
Check 500Series:2Gallons
Tugger(20388):0.6Gallons
Drain
1000Series
1000Series:3Gallons
Fill/Check
Drain
1000SeriesDualInput
Fill Point
Capacity:2Gallons
Check That
Level Is
Within
Sight Glass
Drain
(Underside)
QuadPumpDrives
See the attached Service Bulletins for detailed lubrication requirements.
SlewBearingArrangements
SeatraxstronglyrecommendstheuseofLubemaster(CertifiedLabs)PremalubeHeavyDutyNLGI#2
greaseintheslewbearingsbothupperandlowerandboomheelpinsofallSeatraxcranes.
UpperBearing
Seatrax has fielded a number of synthetic upper bearing variants centered on two basic designs: S-type
hemispherical and paired radial and thrust bearings. All of these designs have a long service life if
properly lubricated.
Radial/thrust designs are serviced via two grease fittings, but there are two classes of S-type bearings: two
and six zerk. On the six zerk setup, the inner two pairs of
zerks are greased every shift and the outer pair 2-3 times
per week. NOTE: On certain portable cranes using an
inverted kingpost, the normal bearing positions are
reversed so the hemispherical bearing is actually at the
bottom of the kingpost socket.
Slew bearings and boom heel pins are subjected to extreme
pressure so regular greasing is imperative. This is
especially important for the six-zerk hemispherical
bearings: the picture to the right highlights in green the
maze of passages through which grease must travel.
NOTE: Failure to follow the greasing schedule can allow
debris to accumulate, clogging these passageways and
preventing adequate grease from distributing throughout the bearing.
The below drawings illustrate typical grease points on Seatrax upper bearings:
SType,Two(2)Zerk SType,Six(6)Zerk Radial&ThrustBearing

C
B A
A
A
A
B
C
GreasePoint LubricationInterval(AllDutyCycles)
A Everyshift
B Everyshift
C 23timesperweek
LowerBearingShoes
Grease bearing shoes in accordance with the Lubrication Chart that appears later in this document. The
photos below illustrate two different greasing arrangements for the lower bearing shoes. Some cranes
have an optional central greasing system: if equipped, this replaces the zerk fitting on each shoe with a
hose connected to a manifold. The manifold is generally located around the turntable, accessible from the
main deck whenever possible.
Figure1.TypicalBearingShoes(Left)andOptionalCentralGreasingManifold(Right)
Applyamplegreaseonfaceofeachbearing Zerkfitting:one
Manifold
shoeandbearingsurfaceofkingpost. (1)pershoe
Onelineconnectstoeachshoeviaa1/4MJfitting
For additional instructions on installing and lubricating new bearing shoes, refer to the Swing Bearing
System Replacement Procedure in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1.
BreakingInNewSlewBearings
To help distribute lubricant and promote more even wear, rotate the crane through several 360 degree
revolutions while greasing new or replacement slew bearings. This applies to both the upper bearing and
lower shoes. For maximum service life, Seatrax recommends using the above greasing technique each
time, even after breaking in the bearings.
BoomButt/HeelPins
Raise and lower the boom
while greasing the boom heel
pins so that lubricant is
distributed uniformly
throughout the bushings. Each
pin may have one or two grease
fittings, depending on crane
series.
The Boom Butt Bushing
Replacement Procedure in the
Inspection and Maintenance
section of Data Book 1 contains
additional lubrication
suggestions for when boom
heel pins or bushings are replaced.
GreasePointsonTypicalHoists
Use multi-purpose (MPG) grease in lubrication points on the main, auxiliary and boom hoists.
Load and boom hoist arrangements and lubrication points are similar, the main difference being that boom
hoist gearboxes are vertically-oriented.
Parallel Shaft gearboxes: grease points on both gearbox and brake band sides.
Planetary gearboxes: grease points only on the brake band side.
BrakeBandSideGreasePoints(BothParallelShaftandPlanetaryTypeGearboxes)
Type:MPG
Type:MPG
1Point
1Point
(Until
x4shots
comes
fromvent)
GearboxSideGreasePoints(ParallelShaftOnly)
Type: Type:MPG
MPG 1Point
2Points (Until
x4shots comes
fromvent)
EngineOils
Refer to the engine manual in the Prime Mover Manual section of Data Book 1 for manufacturer-
recommended grades and viscosities of oil, along with other fluids.
The following chart of oil grades is typical for the diesel engines installed in Seatrax marine cranes.
AmbientTemperature ViscosityGrade
MinimumF(C) MaximumF(C)
5(15) 122(50) SAE15W40
4(20) 104(40) SAE10W30
22(30) 104(40) SAE5W40
22(30) 86(30) SAE5W30
40(40) 50(10) SAE0W20
GearOils
Gear oils are used in all hoists throughout the crane. Multi-grade types are most commonly used. As with
all lubricants, using the correct grade and additives is crucial to proper performance. Lubricants used in
Seatrax gearboxes should be:
Petroleum-based, non-detergent gear oil containing antioxidation and antifoaming additives. Any
gear oil used must have an EP (Extreme Pressure) additive. EP additives are specifically designed
to prevent metal-to-metal contact in the operation of highly loaded gears.
Safe for brass and bronze metals as indicated by a result of 1b or better on the ASTM-D130 test.
Minimum viscosity index of 95 cst and maintain a minimum viscosity of 40 cst under normal
operating conditions. Viscosities should correspond to local environmental conditions:
o SAE 80W-90 is recommended for the Gulf of Mexico and other sub-tropic regions. Seatrax hoist
drives are typically filled with 80W-90 unless the customer requests a specific lubricant. This
weight is appropriate for most operating conditions. Operations in an environment that is
extremely hot (over 100F) or cold (below 0F), may require draining the gearboxes and
refilling them with a lubricant developed for these specific temperatures.
o Excessively hot environments may require the use of 80W-140 gear oil: this flows like an SAE
80 weight gear oil in cold temperatures yet gives the protection of SAE 140 weight gear oil.
o Arctic cold requires the use of 75W-90 gear oil which flows like an SAE 75 weight gear oil in
cold temperatures yet gives the protection of SAE 90 weight gear oil. For operation in extreme
cold a synthetic or multi-grade oil is recommended with a pour point of 10F (6C) lower than
the minimum ambient temperature.
IMPORTANTNOTES
DO NOT use engine oils or automatic transmission fluids in any gearbox on a Seatrax crane!
Biodegradable synthetic oils have recently emerged onto the market, but none have been tested with
any Seatrax gearbox.
It is imperative that gear oils are replaced at the required intervals, especially if run at high
temperatures for extended periods of time.
When checking oil on the various gearboxes, inspect for discoloration as it can indicate overheating.
Failure to replace discolored gearbox oil can significantly shorten the lifespan of the gears and
bearings.
Many other oil companies also supply oil conforming to the above requirements, but oil datasheets
should be submitted to Seatrax for approval before their use.
Care should be taken to ensure no dirt or contaminants enter the gearbox during the fill/oil transfer
process.
ChartofRecommendedGearOils
Manufacturer AllowableAmbientTemperatureRangesandGrades
and 75W90 80W901 80W140
Brand
<0F 0to100F >100F
CastrolAPGear CastrolAPGear
B.P.CASTROL
80W90 85W140
DeloSyntheticGear DeloGearLubricant DeloSyntheticGear
CALTEX
Lubricant75W90 ESI80W90 Lubricant85W140
CHEVRON
MegaLubricants
MARTINMIDSTREAM PremiumGearOil
GL580W901
MobilDelvac MobilDelvac
MobilubeHDPlus
MOBIL SyntheticGearOil SyntheticGearOil
80W90
75W90 80W140
PETROCANADA TraxonXL75W90 Traxon80W90 TraxonXL80W140
ShellSpiraxS6AXME ShellSpiraxHD ShellSpiraxHD
SHELLOILCO.
75W140 80W90 85W140
TEXACO
FinaPontonicMPX FinaSynpro85W
TOTALFINAELF FinaSynpro75W90
80W90 140
1
Typicalfactoryfill
Grease
Seatrax lubricates all bearings and bushings on the crane during assembly. All grease points should be
attended to as shown by the Lubrication Chart. The following sub-sections discuss the various greasing
requirements of different parts of the crane:
SlewBearingsandBoomHeelPins
Seatrax strongly recommends the use of Lubemaster (Certified Labs) Premalube Heavy Duty NLGI #2
grease in the slew bearings both upper and lower and boom heel pins. Follow the guidelines on the
next page when introducing Premalube to a crane that used different grease previously:
DO NOT MIX WITH CLAY OR BENTONITE GREASES.
Certain greases are not compatible and may fail to perform properly if mixed. This may result in
equipment failure and damage. Purge all old grease prior to using Premalube.
Bearing-type grease fittings: fill with Premalube until the old grease is forced out.
Other surfaces: remove the old grease by applying a degreaser.
For additional information on compatibility and purging consult the Seatrax service department.
Couplings/Splines
Coupling grease used primarily on splines in high-speed conditions. See the attached Service Bulletin
SB26003 for specific coupling grease and vendor recommendations.
PrimeMover
DieselPrimeMoverDriveshaft(IfEquipped)
The crane may be equipped with a dual Cardan U-joint driveshaft which transmits power from the prime
mover to the quad pump drive. The driveshaft has a splined, collapsible center section to adjust for length.
The driveshaft assembly lies within a protective enclosure accessible through a hinged cover.
Prior to lubricating driveshaft, ensure that the prime mover is shut down and cannot be restarted
until maintenance has been completed.
Use only lithium-based greases of NLGI grade #2. DO NOT use sodium-based grease!
After maintenance ensure that driveshaft protective guard is secured.
DriveshaftGuard(Left)andDriveshaftUJoints&Spline(Right)
Type:MPG
Type:MPG
Type:CPG
Interval #ofPoints Lube(Qty) Description

Monthly 2 MPG(1shot) Hinges,DriveshaftGuard
Monthly 2 MPG(Untiloldgreaseexpelledatrubberseals) UJoints,Driveshaft
Monthly 1 CPG(3shots) Spline,Driveshaft
ElectricPrimeMover(IfEquipped)
For cranes equipped with an electric motor(s) as prime mover, refer to the motor manufacturers manual
in the Prime Mover section of Data Book 1 for lubrication requirements.
AllOtherFittings
For other grease points, high-quality multi-purpose grease with EP and moly additives - and high
resistance to water washout - is necessary to prevent metal to metal contact and premature wear. It is also
necessary to use grease rated for the expected service temperature of the crane. Seatrax recommends
NLGI ratings as indicated in the below table:
Temp.Range 40to40F 10to80F 30to110F
Grease NLGIGrade0 NLGIGrade1 NLGIGrade2
ChartofRecommendedGreases
Manufacturer AllowableAmbientTemperatureRangesandGrades
and NLGIGrade0 NLGIGrade1 NLGIGrade21
Brand
40to40F 10to80F 30to110F
ArcticPremalube
LUBEMASTER2 PremalubeNLGI1 PremalubeNLGI2
M/M3
CastrolMolubAlloy CastrolMolubAlloy CastrolMolubAlloy
B.P.CASTROL
67803 860/220ESNLGI1 860/220ESNLGI2
DeloHeavyDuty MolyGreaseEPNLGI MolyGreaseEPNLGI
CALTEX
SyntheticMoly5%EP3 1 2
CHEVRON
CONOCO MolyLowTemp3,4 MegaplexXD3NLGI1 MegaplexXD3NLGI2
MobilgreaseMoly50 MobilRonexAW222
MOBIL MobilgreaseCML
Arctic Moly
PrecisionXL5Moly PrecisionXL3Moly PrecisionXL5Moly
PETROCANADA
EP0 EP1 EP2
SHELLOILCO. ShellRetinaxCMX13 ShellRetinaxCMX1 ShellRetinaxEPX2
DeloHeavyDuty MolyGreaseEPNLGI
TEXACO MolytexEP2
SyntheticMoly5%EP3 1
FinaMarsonLiplex FinaMarsonLiplex
TOTALFINAELF FinaMolyGAllSeason
Moly5 Moly
1 4
Typicalfactoryfill. Aluminumcomplexbase.Donotmixwithothergreases.
2 5
Forslewbearingsandboomheelpins. IsNLGIGrade2.
3
IsNLGIGrade1.
HydraulicOils
Viscosity
Viscosities should correspond to the environmental conditions listed in the table. VG ISO 68 is
recommended for the Gulf of Mexico and other sub-tropic regions. If there appears to be overlap or the
environmental temperatures fall outside the range on the table, then contact Seatrax for advice.
Compatibility
Mineral oils are generally compatible with the seals, fluid conductors and metallic components.
However, some synthetic and/or environmentally-safe fluids have additives or chemical properties which
can damage these components. Contact Seatrax before using any environmentally-friendly hydraulic oils.
Lubricity
Due to the critical tolerances between mating parts in piston pumps and motors, the lubricity of the oil
must meet minimum requirements. The lubrication properties of the oil should be provided on the oil
manufacturers oil data sheets as an FZG rating.
Fluids with zinc-based lubricity additives provide longer service life. Seatrax recommends avoiding the
use of ash-less (non-zinc-based) oils.
HLPvs.HVLPOils
The oils listed on the Seatrax Hydraulic Chart are HLP oils. Seatrax does not recommend the use of
HVLP oils: they may experience up to a 30% loss in viscosity in shear which can cause erratic operation.
OriginalFill
High quality ISO 68 hydraulic oil is typically used for the original fill in the hydraulic system. This type
of oil was chosen because it is a non-detergent, shear-stable, anti-foaming and anti-wear hydraulic oil
with high resistance to rust and oxidation. The additives used in the oil are suitable for long duration use
and are compatible with the seals used in the crane. This oil can be used for temperatures ranging from
30F to 110F.
FieldFill
Whenever oil must be added to the system, or when an oil change becomes necessary, use one of the
fluids shown in the Hydraulic Oil Chart.
Full is approximately 4 below the top of tank or approximately 6 beneath the filler neck. Seatrax does
not use hydraulic cylinders unlike some designs making it unnecessary to leave a large air reserve to
accommodate piston displacement of fluid within the hydraulic tank.

IMPORTANTNOTES
DO NOT use engine oils or automatic transmission fluids in the hydraulic system!
Maintain proper tank level: too full and excess oil can slosh out. Too low and pump damage may
occur. As illustrated in the previous drawing, Seatrax designed the pilot pump suction inlet to sit high
in the tank relative to the inlets for the other pumps. If the oil level drops below the pilot suction inlet,
pilot pressure to the hydraulic system drops, stopping the slew and hoist pumps before cavitation
damage can occur. If this happens, shut down the crane immediately to reduce the chance of damaging
the pilot pump and refill the tank.
The use of oil heaters in the hydraulic tank may change the oil or oil change interval recommended for
a particular environment.
When operating in an extremely cold environment, slowly rotate each hoist for one minute to allow
warmer oil from the tank to replace the cold oil in the lines and warm the motors.
HydraulicOilChart
Listed below are the recommended ISO viscosity grades for hydraulic oil for various ambient temperature
ranges when used in Seatrax hydraulic cranes. Also included is a list of various manufacturers who make
oil conforming to the ISO specifications. These oils are readily available HLP oils typically with high life
to cost benefits. Many other oil companies also supply oil conforming to these requirements, but
hydraulic oil datasheets should be submitted to Seatrax for approval before their use.
Neverfillthehydraulicsystemdirectlyfrombarrels,cansorothercontainers:theseoftencontain
contaminantsandmustbefinelyfilteredduringtheoilfill/transferprocess.
AllowableAmbientTemperatureRange
ISO22 ISO32 ISO46 ISO68
Manufacturer/

Brand 10Fto60F 5Fto75F 15Fto90F 30Fto110F
(23Cto15C) (15Cto24C) (9Cto32C) (1Cto43C)
EnergolHLPHM EnergolHLPHM EnergolHLPHM EnergolHLPHM
B.P.
22 32 46 68
CALTEX RandoHD22 RandoHD32 RandoHD46 RandoHD68
CASTROL HyspinAWS22 HyspinAWS32 HyspinAWS46 HyspinAWS68
CHEVRON RykonOilAW22 RykonOilAW32 RykonOilAW46 RykonOilAW68
CONOCO HydroclearAW22 HydroclearAW32 HydroclearAW46 HydroclearAW68
MOBIL DTE22 DTE32 DTE46 DTE68
PETROCANADA HydrexAW22 HydrexAW32 HydrexAW46 HydrexAW68
SHELLOILCO. Tellus22 Tellus32 Tellus46 Tellus68
TEXACO RandoHD22 RandoHD32 RandoHD46 RandoHD68
TOTALFINAELF AzollaZS22 AzollaZS32 AzollaZS46 AzollaZS68
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
SERVICE BULLETIN
SB26003 (Addendum to SB25001R)
August 1, 2006
PUMP DRIVE COUPLING GREASE
Attached are coupling grease specifications from several lubricant manufacturers. This grease is
manufactured specifically for application on high speed couplings.
Through extensive research and field testing, Seatrax has found these specific lubricants provide
significant improvement in spline life on the high speed spline couplings on hydraulic pump drives.
Application of coupling grease on the input shaft of spline type engine flywheel couplings is
recommended during maintenance.
For more information regarding pump drive lubrication, please see Seatrax Service Bulletin
SB25001R.
SB26003.doc Page 1 of 1
SHELL ALVANIA GREASE CG
For couplings used in industrial equipment
Product Description
Alvania Grease CG is specially formulated with a lithium soap/polymer thickener, which has superior resistance to
oil separation when subjected to the high centrifugal forces normally found in couplings.
Application
Alvania Grease CG is recommended for all types of grease lubricated couplings used in industrial equipment.
Common grease lubricated couplings include:
1. Geared Couplings which have internal and external spur gears that mesh within a common rotating hub
connecting the shafts.
2. Steel Grid Couplings which have a convoluted band of flexible spring steel physically linking the hubs together.
3. Flexible Chain Couplings which have a roller chain that meshes with a sprocket cut in each mating hub.
Advance technology has enabled Alvania Grease CG to perform beyond the normal 6 month change interval. In
actual field experience this grease has shown its ability to perform satisfactorily beyond 3 years. This product should
be used in all grease couplings, especially in those hard to service or those operating under severe conditions.
Because of its high base oil viscosity, Alvania Grease CG is also suitable for use in other industrial applications
where the equipment is subject to high water wash, low speeds and heavy or shock loads.
Features
Alvania Grease CG has a consistency which overlaps the NLGI grades 0 and 1. This grease is specially formulated
with a lithium/polymer thickener and fortified with corrosion, oxidation, extreme pressure and an effective rust
inhibitor additive package.
Its high viscosity base oil and tackifier combine to keep the grease in place and prevent separation. In the ASTM D
4425, High Speed Centrifugal Test, which develops G forces in excess of 36,000 at 15,000 rpm. Alvania Grease CG
exhibits little or no oil separation.
SOC: 02426-12/02
Benefits
resistance to centrifugal separation
extended relubrication frequency
high load carrying capabilities
resistance to water washing
staying in place under high speeds
corrosion and rust protection
minimizing of coupling wear
reduction in down time and maintenance costs
minimizing of coupling freeze-up
use at temperatures up to 325F
one grease for all grease coupling types
Based on ASTM D 1478 and D 4693 torque tests, the minimum recommended bearing lubrication service would be -
10F. For coupling service the minimum usable temperature is not dependent upon ease of pumping or bearing
breakaway force. Field service confirms problem-free coupling service at -20F and below. Actual minimum
temperature for coupling service would be below -20F.
Approvals and Recommendations

AGMA CG-1 type
AGMA CG-2 type
AGMA CG-3 type
Shell recommends Alvania Grease CG in all types of grease couplings including the following:
Browning
Falk
Koppers
Fast
TB Woods
Product Maintenance
The tacky nature of the product makes hand packing the preferred method of newly installed couplings to ensure even
distribution throughout. Normal handling precautions should be observed as with any petroleum based products.
Consult the coupling manufacturers installation instructions for detailed lubricant application procedures. The
following procedure outlines a popular lubrication method. Prior to assembly of gear couplings a coating of grease
should be applied to gear teeth. After hand packing, the coupling should be rotated so the grease fitting reaches 4
oclock, and the fitting/plug removed. A short length of 1/4 inch pipe can be affixed and grease pumped into the
coupling until product is observed flowing out the purge opening at 10 oclock. The pipe should then be removed and
the plugs reinserted. This practice insures that the coupling is adequately lubricated. Routine relubrication can be
accomplished with disassembly using this method. The grease will then be evenly distributed to all moving and
sliding surfaces and the full benefits of the product will be realized. Special care needs to be taken when filling "Full
Travel" type couplings so the correct amount of grease is charged.
Typical Properties of Shell Alvania Grease CG
Test Method
Product Code 71168
NLGI Grade 0/1
Appearance Dark Brown, Tacky
Lithium Soap/Polymer, wt% 10.0
Viscosity(1)
@ 40C, cSt D 445 >3200
@ 100C, cSt D 445 >50
Penetration. Dmm D 217
Worked, 60X 350
Worked, 10,000X, % Change 10
Dropping Point, F Mettler 320+
Centrifugal Oil Separation, vol % D 4425 None
Water Spray-Off, wt % D 4049 <3
Rust Protection D 1743 Pass
Timken, OK Load, lbs D 2509 40+
Four-Ball EP D 2596
Load Wear Index, kgf 68
Weld Point, kgf 400
Four-Ball Wear, mm D 2266 0.4
1 hr, 75C, 1200 rpm, 40 kgf
Guide to Usable Temperature
Min,F (Pumping) 20
Min,F (Bearings) -10
Min,F (Couplings) Below -20
Continuous Service, Max,F 250
Short Exposure, Max,F 325
1
Nominal base oil viscosities without polymers or additives are 680 cSt @ 40C
and 26.1 cSt @ 100C.
Handling Practices
For information on the safe handling and use of this product, refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet at
http://www.equivashell.com. For more information and availability, call 1+800-782-7852 or visit the World Wide
Web: http://www.shell-lubricants.com/.
Grease
Product Description
Mobilgrease XTC is an extra high performance product designed for use in high speed coupling applications. It is manufactured with a
selected high viscosity mineral base oil and an extremely effective, heavy-duty additive package. Mobilgrease XTC is formulated to
provide low bleed as well as high temperature stability, properties critical to modern coupling lubrication and protection. While the base
oil provides excellent elastohydrodynamic lubrication (EHL) film protection properties, the additive package enhances the extreme
pressure (EP) / anti-wear protection, rust and corrosion performance and the high temperature stability of this leading edge product.
Mobilgrease XTC also incorporates proprietary formulation stability to outperform best-in-class low bleed coupling greases with respect
to high temperature stability in high shear conditions. Mobilgrease XTC is an NLGI No. 1 lithium soap-base product.
ExxonMobil research scientists formulated Mobilgrease XTC to meet or exceed the requirements of modern high-speed gear and grid
design couplings including the AGMA CG-2 and CG-1 specifications. This grease has shown excellent performance and protection in a
wide variety of coupling applications covering a broad range of industries.
Based on its outstanding performance, this grease has become the product of choice for many coupling users. Mobilgrease XTC fully
meets the performance requirements of major coupling manufacturers.
Features & Benefits

The Mobilgrease brand of products is well known and highly regarded world-wide based on their outstanding performance and the R&D
expertise and the global technical support that stand behind the brand. The outstanding qualities of one of these lubricants in this
family, Mobilgrease XTC, have made it the choice of many users, especially when performance is a key concern.
Mobilgrease XTC enjoys an excellent reputation in the lubrication of high speed and high temperature gear and grid coupling
applications. Close contacts with original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and end-users ensure that products such as Mobilgrease
XTC will be available to meet critical application needs, both now and in the future.
Mobilgrease XTC was specifically designed for high speed and high temperature coupling applications, and offers the following
advantages and potential benefits:
Features Advantages and Potential Benefits

Excellent resistance to oil separation Less leakage, better reliability and coupling protection
Excellent EHL contribution and wear protection Less coupling wear, even when misaligned, and lower
maintenance costs
Excellent high temperature stability Long grease life and extended intervals between relubrication
Good resistance to rust and corrosion Maintains excellent grease performance even in tough aqueous
environments
ExxonMobil Lubricants & Specialties

All products may not be available locally. For more information, contact your local sales office or visit www.exxonmobil.com.
ExxonMobil is comprised of numerous affiliates and subsidiaries, many with names that include Esso, Mobil, or ExxonMobil. Nothing in this document is intended to override or
supersede the corporate separateness of local entities. Responsibility for local action and accountability remains with the local ExxonMobil-affiliate entities. Due to continual
product research and development, the information contained herein is subject to change without notification. Typical Properties may vary slightly.
2001 Exxon Mobil Corporation. All rights reserved.
Applications
Application Considerations: Because Mobilgrease XTC is highly viscous and has adhesive agents to address coupling demands, use of
hand-operated grease guns at low ambient temperatures without auxiliary heat is discouraged.
Mobilgrease XTC fully meets existing and AGMA Type CG-2 requirements for high-speed flexible gear and grid couplings. Mobilgrease
XTC also meets less demanding AGMA Type CG-1 requirements. Mobilgrease XTC maintains its excellent performance characteristics
in ambient temperatures up to 120 C. It is not recommended for temperatures below -30 C. Mobilgrease XTC is used widely in
industrial applications requiring the use of:
Grid-type flexible couplings

Gear-type flexible couplings
Specifications & Approvals

Mobilgrease XTC meets or exceeds the following industry specifications:
Meets AGMA CG-1
Meets AGMA CG-2
Typical Properties
Mobilgrease XTC
NLGI Grade 1
Thickener Type Lithium/Polymer
Color, Visual Dark Brown
Penetration, Worked, 25 C, ASTM D 217 325
Dropping Point, C, ASTM D 2265 215
Viscosity of Oil, ASTM D 445
cSt @ 40 C 680
Centrifugal Bleed, ASTM D 4425, K36, 24 hrs, 38 C, vol % 0
Penetration change, ASTM D 217, from 60X to 10,000X, mm/10 +25
Bomb Oxidation, ASTM D 942, Pressure drop at 100 hrs, kPa 35
Four- Ball Wear, ASTM D 2266 0.35
Four- Ball EP Test, ASTM D 2596,
Weld Point, Kg 315
Load Wear Index, Kgf 51
Timken OK Load, ASTM D 2509, lb 60
Corrosion Prevention, ASTM D 1743 Pass
Copper Strip Corrosion, ASTM D 4048 1A

Health & Safety
Based on available information, this product is not expected to produce adverse effects on health when used for the intended
application and the recommendations provided in the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) are followed. MSDS's are available upon
request through your sales contract office, or via the Internet. This product should not be used for purposes other than its intended use.
If disposing of used product, take care to protect the environment.
The Mobil logotype, the Pegasus are trademarks of Exxon Mobil Corporation, or one of its subsidiaries.

Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
SERVICE BULLETIN
SB25001R4
January 10, 2005 (Revised March 26, 2012)
PUMP DRIVE LUBRICATION

Seatrax cranes equipped with 4 pad pump drives require additional lubrication, which will prolong
pump and gear life. In addition to the internal fluid level the drive gears should be lubricated on a
periodic basis to prevent spline fretting.
Seatrax has different models of 4 pad pump drives, each having a different maintenance procedure.
For units utilizing the Part No. 20135,

20156, 20173 and 20195:
Each independent drive should have 2 shots
from an oil can of SAE 90W oil applied into
the breathers on a monthly basis.
NOTE: If this has never been performed
then start by applying 10 shots of oil from
oil can in each pad.
For units utilizing the Part No. 20200,

20201, 20202, 20206 and 20224:
The center drive shaft should have 1 shot of
Coupling Grease (Ref: SB26003) applied
on a weekly basis.
NOTE: If this has never been performed
then start by applying 6 shots of grease.
Oil capacity: 7.5 quarts.
SB25001R4.doc Page1of2
For 1,400 2,300 hp units including Part
Nos.
20271, 20278, 20296, 20406, 20416,

20417, 20418, 20419 & 20420
Oil Capacity: Approximately 9.25 gallons
Fill to the mark on the dipstick. There are no
other lubrication points.
NOTE: This series of units is identifiable
by a front center-mounted cooling pump.
For 1,000 hp units including Part Nos.
20258, 20259, 20261, 20265, 20289,

20387, 20405, 20412, 20413, 20414,
20415, 20421, 20422, 20430, 20431
& 20452
Oil Capacity: Approximately 2 gallons.
Fill to the mark on the dipstick. There are no
other lubrication points.
NOTE: This series of units is identifiable
by a front center-mounted cooling pump.
SB25001R4.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611

31mayo2013
Directricesdelubricacin
Informacingeneral
Las directrices de lubricacin que se presentan en este manual tienen el propsito de representar
intervalos mnimos, seguro de lubricacin en condiciones normales de funcionamiento. Condiciones de
operacin de campo varan considerablemente para que los operadores y personal de servicio deban
ejercer el buen juicio y el sentido comn al mantenimiento de la gra Seatrax o cualquier tipo de
maquinaria.
Las gras deben lubricarse con ms frecuencia cuando estn sujetos a cambios extremos de
temperatura, operacin prolongada y el mal tiempo.
A discrecin del personal de servicio, perodos de lubricacin pueden ser extendidos durante los
perodos de inactividad.
Seatrax recomienda el establecimiento de un programa de lubricacin peridica para cada gra, y
despus de ese programa dale seguimiento con cuidado.
ADVERTENCIA
Lafaltadelubricacindelequipodeformaadecuadadeacuerdoconestabuena
prcticamanualyengeneralpuedecausarunfallodebidoaundesgasteexcesivoo
sobrecalentamiento,loqueresultaenunaccidentepeligrosoycostoso.
Lubricacin
Al considerar cualquier aceite o lubricante, verificar la compatibilidad con los componentes y los sellos en
el sistema antes de su uso.
Utilice la cantidad y el tipo correcto de lubricante y una aplicacin correcta a intervalos apropiados.
Asegrese de que el equipo funciona correctamente engrasado.
Limpie la pistola de engrase y las graseras para evitar forzar arenilla en dispositivos de engrase.
Mantenga embudos, tapones, y recipientes de aceite limpio. Limpie los recipientes de aceite antes de
usar.
Cojinetes y bujes es mejor lubricarse mientras se hace girar, lo que es especialmente importante para
los cojinetes de rotacin y los bujes del pivote de la pluma.
Evite golpes fuertes de presin con la pistola de grasa, puede daar los sellos.
Drene la caja de engranes y otros drenajes de aceite mientras est caliente por lo que el aceite drenado
llevar fuera cualquier tipo de lodos.
Est atento a signos de problemas de lubricacin:
o Un rea seca puede indicar lubricacin insuficiente o un punto alto.
o Fugas o la acumulacin excesiva de grasa podran significar un sello daado.
StandardLubeSchedule_R10_spamx.doc Pgina1of19
No pase por alto los puntos de lubricacin: aplicar unas gotas de aceite de forma peridica a todas las
partes metlicas de desgaste.
Tiposdelubricante
Cdigo Descripcin
EO Aceite de motor, consulte las recomendaciones del fabricante del motor
Multi-Purpose tipo de grasa con aditivos EP (extrema presin) y una alta
MPG
resistencia al lavado por agua.
PLG Lube master (Labs Certif.) Premalube grasa resistente, NLGI # 2
MPL Multi-Purpose Lubricante de engranajes con aditivos EP
CPG Grasa para acoplamiento (ver Boletn de Servicio SB26003)
HO Aceite hidrulico, por graficas
Lubricante para cable de alambre, consulte las recomendaciones del fabricante
WRL
del cable de alambre
Programadecambiodelubricacin
Intervalos Puntos Lube Nivel Descripcin
HO Tanquedeaceite
4"pordebajodela
5000horasoun(1) hidrulico(Ver
Tapndedrenaje partesuperior/
ao:loqueocurra esquemashidrulicosy
1 ytapadellenado 6"pordebajodela
primero listadematerialespara
tapadellenado
lacapacidad)
cajadeengranesy
Llenehastala cajadeengranesde
Verdisposiciones marcade dobleentrada
1000horasoun(1) decajade verificacinoen
Cajasdeengranes
ao:loqueocurra engranes lasmirrillasdel
demalacates
1 vidriodenivel
primero principal,auxiliary
Cambiesitiene MPL pluma
contaminacin, Llenoyrevisar Cajadeengranes,ycaja
partculaso MireSB25001R2 (etiqueta),marcao deengranesdebombas
decoloracin niveldevarilla mltiples
Giro/Tanquede
reserva/tapnde 1/2a3/4lleno Cajasdeengranes
llenado degiro
Llenehastala
Mireseccin8
Paraelmotordiesel EO marcadevarillade Motordiesel
Librodedatos
aceite
1
Intervalossebasanenhorasdefuncionamientodelaunidad,nosebasanenhorasdeaplicacindel
Motor.
Puntosdelubricacin
M
L
H
J
C
K D
I
Deberdeclasificacindelciclo
Deberdeciclo Pesado Mediano Ligero
Usoenhoras/semana >50horas 2150horas 20horas
Graficadelubricacin
1
Pesado Mediano Libiano Punto #dePuntos Lubricante Cantidad Descripcin
Ver'disposicinderodamientosdegiroy
N 26 PLG 6tiros/punto Cojinetesuperior,giro
rodamientosuperior'
Turno Turno Turno I 1/Cojinete PLG 4 tiros/punto Cojinetesinferiores,giro
Turno Diario Diario C 12/Perno PLG 4tiros/punto Pernosdepivotedelapluma
Turno Diario Diario K Brochaoesprallado MPG Brochaoesprallado Engranedegiro
Turno Diario Diario D 1 EO Marcadelleno Niveldeaceitedemotordiesel2
Cajadeengranesdebombasmltiples,
VerBarradeUnindelMotordeDiesel(siestaequipado)
barracardan(siestaequipada)
Turno Diario Diario VerSB25001R 1 MPL MarcadeLleno
niveldeaceite(Todos)
Turno Diario Diario VerSB25001R 4 MPL CercaLleno
niveldeaceitedondesientalabomba3
Semanal Semanal Semanal VerSB26003 1 CPG 1tiro
entradadepernodentado4
Poleas
G Mstil
Diario Diario Semanal 1/Polea MPG 2tiros/punto
E Puntayextensindelapluma
A Bloquedecarga
Poleas,sistemadearnsflotante(si
Turno Diario Diario F 1/Polea MPG 2tiros/point
estaequipado)
Diario Diario Semanal A 1 MPG 2tiros/point Cojinetegiratorio,bloquedecarga
Cablesde Todosloscablesdealambre(Librode
Semanal Semanal Semanal 35 WRL BrochaoEsprallado
alambre Datos1,Seccin7)
4Pordebajodela
Tanque partesuperior/
Diario Diario Semanal Tapa HO Niveldeaceitehidrulico
hidrulico 6Pordebajodela
tapadeLlenado
Diario Diario Semanal Cajadeengranes Tapn MPL Lleno
Malacate Cajadeengranes,malacatedeeje
Semanal Semanal Semanal 5/Malacate MPG Quesalgaporelrespiradoro
4tiros/puntosinorespirador
paralelo

Graficadelubricacin(Continuacin)
Heavy Medium Light Point1 #ofPoints Lube Quantity Description
Diario Diario Semanal Cajadeengranes Tapn MPL Lleno
Malacate Cajadeengranes,malacatede
Semanal Semanal Semanal 2/Malacate MPG Quesalgaporelrespiradoro
4tiros/puntosinorespirador
planetarios

Giro/tanque
Diario Diario Semanal Tapn MPL 1/2to3/4lleno Cajadeengranes,giro
dereserva
Diario Semanal Semanal B 1 MPG 2tiros/punto Cubiertadelabola,giratorio
Diario Semanal Semanal L 2encadalado MPG 2tiros/punto Topesdelapunta(Resortes)
Diario Semanal Semanal D 1 MPG 2tiros/punto Poleadelabanico,motor
Diario Semanal Semanal Puertas 2/puertas MPG 1tiro/punto bisagrasdelaspuertas
2tiros/punto Cojinetesdemalacate:principal,
Diario Semanal Semanal J 4 MPG
auxiliarypluma.
Semanal Semanal Semanal H 2 MPG 1tiro/punto Giratorioelctrico
Semanal Semanal Semanal M 2 MPG 1tiro/punto Soportedeluzgiratoria
Semanal Semanal Semanal K 1/pin MPG 3tiros/punto Pindeengranes
1
VasediagramadePuntosdelubricacin.
2
Cambieelaceiteyelfiltrodelmotoracuerdoconlasrecomendacionesdelfabricante(VerManualdemotorseccindelLibrodeDatosdel1)osiunanlisis
delaceiteindicaqueserequiereelcambio.
3
No.deParte:20135,20138,20153,20156,20173,20195,20199,20213,20214,20216,20217,20219
4
No.deParte:20200,20201,20224,20232,20248,20249,20255,20262,20264,20284
Disposicionesdecajadeengranesejeparalelo
Los nmeros de serie que se enlistan a continuacin son para las cajas de engranes, no para el
malacate. Una serie de caja de engranes se utilizada en mltiples series de malacates, es decir, serie
700 se encuentran tanto en malacates series 700 y 800.
Puntos de llenado y para revisar el nivel deberan estar marcados por una placa o etiqueta colocada en
la caja de engranes. Si no, utilice los tapones o mirillas de vidrio que se indica en los siguientes
diagramas para llenar, comprobar los niveles o drenar el aceite.
Las cajas de engranes de ejes paralelos en realidad puede ser llenado a travs de cualquiera de los
tapones, siempre que sean iguales o por encima del nivel del tapn de control del nivel.
Las capacidades de fluido son aproximados.
Cajadeengranesde Cajasdeengranesdemalacateprincipaly
malacatedelapluma auxiliar
Serie400 Capacidad:90.84Litros
Lleno/Revisar
Drenar
Serie700 Capacidad:121.13
Litros
Lleno/Revisar(Pluma)
Lleno/Revisar
(Principal)
Lleno/Revisar
(Auxiliar)
Drenar
Disposicionesdecajadeengranesejeparalelo(Continuacin)
Serie1600
Cajadeengranesde Capacidad:310.40Litros
malacatedelapluma
Lleno
Revisar(Nivelconmirilla
devidrio)
Drenar
Capacidad:382.32Litros Cajasdeengranesdemalacateprincipaly
auxiliar
Lleno
Revisar(Nivel
conmirillade
vidrio)
Lleno/Revisar
Cualquiera (Llenarcon
cualquierayrevisar
conelotro)
Drenar
Disposicionesdecajadeengranesdeplanetario
Serie125/250/500 Capacidades
Lleno Serie125:7.57Litros
Serie250:3.78Litros
Revisar Serie500:7.57Litros
Malacateparatirar(20388):2.27Litros
Drenar
Serie1000
Serie1000:11.35Litros
Lleno/Revisar
Drenar
Serie1000dobleentrada
Capacidad:7.57Litros
Cajadebombas
Vea los Boletines de Servicio adjuntos para requisitos detallados de lubricacin.
Disposicindecojinetedegiro
SeatraxrecomiendaestrictamenteelusodegrasaNLGI#2enloscojinetesdegiro,ambossuperiore
inferioryenlospernosdelpivoteentodaslasgrasSeatrax.
Cojinetesuperior
Seatrax ha alineado una serie de variantes de rodamientos superiores sintticos que se centraron en dos
diseos bsicos: Tipo-S de hemisfrico y cojinetes radiales de empuje y emparejado. Todos estos diseos
tienen una larga vida til si se lubrica correctamente.
Diseos radiales y empuje son accesibles a travs de dos puntos de engrase, el propsito es que hay dos
clases de cojinetes de tipo S: dos y seis graseras. En la
configuracin de seis puntos para la grasa, los dos pares
internos de graseras deben engrasarse cada turno y el par
exterior 2-3 veces por semana. NOTA: En algunas gras
mviles que utilizan un poste de carga invertida, las
posiciones normales de cojinete se invierten por lo que el
cojinete hemisfrico en realidad es en la parte inferior del
poste de carga conectado.
Cojinetes de giro y pernos del pivote de la pluma estn
sometidos a una gran presin de carga para engrase regular
es imprescindible. Especialmente esto es importante para
los seis puntos de graseras del cojinete hemisfrico: La
imagen de la derecha en las lneas verdes del laberinto es
por donde la grasa tiene que pasar para lubricar. NOTA: Si no respeta el programa de engrase puede
permitir que se acumulen desechos, obstruccin, pasadizos e impedir que la grasa no se pueda distribuir
en todo el apoyo.
Los dibujos ilustran el punto de grasa tpica de cojinetes superiores Seatrax:
TipoS,dos(2)graseras TipoS,seis(6)graseras Cojineteradialyempuje

C
B A
A
A
A
B
C
Puntodegrasa Intervalosdelubricacin
A Cadaturno
B Cadaturno
C 23vecesporsemana
Cojinetesinferioresdegiro
Engrase los Cojinetes de giro en conformidad con la Tabla de lubricacin que aparece ms adelante en
este documento. Las siguientes imgenes muestran dos arreglos diferentes para engrasar los cojinetes
inferiores. Algunas gras tienen un sistema de engrase central opcional: si lo tiene, esto reemplaza la
grasera en cada cojinete con una manguera conectada a un colector. El colector est situado alrededor de
la mesa giratoria general, accesible desde la cubierta principal cuando sea necesario.
Figura.Engrasedecojinetesdegirotpicos(izquierda)yEngrasecentralizadoconcolectoropcional(derecha)
Apliqueabundantegrasaenlacaradecada (1)grasera Engrasecentral

cojinetequellevayenelreadegirodel porcojinete
postedecarga.
UnalneaseconectaacadacojineteconunconectordeJIC
Para obtener ms instrucciones sobre cmo instalar y lubricar cojinetes nuevos, consulte el
Procedimiento de reemplazo de cojinete del sistema de giro en la seccin de Inspeccin y
mantenimiento seccin de Libro de datos 1.
Paraasentarloscojinetesnuevos
Para ayudar a distribuir el lubricante y promover que el desgaste sea parejo, gire la gra a travs de varias
vueltas de 360 grados, mientras al mismo tiempo se engrasa los rodamientos nuevos o se reemplazan los
cojinetes de giro. Esto se aplica tanto a los zapatos de soporte superior e inferior. Para obtener la mxima
vida til de funcionamiento, Seatrax recomienda utilizar la tcnica anterior cada vez, incluso para asentar
los rodamientos.
Pernosdepivotedelapluma
Suba y baje la pluma mientras se engrasan los pernos de pivote de la pluma para que el lubricante se
distribuya uniformemente a lo
largo de los bujes.
El Procedimiento de reemplazo
de los bujes de pivote de la
pluma se encuentran en la
seccin de Inspeccin y
mantenimiento de Libro de
Datos 1. contiene sugerencias
adicionales para la lubricacin
cuando se reemplazan los
pernos de pivote de la pluma.
Puntosdegraserasenmalacatestpicos
Los puntos de engrase en los malacates principal, auxiliar y la pluma utilizan grasa de uso mltiple
(MPG).
En los malacates principal y auxiliar las disposiciones y puntos de lubricacin son similares, la principal
diferencia es que en la pluma la caja de engranes se orienta verticalmente.
Caja de engranes de ejes paralelos: Puntos de engrase en ambos lados, en el lado de la caja de
engranes y el lado del freno.
Caja de engranes de Planetarios: Puntos de engrase solamente en el lado del freno.
Puntosdeengraseladodelfrenodelabanda(ambostiposdecajadeengranesparaleloyplanetarios)
Tipo:MPG
1Punto
(Quesalga Tipo:CPG
porel 1Puntox4
respirador) tiros
Cajadeengranesladodepuntodeengrase(ejeparalelosolamente)
Tipo:MPG
2Puntosx Tipo:MPG
4tiros 1Punto
(Quesalga
porel
respirador)
Aceitesdemotor
Consulte el manual del motor en la seccin Manual de motor de Libro de datos 1 para los grados y
viscosidades de aceite recomendados por el fabricante, junto con otros lquidos.
La siguiente tabla de grados de aceite es tpica de los motores diesel instalados en las gras marinas
Seatrax
Temperaturadeambiente Gradodeviscosidad
MnimoF(C) MximoF(C)
5(15) 122(50) SAE15W40
4(20) 104(40) SAE10W30
22(30) 104(40) SAE5W40
22(30) 86(30) SAE5W30
40(40) 50(10) SAE0W20
Aceiteparacajadeengranes
Aceites de engranajes se utilizan en todos los malacates de toda la gra. Tipo multigrado son los ms
utilizados. Al igual que con todos los lubricantes, con el grado y aditivos correctos es crucial para el
rendimiento adecuado. Los lubricantes usados en cajas de engranes Seatrax deben ser:
Derivados del petrleo, no detergente del aceite del engranaje contiene antioxidante y aditivos
antiespumantes. Cualquier aceite de engranajes utilizado debe tener un aditivo EP (Extrema
Presin). EP estn diseados especficamente para evitar el contacto de metal con metal en la
operacin de engranajes altamente cargados.
Asegrese para metales de latn y bronce como lo indica el resultado de 1b o mejor en la prueba
ASTM-D130.
El ndice de viscosidad mnima de 95 cst y mantener una viscosidad mnima de 40 cst bajo
condiciones de funcionamiento normales. Las viscosidades deben responder a las condiciones locales
del medio ambiente:
o SAE 80W-90 est recomendado para el Golfo de Mxico y otras regiones sub-tropicales. Los
malacates de Seatrax tpicamente se llenan con 80W-90 a menos que el cliente solicite un
lubricante especfico. Este peso es apropiado para la mayora de condiciones de funcionamiento.
Las operaciones en un ambiente que es muy caliente (ms de 100 F) o fro (menos de 0 F),
pueden requerir de drenaje de la caja de engranes y volver a llenar con un lubricante
desarrollado para estas temperaturas especficas.
o Ambientes excesivamente calientes pueden requerir el uso de aceite para caja de engranes 80W-
140: esto fluye como un peso de aceite SAE 80 para engranajes en temperaturas fras pero da la
proteccin de peso del aceite SAE 140.
o En el fro rtico requiere el uso de aceite de engranaje 75W-90 que fluye como un peso de aceite
para engranajes SAE 75 en temperaturas fras pero da la proteccin de peso de aceite de
engranajes SAE 90. Para el funcionamiento en fro extremo un aceite sinttico o multigrado se
recomienda con un punto de fluidez de 10 F (6 C) menor que la temperatura ambiente
mnima.
NOTASIMPORTANTES
NO utilice aceites de motor o fluidos de transmisin automtica en cualquier caja de engranes en una
gra Seatrax!
Aceites sintticos biodegradables han surgido recientemente en el mercado, pero ninguno ha sido
probado en cajas de engranes Seatrax.
Es imperativo que los aceites para engranajes son reemplazados en los intervalos requeridos, sobre
todo si funciona a altas temperaturas durante perodos prolongados de tiempo.
Al revisar el aceite en las diversas cajas de engranes, compruebe la decoloracin, ya que puede indicar
sobrecalentamiento. Si no se reemplaza el aceite en la caja de engranes descolorida puede acortar
significativamente la vida til de los engranes y rodamientos.
Muchas otras compaas suministran aceite conforme a los requisitos anteriores, pero las hojas de
datos de aceite son sometidas a Seatrax para su aprobacin antes de su uso.
Se debe tener cuidado para asegurar que no hay suciedad o contaminantes que entran en la caja de
engranes durante el llenado o proceso de transferencia de aceite.
Tabladerecomendacionesdeaceitesparacajasdeengranes
Rangosdeambientepermitidosparatemperaturaygrados
Manufactura/marca 75W90 80W901 80W140
<0F 0to100F >100F
CastrolAPGear CastrolAPGear
B.P.CASTROL
80W90 85W140
CALTEX
CHEVRON
MegaLubricants
MARTINMIDSTREAM PremiumGearOil
GL580W901
MobilDelvac MobilDelvac
MobilubeHDPlus
MOBIL SyntheticGearOil SyntheticGearOil
80W90
75W90 80W140
PETROCANADA TraxonXL75W90 Traxon80W90 TraxonXL80W140
ShellSpiraxS6AXME ShellSpiraxHD ShellSpiraxHD
SHELLOILCO.
75W140 80W90 85W140
TEXACO
FinaPontonicMPX FinaSynpro85W
TOTALFINAELF FinaSynpro75W90
80W90 140
1
Llenadotpicodefabrica
Grasa
Seatrax lubrica todos los cojinetes y bujes de la gra durante el montaje. Deben ser atendidos todos los
puntos de engrase a como lo muestra la Tabla de lubricacin. Las siguientes sub-secciones se describen
los diversos requisitos de engrase de diferentes partes de la gra:
Cojinetedegiroypernosdepivotedelapluma
Seatrax recomienda estrictamente el uso de Lubemaster (Cert. Lab.) Premalube Heavy Duty NLGI # 2
grasa en los cojinetes de giro superior e inferior y pernos de pivote de la pluma. Siga las instrucciones en
la pgina siguiente al introducir Premalube a una gra que se utiliza diferente grasa previamente.
NO MEZCLE CON GRASAS DE ARCILLAY O BENTONITA.
Ciertas grasas no son compatibles y pueden dejar de funcionar correctamente si se mezclan. Esto
puede resultar una falla del equipo o daos. Purgue toda la grasa antes de usar Premalube.
Tipo de cojinete con grasa: llenar con Premalube hasta que la grasa se ve obligada a salir.
Otras superficies: elimine la grasa mediante la aplicacin de un desengrasante.
Para obtener informacin adicional acerca de la compatibilidad y la purga consultar al departamento
de servicio Seatrax.
Acoplamientosyranuras
Consulte el Boletn de Servicio SB26003 de acoplamiento especfico y la recomendacin del distribuidor
Fuerzaprimaria
FuerzaprimariadieselbarraCardan(Siestaequipado)
La gra puede estar equipada con un eje de barra cardan junto con una unin de que transmite la potencia
del motor de accionamiento a la caja de engranes de la bomba cudruple. El eje de transmisin tiene una
seccin central ranurada, plegable para ajustar la longitud. El conjunto de la barra cardan del motor se
encuentra dentro de un recinto protector accesible a travs de una cubierta con bisagras.
Prioridad para la barra cardan, asegrese de que el motor primario este apagado y no se pueda
arrancar hasta que el mantenimiento se ha completado.
Utilice nicamente las grasas a base de litio de grado NLGI # 2. No utilice grasa a base de sodio.
Despus del mantenimiento asegure que la guarda de la barra cardan de la transmisin est asegurada.

GuardadebarraCardan(Izquierda)ybarraCardan,UninyRanura(Derecha)
Tipo:MPG
Tipo:MPG
Tipo:CPG
Intervalo #depunto Lube(Cantidad) Descripcin

Mensual 2 MPG(1tiro) Bisagras,BarraCardan
Mensual 2 MPG(Hastaquelagrasaviejasalga) Union,BarraCardan
Mensual 1 CPG(3tiro) Ranura,BarraCardan
Fuerzaprimariaelctrica(siestaequipado)
Para gras equipadas con un motor elctrico(s) como motor primario, consulte el manual del fabricante
del Motor primario en la seccin de Libro de datos 1 para los requisitos de lubricacin.
Todoslosotrospuntos
Para otros puntos de engrase, grasa de alta calidad multi-propsito con aditivos EP y molibdeno y una alta
resistencia al lavado por agua es necesaria para evitar el contacto entre metales y el desgaste prematuro.
Tambin es necesario el uso de grasa para la temperatura de servicio esperada de la gra. Seatrax
recomienda calificaciones NLGI como se indica en la siguiente tabla:
Rangodetemp. 40a40F 10a80F 30a110F
Grasa NLGIGrado0 NLGIGrado1 NLGIGrado2
Tabladerecomendacionesdegrasa
Manufactura/ Rangosdeambientepermitidosparatemperaturaygrados
marca NLGIGrade0 NLGIGrade1 NLGIGrade21

40to40F 10to80F 30to110F
ArcticPremalube
LUBEMASTER2 PremalubeNLGI1 PremalubeNLGI2
M/M3
CastrolMolubAlloy CastrolMolubAlloy CastrolMolubAlloy
B.P.CASTROL
67803 860/220ESNLGI1 860/220ESNLGI2
CALTEX
CHEVRON
CONOCO MolyLowTemp3,4 MegaplexXD3NLGI1 MegaplexXD3NLGI2
MobilgreaseMoly50 MobilRonexAW222
MOBIL MobilgreaseCML
Arctic Moly
PrecisionXL5Moly PrecisionXL3Moly PrecisionXL5Moly
PETROCANADA
EP0 EP1 EP2
SHELLOILCO. ShellRetinaxCMX13 ShellRetinaxCMX1 ShellRetinaxEPX2
DeloHeavyDuty MolyGreaseEPNLGI
TEXACO MolytexEP2
SyntheticMoly5%EP3 1
FinaMarsonLiplex FinaMarsonLiplex
TOTALFINAELF FinaMolyGAllSeason
Moly5 Moly
1
Llenadotpicodegrasa
2
Paracojinetesdegiroypernosdepivotedelapluma.
3
NLGIesGrado1
4
BasecomplexdeAluminio.Norevuelvaconotrasgrasas.
5
NLGIesGrado2
Aceiteshidrulicos
Viscosidad
Las viscosidades deberan corresponder a las condiciones ambientales que figuran en la tabla. ISO VG 68
se recomienda para el Golfo de Mxico y otras regiones sub-tropicales. Si parece que hay superposicin o
las temperaturas ambientales se encuentran fuera del rango de la tabla, pngase en contacto con Seatrax.
Compatibilidad
Los aceites minerales son generalmente compatibles con los sellos, los conductores de fluidos y
componentes metlicos. Sin embargo, algunos fluidos sintticos y / o el medio ambiente-seguro tienen
aditivos o propiedades qumicas que pueden daar estos componentes. Contctese con Seatrax antes de
utilizar cualquier otro aceite hidrulico.
Lubricidad
Debido a las tolerancias crticas entre las piezas de acoplamiento en las bombas de pistn y motores, la
lubricidad del aceite debe cumplir con los requisitos mnimos. Las propiedades de lubricacin del aceite
deben presentarse en hojas de datos de petrleo las empresas de aceite como una calificacin FZG.
Los fluidos con aditivos de lubricidad a base de zinc proporcionan una mayor vida til. Seatrax
recomienda evitar el uso de aceites no a base de zinc.
AceitesHLPvs.HVLP
Los aceites que aparecen en la Tabla hidrulica Seatrax son aceites HLP. Seatrax no recomienda el uso de
aceites HVLP: pueden experimentar hasta una prdida del 30% de la viscosidad en la lubricacin lo cual
puede provocar un funcionamiento errtico
Llenadooriginal
El aceite hidrulico ISO 68 de alta calidad se utiliza tpicamente para el relleno original en el sistema
hidrulico. Este tipo de aceite se ha elegido porque es un no-detergente, estable al cizallamiento, anti-
espuma y anti-desgaste aceite hidrulico de alta resistencia a la oxidacin. Los aditivos utilizados en el
aceite son adecuados para el uso a larga duracin y son compatibles con las juntas utilizadas en la gra.
Este aceite se puede utilizar para temperaturas que van de 30 F a 110 F.
Llenadoenelcampo
Cada vez que el aceite debe ser aadido al sistema, o cuando un cambio de aceite se convierte en
necesario, utilizar uno de los fluidos que se muestran en la Tabla de aceite hidrulico.
Lleno es aproximadamente 4 "por debajo de la parte superior del tanque o aproximadamente 6" por
debajo de la boca de llenado. Seatrax no utiliza cilindros hidrulicos a diferencia de algunos diseos, por
lo que es necesario dejar una reserva de aire grande para acomodar el desplazamiento del pistn de
lquido dentro del tanque hidrulico.
NOTASIMPORTANTES
NO utilice aceites de motor o fluidos de transmisin automtica en el sistema hidrulico.
Mantener el nivel en el tanque apropiadamente: el aceite demasiado lleno y el exceso puede chapotear
afuera. Nivel demasiado bajo puede ocurrir daos en la bomba. Como se ilustra en el dibujo anterior,
Seatrax disea la entrada a la bomba de succin de piloto en la parte alta del tanque relativa a las
entradas de las otras bombas. Si el nivel baja por debajo de la boca de succin, la presin piloto del
sistema hidrulico bajara, deteniendo las bombas de giro y levantamiento antes de que daos de
cavitacin puedan ocurrir. Si esto ocurre, apague la gra inmediatamente para reducir la posibilidad de
daar la bomba piloto y volver a llenar el tanque.
El uso de calentadores de aceite en el depsito hidrulico puede cambiar el aceite o el intervalo de
cambio de aceite recomendado para un entorno particular.
Cuando se opera en un ambiente extremadamente fro, gire lentamente el malacate durante un minuto
para permitir que el aceite se caliente en el tanque y reemplazar el aceite fro en las lneas y calentar
los motores.
Tabladeaceitehidrulico
A continuacin se enumeran los grados de viscosidad ISO recomendados para el aceite hidrulico para
diferentes rangos de temperatura de ambiente cuando se utilizan en gras hidrulicas Seatrax. Tambin se
incluye una lista de varios fabricantes que hacen el aceite conforme a las especificaciones ISO. Estos
aceites son aceites HLP fcilmente disponibles por lo general con gran vida a beneficios de costos.
Muchas otras compaas petroleras tambin suministran el aceite conforme a estos requisitos, pero
las hojas de datos de aceite hidrulico deben presentarse a Seatrax para su aprobacin antes de su
uso.
Nuncalleneelsistemahidrulicodirectamentedelosbarriles,latasuotrosrecipientes:queamenudo
contienencontaminantesydebenserfinamentefiltradosduranteelllenadodeaceiteenla
transferenciadeproceso.
Rangosdeambientepermitidosparatemperatura
ISO22 ISO32 ISO46 ISO68
Manufactura/
marca 10Fto60F 5Fto75F 15Fto90F 30Fto110F
(23Cto15C) (15Cto24C) (9Cto32C) (1Cto43C)
EnergolHLPHM EnergolHLPHM EnergolHLPHM EnergolHLPHM
B.P.
22 32 46 68
CALTEX RandoHD22 RandoHD32 RandoHD46 RandoHD68
CASTROL HyspinAWS22 HyspinAWS32 HyspinAWS46 HyspinAWS68
CHEVRON RykonOilAW22 RykonOilAW32 RykonOilAW46 RykonOilAW68
CONOCO HydroclearAW22 HydroclearAW32 HydroclearAW46 HydroclearAW68
MOBIL DTE22 DTE32 DTE46 DTE68
PETROCANADA HydrexAW22 HydrexAW32 HydrexAW46 HydrexAW68
SHELLOILCO. Tellus22 Tellus32 Tellus46 Tellus68
TEXACO RandoHD22 RandoHD32 RandoHD46 RandoHD68
TOTALFINAELF AzollaZS22 AzollaZS32 AzollaZS46 AzollaZS68
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
BOLETINDESERVICIO
SB26003(apndiceaSB25001R)
01deagostode2006
GRASAPARAACOPLAMIENTOSDECAJADEENGRANESPARALAS
BOMBAS
Se adjuntan especificaciones de grasa de varios fabricantes de lubricantes para acoplamiento. Esta

grasa est fabricada especficamente para su aplicacin en acoplamientos de alta velocidad.
A travs de una extensa investigacin y las pruebas de campo, Seatrax ha encontrado estos
lubricantes especficos que proporcionan una mejor y significativa vida para la ranuras dentadas de
alta velocidad en las unidades de acoplamiento de la caja de engranes para las bombas.
Se recomienda la aplicacin de grasa en la entrada del eje de acoplamiento en la ranura dentada
hacia el volante del motor durante el mantenimiento.
Para obtener ms informacin sobre la lubricacin de la caja de engranes de las bombas por favor
consulte el Boletn de Servicio Seatrax SB25001R.
SB26003_spamx.doc Page1of1
SHELL ALVANIA GREASE CG
For couplings used in industrial equipment
Product Description
Alvania Grease CG is specially formulated with a lithium soap/polymer thickener, which has superior resistance to
oil separation when subjected to the high centrifugal forces normally found in couplings.
Application
Alvania Grease CG is recommended for all types of grease lubricated couplings used in industrial equipment.
Common grease lubricated couplings include:
1. Geared Couplings which have internal and external spur gears that mesh within a common rotating hub
connecting the shafts.
2. Steel Grid Couplings which have a convoluted band of flexible spring steel physically linking the hubs together.
3. Flexible Chain Couplings which have a roller chain that meshes with a sprocket cut in each mating hub.
Advance technology has enabled Alvania Grease CG to perform beyond the normal 6 month change interval. In
actual field experience this grease has shown its ability to perform satisfactorily beyond 3 years. This product should
be used in all grease couplings, especially in those hard to service or those operating under severe conditions.
Because of its high base oil viscosity, Alvania Grease CG is also suitable for use in other industrial applications
where the equipment is subject to high water wash, low speeds and heavy or shock loads.
Features
Alvania Grease CG has a consistency which overlaps the NLGI grades 0 and 1. This grease is specially formulated
with a lithium/polymer thickener and fortified with corrosion, oxidation, extreme pressure and an effective rust
inhibitor additive package.
Its high viscosity base oil and tackifier combine to keep the grease in place and prevent separation. In the ASTM D
4425, High Speed Centrifugal Test, which develops G forces in excess of 36,000 at 15,000 rpm. Alvania Grease CG
exhibits little or no oil separation.
SOC: 02426-12/02
Benefits
resistance to centrifugal separation
extended relubrication frequency
high load carrying capabilities
resistance to water washing
staying in place under high speeds
corrosion and rust protection
minimizing of coupling wear
reduction in down time and maintenance costs
minimizing of coupling freeze-up
use at temperatures up to 325F
one grease for all grease coupling types
Based on ASTM D 1478 and D 4693 torque tests, the minimum recommended bearing lubrication service would be -
10F. For coupling service the minimum usable temperature is not dependent upon ease of pumping or bearing
breakaway force. Field service confirms problem-free coupling service at -20F and below. Actual minimum
temperature for coupling service would be below -20F.
Approvals and Recommendations

AGMA CG-1 type
AGMA CG-2 type
AGMA CG-3 type
Shell recommends Alvania Grease CG in all types of grease couplings including the following:
Browning
Falk
Koppers
Fast
TB Woods
Product Maintenance
The tacky nature of the product makes hand packing the preferred method of newly installed couplings to ensure even
distribution throughout. Normal handling precautions should be observed as with any petroleum based products.
Consult the coupling manufacturers installation instructions for detailed lubricant application procedures. The
following procedure outlines a popular lubrication method. Prior to assembly of gear couplings a coating of grease
should be applied to gear teeth. After hand packing, the coupling should be rotated so the grease fitting reaches 4
oclock, and the fitting/plug removed. A short length of 1/4 inch pipe can be affixed and grease pumped into the
coupling until product is observed flowing out the purge opening at 10 oclock. The pipe should then be removed and
the plugs reinserted. This practice insures that the coupling is adequately lubricated. Routine relubrication can be
accomplished with disassembly using this method. The grease will then be evenly distributed to all moving and
sliding surfaces and the full benefits of the product will be realized. Special care needs to be taken when filling "Full
Travel" type couplings so the correct amount of grease is charged.
Typical Properties of Shell Alvania Grease CG
Test Method
Product Code 71168
NLGI Grade 0/1
Appearance Dark Brown, Tacky
Lithium Soap/Polymer, wt% 10.0
Viscosity(1)
@ 40C, cSt D 445 >3200
@ 100C, cSt D 445 >50
Penetration. Dmm D 217
Worked, 60X 350
Worked, 10,000X, % Change 10
Dropping Point, F Mettler 320+
Centrifugal Oil Separation, vol % D 4425 None
Water Spray-Off, wt % D 4049 <3
Rust Protection D 1743 Pass
Timken, OK Load, lbs D 2509 40+
Four-Ball EP D 2596
Load Wear Index, kgf 68
Weld Point, kgf 400
Four-Ball Wear, mm D 2266 0.4
1 hr, 75C, 1200 rpm, 40 kgf
Guide to Usable Temperature
Min,F (Pumping) 20
Min,F (Bearings) -10
Min,F (Couplings) Below -20
Continuous Service, Max,F 250
Short Exposure, Max,F 325
1
Nominal base oil viscosities without polymers or additives are 680 cSt @ 40C
and 26.1 cSt @ 100C.
Handling Practices
For information on the safe handling and use of this product, refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet at
http://www.equivashell.com. For more information and availability, call 1+800-782-7852 or visit the World Wide
Web: http://www.shell-lubricants.com/.
Grease
Product Description
Mobilgrease XTC is an extra high performance product designed for use in high speed coupling applications. It is manufactured with a
selected high viscosity mineral base oil and an extremely effective, heavy-duty additive package. Mobilgrease XTC is formulated to
provide low bleed as well as high temperature stability, properties critical to modern coupling lubrication and protection. While the base
oil provides excellent elastohydrodynamic lubrication (EHL) film protection properties, the additive package enhances the extreme
pressure (EP) / anti-wear protection, rust and corrosion performance and the high temperature stability of this leading edge product.
Mobilgrease XTC also incorporates proprietary formulation stability to outperform best-in-class low bleed coupling greases with respect
to high temperature stability in high shear conditions. Mobilgrease XTC is an NLGI No. 1 lithium soap-base product.
ExxonMobil research scientists formulated Mobilgrease XTC to meet or exceed the requirements of modern high-speed gear and grid
design couplings including the AGMA CG-2 and CG-1 specifications. This grease has shown excellent performance and protection in a
wide variety of coupling applications covering a broad range of industries.
Based on its outstanding performance, this grease has become the product of choice for many coupling users. Mobilgrease XTC fully
meets the performance requirements of major coupling manufacturers.
Features & Benefits

The Mobilgrease brand of products is well known and highly regarded world-wide based on their outstanding performance and the R&D
expertise and the global technical support that stand behind the brand. The outstanding qualities of one of these lubricants in this
family, Mobilgrease XTC, have made it the choice of many users, especially when performance is a key concern.
Mobilgrease XTC enjoys an excellent reputation in the lubrication of high speed and high temperature gear and grid coupling
applications. Close contacts with original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and end-users ensure that products such as Mobilgrease
XTC will be available to meet critical application needs, both now and in the future.
Mobilgrease XTC was specifically designed for high speed and high temperature coupling applications, and offers the following
advantages and potential benefits:
Features Advantages and Potential Benefits

Excellent resistance to oil separation Less leakage, better reliability and coupling protection
Excellent EHL contribution and wear protection Less coupling wear, even when misaligned, and lower
maintenance costs
Excellent high temperature stability Long grease life and extended intervals between relubrication
Good resistance to rust and corrosion Maintains excellent grease performance even in tough aqueous
environments

Applications
Application Considerations: Because Mobilgrease XTC is highly viscous and has adhesive agents to address coupling demands, use of
hand-operated grease guns at low ambient temperatures without auxiliary heat is discouraged.
Mobilgrease XTC fully meets existing and AGMA Type CG-2 requirements for high-speed flexible gear and grid couplings. Mobilgrease
XTC also meets less demanding AGMA Type CG-1 requirements. Mobilgrease XTC maintains its excellent performance characteristics
in ambient temperatures up to 120 C. It is not recommended for temperatures below -30 C. Mobilgrease XTC is used widely in
industrial applications requiring the use of:
Grid-type flexible couplings

Gear-type flexible couplings
Specifications & Approvals

Mobilgrease XTC meets or exceeds the following industry specifications:
Meets AGMA CG-1
Meets AGMA CG-2
Typical Properties
Mobilgrease XTC
NLGI Grade 1
Thickener Type Lithium/Polymer
Color, Visual Dark Brown
Penetration, Worked, 25 C, ASTM D 217 325
Dropping Point, C, ASTM D 2265 215
Viscosity of Oil, ASTM D 445
cSt @ 40 C 680
Centrifugal Bleed, ASTM D 4425, K36, 24 hrs, 38 C, vol % 0
Penetration change, ASTM D 217, from 60X to 10,000X, mm/10 +25
Bomb Oxidation, ASTM D 942, Pressure drop at 100 hrs, kPa 35
Four- Ball Wear, ASTM D 2266 0.35
Four- Ball EP Test, ASTM D 2596,
Weld Point, Kg 315
Load Wear Index, Kgf 51
Timken OK Load, ASTM D 2509, lb 60
Corrosion Prevention, ASTM D 1743 Pass
Copper Strip Corrosion, ASTM D 4048 1A

Health & Safety
Based on available information, this product is not expected to produce adverse effects on health when used for the intended
application and the recommendations provided in the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) are followed. MSDS's are available upon
request through your sales contract office, or via the Internet. This product should not be used for purposes other than its intended use.
If disposing of used product, take care to protect the environment.
The Mobil logotype, the Pegasus are trademarks of Exxon Mobil Corporation, or one of its subsidiaries.

Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
BOLETINDESERVICIO
SB25001R4
10deenerode2005(Revised26demarzode2012)
LUBRICACIONDECAJADEENGRANESPARABOMBAS
Gras de Seatrax equipadas con 4 unidades de bombeo en la caja de engranes requieren lubricacin
adicional, que prolongar la vida de la bomba y de engranes. Adems del nivel de fluido interno los
engranes deben ser lubricados peridicamente para prevenir estras en las ranuras.
Seatrax tiene diferentes modelos de 4 adaptadores para 4 unidades de bombeo, cada uno con un
procedimiento de mantenimiento diferente.
Para unidades utilizando el No. de Parte

20135, 20156, 20173 y 20195:
Cada unidad independiente debe tener 2
tiros de una aceitera de aceite SAE 90W
aplicados en los respiraderos en forma
mensual.
NOTA: Si nunca se ha lubricado comience
aplicando 10 tiros de aceite de una aceitera
en cada adaptador.
SB25001R4_spamx.doc Page1of3
Para unidades utilizando el No. de Parte
20200, 20201, 20202, 20206 y 20224:
En el centro de la barra cardan debe tener
una Grasera (Ref.: SB26003) aplique un tiro
de grasa por semana.
NOTA: Si no se ha lubricado comience
aplicando 6 tiros de grasa.
Oil capacity: 7.09 litros.
Para unidades de 1,400 a 2,300 hp incluye

Nos. de Parte
20271, 20278, 20296, 20406, 20416,

20417, 20418, 20419 & 20420
Capacidad de Aceite: Aproximadamente
de 35.01 litros
Llene hasta la marca de lleno de la varilla.
No hay otros puntos de lubricacin.
NOTA: Esta serie de unidades es
identificable por una bomba de enfriamiento
montado en el centro lado de las bombas.
Para unidades de 1,000 hp incluyen Nos. de
Parte
20258, 20259, 20261, 20265, 20289,

20387, 20405, 20412, 20413, 20414,
20415, 20421, 20422, 20430, 20431
& 20452
Capacidad de Aceite: Aproximadamente
de 7.57 litros
Llene hasta la marca de lleno de la varilla.

No hay otros puntos de lubricacin.
NOTA: Esta serie de unidades es

identificable por una bomba de enfriamiento
montado en el centro lado de las bombas.
Section/Seccin7 ________________________
Rigging Aparejo
Wire Rope Specifications Especificaciones de cable de acero
Reeving Diagrams Diagramas de instalacin del cable de
acero
Hoist Drum Shimming Nivelacin de tambor del malacate
Erection and Installation Procedure Montaje y procedimiento de instalacin
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
30November2001
Rigging
General
Proper care and attention to the wire rope is vital for safe crane operation. Failure to correctly
maintain the wire rope shortens rope life and endangers personnel and property.
Although many types of wire rope exist and many manufacturers produce wire rope, only
replace wire rope with the same size, type, construction, and manufacturer of the wire rope
supplied with the crane.
Seatrax uses specific wire rope designs to meet or exceed the specifications on each crane
and replacing the rope with the wrong type can greatly shorten the working life of the rope or
become extremely dangerous.
Lubrication
Each wire rope is actually constructed from many individual strands that interact with each
other as the rope moves. If these components are not adequately lubricated, the wire rope does
not move properly and the rope begins to breakdown from abrasive wear.
Any lack of lubrication allows an opportunity for the following conditions:
Rust
Corrosion
Freezing
Heat
Abrasion
The manufacturer lubricates wire ropes, but the protection must be maintained in the field.
Lubricant must penetrate to the inner core of the wire rope to get an oil film between all
strands.
Lubricant can be applied hot or cold, depending on the exact type.
Refer to the wire rope distributor or manufacturer to find the best lubricant and the best
application methods. The lubricant interval depends on the service and ambient conditions.
The most commonly used interval is 100 hours, but exposure to salt air may require more
frequent lubrication.
RiggingStandardInfo_R02.doc Page1of4
WireRopeInspection
All wire ropes in active service should be visually inspected once every working day. A
thorough inspection of such ropes should be made at least once a month and date records kept
as to rope condition.
Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength should be carefully

examined and determination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a
safety hazard. The following conditions should be sufficient reason to question rope safety
and consider replacement.
Corrosion.
More than one broken wire in any one strand. Breaks occurring on crowns of outside
wires indicate normal deterioration. Breaks in valleys between strand indicate an
abnormal condition, possibly fatigue or breakage of other wires not readily visible.
More than one broken wire near attached fittings.
Heavy wear and/or broken wires in rope sections under sheaves where rope travel is
limited or at points of contact with saddles.
Extensive abrasion, scrubbing, and peening of outside wires, pitting, kink damage or other
mechanical abuse causing distortion of rope structure.
Sheaves, guards, guides, drums flanges and other surfaces contacted by the rope during
operation should be inspected for conditions which are harmful to the rope.
WireRopeReplacement
A fully comprehensive and precise set of rules cannot be given for determination of exact time
for rope replacement since many variable factors are involved. Safety in this respect depends
largely upon the use of good judgment by competent maintenance personnel in evaluating
remaining rope strength in a used rope after allowance for deterioration disclosed by
inspection.
According to API Recommended Practice 2D (API RP2D), wire rope should be retired if any
of the following conditions exist:
Rotation resistant rope: Four randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or two
broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. (Rope lay is the length along the rope in which
one strand makes a complete revolution around the rope.)
Pendant lines: Three broken wires within one rope lay, or two broken wires at end
connection.
Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing wear of more than 1/3 of the original diameter of
outside wires.
Evidence of severe corrosion.
Evidence of heat damage from any cause.
Reduction from nominal diameter of more than:
3/64 (.047) for rope diameters through
1/16 (.062) for rope diameters 7/8 through 11/8
3/32 (.093) for diameters 1 to 1
Marked reduction in diameter indicates deterioration of the core,

resulting in lack of proper support for the load carrying strands.
Excessive rope stretch or elongation may also be an indication of
internal deterioration.
Kinks, crushing, bird caging or any other damage resulting in

distortion of the rope structure.
Noticeable rusting or development of broken wires in the vicinity

of attachments.
Boom hoist ropes should be inspected near dead end for breaks in the heart of rope not visible
from outside caused by vibrations.
When replacing ropes, do not weld ends to seize them as this can cause premature failure.
This is especially critical on the boom hoist dead end.
All rope should be of proper size, grade, and construction as recommended in following pages
of this manual.
When transferring wire rope from a storage reel to the crane drum, always reel in the same
direction. This will help the rope reeve smoothly onto the drum. It is also necessary to keep
tension on the rope at all times while reeving.
WireRopeInstallation
NOTE: The easiest way to reeve all wire ropes is to run a 5/8 or larger hemp rope in place of the
wire rope (hemp does not stretch like nylon). Attach one end of the hemp rope to the end of the
wire rope and reeve the other end through the sheaves and run three wraps onto the respective
drum. Hold tension on hemp rope at drum while pulling on wire rope with hoist. Reeve hemp
around and off the drum (this is known as cat-heading).
1. Boom Rope Reeving:

A. Set reel of rope on a stand near the right side of the boom butt. Face the stand so the rope
can be pulled from the bottom of the reel towards the point.
B. Attach two shackles together and attach one to a lifting eye on the boom butt nearest to the
reel. Run the wire rope through the shackle and attach it to the hemp rope. From here, the
rope continues across the boom and under the far right sheave. Reeve boom suspension as
per reeving diagram. Make off winch dead end on side plate of hoist drum with H
blocks supplied.
C. Make off gantry end of suspension rope using the wedge socket supplied.
2. Main Rope Reeving:
A. NOTE: When reeving the main rope, it is important to have a reeving diagram available,
and know how many parts of line the crane should have. Reeve main line wire rope
through the anti-two block and the last point sheave (the sheave before it goes to the hoist
drum), and continue to the main hoist drum. Attach wire rope to the drum with the H
blocks supplied.
B. To keep tension on the wire rope during reeving, run the wire rope between two 6 long
boards (2 x 4 or similar), and tighten them against the rope with 2 C clamps. Do this on
the point side of one of the boom lacing boards. Slowly hoist the boards against the boom
lacing boards. Use the clamps on the 6 boards to keep tension on the rope as it reeves
onto the drum.
C. Leave enough rope at the point to run it through the main block, anti-two block, and point
sheaves for the appropriate number of falls. Refer to the reeving diagram for the correct
reeving pattern.
D. Run the end of the wire rope through the point towards the attachment point.
E. Use wedge socket supplied to make the dead end. NOTE: Connect MIPEG load sensing
plate, if fitted, to the wedge socket, and dead end post to tension link plates with tension
link pin. Now attach load sensor to link plates with link pin.
3. Whip Line Reeving:
A. Reeve whip line wire rope over jib sheave, load sensor sheave (if equipped), point sheave,
and onto aux. drum. Keep tension on the rope as described in 2B.
B. Slide headache ball (small end first) onto aux. rope. Attach the wedge socket according to
the Wedge Socket procedure in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1.
Attach the stinger line. Bolt headache ball over the wedge socket.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
30denoviembrede2001
Aparejo
Generales
Cuidado apropiado y atencin al cable de alambre es vital para la operacin segura de la gra.
Si no se mantiene correctamente el cable se acorta la vida del cable y pone en peligro a
personas y la propiedad.
Aunque existen muchos tipos de cables y muchos fabricantes producen cable, slo reemplace
el cable de alambre con el mismo tamao, tipo de construccin, y el fabricante del cable
suministrado con la gra.
Seatrax utiliza diseos especficos de cable para cumplir o exceder las especificaciones de
cada gra lo cual el reemplazo del cable de alambre con el tipo equivocado puede acortar
considerablemente la vida til del cable o llegar a ser muy peligroso.
Lubricacin
Cada cable esta en realidad construido a partir de muchas hebras individuales que interactan
entre s como la cuerda se mueve. Si estos componentes no se lubrican adecuadamente, el
cable de alambre no se mueve apropiadamente y el cable comienza a quebrarse por desgaste
abrasivo.
Cualquier falta de lubricacin permite un deterioro por las siguientes condiciones:
Oxido
Corrosin
Congelacin
Calor
Abrasin
El fabricante lubrica las cuerdas de alambre, pero la proteccin se debe mantener en el campo.
El lubricante debe penetrar en el ncleo interno del cable para obtener una pelcula de
aceite entre todas las cuerdas.
El lubricante se puede aplicar caliente o fro, dependiendo del tipo exacto.
Consulte al distribuidor de cable o con el fabricante para encontrar el mejor lubricante y los
mejores mtodos de aplicacin. El intervalo de lubricante depende del servicio y las
condiciones ambientales. El intervalo ms comnmente usado es 100 horas, pero la
exposicin al aire de la sal puede requerir una lubricacin ms frecuente.
Inspeccindelcabledealambre
Todos los cables en servicio activo deben ser inspeccionados visualmente una vez cada da de
trabajo. Una inspeccin minuciosa de dichos cables debe hacerse por lo menos una vez al mes
y mantener registros actualizados en cuanto a condiciones del cable.
RiggingStandardInfo_R02_spamx.doc Pgina1of4
Cualquier deterioro, lo que resulta es una prdida apreciable de la
fuerza original lo cual debe ser cuidadosamente examinado y
determinar si el uso mayor del cable constituya un riesgo para la
seguridad. Las siguientes condiciones deben ser razn suficiente para
cuestionar la seguridad del cable y considerar el reemplazo.
Corrosin.
Ms de un cable roto en una sola hebra. Saltos que se producen en
las coronas de los alambres exteriores indican deterioro normal. Si
el cable se mete en medio de dos cables seala una condicin
anormal, posiblemente, la fatiga o rotura de otros cables no son
fcilmente visibles.
Ms de un cable roto cerca de los accesorios conectados.
Desgaste pesado y / o alambres rotos en secciones del cable por
debajo de las poleas donde el cable pasa esta limitado o en los
puntos de contacto de los extremos de terminacin (bloques H y
grapas de terminacin de cua).
Amplia abrasin, tallado, marcado, picaduras, daos de torcedura u
otro abuso mecnico que causa distorsin de la estructura del
cable.
Las poleas, guardias, guas, tambores, bridas y otras superficies en contacto con el cable
durante la operacin debe ser inspeccionado para condiciones que son perjudiciales para el
cable.
Reemplazodelcabledealambre
Una comprensin completa y precisa de las normas no se puede dar para la determinacin del
tiempo exacto para el reemplazo del cable, ya que muchos factores variables intervienen.
Seguridad a este respecto depende en gran medida del uso de buen juicio por parte del
personal de mantenimiento competente en la evaluacin de resistencia del cable restante, en
un cable usado despus de la asignacin de deterioro divulgado por la inspeccin.
De acuerdo a API Prctica Recomendada 2D (API RP2D), el cable de alambre debe ser
retirado si alguna de las siguientes condiciones existe:
Rotacin de Cable resistente: Cuatro alambres rotos distribuidos alrededor en una vuelta
de cable o dos alambres rotos en una hebra en una vuelta de cable. (1 vuelta es la longitud
a lo largo del cable en el que una hebra realiza una vuelta completa alrededor del cable).
Las lneas de suspensin: Tres alambres rotos en una vuelta de cable o dos alambres rotos
en la conexin final.
Aabrasin, tallado o marcado causando un desgaste de ms de 1/3 del dimetro original de
los cables externos.
Evidencia de corrosion severa.
Evidencia de dao por calor por cualquier causa.
Reduccin del dimetro nominal de ms de:
3/64 (.047) para dimetro de cable hasta
1/16 (.062) para dimetro de cable de 7/8 hasta 11/8
3/32 (.093) para dimetro de cable de 1 a 1
Reduccin marcada en el dimetro indica el deterioro del ncleo, lo que resulta falta de
soporte adecuado para la realizacin de carga en las hebras. Tramo de cable alargado o
elongacin excesiva tambin puede ser una indicacin de deterioro interno.
Quebraduras, trituracin, desenhebrado o cualquier otro dao que produce una distorsin
de la estructura del cable.
Notable oxidacin o el desarrollo de alambres rotos en el cable adjunto.
El cable de la pluma debe ser inspeccionado cerca del extremo de terminacin, por
quebraduras en el ncleo del cable las cuales no son visibles desde el exterior que son
causadas por la vibracin.
Al reemplazar cables de alambre, no soldar extremos para aprovechar que esto puede causar
un fallo prematuro. Esto es especialmente crtico en el extremo de terminacin de la pluma.
Todos los cables de alambre deben ser de un tamao adecuado, el grado, y la construccin
como se recomienda en las siguientes pginas de este manual.
Cuando se transfiere el cable de alambre de un carrete de almacenamiento para el tambor de la
gra, siempre la posicin del carrete en la misma direccin. Esto ayudar al cable enrollarse
sin problemas en el tambor. Tambin es necesario mantener la tensin en el cable en todo
momento mientras se esta enhebrando.
Instalacindecabledealambre
NOTA: La manera ms fcil de enhebrar todos los cables es ejecutar una cuerda de mecate de
fibra natural de 5/8 "o mayor en lugar del cable de alambre (mecate de fibra natural-no se estira
como el nylon). Conecte o amarre un extremo de mecate en el final del cable de alambre y
enhebrar el otro extremo de mecate a travs de las poleas y ejecute tres vueltas en el tambor
respectivo. Mantenga la tensin en el mecate en el tambor mientras tira la cuerda de alambre con
el malacate. Enhebre el mecate alrededor y fuera del tambor.
1. Enhebrado de cable de alambre de la pluma:

A. Establecer el carrete de cable en un soporte cerca de la parte derecha de la seccin inferior.
Ponga el soporte en direccin que la cuerda puede tirar de la parte inferior del carrete
hacia el punto.
B. Amarre dos grilletes juntos y nalos con la argolla de elevacin de la pluma en el extremo
ms cercano hacia el carrete. Ejecute el cable de alambre a travs del grillete y adjunte a la
cuerda de mecate. A partir de este punto, la cuerda contina a travs de la pluma y en la
polea de la derecha. Enhebre la suspensin de la pluma segn el diagrama de enhebrado.
Asegrese que el extremo de terminacin en la placa lateral del tambor del malacate los
bloques "H" estn suministrados.
C. Asegrese que en la terminacin del cable en el mstil sea usado el terminal de cua
suministrado para la suspensin del cable.
2. Enhebrado de cable del principal:
A. NOTA: Cuando se enhebra la cuerda principal, es importante contar con un diagrama de
enhebrado disponible y saber cuntas partes de lnea la gra debe tener. Enhebrar la lnea
del cable principal a travs del bloque de doble bloqueo y el ltimo punto de la polea (la
polea antes de que vaya al tambor de elevacin), y continuar con el tambor de elevacin
principal. Conecte la cuerda de alambre del tambor con los bloques "H" suministrados.
B. Para mantener la tensin en el cable durante el enhebrado, pase el cable entre dos tablas 6
de largo (2 x 4 o similar), y apretarlos contra el cable con 2 abrazaderas "C". Haga esto, en
el lado del punto de la pluma despus de uno de los protectores de nylon del cable.
Lentamente levante la placa del malacate contra las tablas en el protector de nylon de la
pluma. Utilice las pinzas en los tablones de 6para mantener la tensin en el cable como se
este enhebrando el cable en el tambor.
C. Deje suficiente cable en el punto para enhebrarlo a travs del bloque principal, el bloque
de doble bloqueo y poleas de carga de la punta y para el nmero apropiado de partes de
lnea. Consulte el diagrama de enhebrado para el patrn de enhebrado correcto.
D. Ponga el extremo del cable de alambre a travs del punto hacia el punto de conexin.
E. Use el terminal de cua proporcionado para el extremo de terminacin. NOTA: Conecte
el censor de carga, al terminal de cua, y despus las placas de enlace de tensin con el
poste de la punta con el perno de tensin. Ahora coloque el censor de carga para enlazar
las placas con el perno de enlace.
3. Enhebrado de cable del auxiliar:
A. Enhebre el cable de alambre sobre la polea de la extensin de la pluma, la polea del censor
de carga (si est equipado), polea de la pluma, y hacia el tambor del auxiliar. Mantener la
tensin en el cable como se describe en 2B.
B. Deslice la bola de carga (extremo pequeo primero) sobre el cable. Conecte el terminal de
cua de acuerdo con el procedimiento de "terminal con cua" en la seccin de Inspeccin
y mantenimiento de Libro de datos 1. Conecte la lnea de aguijn. Atornille la bola de
carga sobre el terminal de cua.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
BoomandAuxiliaryHoistReeving
ReevingDiagramsRHCab.doc Page1of2
MainHoistReeving
ReevingDiagramsRHCab.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Enhebradodelmalacatedelaplumaymalacateauxiliar
Concabinadeloperadoraladerecha
Extremo de
Poleasdelapunta terminacin
oarnsflotante
Poleasde
mastl
Tambordel
malacate
delapluma
Poleadelaextensindelapluma
(Lnearapida)
Poleasdelapunta delapluma
Tambordelmalacate auxiliar
ReevingDiagramsRHCab_spamx.doc Pgina1of2
Enhebradodemalacateprincipal
Poleadelaextensindelapluma
(Lnearapida)
Extremode
terminacin Lineade6
partes
Tambordel
malacateprincipal
Lineade4
partes
Lineade2
partes
ReevingDiagramsRHCab_spamx.doc Pgina2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
Documentation
Pending
DocumentationPending.doc
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
13December2011
ErectionandInstallationProcedure
ForSSeriesKingpostCranes(ExceptS48&S56)
This procedure applies to the above-referenced Seatrax models which use a hemispherical-type upper
swing bearing. It outlines the general methods and guidelines for erecting and installing the crane on-
site. This work should be carried out by or under the guidance of a Seatrax service technician.
Prior to commencing erection review the following documents and have them on-hand for reference:
Procedure DataBook1Section
GeneralArrangement
GeneralDocumentation
BoomGeneralArrangement
InitialStartupandCommissioningProcedure
BoltInstallation&InspectionProcedure
SpecificationforLargeDiameterNuts&Bolts
SwingBearingSystemReplacementProcedure InspectionandMaintenance
WedgeSockets
CollectorRings
Rigging
ReevingDiagrams Rigging
LubricationSchedule Lubrication
KINGPOST
1. Protect from damage the machined/lubricated areas on top of the kingpost and in the gear area.
2. Attach 2 tag lines to kingpost at bull gear for stabilization during lift.
3. Attach lifting aids to kingpost trunnions or lifting eyes as appropriate and lift kingpost.
4. Lower the kingpost onto platform pedestal and set vertically true in the N-S and E-W to 1/2.
5. Fully weld the interconnecting butt-weld and complete all necessary NDE.
GANTRY
1. Gently lay gantry back.
2. Attach upper landing platform to gantry.
3. Attach lower landing platform to gantry.
4. Attach upper vertical ladder to the upper and lower landings.
5. Attach main vertical ladder to upper/gantry.
ErectionProcedure_SSeries_R01.doc Page1of3
6. Attach maintenance jib arm (if equipped) to gantry and secure.
7. Lift gantry using lifting eyes attached and position over the upperworks assembly.
8. Lower gantry into matching upperworks attachment points. Connect the two units together using
the pins supplied and install gantry pin retaining bolts.
UPPERWORKS/GANTRY
1. Prepare kingpost by removing shrinkwrap from slew bearing surfaces, cleaning off shipping grease
and re-greasing upper bearing surface with Lubemaster Premalube per the Lubrication Schedule
in the Lubrication section of Data Book 1.
2. Lower the upperworks/gantry assembly over the kingpost, aligning the factory-installed upper
bearing with gantry opening, and lower into position. Grease and install all lower bearing shoes
and bearing surfaces with Lubemaster Premalube per the Lubrication Schedule.
3. Lower all cables and air line (if equipped with pneumatic system) through kingpost and tie them
off to keep them from falling. Install cables and airline to collector bottom box.
4. Unbolt the stabbing guide from atop the kingpost.
5. Refer to Collector Rings in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1. Connect
electrical/instrument cables to the slip ring collector. Bolt slip-ring assembly to top of kingpost.
6. Attach external gantry air line (in loose gear box) to air swivel atop the collector ring. Run the line
with the cable channel down the gantry and attach to the line near the boom winch.
7. At kingpost base, connect electrical cables to junction boxes, airline to rig air, and access ladder to
upperworks.
BOOMSECTIONS
1. Bolt the sections of boom together as show in the general assembly. The V on the end of the
boom section is always toward the boom point.
NOTE: for large cranes (e.g., S108, S126) with boom sections that must be welded onsite, do so in
accordance with the Boom Section Welding Procedure in the Rigging section of Data Book 1.
2. Insert bolts with the head toward the boom tip: this is important for increased safety and reduced
corrosion potential. Install a hardened flat washer under the head of the bolt and under the nut. Use
only the bolts supplied or bolts that conform to Seatrax Specifications for Large Diameter Nuts
and Bolts located in the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1. Torque to correct
value.
BOOMASSEMBLY
1. Insert boom butt into boom connection plates in upperworks. Insert boom foot pins. Pre-grease
with Lubemaster Premalube as-required. Insert and tighten boom foot pin retaining bolts.
2. Apply at least 6 shots of Lubemaster Premalube grease to each pin fitting to grease bushing.
3. Connect hydraulic hoses to main/aux. winch as marked, ensuring hose is passed through the carrier
hoops provided. It is imperative that dirt is kept from entering the system.
4. Complete electrical connections for boom and gantry mounted equipment
5. At this point, the crane can be run in accordance with Initial Start-up & Commissioning
Procedure while the rope is reeved.
RIGGING
Refer to the Rigging section of Data Book 1.
COMPLETION
Follow the Initial Start-up and Commissioning Procedure in the Inspection and Maintenance section
of Data Book 1, which includes the following:
1. Check wire rope anchors on all hoists.
2. Install slew gear(s) if not previously installed.
3. Connect all guards.
4. Complete all mechanical/hydraulic/electrical system connections.
5. Grease all bearings and sheaves (see Lubrication in Data Book 1)
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
13dediciembrede2011
Montajeyprocedimientodeinstalacin
ParagrasSeriesSconpostecentral(exceptoS48yS56)
Este procedimiento se aplica a los modelos Seatrax arriba mencionados que utilizan un cojinete
hemisfrico de tipo oscilante superior. En l se realizan los mtodos y directrices generales para el
montaje y la instalacin de la gra en el lugar. Este trabajo debe ser realizado por o bajo la supervisin
de un tcnico de servicio Seatrax.
Antes de iniciar el montaje revise los siguientes documentos y tngalos a la mano como referencia:
Procedimieto LibrodeDatosSeccin1
Arreglogeneral
Documentacingeneral
Arreglogeneraldelapluma
Procedimientodearranqueinicialypuestaenmarcha
Instalacindetornillosyprocedimientosdeinspeccin
Especificacionesparatuercasytornillosdedimetrogrande
Procedimientodereemplazodecojinetesdelsistemadegiro Inspeccinymantenimiento
Terminacindecua
Anillocolector
Aparejo
Diagramasdeenhebradodelcable Aparejo
Programadelubricacin Lubricacin
POSTECENTRALDECARGA
1. Proteger contra el dao de las reas maquinadas y lubricar en la parte superior del poste central de
carga y en la zona de ensamble de la unin giratoria.
2. Coloque 2 lneas de mecate en el engrane giratorio del poste central de carga para la estabilizacin
durante el levantamiento.
3. Atornille la placa de levantamiento en el poste central de carga use las placas de levantamiento
que estn soldadas y levante el poste central de carga como sea apropiado.
4. Baje el poste central de carga sobre la plataforma del pedestal y colquelo verticalmente acertando
en el norte-sur y este-oeste a 1/2 .
5. Soldar totalmente la interconexin de soldadura a tope y completar prueba no destructiva de
componentes (equivalente).
ErectionProcedure_SSeries_R01_spamx.doc Pgina1of3
MASTIL
1. Coloque suavemente el mstil en la superficie con la parte posterior hacia abajo.
2. Coloque la plataforma de aterrizaje superior al mstil.
3. Coloque la plataforma de aterrizaje inferior al mstil.
4. Coloque la escalera vertical superior a las plataformas superior e inferior.
5. Coloque la escalera vertical principal en la estructura hasta la parte superior del mstil.
6. Coloque el brazo de mantenimiento al (si est equipado) en el mstil y el seguro.
7. Levante el mstil usando las argollas de levantamiento que se encuentran unidas en la posicin
sobre el conjunto de la estructura superior.
8. Baje el mstil en los puntos coincidentes con la estructura superior de fijacin. Conecte las dos
unidades, usando los pernos suministrados e instalar los tornillos retencin.
ESTRUCTURASUPERIOR/MASTIL
1. Preparar el poste central de carga quitando la envoltura de la superficie de rodamiento de giro
horizontal, limpie la grasa con la que fue embarcado y re-engrase el rodamiento superior con grasa
NLGI #2 por el Programa de lubricacin en la seccin Programas de lubricacin de Libro de
datos 1.
2. Baje la estructura superior y el mstil ensamblado sobre el poste central de carga, alineando la
abertura superior del mstil con el poste central de carga, instale el rodamiento superior en
posicin. Engrase los zapatos de cojinetes inferior y las superficies de rodamiento por el
Programa de lubricacin de Libro de datos
3. Baje todos los cables y la lnea de aire (si est equipado con sistema neumtico) a travs de el
centro del poste y amrrelas para que caigan por el centro hasta la parte inferior. Instale los cables y
manguera de aire a la caja colectora de abajo.
4. Desatornille la gua de montaje que se encuentra en lo ms alto del poste central de carga.
5. Consulte en Anillo Colector en la seccin Inspeccin y mantenimiento del Libro de datos 1.
Conecte los cables elctricos e instrumento al anillo colector giratorio. Atornille el anillo colector
giratorio en la parte superior del poste central de carga.
6. Conecte la lnea de aire externo del mstil (adentro de la caja de envo) para girar el aire encima del
anillo colector. Corra la lnea en el canal de cable por el mstil y nala con la lnea cerca del
malacate de la pluma.
7. En la base del poste central de carga conecte los cables elctricos a las cajas de conexin, la lnea
de aire con el aire que suministra la plataforma y la escalera de acceso a la estructura superior.
SECCIONESDELAPLUMA
1. Atornille las secciones de la pluma justo como se muestra en el ensamblaje general. La V parte
final de la pluma esta siempre hacia la punta de la seccin superior.
NOTA: para las gras de gran tamao (por ejemplo, S108, S126) con secciones que se tienen que
soldar en el lugar, lo hagan en conformidad con el Procedimiento de soldadura seccin de la
pluma en la seccin de Aparejo del Libro de datos 1.
2. Inserte los tornillos con la cabeza hacia la punta de la pluma: es importante para aumentar la
seguridad y reducir el potencial de corrosin. Instalar una rondana plana endurecida bajo la cabeza
del tornillo y debajo de la tuerca. Utilice slo los tornillos suministrados o tornillos que se ajustan a
Seatrax 'Especificaciones para las tuercas y tornillos de dimetro grande ubicado en la seccin de
Inspeccin y mantenimiento del Libro de datos 1. Apriete el valor correcto.
SECCIONINFERIOR
1. Inserte la seccin inferior con los platos conectores de la estructura superior. Inserte los pernos del
pivote e instale los tornillos retenedores. Engrselos con grasa NLGI #2 como se requiera.
2. Aplique al menos 6 disparos de grasa NLGI #2 en las graseras de cada perno del pivote apropiado
para lubricar los bujes.
3. Conecte las mangueras hidrulicas del malacate principal y auxiliar como estn marcadas,
asegurando que las mangueras pasen a travs de los aros de soporte proporcionados. No desconecte
los tapones de las mangueras hasta despus que hayan pasado por los aros.
4. Completar las conexiones elctricas de la pluma y del equipo montado en el mstil.
5. En este punto, la gra se puede arrancar de acuerdo al Procedimiento de Arranque Inicial y Puesta
en Marcha, mientras que el cable se enhebra.
APAREJO
Consulte la seccin de Aparejo en el Libro de datos 1.
EJECUCION
Siga el Procedimiento de Arranque Inicial y Puesta en Marcha en la seccin de la Inspeccin y
mantenimiento de Libro de datos 1, que incluye lo siguiente:
1. Revise los anclajes de cable en todos los malacates.
2. Instale engranaje de giro (s) si no se instalo previamente.
3. Conecte todas las guardias de los engranes.
4. Complete todas las conexiones del sistema mecnico, hidrulico y elctrico.
5. Engrase todos los cojinetes y poleas. (ver Lubricacin en el Libro de datos 1)
Section/Seccin8 ________________________
PrimeMoverManual Manualdemotor
Caterpillar C15 Diesel Engine Motor diesel Caterpillar C15
Section/Seccin9 ________________________
LoadIndicator Indicadordecarga
Seatrax CCM7000 Seatrax SLI
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
17January2013
CCM7000CraneControlModule
WithWiredLoadCells
OperationsandMaintenance
CCM7000_OperationsWired_R01.doc Page1of34
TableofContents
Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 3
Navigation................................................................................................................................................. 3
Screens...................................................................................................................................................... 4
Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Safe Load Indicator (SLI) (Optional) ................................................................................................... 5
View Load Charts ................................................................................................................................. 7
Notes ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
Hoists .................................................................................................................................................... 9
Engine ................................................................................................................................................. 11
Controls (Optional)............................................................................................................................. 12
Status................................................................................................................................................... 13
Alarm Log........................................................................................................................................... 13
Parameters 1 and 2.............................................................................................................................. 14
SLI Parameters 1 and 2 (If Equipped with Load Indicator) ............................................................... 15
Warning and Notification Pop-Up Screens ........................................................................................ 17
General Maintenance & Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 18
Calibrating Drum Counters................................................................................................................. 18
Drum Counter Zeroing ................................................................................................................... 18
Adjusting Drum Counters................................................................................................................... 20
Enable/Disable Hoist Lower Limits ............................................................................................... 20
Hoist Limit Adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 22
Main/Aux Limit Adjustments......................................................................................................... 23
Boom Limit Adjustments ............................................................................................................... 24
Boom Limit Alarm Trip Point Adjustment .................................................................................... 24
Level Indicator Calibration................................................................................................................. 25
Hour Meter Offsets ............................................................................................................................. 26
Setting Inspection Dates (If Equipped)............................................................................................... 27
Troubleshooting Level, Pressure & Temperature Sensors ................................................................. 28
Replacing Encoders ............................................................................................................................ 29
Maintenance of SLI Option .................................................................................................................... 30
Annual Load Testing .......................................................................................................................... 30
Load Cell and Boom Angle Sensor Calibration ................................................................................. 31
Aux Load Cell Calibration.............................................................................................................. 32
Main Load Cell Calibration ............................................................................................................ 33
Boom Angle Calibration................................................................................................................. 32
Entering Previously-Recorded Count Values................................................................................. 33
System Alarms........................................................................................................................................ 34
Introduction
The Seatrax CCM7000 crane control module simplifies the monitoring of primary and auxiliary
crane systems, including hydraulic systems, hoists and prime mover.
The system provides single-point access to a variety of monitoring and control functions. Rather
than scanning gauges and working controls spread throughout the cab, the crane operator can page
through screens to monitor systems and operate controls via touch screen buttons. On cranes
equipped with a dedicated joystick-mounted switch, operators may page through screens without
removing their hands from the controls. Especially important information is replicated across
multiple screens.
The purpose of this manual is to familiarize operators with basic system navigation, commonly
viewed screens and basic maintenance. Due to custom configurations and continual design
improvements, the screenshots in this manual are not intended to represent any particular crane,
but to provide examples of what operators may encounter.
Navigation
The user-friendly interface, intuitive layout and logical workflow permit operators to learn the
CCM7000 quickly with minimal training. CCM7000 utilizes a touch screen for system navigation: the
operator simply touches onscreen buttons to access desired screens, switch between hoist monitors or
start/stop functions.
Tapping screen menu buttons provides direct access to SLI, Hoists, Engine, Controls and Gauges
screens if the crane is equipped with these options. The bottom left-hand button always returns the
operator to the main menu.
Depending on configuration, the bottom rows of most primary screens share a common set of
navigation buttons:
Alarm Reset: Silences the audible alarm caused by exceeding limits such as engine oil pressure,
engine coolant or hydraulic oil temperature.
Limit Override: If limits were enabled by Seatrax personnel under Parameters, then the operator
will have to touch and hold the Limit Override button when hoisting activities exceed upper and
lower limits. If limits have not been enabled, then the button does not function.
Engine: This particular screen will allow you to navigate to the Engine Screen. Other screens will
show different wording for this button depending on what page is currently shown.
Electronic Joysticks (If equipped): In general, there are two alternate configurations for the joystick
trigger and rocker switch:
Configuration Rocker Left Trigger Rocker - Right
#1 Next Screen Radio Squeeze-to-Talk Horn
#2 Previous Screen Horn Next Screen
Screens
Menu
As the CCM7000 powers
on, it passes through a
series of startup screens
before reaching the main
Menu. From this home
screen, the operator may
access screens for
controlling or monitoring
functions including but
not limited to:
Safe Load
Indicator (SLI)
Hoists
Engine
Status
Screen Saver
Parameters
SafeLoadIndicator(SLI)(Optional)
CCM7000 installations equipped with the optional Seatrax SLI load moment indicator incorporate
a hardwired network of boom angle and hoist load cell sensors that communicate with the
CCM7000 terminal.
Operators may use the SLI screen to monitor safe working load (SWL), actual load, hook radius and
hook load as a percentage of SWL. They may also set tare and select among available load charts
based on sea and wind conditions or onboard vs. offboard lifting requirements.

90%SWL
100%SWL
PushingAnyof4CornerGauges PressHeretoChangeCurrently
SwapsbetweenHydraulicPressure SelectedPartsofLineforMainHoist.
andEngineReadings OnlyDisplayedWhenMainHoistis
Chosen.
The semi-circular display to the right displays graphically the percent of SWL based on active
load chart that is being moved. The beginning of the yellow band indicates that 90% of SWL has
been reached, and the start of the red band indicates 100% of SWL.
The following controls are in a column to the left of the semi-circular SWL display:
Aux/Main: Touching this button allows the operator to switch between monitoring the Aux and
Main hoists.
Note: For cranes with Main/Aux hoist controls consisting of a single joystick and an
OFF/MAIN/AUX switch, the hoist being monitored on the CCM7000 is determined by the position
of the switch.
Onboard/Offboard: Switches between Onboard and Offboard versions of the installed load
chart(s) so that SWL and hook load information are displayed accurately.
Radius: The current lifting radius.
Wind: Displays the wind speed upon which current load chart calculations are based. If multiple
charts are installed: For Onboard or Offboard lifts, select among load charts for one with wind
speed closest to that of prevailing conditions.
Wave: For Offboard lifts, displays the wave height that current load chart calculations are based
on. If multiple charts are installed: the operator may also touch Wave to select the load chart
written for wave conditions closest to prevailing conditions.
View Load Charts: Pops up a screen displaying the currently installed load charts, as shown on
the next screenshot.
ViewLoadCharts
Load Charts screen allows the crane operator to view the current load chart in its entirety. If multiple
charts are loaded, the operator may press any of the buttons to the left in order to select among charts
based on wind speed, wave height and lift type criteria.
Lift: Shows whether Onboard, Offboard, or ASME B30.8

Wind Speed/Fixed Cv: Figure upon which current load chart is based.
Wave Height/List-Trim: (If Applicable) Figure upon which current load chart is based.
Notes
The Notes screen displays the configuration and lift criteria upon which lifting calculations are
based.
Hoists
The Hoists screen provides concurrent information on the auxiliary, main and boom hoists including
their hours in operation, speed, direction and the amount of rope run out. In addition, list and trim
angles are displayed relative to minimum and maximum permissible values.
On SLI-
Equipped
Cranes,
Duplicates
SWL
Information
on Most
Primary
Screens
The below screen extract provides an example of detailed hoist information:

Direction of Hoist Rotation
Hook Hoisting Direction

Position (Up or Down Arrows)
Relative to
Upper and
Lower Limits Hour Meter
Drum Speed
Joystick Hook Payout
Direction (Up or Hook Payout Reset
Down Arrows)
Hoist Speed (Up or Down) Displayed Only When Alarm

Conditions Exist for Particular Hoist
The following extract from the preceding Hoists screen illustrates detailed Gauge and (optional) Wind
information:
Wind Direction Indicator
Wind Speed: Actual
Wind Speed: Maximum Attained
Mph-M/S-Knots: The system can be set to display wind speed in any of these formats.
Wind: The Direction Indicator constantly updates the operator on wind direction in relation to the
cranes current position. The Wind Speed numbers display both actual and maximum measured
wind speeds (limited by sensor maximum), while the graph illustrates actual wind speed as a
percentage of sensor maximum.
Gauge: Allows the operator to choose method of monitoring gauges while on the Hoist screen.
o When the PAUSE symbol (double vertical bars) is displayed, left and right directional arrows
appear permitting the operator to page left or right through gauges readings.
o When the PLAY symbol is displayed, the gauges page automatically. Touch PAUSE to toggle
back and forth between automatic and manual paging modes.
List and Trim Angles Indicator (Optional)

The gauge below displays information on List (Sidelead) and Trim (Offlead) angles of the crane and
underlying platform including:
Absolute system minimums and maximums represented here as 20
List/Trim Angle: current angles of list and trim. Exceeding parameters generates both visual and
audible alarms.
Max/Min: the maximum and minimum angles that have been recorded.
Bar graph representations of the percent of current list and trim angles relative to the 0 to 20
operating range.
Engine
The Engine screen provides single-source monitoring of levels, pressures and temperatures of various
prime mover and hydraulics-related systems. In certain configurations it may also replicate the
console-mounted engine and hydraulic controls.
This screen will look different on cranes using electric prime movers, obviously lacking such gauges as
engine oil pressure and coolant temperature.
Controls(Optional)
The Controls screen provides the capability for switching and regulating electrical accessory
equipment such as lighting and windshield wipers. If so-equipped, the main Menu will have a
Controls icon.
Status
The Status screen summarizes all monitored activities, including current instrument readings, hoist and
rope status and control settings.
AlarmLog
The Alarm Log screen maintains a date and time-stamped record of any event that exceeds a monitored
operational parameter. Events can include anything from high coolant temperature to excess hydraulic
pressure.
Parameters1and2
The Parameters 1 and 2 screens provide the capability to activate and deactivate various functions and
alter system parameters and settings.
If the crane has a right hand cab, the Orientation button should indicate Right Hand.
If the crane has a left hand cab, the Orientation button should indicate Left Hand.
Note: Left and right handedness are from the perspective of a person standing on the turntable looking
toward the front of the crane, i.e., the boom point.
SLIParameters1and2(IfEquippedwithLoadIndicator)
The SLI Parameters 1 and 2 screens provide a snapshot of the statuses of SLI load indicator
components and allow modification of parameters. SLI Parameters 1 is accessed from the SLI
Parameters screen. SLI Parameters 2 is in turn reached from the SLI Parameters 1 screen.
When the SLI receives good signals from both load cells and the boom angle sensor, the SLI Data
Packet field will display a signal string similar that shown below that below. The format is: letter A
followed by 6 numbers, letter B followed by 6 numbers, and then C followed by a + or - sign,
three numbers, a decimal point and another number.
A012500B000000C+045.2

MainLoadCell AuxiliaryLoadCell BoomAngleSensor
If the SLI is not receiving a signal from one of the cells, then dashes will be displayed for that portion
of the signal string. For example, the above-referenced data string would display as
A012500B------C045.2 if the auxiliary load cell signal was absent.
For further instructions on both interpreting and using these screens particularly SLI Parameters 2 as
shown below please refer to pages 31 through 33.
WarningandNotificationPopUpScreens
Other screens pop up based on actions, events or equipment situations to generate warnings and alarms
alerting the operator to various equipment conditions. Oftentimes, these screens provide suggestions
for resolving a situation.
GeneralMaintenance&Troubleshooting
CalibratingDrumCounters
Drum counters must be calibrated when wire rope is replaced and may require adjustment occasionally
during normal usage.
Calibrate an existing installation: skip to the section entitled Adjusting Drum Counters on page 20.
Calibrate drum counters when new rope is being installed: proceed with Drum Counter Zeroing.
The below table summarizes the CCM7000-oriented steps for replacing wire rope and maps these steps
to the sections containing relevant detailed instructions:
Step SectionReference Page
1. DisableCCM7000hoistlowerlimits Enable/DisableHoistLowerLimits 20
2. Removewirerope RiggingGeneralInstructions DataBook1
3. Zerothedrumcounters DrumCounterZeroing 18
4. Installnewrope RiggingGeneralInstructions DataBook1
5. EnableandsetCCM7000hoistlimits. HoistLimitAdjustment 22
DrumCounterZeroing
1. Orient hoist drums as follows:
A. Main and Auxiliary Hoists: Rotate the drum until the wire rope attachment point is at its
highest vertical position as illustrated in Figure 1A below.
B. Boom Hoist: Rotate the drum until the attachment point is at the back end of the hoist as
illustrated in Figure 1B below.
Figure1A.Main/AuxHoistRope
Figure1B.BoomHoistRope
InstallationZeroPoint
InstallationZeroPoint
2. Center the encoder by pressing the Configure <Hoist> Encoders button on the Parameters 1
screen. A No Errors message should remain in the white band under the button. If Check
Wiring appears in this band, you must correct the issue before continuing.
3. Navigate to the Parameters 2 screen and tap the Total <Hoist> Rope Wraps: block to generate a
pop-up keyboard.
4. Type zero in the pop-up keypad and press Enter: the keypad will disappear and the value
displayed on the Parameters 2 screen should now be zero.
5. Attach new wire rope to wire rope attachment point on hoist drum, following guidelines in the
Rigging section of Data Book 1: Installation, Operation and Maintenance.
6. Spool in the new rope, maintaining tension per the above-referenced Rigging instructions: the
system will count wraps automatically.
AdjustingDrumCounters
To make drum counter adjustments, reel enough rope off the drums so only a few wraps remain; this
makes them easier to count. Now, physically count the number of wraps on the drum. Next, on the
Parameters 2 screen enter the number of wraps counted into the pop-up keypad which displays from
tapping the Total <Hoist> Rope Wraps: block.
Enable/DisableHoistLowerLimits
CAUTION:
Hoistlimits,whicharesetfromthedisplay,MUSTbedisabledpriorto:1)replacingwire
ropes,or2)performingadjustmentstohydraulicboomkickouts.Failuretodothiscan
preventtheremovalofwireropeorresultinimproperadjustmentofthehydraulicboom
kickouts.
Main/AuxHoist
Both the Main and Auxiliary hoist lower limits can be disabled to facilitate rope changes or special
crane operations that require the hooks to be paid out beyond the lower limit settings. Disable either of
the lower limits by tapping the <Hoist> Lower Limit Enabled button until it changes to <Hoist>
Lower Limit Disabled.
When disabled, the limits can be re-enabled by tapping the associated hoist button until it changes back
to <Hoist> Lower Limit Enabled.
BoomLimitAlarm
An audible alarm feature warns the operator whenever the boom is approaching either its upper or
lower limit. The audible warning occurs prior to the pop-up message and deactivation of the hoist
hydraulics.
To enable the limit alarm, tap the Boom Limit Alarm <Enabled / Disabled> button on the Parameters
1 screen until it changes to Boom Limit Alarm Enabled. To disable tap the button until it changes to
Boom Limit Alarm Disabled.
HoistLimitAdjustment
CAUTION:
Hoistlimits,whicharesetfromthedisplay,MUSTbedisabledpriorto:1)replacingwire
ropes,or2)performingadjustmentstohydraulicboomkickouts.Failuretodothiscan
preventtheremovalofwireropesorresultinimproperadjustmentofthehydraulicboom
kickouts.
1. DISABLE the hoist limits by pressing the Limits Enabled button. It will change to read, Limits
Disabled.
Main/AuxLimitAdjustments
1. If the MAIN or AUX hoist limits require adjustments, raise the boom to a high angle.
2. Lower the hook to the desired limit position and press the Set <Hoist> Lower Limit button.
3. Test the limit to verify it functions properly.
Testing Limits
Test by: a) enabling limits, b) backing hoist away from limit, and then c) moving hoist
towards limit until you get the warning message and hoisting is disabled at the desired set
point.
After testing the limit, disable limits once again before resuming adjustments.
4. Raise the hook until it is in its parked position. Lower the hook slightly and press the Set <Hoist>
Upper Limit button.
BoomLimitAdjustments
1. If the BOOM hoist limits require adjustments, raise the boom until the hydraulic kick out disables
hoisting.
2. Back the boom away from the kick out position a minimum of one foot and press the Set Boom
Upper Limit button.
3. Lower the boom to the desired lower limit position and press the Set Boom Lower Limit button.
4. After all the limits have been set, enable the limits by pressing the Limits Disabled button. It will
change to read Limits Enabled.
BoomLimitAlarmTripPointAdjustment
The trip point at which the audible alarm sounds is adjustable based on operator preference. The alarm
will sound at a user selected number of drum revolutions ahead of the limit setting. This can be set to
anything greater than or equal to two (2) drum revolutions (system default).
To adjust the trip point:
1. Ensure the boom limits are set properly based on the process outlined in the previous section.
2. Go to the Parameters 2 screen.
3. Tap the High/ Low Angle Alarm Drum Revs block and enter the desired value in the keypad that
pops up. For example, if 5 is entered the alarm will sound five drum revolutions before the boom
reaches its limit.
LevelIndicatorCalibration
Calibrating the indicators involves physically moving the indicator float to the desired full position,
viewing the output value at that position and entering that value as the full set point. Once calibrated,
the CCM7000 will compute the liquid level percentages based on the entered full set point. To
calibrate an indicator complete the following steps.
1. Remove the level indicator from the tank and situate the float at the desired full position.
2. Navigate to the Parameters 2 screen and tap the <Hyd./Diesel> Tank Full Set Point block to enter
the value displayed in the <Hyd./Diesel> Level (Realtime) block.
3. Reinstall the level indicator when you have completed the calibration.
HourMeterOffsets
Users can enter Hour Meter Offset figures to account for previously documented usage hours.
To provide the CCM7000 with prior hours intelligence, the documented hours and minutes must be
entered into the Offset Blocks for each of the components. The offset values must represent the sum
of all the hours documented for a component prior to when the CCM7000 was placed in service.
Follow these steps to enter offset hours:
1. From the Parameters 2 screen, enter the prior hours and minutes into the offset blocks for the
engine and each hoist by tapping the appropriate field.
2. Verify CCM7000 is indicating the total times properly by checking the hours displayed on the
STATUS screen. The displayed times will be the total component times.
SettingInspectionDates(IfEquipped)
1. From the Parameters 1 screen, press the Inspection Dates button located at the lower left hand
corner.
2. From the Inspections screen, ALL quarterly and monthly inspection dates will be calculated
automatically once you have entered the Annual Inspection Date. (NOTE: Only after entering the
annual inspection year, will the system recalculate the other dates.)
3. From this same screen, you can also adjust the amount of days prior to the actual inspection date
that the system will begin to notify the operator.
TroubleshootingLevel,Pressure&TemperatureSensors
When troubleshooting a sensor, check for the following before replacing.
1. Ensure that the PLC Power, Run and Comm0 LEDs are lit (green) as well as make certain that the
PLC Fault light is neither lit nor flashing red.
Symptom Action
PowerLEDisnotlit Determinewhyvoltageisnotpresentatthe
PLCandmakethenecessarycorrections.
PowerLEDislitandtheRunLEDisnot Locatethe3positiondipswitchbehindthe
flipoutdoorontheleftsideofthePLC.
MovetheswitchtotheRUNposition.
Comm0LEDisnotlit ChecktheconnectionsbetweenthePLCand
themonitor.
FaultLEDislitorflashing Cyclethesystempower.
2. Ensure all cabling and wiring associated with the particular sensor is not damaged and all
termination points are tight along the entire loop (from the input power terminal in the enclosure to
the sensor input connection, from the sensor output connection to the output terminal in the
enclosure, and from the output terminal in the enclosure to the analog input card of the PLC.
Symptom Action
Looseconnections Tightenaccordingly
Damagedwiring Replacedamagedwire(s)and/orcable(s)with
theappropriatewiresize.
3. Ensure that 24VDC is present on the input (white or red wire) at the sensor connector by measuring
with a meter.
Symptom Action
24VDCisNOTpresent Determinewhyvoltageisnotpresentand
makethenecessarycorrections.
24VDCispresent Verifythattheoutputcurrentofthesensoris
intherangeof420mAbyremovingthe
outputwire(blackwire)fromitsterminaland
connectingoneofthemeterleadstothe
blackwireandtheothertotheterminal.
Iftheoutputcurrentisnotwithinthe
requiredrange,replacethesensor.
ReplacingEncoders
1. Install coupling (item 2) to the replacement encoder (item 4) and secure it firmly to the shaft with
the set screw.
2. Mount replacement encoder with the four mounting bolts (item 3).
3. Loosen the encoder alignment bolts (items 5 & 6) that are installed through the slotted holes of the
mounting brackets.
4. Visually move the encoder so its axis is as close as possible to drum shaft adapter (item 1) axis in
all directions and snug the alignment bolts (items 5 & 6).
5. Rotate the encoder by hand so the coupling spins on the drum shaft adapter (item 1) and check for
resistance through a complete revolution. If resistance is experienced, loosen the alignment bolts
(items 5 & 6) and move the encoder position to achieve a better alignment. Repeat hand rotation
check.
6. When coupling rotates freely through a complete revolution, tighten the alignment bolts (items 5 &
6) completely.
7. Secure the coupling (item 2) to the drum shaft adapter (item 1) with the set screw.
MaintenanceofSLIOption
The basic CCM7000 requires no periodic maintenance other than perhaps re-setting hoist drum
counters periodically. In general, customers experiencing problems should direct their inquiries to
the Seatrax service department.
However, some field repair and maintenance may be performed on installations incorporating the
optional SLI load moment indicator.
AnnualLoadTesting
Heavy shock may affect load indication accuracy. For accuracy, the load cells and boom angle
sensor should be tested every year, and recalibrated as necessary.
The simplest way of testing a load cell is to lift at least two known weights. A test weight should
be known with an accuracy of 2 % of max SWL. For increased accuracy, factor in the known
weights of all additional equipment such as blocks, slings, etc.
The test loads must be significant relative to the load cell capacity. The minimum test weight is
about 20% of the safe working load; a preferred test weight is greater than 50% of the SWL -
without exceeding SWL - for the radius at which the lift/pull is performed.
For example, a 30,000 lb load cell on four parts of line has a SWL of 120,000 lb.
The minimum test load in this example would be 24,000 lb
A good test load would be 60,000 lb or more.
Determine the accuracy of the tested system with the following formula referenced from SAE-J-
159 7.3:
Indicated Load
x 100 = % of Load
Actual Load
If testing yields inaccurate readings, then follow the Load Cell and Boom Angle Sensor Calibration
procedure beginning on the next page.
LoadCellandBoomAngleSensorCalibration
Annual calibration is recommended for the load cells and boom angle sensor. The below screenshots
from the CCM7000 are used to calibrate these items:
Figure2.SLIParametersScreenshotExample
Figure3.SLIParameters2ScreenshotExample
BoomAngleCalibration
Check which side the boom tip junction box, which houses the angle sensor, is mounted on; right hand
or left hand. Then lower boom to the horizontal position: using a high-quality bubble level or digital
angle sensor on one of the chords will help with accuracy.
1. From the Main menu select the Parameters tab then SLI Parameters Page and press Angle
Orientation to match which side the boom tip junction box is mounted, right hand or left hand.
2. Then press the Set Boom Angle Zero Degrees button.
3. Move the boom to different positions and compare the radius on the touch screen to the manual
radius indicator on the boom.
If the reading on the screen needs adjustment it can be done via the Angle Offset setting on
the SLI Parameters Page. When the number is pressed a keypad will popup: key in the offset
number and press Enter. This may take a couple of tries to get the desired reading.
4. It is advisable to record the Angle Zero Count in case the settings are inadvertently changed.
This number can be found on SLI Parameters Page 2 as Angle Zero Count. Note this
information in the daily log and crane file.
AuxLoadCellCalibration
A known weight (preferably 50% of capacity or greater without exceeding the SWL for test radius),
certified dynamometer (dyno) and water bags or pad eye on deck approved to perform pull tests will be
required for calibration.
1. Lower the aux ball to the position where the load will be attached - or where the dyno will be
hooked to the pad eye - and lift approximately one foot.
2. With no load on the aux hook, from the CCM7000 Main menu select the Parameters tab then
SLI Parameters Page, wait for reading to settle (this may take a couple of minutes) and then
press the Set Aux Zero Load button.
3. Lift the known load - or pull on the pad eye using the dyno and allow the reading to settle. In
the SLI Parameters Page, press the Aux Calibration Weight number and a keypad will pop
up. Type the weight of the known load or the reading from the dyno on the keypad and press
Enter.
4. Release the load and lift again to check calibration.
5. It is advisable to record the Aux Lbs. per Count and Aux Zero Count in case the settings are
inadvertently changed. These numbers can be found on SLI Parameters Page 2 as Aux lbs per
Count and Aux Zero Count. Note this information in the daily log and crane file.
MainLoadCellCalibration
A known weight (preferably 50% of capacity or greater without exceeding the SWL for test radius)
certified dyno and water bags or pad eye on deck approved to perform pull tests will be required for
calibration.
1. Lower the main block to the position where the load will be attached - or where the dyno will
be hooked to the pad eye - and lift approximately one foot.
2. With no load on the hook, from the CCM7000 Main menu select the Parameters tab then SLI
Parameters Page, wait for reading to settle (this may take a couple of minutes) and then press
the Set Main Zero Load button.
3. Lift the known load - or pull on the pad eye using the dyno - and allow the reading to settle. In
the SLI Parameters Page press the Main Calibration Weight number and a keypad will pop
up. Type the weight of the known load or the reading from the dyno on the keypad and press
Enter.
4. Release the load and lift again to check calibration.
5. It is advisable to record the Main Lbs. per Count and Main Zero Count in case the settings
are inadvertently changed. These numbers can be found on SLI Parameters Page 2 as Main
Lbs. per Count and Main Zero Count. Note this information in the daily log and crane file.
EnteringPreviouslyRecordedCountValues
If previously-recorded count value data is not available or if any components have been replaced, then
follow the calibration procedures listed earlier in the document.
If previous calibration data is available and all components are the same, then values may be entered
manually without performing calibrations. Refer to the daily log or crane file for previously-recorded
calibration data. Navigate to the SLI Parameters Page 2 to make the following adjustments:
1. In Aux/Main Zero Count enter the value previously recorded by pressing the Zero Count
number, typing it on the keypad and pressing Enter.
2. In Aux/Main Lbs. per Count enter the value previously recorded by pressing the Lbs. per
Count number, typing it on the keypad and pressing Enter.
3. In Angle Zero Count enter the value previously recorded by pressing the Angle Zero Count
number, typing it on the keypad and pressing Enter.
SystemAlarms
Alarm Set System Alarm
Alarm Condition
Point Response Acknowledgement
Message cleared with Alarm Reset.
Alarm ticker explains the
HYDRAULIC OIL OVER TEMP 200 deg F Alarm doesnt reoccur until hydraulic oil
problem, buzzer sounds.
temperature is below 150F.

ENGINE COOLANT OVER TEMP 215 deg F Alarm doesnt reoccur until coolant
temperature is below 150F.

ENGINE LOW OIL PRESSURE 10 psi Alarm doesnt reoccur until the engine is
restarted.
DIESEL FUEL LOW LEVEL 10% Alarm doesnt reoccur until fuel level is
problem.
replenished to 25%.
HYDRAULIC OIL LOW LEVEL 10% Alarm doesnt reoccur until oil level is
problem.
replenished to 25%.
PLC BATTERY LOW (3.6V is Alarm ticker explains the Condition cleared by changing PLC
normal) problem. battery.
SLI OVERLOAD - occurs when SLI SLI load > 100% of Alarm ticker explains the
Alarm doesnt reoccur until load is under
load is above AUX / MAIN SWL. SWL problem, buzzer sounds.
75%.
AUX WARNING - occurs if Joystick 1/4 - 1 drum rotation

Alarm ticker explains the Alarm cleared when joystick is released
UP command active when drum (1024 - 4096 encoder
problem, buzzer sounds. and returned to neutral.
rotation DOWN is detected counts)
AUX ALARM - occurs if joystick UP Steady joystick Message cleared with Alarm Reset as
problem, buzzer sounds,
command maintained after AUX command following long as joysticks are released and drum
horn sounds, hoisting is
warning occurs. AUX WARNING rotation stops.
DISABLED.
Message cleared with Alarm Reset as
AUX OVERSPEED - occurs when 25% above MAX drum problem, buzzer sounds,
long as joysticks are released and drum
AUX drum speed is excessive. speed horn sounds, hoisting is
rotation stops.
DISABLED.
MAIN WARNING - occurs if 1 - 2 drum rotations
Joystick UP command active when (4096 - 8192 encoder
drum rotation DOWN is detected counts)
MAIN ALARM - occurs if joystick Steady joystick Message cleared with Alarm Reset as
UP command maintained after command following long as joysticks are released and drum
MAIN warning occurs. MAIN WARNING rotation stops.
DISABLED.
Message cleared with Alarm Reset as
MAIN OVERSPEED - occurs when 25% above MAX drum problem, buzzer sounds,
long as joysticks are released and drum
MAIN drum speed is excessive. speed horn sounds, hoisting is
rotation stops.
DISABLED.
BOOM WARNING - occurs if 1 - 2 drum rotations
Joystick UP command active when (4096 - 8192 encoder
drum rotation DOWN is detected counts)
BOOM ALARM - occurs if joystick Steady joystick Message cleared with Alarm Reset as
UP command maintained after command following long as joysticks are released and drum
BOOM warning occurs. BOOM WARNING rotation stops.
DISABLED.
BOOM OVERSPEED - occurs Message cleared with Alarm Reset as
25% above MAX drum problem, buzzer sounds,
when BOOM drum speed is long as joysticks are released and drum
speed horn sounds, hoisting is
excessive. rotation stops.
DISABLED.
Alarm ticker & pop-up
PLC COMMS ERROR - occurs
message explains the Alarm cleared by correcting PLC fault or
when communications between
problem, CCM7000 correcting communication wiring issue.
touch screen and PLC is lost.
inoperative.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
17deenerode2013
CCM7000
Concensordecargaalambrado
Operacionesymantenimiento
CCM7000_OperationsWired_R01_spamx.doc Pgina1of34
Tabladecontenido
Introduccin.............................................................................................................................................. 3
Navegacin ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Pantallas.................................................................................................................................................... 4
Men ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Indicador de sobrecarga (SLI) (Opcional)............................................................................................ 5
Vista de grafica de carga....................................................................................................................... 7
Notas ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
Malacates .............................................................................................................................................. 9
Motor .................................................................................................................................................. 11
Controles (Opcional) .......................................................................................................................... 12
Estado ................................................................................................................................................. 13
Alarma de inicio ................................................................................................................................. 13
Parmetros 1 y 2 ................................................................................................................................. 14
SLI Parmetros 1 y 2 (Si esta equipada con censor de carga) ............................................................ 15
Advertencia y notificacin pantallas emergentes ............................................................................... 17
Mantenimiento general y solucin de problemas ................................................................................... 18
Calibracin de los contadores del tambor........................................................................................... 18
Puesta a cero del contador del tambor ............................................................................................ 18
Ajuste de contadores de tambor.......................................................................................................... 20
Activar / desactivar la elevacin de lmite inferior......................................................................... 20
Ajustes de lmite de los malacates ...................................................................................................... 22
Ajustes de limites principal y auxiliar ............................................................................................ 23
Ajuste de limite de la pluma ........................................................................................................... 24
Ajuste de lmite de alarma en el punto de disparo.......................................................................... 24
Nivel de calibracin del indicador...................................................................................................... 25
Compensaciones de cronmetro ......................................................................................................... 26
Establecer las fechas de inspeccin (si esta equipado)....................................................................... 27
Solucin de problemas de censores de nivel, presin y temperatura ................................................. 28
Reemplazamiento de codificadores .................................................................................................... 29
Mantenimiento de opcin SLI ................................................................................................................ 30
Prueba de carga anual ......................................................................................................................... 30
Censor de carga y calibracin del censor de angulo de la pluma ....................................................... 31
Calibracin de Angulo de la Pluma ................................................................................................ 32
Calibracin del Sensor de Carga del Auxiliar ................................................................................ 32
Calibracin del Censor de Carga del Principal............................................................................... 33
Introduccin Anterior-Registro de Valores de Conteo................................................................... 33
Sistema de Alarmas ................................................................................................................................ 33
Introduccin
El CCM7000 en las gras de Seatrax, mdulo de control simplifica el seguimiento de los sistemas
de gras principales y auxiliares, incluidos los sistemas hidrulicos, aparejos y del motor primario.
El sistema proporciona un solo punto de acceso a una variedad de funciones de vigilancia y
control. En lugar de escanear indicadores y controles de trabajo repartidos por toda la cabina, el
operador de la gra puede desplazarse por las pginas en las pantallas para controlar los sistemas y
operaciones de control a travs de botones de la pantalla de tacto. En las gras equipadas con el
interruptor montado en la palanca de control, el operador puede desplazarse por las pginas en la
pantalla sin quitar las manos de los controles. Especialmente importante informacin se replica en
varias pginas.
El propsito de este manual es familiarizar a los operadores del sistema de navegacin bsica,
paginas de pantalla ms vistas y mantenimiento bsico. Debido a las configuraciones
personalizadas y mejoras de diseo continuo, las capturas de pantalla de este manual no tienen el
propsito de representar cualquier gra en particular, sino para dar ejemplos de lo que los
operadores puedan encontrar.
Navegacin
Navegacin es fcil de usar el interfaz, diseo entendible y lgico de flujo de trabajo permiten a los
operadores de aprender el CCM7000 rpidamente con una formacin mnima. CCM7000 utiliza una
pantalla de tacto para sistema de navegacin: el operador simplemente toca botones en pantalla para
acceder a las pantallas deseadas, cambiar entre monitores de malacate o iniciar / detener funciones.
Al tocar los botones del men en pantalla proporciona acceso directo a SLI, aparejos, motores,
controles y pantallas de medidores si la gra est equipada con estas opciones. En la parte inferior
izquierda, el botn (menu) siempre devuelve al operador al men principal.
Dependiendo de la configuracin, las filas inferiores de la mayora de pantallas principales comparten
un conjunto comn de botones de navegacin:
Alarm Reset: Silencia la alarma audible causada por exceder los lmites, como la presin de aceite
del motor, refrigerante del motor o la temperatura del aceite hidrulico.
Limit Override: Si los lmites se han habilitado por personal Seatrax en Parmetros, el operador
tendr que tocar y mantener el Lmite Override cuando las actividades de elevacin superior a los
lmites superior e inferior. Si los lmites no se han habilitado, el botn no funciona.
Engine: Esta pantalla en particular le permitir navegar a la pantalla del motor. Otras pantallas
mostrar una redaccin diferente para este botn en funcin de lo que la pgina se muestra
actualmente.
Palancas de Control Elctricos (si estn equipados): En general, hay dos configuraciones
alternativas para las palancas de control, interruptor selector y gatillo:
Configuracin Selector Izquierda Gatillo Selector - Derecha
#1 Pantalla Siguiente Radio Apriete-para-Hablar Corneta
#2 Pantalla Anterior Corneta Pantalla Siguiente
Pantallas
Men
Cuando el CCM7000 se
enciende, pasa a travs de
una serie de pantallas de
inicio antes de llegar al men
principal. Desde esta
pantalla, el operador puede
acceder a las pantallas para
controlar o supervisar las
funciones que incluyen, pero
no se limitan a:
Indicador de
Sobrecarga (SLI)
Malacates
Motor diesel
Estado
Pantalla ahorradora
Parmetros
Indicadordesobrecarga(SLI)(Opcional)
CCM7000 instalaciones equipadas con el Indicador de Sobrecarga Seatrax SLI opcional al
momento de carga incorporado a una red cableada de inclinacin de la pluma y censores en los
levantamientos de carga que se comunican con el terminal del CCM7000.
Los operadores pueden utilizar la pantalla SLI para monitorizar la carga segura de trabajo (SWL),
carga real, radio de gancho y gancho de carga como un porcentaje de SWL. Adems, podrn fijar la
tara y seleccionar entre graficas de carga disponibles en funcin de las condiciones de viento y mar o
requerimientos de elevacin a bordo vs. fuera de borda.

90%SWL
100%SWL
Presionecualquieradelas4esquinas. Presioneaquparacambiarpartes
IntercambiosentreMedidoresde actualmenteseleccionadasdelalneade
PresinHidrulicaylasLecturasdel elevacinprincipal.Slosemuestracuando
Motor seseleccionaelaparejoprincipal
La pantalla semi-circular a la derecha muestra grficamente el porcentaje de SWL - basado en la

grafica de carga activo - que se est moviendo. El comienzo de la banda amarilla indica que el 90%
de SWL se ha alcanzado, y el inicio de la banda roja indica 100% de SWL.
Los siguientes controles estn en una columna a la izquierda de la pantalla semi-circular SWL:
Aux./ Main: Al tocar este botn permite al operador cambiar entre la monitorizacin de los
malacates auxiliar y principal.
Nota: Para gras con Principal / Auxiliar el control del malacate que consisten en una sola palanca
y un interruptor OFF / MAIN / AUX, el malacate est supervisado por el CCM7000 determinado
por la posicin del interruptor.
Onboard / Offboard: Cambia entre las versiones a bordo y fuera de borda de la grafica de carga
instalado (s) para que la informacin de SWL y gancho de carga se muestren correctamente.
Radius: Radio de elevacin de acuerdo al movimiento actual.
Wind: Muestra la velocidad del viento en el que los clculos actuales de la grfica de carga se
basan. Si se instalan mltiples grficos: Para elevaciones de a bordo o fuera de borda, seleccionar
entre graficas de carga para una velocidad del viento con la ms prxima a la de las condiciones
prevalecientes.
Wave: Para elevaciones fuera del tablero, muestra la altura de las olas que los actuales clculos de
la grfica de carga se basan. Si se instalan varios grficos: el operador tambin puede tocar Wave
para seleccionar la tabla de cargas por escrito las condiciones de oleaje ms cercanas a las
condiciones imperantes.
View Load Charts: Aparecer una ventana que muestra las graficas de carga instalados
actualmente, como se muestra en la siguiente captura de pantalla.
Vistadegraficadecarga
La Vista de Graficas de Carga permite al operador de la gra para ver el grfico de la corriente de
carga en su totalidad. Si se cargan varios grficos, el operador puede pulsar cualquiera de los botones
de la izquierda para seleccionar entre los grficos basados en la velocidad del viento, altura de las olas
y de los criterios del tipo de elevacin.
Lift: Muestra si a bordo, fuera de borda, o ASME B30.8

Wind Speed/Fixed Cv: La figura sobre la cual se basa grfico de carga actual.
Wave Height/List-Trim: (Si corresponde) Figura en que se basa tabla de carga actual.
Notas
La pantalla de Notas muestra los criterios de configuracin y de elevacin sobre la que se basan
los clculos de elevacin.
Malacates
La pantalla proporciona informacin concurrente de los Malacates auxiliares, principal, y pluma
incluyendo sus horas de operacin, la velocidad, la direccin y la cantidad de cable desenrollado y
enrollado. Adems, la lista y ngulos de asiento se muestran con respecto a los valores aceptables
mnimo y mximo.
Porcentaje
decarga
segurade
trabajo
(SWL)
El siguiente extracto de pantalla es un ejemplo de la informacin detallada de elevacin:

Direccin de rotacin delaparejo
Direccindel
Enposicinrelativa aparejo(flechas
delganchoalos haciaarribao
lmitessuperiore haciaabajo)
inferior Medidordehoras
velocidaddeltambor(RPM)
Direccindepalanca Cableerrollado/desenrrollado
decontrolflechashacia
arribaohaciaabajo
Reiniciarcable
Velocidadde enrolladoy
(arribaoabajo) Slosemuestrasiexisten desenrollado
condicionesdealarma
especialparaunmalacate
El siguiente extracto de la pantalla del malacate anterior ilustra Medidor detallado y (opcional) la
informacin del viento:
Indicadordedireccin delviento
Velocidad del Viento: Actual
Velocidad delviento: mximaalcanzada
Mph-M/S-Knots: El sistema puede ser configurado para mostrar la velocidad del viento en
cualquiera de estos formatos.
Wind: El indicador de direccin constantemente actualiza el operador de la direccin del viento
en relacin a la posicin actual de la gra. Los nmeros de la velocidad del viento muestra
velocidades de medidas reales y mxima del viento (limitado por censor mximo), mientras que el
grfico ilustra la velocidad real del viento como un porcentaje del mximo del censor.
Gauge: Permite al usuario elegir el mtodo de indicadores de seguimiento mientras que en la
pantalla del malacate:
o Cuando el smbolo de pausa (PAUSE-barras dobles verticales) en la pantalla, las flechas de
direccin izquierda y derecha aparecen y permite al operador leer todos los medidores tocando
la flecha que la izquierda o a la derecha.
o Cuando el smbolo de reproduccin (PLAY) en la pantalla, la pgina de medidores cambia de
forma automtica. Pulse pausa (PAUSE) para alternar entre los modos de cambio de pagina
automtica y manual.
Lista de indicadores y angulos de asiento (Opcional)

El indicador de abajo muestra informacin sobre la lista (Sidelead) y Trim (Offlead) ngulos de la gra
y plataforma subyacente, incluyendo:
Mnimos y mximos absolutos del sistema - representado aqu como 20
Lista / Recorte de ngulo: ngulos actuales de la lista y el asiento. Exceder los parmetros genera
alarmas visuales y audibles.
Max / Min: los ngulos mximos y mnimos que se han registrado.
Representaciones grfico de barras del porcentaje de la lista actual y ngulos de asiento en relacin
con el 0 a 20 Rango de funcionamiento.
Motor
La pantalla del Motor proporciona una sola fuente de control de los niveles, presiones y temperaturas
del motor principal y varios sistemas hidrulicos relacionados. En ciertas configuraciones, tambin
puede replicar el motor montado en la consola y los controles hidrulicos.
Esta pantalla tendr un aspecto diferente en las gras elctricas que utilizan motores primarios,
obviamente carece de indicadores tales como la presin de aceite del motor y la temperatura del
lquido refrigerante.
Controles(Opcional)
La pantalla Controles proporciona la capacidad de conmutacin y regulacin de equipo de accesorios
elctricos, tales como la iluminacin y limpiaparabrisas. Si est equipado as, el men principal tendr
un icono de Controles.
Estado
La pantalla de Estado resume todas las actividades supervisadas, incluyendo lecturas de los
instrumentos actuales, aparejos y el estado de cable y los ajustes de control.
Alarmadeinicio
La pantalla de registro de alarmas mantiene la fecha y la hora con marca de registro de cualquier
evento que supera un parmetro programado en funcionamiento. Los eventos pueden incluir cualquier
cosa, desde alta temperatura del refrigerante a la presin hidrulica en exceso.
Parmetros1y2
Los Parmetros 1 y 2 pantallas para proporcionar la capacidad de activar y desactivar diversas
funciones y modificar los parmetros del sistema y la configuracin.
Si la gra tiene la cabina a la derecha, el botn de orientacin debe indicar mano derecha.
Si la gra tiene la cabina de la izquierda, el botn Orientacin debe indicar mano izquierda.
Nota: las manos izquierda y derecha son desde la perspectiva de una persona sentada en el asiento de
la cabina mirando hacia la parte delantera de la gra, es decir, el punto de la pluma.
SLIParmetros1y2(Siestaequipadaconcensordecarga)
Los Parmetros SLI 1 y 2 pantallas que ofrecen estados instantneos de los componentes indicadores
de la carga SLI y permiten la modificacin de los parmetros. SLI Parmetros 1 se accede desde la
pantalla Parmetros SLI. Parmetros SLI 2 se accede a partir de la pantalla de los parmetros SLI 1.
Cuando el SLI recibe buenas seales de los censores de carga y el censor de inclinacin de la pluma, el
campo de datos de paquetes SLI se mostrar una cadena de seal similar que se muestra a continuacin
ms adelante. El formato es: letra A seguido de 6 nmeros, la letra B, seguido de 6 nmeros, y
luego en C seguido por un + o - signo, tres nmeros, un punto decimal y otro nmero.
A012500B000000C+045.2

Censorprincipal Censorauxiliar Censordeangulo
delapluma
Si el SLI no est recibiendo una seal de una de los censores, entonces se mostrar guiones para que
parte de la cadena de seal. Por ejemplo, si la cadena de dichos datos se muestran como
A012500B ------ C045.2 quiere decir que la seal del censor de carga del auxiliar esta ausente.
Para obtener ms instrucciones, tanto en la interpretacin y el uso de estas pantallas - Parmetros
particularmente SLI 2 como se muestra a continuacin: - por favor consulte las pginas 31 a 33.
Advertenciaynotificacinpantallasemergentes
Otras pantallas surgen acciones basadas en, eventos o situaciones de equipo para generar avisos y
alarmas para alertar al operador a condiciones diferentes equipos. A menudo, estas pantallas ofrecen
sugerencias para resolver una situacin.
Mantenimientogeneralysolucindeproblemas
Calibracindeloscontadoresdeltambor
Los contadores de tambor deben ser calibrados cuando se sustituye cable de acero y puede requerir un
ajuste de vez en cuando durante el uso normal.
Calibrar una instalacin existente: vaya a la seccin titulada Ajuste de Contadores de tambor en la
pgina 20.
Calibrar contadores de tambor cuando se a instalando un cable de acero nuevo: continuar con la
reduccin a cero del contador del tambor
La siguiente tabla resume los pasos CCM7000 orientadas para la sustitucin de cable de acero y las
figuras 1A y 1B de los pasos de las secciones que contienen importantes instrucciones detalladas:
Paso SeccindeReferencia Pagina
1. DesactivarCCM7000lmitesdelos Activar/Desactivarmalacatesde 20
malacatesmsbajos lmiteinferior
2. Remuevacabledeacero Malacatesinstruccionesgenerales LibrodeDatos1
3. Poneraceroloscontadoresde Puestaacerodelcontadordeltambor 18
tambor
4. Instalecabledeaceronuevo Malacatesinstruccionesgenerales LibrodeDatos1
5. HabilitaryconfigurarCCM7000 Ajustedelmitedeaparejo 22
lmitesdeaparejos
Puestaacerodelcontadordeltambor
1. Oriente los tambores del los malacates de la siguiente manera:
A. Aparejos Principal y Auxiliar: girar el tambor hasta que el cable de acero punto de unin
est en su posicin vertical ms alta, como se ilustra en la Figura 1A a continuacin.
B. Aparejo de la Pluma: girar el tambor hasta que el punto de unin est en el extremo posterior
del aparejo, como se ilustra en la Figura 1B a
continuacin.
Figura1A.Instalacinpuntocerodel
Figura1B.Instalacinpuntocerodel
cablePrincipal/Auxiliar
cabledelaPluma
2. Centro de codificador es pulsando el botn Configurar Encoders <Hoist> botn en la pantalla de
Parmetros 1. No Errors Este mensaje debera permanecer en la franja blanca debajo del botn.
Si Check Wiring aparece en esta franja blanca, debe corregir el problema antes de continuar.
3. Vaya a la pantalla de Parmetros 2 y pulse el Total <Hoist>Rope Wraps: bloquear para generar
un teclado emergente.
4. Escriba cero en el teclado desplegable y pulsa Enter del teclado desaparecer y el valor mostrado
en la pantalla de Parmetros 2 ahora debe ser cero.
5. Conecte cable nuevo al punto de fijacin del cable de acero sobre el tambor del malacate, siguiendo
las directrices de la seccin malacate de Libro de Datos 1: Instalacin, Operacin y Mantenimiento.
6. Carrete con cable de acero nuevo, mantiene la tensin por las instrucciones del malacate arriba
mencionados: el sistema contar las vueltas del cable de acero automticamente.
Ajustedecontadoresdetambor
Para hacer ajustes en el contador del tambor, entre menos vueltas de cable queden en el carrete hace
ms fciles de contar y ajustar. Ahora, fsicamente cuente el nmero de vueltas en el tambor. A
continuacin, en la pantalla de Parmetros 2 introduzca el nmero de vueltas contadas en el teclado
pop-up que muestra aprovechando el Total <Hoist>Rope Wraps: bloque.
Activar/desactivarlaelevacindelmiteinferior
PRECAUCIN:
Loslmitesdelosmalacatesqueseestablecenapartirdelapantalla,sedebedesactivar
antesde:1)lasustitucindecables,o2)larealizacindeajustesenloslmitesdela
pluma.Sinolohaceestopuedeimpedirremoverelcableoresultarunajusteimpropioen
loslmitesdelapluma.
Malacatesprincipal/auxiliar
Los lmites ms bajos de los malacates principal y auxiliar se pueden desactivar para facilitar los
cambios de cable o de operaciones especiales de la gra que requieren que los ganchos vayan ms all
de los ajustes del lmite inferior. Deshabilitar cualquiera de los lmites inferiores del malacate que
corresponda tocando el <Hoist> Lower Limit Enabled botn hasta que cambie a <Hoist> Lower
Limit Disabled.
Cuando est desactivada, los lmites se pueden volver a activar pulsando el botn del malacate
asociado hasta que cambie de nuevo a <Hoist> Lower Limit Enabled.
Alarmadelimitedelapluma
Una caracterstica de alarma audible avisa al operador cuando la pluma se acerca ya sea superior o
inferior a su lmite. La seal acstica se produce antes del mensaje que aparecer en la pantalla y
desactivara los sistemas hidrulicos de elevacin.
Para activar la alarma de lmite, toque en el Boom Limit Alarm <Enabled / disabled> botn en los
parmetros de una pantalla hasta que cambie a Boom Limit Alarm Enabled. Para desactivar pulse el
botn hasta que cambie a Boom Limit Alarm Disabled.
Ajustesdelmitedelosmalacates
PRECAUCION:
Loslmitesdelosmalacatesqueseestablecenapartirdelapantalla,sedebedesactivar
antesde:1)lasustitucindecables,o2)larealizacindeajustesenloslmitesdela
pluma.Sinolohaceestopuedeimpedirremoverelcableoresultarunajusteimpropioen
loslmitesdelapluma.
1. Para deshabilitar los lmites de los malacates pulse Limits Enabled. Este cambiara para leer
Limits Disabled.
Ajustesdelimitesprincipalyauxiliar
1. Si los malacates principal y auxiliar requieren de un ajuste de lmite, levante la pluma a un ngulo
alto.
2. Baje el gancho a la posicin final deseada y pulse el botn Set <Hoist> Lower Limit.
3. Pruebe el lmite para comprobar las funciones correctamente.
Lmites de prueba
Prueba de: a) permitir lmites, b) malacate fuera de lmite, y luego c) que se mueve hacia
el lmite de elevacin hasta que llegue el mensaje de advertencia y la elevacin se
desactiva en el punto de referencia deseado.
Despus de probar el lmite, deshabilite los lmites una vez ms antes de volver a los
ajustes.
4. Elevar el gancho hasta que est en su posicin de parada. Baje el gancho ligeramente y pulse el
botn Set <Hoist> Upper Limit.
Ajustedelimitedelapluma
1. Si el malacate de la pluma requiere de ajustes en los limites, levante la pluma hasta que el
levantamiento sea deshabilitado por la vlvula hidrulica de limite Kick out.
2. Regrese la pluma hacia abajo un mnimo de un pie (1) y presione el botn Set Boom Lower
Lmite.
3. Baje la pluma hasta la posicin lmite inferior deseado y pulse el botn Set Lower Limit.
4. Despus de todos los lmites han sido establecidos, permitir a los lmites pulsando la tecla de
Limits Disabled. Se cambiar a Limits Enabled habilitado.
Ajustedelmitedealarmaenelpuntodedisparo
El punto de disparo en el que la alarma audible suena es ajustable segn las preferencias del operador.
La alarma sonar en un nmero de usuario seleccionado de revoluciones del tambor antes de la fijacin
de lmites. Esto se puede ajustar a cualquier cosa mayor o igual a dos (2) revoluciones del tambor
(defecto del sistema).
Para ajustar el punto de disparo:
1. Asegurar que los lmites se han establecido correctamente en el aparejo de la pluma basado en
el proceso descrito en la seccin anterior.
2. Vaya a la pantalla de Parmetros 2.
3. Toque en el bloque de teclas High / Low Angle Alarm Drum Revs e introduzca el valor
deseado en el teclado que aparece. Por ejemplo, si 5 se introduce y la alarma sonar cinco
revoluciones del tambor antes del boom llega a su lmite.
Niveldecalibracindelindicador
Calibracin de los indicadores implica mover fsicamente el flotador indicador a la posicin completa
deseada, se muestran el valor de salida en esa posicin y entrar en ese valor como el punto de ajuste
completo. Una vez calibrado, el CCM7000 calcular los porcentajes de nivel de lquidos basados en el
punto de ajuste completo. Para calibrar un indicador de completar los siguientes pasos.
1. Remueva el indicador de nivel del tanque y situar el flotador en la posicin deseada completo.
2. Vaya a la pantalla de Parmetros 2 y pulse el bloque <Hyd/Diesel> Tank Full Set Point para
introducir el valor que aparece en el bloque de teclas <Hyd/Diesel> Level (nivel de tiempo real).
3. Vuelva a instalar el indicador de nivel cuando haya completado la calibracin.
Compensacionesdecronmetro
Los usuarios pueden introducir cifras de Compensacin de Cronmetro para dar cuenta de las horas de
uso previamente documentados.
Para proporcionar al CCM7000 horas previas de inteligencia, las horas y los minutos documentados
deben ser incluidos en los bloques de Offset para cada uno de los componentes. Los valores de
desplazamiento debe representar la suma de todas las horas documentadas para un componente antes
de la CCM7000 cuando se ponen en servicio.
Siga estos pasos para introducir la hora Offset:
1. Desde la pantalla de Parmetros 2, introduzca las horas previas y actas en los bloques de
compensacin para el motor y cada elevador pulsando en el campo apropiado.
2. Verificar CCM7000 se indica el total de veces correctamente mediante la comprobacin de las
horas que se muestran en la pantalla Estado-Status. Los tiempos mostrados sern los tiempos de
componentes totales.
Establecerlasfechasdeinspeccin(siestaequipado)
1. Desde la pantalla de Parmetros 1, pulse el botn de Inspeccin Fechas situado en la esquina
inferior izquierda.
2. En la pantalla de inspecciones, todas las fechas de inspeccin trimestral y mensual se calcularn

automticamente una vez que haya entrado en la Fecha de Inspeccin Anual. (NOTA: Slo
despus de entrar en el ao inspeccin anual, el sistema vuelva a calcular las otras fechas.)
3. Desde esta misma pantalla, tambin puede ajustar la cantidad de das antes de la fecha de la
inspeccin real que el sistema comenzar a notificar al operador.
Solucindeproblemasdecensoresdenivel,presiny
temperatura
Cuando un censor demuestre una falla, compruebe lo siguiente antes de reemplazar.
1. Asegrese de que el PLC tenga energa, luz de correr (RUN) y luz de comunicacin (COMM)
estn encendidas en (verde), as como asegurarse de que la luz de fallos del PLC no este
encendida o parpadeando en rojo.
Sntoma Accin
LaluzdelLEDdealimentacinnoestaencendido. DetermineporqunohayvoltajeenelPLCy
hacerlascorreccionesnecesarias.
LaluzdelLEDdealimentacinestaencendidoylaluz LocaliceelinterruptorDIP3posicionesdetrsde
LEDdecorrer(Run)no. lapuertadesalidaabatibleenelladoizquierdo
delPLC.
MuevaelinterruptoralaposicinRUN.
ComunicacindeLEDnoesteencendida. CompruebelasconexionesentreelPLCyel
monitor.
LuzdefallodelLEDestencendidooparpadeando. Apagueyenciendaelsistema.
2. Asegurarse de que todo el cableado y el alambrado asociado con el censor particular no est
daado y todos los puntos de terminacin son ajustados a lo largo de todo el circuito (desde el
terminal de potencia de entrada en el recinto elctrico para la conexin de entrada de censor, de
la conexin de salida del censor en el terminal de salida en el recinto elctrico, y desde el
terminal de salida en el recinto elctrico para la tarjeta de entrada analgica del PLC.
Sntomas Accin
Lasconexionessueltas. Aprieteenconsecuencia.
Cableadodaado. Cambieelcabledaado(s)y/oelcable(s)conel
tamaodecableadecuado.
3. Asegrese que la corriente de 24VDC este en la entrada (el blanco o rojo) en el conector del
censor revisando con medidor de corriente.
Sntomas Accin
Silacorrientede24DCnoestapresente. Determineporqunohayvoltajedecorrientey
hacerlascorreccionesnecesarias.
Silacorrientede24VDCestapresente. Compruebequelacorrientedesalidadelcensor
estenelintervalode420mAquitandoelcable
desalida(cablenegro)desuterminalyla
conexindeunodeloscablesdelmedidoral
cablenegroyelotroalterminal.
Silacorrientedesalidanoestdentrodelrango
requerido,sustituirelcensor.
Reemplazamientodecodificadores
1. Instale el acoplamiento (pieza 2) para el codificador de sustitucin (artculo 4) y fjela
firmemente al eje con el tornillo de fijacin.
2. Monte codificador reemplazo con los cuatro tornillos de fijacin (tornillo 3).
3. Afloje los tornillos de alineacin del codificador (tornillos 5 y 6) que se instalan a travs de los
orificios ranurados de los soportes de montaje.
4. Visualmente mover el codificador de manera que su eje est lo ms cerca posible de tambor
adaptador del eje (pieza 1) eje en todas las direcciones y ajuste los tornillos de alineacin
(tornillos 5 y 6).
5. Gire el codificador a mano para los giros de acoplamiento del adaptador del eje del tambor
(punto 1) y compruebe la resistencia a travs de una revolucin completa. Si la resistencia es
experimentada, afloje los tornillos de alineacin (tornillos 5 y 6) y mueva la posicin del
codificador para lograr una mejor alineacin. Repita la rotacin con la mano.
6. Cuando acoplamiento gira libremente a travs de una revolucin completa, apriete los tornillos
de alineacin (tornillos 5 y 6) completamente.
7. Fije el acoplamiento (elemento 2) al adaptador del eje del tambor (punto 1) con el tornillo de
fijacin.
MantenimientodeopcinSLI
El CCM7000 bsico no requiere mantenimiento peridico ms que tal vez re-ajuste peridicos en
los contadores de los aparejos. En general, los clientes que tienen problemas deben dirigirse al
departamento de servicio de Seatrax.
Sin embargo, algunas reparaciones y mantenimiento se puede realizar en instalaciones en el campo
que incorporan en opcin a la carga indicada al momento.
Pruebadecargaanual
Choque cargas pesadas pueden afectar la precisin del indicador de carga. Para mayor precisin,
los censores de carga y censores de ngulo de la pluma se deben probar todos los aos, y volver a
calibrar si es necesario.
La forma ms sencilla de probar un censor de carga es para levantar al menos dos pesos conocidos.
A pesa de prueba debe conocerse con una precisin de 2% del valor mximo SWL. Para mayor
precisin, factor en los pesos conocidos de todos los equipos adicionales tales como bloques,
eslingas, etc.
Las cargas de ensayo deben ser significativas en relacin con la capacidad del censor de carga. El
peso de prueba mnimo es de aproximadamente 20% de la carga mxima de seguridad, un peso de
prueba preferido es mayor que 50% de la SWL - sin exceder SWL - para el radio al que se realiza
la elevacin.
Por ejemplo, un censor de 30.000 libras de carga en cuatro partes de lnea tiene una SWL de
120.000 libras.
La carga de prueba mnima en este ejemplo sera 24.000 libras.
Una buena prueba de carga sera 60.000 libras o ms.
Determinar la precisin del sistema de prueba con la siguiente frmula de referencia SAE-J-159
7.3:
Carga indicada
x 100 = % de carga
Carga actual
Si los rendimientos de pruebas de lecturas son inexactas, contine con, Load Cell and Boom Angle
Censor calibracin procedimiento que empieza en la pgina siguiente.
Censordecargaycalibracindelcensordeangulodelapluma
Calibracin anual se recomienda para los censores de carga y censores de ngulo de la pluma. Las
capturas de pantalla por debajo del CCM7000 se utilizan para calibrar los siguientes elementos:
Figura1.SLIParametersScreenshotEjemplo
Figura2.SLIParameters2ScreenshotEjemplo
CalibracindeAngulodelaPluma
Compruebe en qu lado de la punta de la pluma esta la caja de conexiones, donde se encuentra el
censor de ngulo, se monta en, mano derecha o la mano izquierda. Luego baje la pluma a la posicin
horizontal: con un nivel de burbuja de la alta calidad o el censor de ngulo digital en uno de los
acordes cuadrados el cual ayudar con precisin.
1. En el men principal, seleccione la ficha Parameters entonces aparecer SLI Parameters Page
y presione Orientation Angle presione para que coincida con el lado de la caja de conexin
que esta montada en la punta de la pluma, en la mano derecha o la mano izquierda.
2. A continuacin, pulse el botn Set Boom Angle Zero Degrees.
3. Mueva la pluma en diferentes posiciones y compare el radio en la pantalla de tacto con el
indicador manual de radio en la pluma.
Si la lectura en la pantalla necesita ajuste se puede hacer a travs del Angle Offset en la
pgina de configuracin de SLI Parameters Page. Cuando el nmero se pulsa en el bloque de
teclado este surgir en el Offset y presione Enter. Esto puede tomar un par de intentos para
obtener la lectura deseada.
4. Es conveniente registrar el Angle Zero Count en el caso de los ajustes se cambian
inadvertidamente. Este nmero se puede encontrar en la pgina de SLI Parameters Page 2 as
como en Angle Zero Count. Tenga en cuenta la informacin esta en el archivo de registro
diario en el inicio de la gra.
CalibracindelSensordeCargadelAuxiliar
Un peso conocido (preferiblemente 50% de la capacidad o ms sin exceder el radio de prueba para
SWL), dinammetro certificado (dyno) y bolsas de agua o estirar de una placa de levantamiento en la
cubierta aprobadas para realizar pruebas de carga, cualquiera de estos se requiere para la calibracin.
1. Baje la bola auxiliar a la posicin donde se realizar la carga o donde el banco de pruebas se
encuentre y levante la carga aproximadamente un pie.
2. Sin carga en el gancho auxiliar, en el men principal CCM7000 seleccione la ficha Parameters
entonces contine en SLI Parameters Page, espere a que la lectura se estabilice (esto puede
tardar un par de minutos) y luego presione el botn Set Aux Zero Load.
3. Levante la carga conocida o estire de una placa de levantamiento en el banco de pruebas y
permita la lectura que fue establecida de acuerdo a la prueba. En la pgina SLI Parameters,
pulse el Aux Calibration Weight numero y teclado aparecer. Escriba el peso de la carga
conocida o la lectura desde el banco de pruebas en el teclado y pulsa Enter.
4. Baje la carga y levntela de nuevo para comprobar la calibracin.
5. Es aconsejable registrar las Lbs del Auxiliar para contar Aux Count Zero en caso de que los
ajustes se cambian inadvertidamente. Estos nmeros se pueden encontrar en la pgina SLI
Parameters 2 como en Aux Zero Count. Tenga en cuenta la informacin esta en el registro
diario en el inicio de la gra.
CalibracindelCensordeCargadelPrincipal
Un peso conocido (preferiblemente 50% de la capacidad o ms sin exceder el radio de prueba para
SWL), dinammetro certificado (dyno) y bolsas de agua o estirar de una placa de levantamiento en la
cubierta aprobadas para realizar pruebas de carga, cualquiera de estos se requiere para la calibracin.
1. Baje el bloque del principal a la posicin donde se realizar la carga o donde el banco de
pruebas se encuentre y levante la carga aproximadamente un pie.
2. Sin carga en el gancho principal, en el men principal CCM7000 seleccione la ficha
Parameters entonces contine a la pagina SLI Parameters, espere a que la lectura se estabilice
(esto puede tardar un par de minutos) y luego presione el botn Set Aux Zero Load.
3. Levante la carga conocida o estire de una placa de levantamiento en el banco de pruebas y
permita la lectura que fue establecida de acuerdo a la prueba. En la pgina SLI Parameters
pulse el Main Calibration Weight y el numero aparecer en el teclado. Escriba el peso de la
carga conocida o la lectura desde el banco de pruebas en el teclado y pulse Enter.
4. Baje la carga y levntela de nuevo para comprobar la calibracin.
5. Es aconsejable registrar el Main Lbs. Per Count y Main Count Zero en caso de que los
ajustes se cambian inadvertidamente. Estos nmeros se pueden encontrar en la pgina SLI
Parameters 2 as como en Main Lbs. Per Count y en Main Zero Count. Tenga en cuenta la
informacin esta en el registro diario en el inicio de la gra.
IntroduccinAnteriorRegistrodeValoresdeConteo
Si la introduccin anterior de conteo no se registr y el valor no est disponible o si ninguno de los
componentes ha sido sustituido, a continuacin, siga los procedimientos de calibracin mencionados
anteriormente en el documento.
Si los datos de calibracin anterior est disponible y todos los componentes son los mismos, entonces
los valores se pueden introducir manualmente sin necesidad de realizar calibraciones. Consulte el
registro diario o archivo de gra para los datos de calibracin previamente grabados. Vaya a la pgina
SLI Parameters para realizar los siguientes ajustes:
1. En Aux / Main Zero Count introduzca el valor previamente grabado pulsando Zero Count,
escribiendo el numero en el teclado y presionar Enter.
2. En Aux / Main Lbs. per Count introduzca el valor previamente grabado pulsando Lbs. per
Count escribiendo el numero en el teclado y presionar Enter.
3. En Angle Zero Count introduzca el valor previamente grabado pulsando Angle Zero Count
escribiendo el numero en el teclado y presionar Enter.
SistemadeAlarmas
Ajuste de Respuesta del Alarma
Condicin de Alarma
Alarma Sistema Acknowledgement
Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
Alarma explicando el
SOBRECALENTAMIENTO DE de alarma. Alarma no vuelve hasta que
200 deg F problema en la barra,
ACEITE HIDRAULICO la temperatura del aceite hidrulico este
sonido zumbador.
por debajo de 150 deg F
SOBRECALENTAMIENTO DEL de alarma. Alarma no vuelve hasta que
215 deg F problema en la barra,
REFRIGERANTE DEL MOTOR la temperatura del aceite hidrulico este
sonido zumbador.
por debajo de 150 deg F
Ajuste de Respuesta del Alarma
Condicin de Alarma
Alarma Sistema Acknowledgement
Alarma explicando el Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
BAJA PRESION DEL ACEITE
10 psi problema en la barra, de alarma. Alarma no vuelve hasta que
DEL MOTOR
sonido zumbador. el motor se reinicia.
Alarma explicando el de alarma. Alarma no vuelve hasta que
BAJO NIVEL DE COMBUSTIBLE 10%
problema en la barra. el nivel de combustible no sea repuesto
a 25%
BAJO NIVEL DE ACEITE Alarma explicando el de alarma. Alarma no vuelve hasta que
10%
HIDRAULICO problema en la barra. el nivel de combustible no sea repuesto
a 25%
BATERIA BAJA DEL PLC (3.6V Alarma explicando el Condicin borrada reemplazando la
es normal) problema en la barra. batera del PLC.
SOBRE CARGA EN EL SLI- Alarma explicando el Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
SLI de carga > 100%
ocurre cuando la carga esta sobre problema en la barra, de alarma. Alarma no vuelve hasta que
de SWL
de SLI- AUX / MAIN SWL. sonido zumbador.. la carga no este por debajo de 75%
ADVERTENCIA DEL AUXILIAR -
Alarma explicando el Alarma borrada cuando la palanca de
ocurre si la palanca de control 1/4 - 1 rotacin del
problema en la barra, control es liberada y esta en posicin
activa en ARRIBA la rotacin del tambor
sonido zumbador. neutral.
tambor es ABAJO.
ALARMA DEL AUXILIAR- si la Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
Palanca de control en problema en la barra,
palanca de control despus de siempre y cuando se libera la palanca
posicin fija seguida sonido zumbador, sonido
mantenida en ARRIBA ocurre de control y el tambor detiene la
de Alarma del Auxiliar de corneta, levantamiento
Alarma del Auxiliar. rotacin.
esta DISABLED.
SOBRE VELOCIDAD DEL Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
problema en la barra,
AUXILIAR - ocurre si el tambor 25% sobre la siempre y cuando se libera la palanca
sonido zumbador, sonido
AUXILIAR esta en velocidad velocidad del tambor de control y el tambor detiene la
de corneta, levantamiento
exceciva. rotacin.
esta DISABLED.
ADVERTENCIA DEL PRINCIPAL -
ocurre si la palanca de control 1 - 2 rotacin del
sonido zumbador.. neutral.
tambor es ABAJO.
ALARMA DEL PRINCIPAL si la Palanca de control en Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
palanca de control despus de posicin fija seguida siempre y cuando se libera la palanca
mantenida en ARRIBA ocurre de Alarma del de control y el tambor detiene la
Alarma del Principal. Principal rotacin.
esta DISABLED.
SOBRE VELOCIDAD DEL Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
PRINCIPAL -ocurre si el tambor 25% sobre la siempre y cuando se libera la palanca
PRINCIPAL esta en velocidad velocidad del tambor de control y el tambor detiene la
excesiva. rotacin.
esta DISABLED.
ADVERTENCIA DE LA PLUMA -
occurre si la palanca de control 1 - 2 rotacin del
sonido zumbador. neutral.
tambor es ABAJO.
ALARMA DE LA PLUMA si la Mensaje borrado con restablecimiento
Palanca de control en problema en la barra,
palanca de control despus de siempre y cuando se libera la palanca
posicin fija seguida sonido zumbador, sonido
mantenida en ARRIBA ocurre de control y el tambor detiene la
de Alarma de la Pluma de corneta, levantamiento
Alarma del la Pluma. rotacin.
esta DISABLED.
SOBRE VELOCIDAD DE LA problema en la barra,
25% sobre la siempre y cuando se libera la palanca
PLUMA -ocurre si el tambor de la sonido zumbador, sonido
velocidad del tambor de control y el tambor detiene la
PLUMA esta en velocidad excesiva. de corneta, levantamiento
rotacin.
esta DISABLED.
ERROR DE COMUNICACION DEL Alarma en la barra y
PLC- ocurre cuando se pierde la aparecer explicando el Alarma aprobada por la correccin de
comunicacin entre la pantalla de mensaje del problema del fallos del PLC
contacto y el PLC CCM7000 inoperativo.
Section/Seccin10 _______________________
GeneralBillofMaterialsand Listadematerialgeneralydatosde
ComponentData componentes
(Englishonly) (Solamenteeningls)
General Bills of Material Lista de material general
Component Data Datos de componentes
o Slew Bearings o Cojinetes de giro
o Hoist Assemblies o Ensamblaje de malacates
o Hoisting Block, Load and Overhaul o Bloque de elevacin, carga y bola
o Sheaves o Poleas
o Brakes, Slew and Hoist o Frenos, giro y malacates
o Gearboxes o Cajas de engranes
o Pumps o Bombas
o Filters o Filtros
o Motors o Motores
o Starters o Motores de arranque
o Valves o Vlvulas
o Controls o Controles
o Additional Equipment o Equipo adicional
Slew Bearings
Cojinetes de giro
Hoist Assemblies
Ensamblaje de malacates
Hoisting Block, Load and Overhaul
Bloque de elevacin, carga y bola
Sheaves
Poleas
Brakes, Slew and Hoist
Frenos, giros y malacates
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
1September1999
ShaftBrake,FailSafe
PartNo.40116
40116_R00.doc Page1of4
ExplodedView
PartNo.40116
PartsList
ITEM# DESCRIPTION ITEM# DESCRIPTION
1 OilSeal 14 StationaryDisc
2 RetainingRing 15 Piston
3 InternalSnapRing 16 PackingBackupRing
4 Bearing 17 ORing
5 Housing 18 PackingBackupRing
6 Gasket 19 ORing

7 SpringRetainer 20 PowerPlate
8 CompressionSpring 21 ProtectivePlug
9 Shaft 22 BleederScrew
10 TorquePin 23 HexFlangeScrew
11 PrimaryDisc 24 HexPlug
12 CompressionSpring 25 ORing
13 RotatingDisc 26 HexPlug
BRAKEFUNCTION
The Failsafe Brake is spring loaded to apply the The brake is designed to fit between the gear
brake and hydraulic pressure is required to reducer and hydraulic motor. The common
release or hold off the brake. Normal operation mounting surfaces of the brake, motor, and gear
is to have the brake pressurized in the released reducer are machined to close tolerances and
position with the crane hydraulic system should be protected from damage during
operating and the console mounted swing lock installation and removal.
released. If there is a loss of pressure to this
brake, the brake will automatically apply.
INSTALLATIONPROCEDURE
Refer to Figure 2
1. Grease and place the O Ring (25) into the 5. Insert the shaft of the motor into the brake
mounting face of the brake. and rotate into position.
2. Place the shaft brake into the gear reducer 6. Lubricate the exposed allthread with anti-
with the bleeder screw to the front. seize.
3. Align the mounting holes by rotating the 7. Install four lock washers with nuts and
engaged brake into position. If this is not tighten evenly.
possible, the brake can be rotated once 8. Attach the #4 pressure to release hose
pressure has been applied to the upper from the console swing lock to the upper
brake inlet port. This will release the port of the brake, and the #4 pressure to
brake and allow it to be rotated into apply hose from the foot brake to the
position. lower port.
4. Similarly, grease and place the other O 9. Use upper and lower bleeder screws to
Ring (25) on the mounting face of the remove air from the brake system.
motor.
BRAKEDISASSEMBLYPROCEDURE
Refer to Figure 1
1. With shaft protrusion down, disassemble B. Remove snap rings (3). Remove
in the following order: Bolts (23) shaft (9) and bearing (4), lightly
alternately, power plate (20), gasket (6), tapping the shaft with a plastic or
stationary discs (14), rotating discs (13), wood mallet.
springs (12), primary disc (11), pins (10), C. Remove bearing from shaft.
springs (8), and spring retainer (7). D. Remove the piston (15) from the
2. Further disassembly is not recommended power plate (20) by introducing
and should not be attempted unless it is low-pressure air (15 psi) into the
necessary to replace one or more of the hydraulic inlet. Make sure the
following parts: Seal (1), snap rings (3), piston is pointed away from persons
bearings (4), or shaft (9). If disassembly when air is applied. Remove O
is required, proceed as follows: rings (17 and 19) and back-up rings
A. Remove seal (1). This will be (16 and 18) from the I.D. and O.D.
ruined and must be replaced. of the piston. Back-up rings will be
CAUTION: Be extra careful not to damaged and should not be
damage adjacent bearing seal. removed if replacement is not
planned.
ASSEMBLYPROCEDURE
Use the reverse of the disassembly procedure with the following notes and additions: IMPORTANT:
There may be more parts in a service kit than your brake requires. Check the parts list carefully for
the exact quantity. In the case of springs, space the required quantity equally.
1. Make sure all parts are thoroughly 6. Rotating discs must be clean and dry.
clean before re-assembly. The lining material and mating
2. Worn or damaged O rings or PIPE surfaces of the stationary discs must
back-up rings must be replaced prior be kept clean and free of any traces of
to assembly. oil. Worn or heavily scored discs
3. The cylinder of the power plate, the must be replaced.
piston, and the O rings must be clean 7. Press bearings (40) into external spline
prior to re-assembly and pre-lubed of housing end of shaft (9) and install
with hydraulic oil. the sub-assembly into the housing (5),
4. Install piston (15) into power plate install retaining ring (3). After
(20) using a shop press, being careful installing all the internal components
not to damage the O rings or PIPE of the brake, install power plate (20)
back-up rings. Visually align the sub-assembly.
cutouts in the piston with the torque 8. Install bolts (23). Tighten
pin (10) holes in the power plate (20). sequentially, one turn at a time, until
CAUTION, the depth the piston is power plate is properly sealed.
installed into the power plate is Torque to 80-95 lb. ft. Then press
critical. The surface of the piston bearing (4) onto shaft (9) and install
cutouts must be flush to .120 in. below retaining ring (3).
the surface if the power plate. DO 9. Before installing seal (1), lubricate the
NOT exceed the 0.120 in. depth or lip of the seal with hydraulic oil. Use
piston will cock resulting in a a shop press to install the seal. Face
complete loss of braking. the lip of the seal toward the inside of
5. When pressing bearings onto the shaft, the brake. Press evenly around the
press on the inner race of the bearing O.D. of the seal and use care to avoid
and support the shaft properly. cocking.
Gearboxes
Cajas de engranes
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
14May2011
SlewGearboxandShaft,Planetary
PartNo.20071
Service
Seatrax advises customers to contact the Service Department regarding any problems with this
gearbox rather than attempting to field-service it, therefore no repair information is provided.
Lubrication
For lubrication intervals and recommendations see the Lubrication section of Data Book 1, but
some general guidelines include:
Higher temperatures require more frequent oil changes.
Change the oil after the first 50 hours of operation and every 1,000 hours or one (1) year
thereafter.
Change the oil if there are any traces of contamination, particles or discoloration.
RefillingGearboxLubricant
1. Drain the old oil by removing the plug on the bottom near the slew gear, then removing the cap
of the slew tank.
CAPACITY: Approximately fifteen (15) gallons (per slew drive) - including day tank.
NOTE: Drain oil when hot to help remove any sludge
buildup.
2. Inspect the old oil for sand-size or larger particles. If
these are present, the unit may require repair or
replacement in the near future.
3. After draining, replace the lower plug and remove the
plug located 90 to the left or right of the slew tank to
gearbox fill line.
4. Slowly fill the unit through the slew tank until oil runs
out the plug on the top of the gearbox.
5. Install the gearbox top plug.
6. Fill the slew tank to full
7. Test for leaks.
8. Recheck fluid level after one day of operation
TighteningandTorquingBolts
NOTE: DO NOT use impact wrenches to tighten bolts. All bolts, especially the shoulder bolts,
must be tightened by hand.
1. The following steps describe the proper procedure for tightening and torquing bolts or socket
head cap screws (shoulder bolts) in a bolt
circle.
2. Tighten (but do not torque) bolt A until
snug.
3. Go to the opposite side of the bolt circle and
tighten bolt B until equally snug.
4. Continue around bolt circle and tighten the
remaining bolts.
5. Now use torque wrench to apply the specified
torque to bolt A.
6. Continue around the bolt circle and apply an
equal torque to the remaining bolts.
NOTE: Shoulder bolts should be tightened and
torqued last.
ShimChart
GAP(in.) SHIMWIDTH(in.) GAP(in.) SHIMWIDTH(in.)
000to.002 006 .030to.032 036
.002to.004 008 .032to.034 038
.004to.006 010 .034to.036 040
.006to.008 012 .036to.038 042
.008to.010 014 .038to.040 044
.010to.012 016 .040to.042 046
.012to.014 018 .042to.044 048

.014to.016 020 .044to.046 050
.016to.018 022 .046to.048 052
.018to.020 024 .048to.050 054
.020to.022 026 .050to.052 056
.022to.024 028 .052to.054 058
.024to.026 030 .054to.056 060
.026to.028 032 .056to.058 062
.028to.030 034
PartsList
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION
1 1 HubShaftSubAssy. 3 1 CarrierSubAssy.
1A 1 OutputShaft 3A 1 Carrier
1B 1 Seal(Face) 3B 3 RollPin
1C 1 BearingCup 3C 6 BearingCup
1D 1 BearingCone 3D 6 BearingCone
1E 1 BearingCup 3E 3 PlanetShaft
1F 1 BearingCone 3F 3 ClusterGear
1G 1 Hub 3G 3 Spacer
1H 1 InternalGearHub 3H 3 RetainingRing
1I 4 Plate 4 1 RingGear
1J 1 InternalGear 5 2 Oring
1K 1 BearingPlate 6 1 Cover
1L 1 ShimSet 7 1 MagneticPipePlug
1M 8 Bolt 8 1 ThrustWasher
1N 8 Bolt 13 1 InputGear
1P 3 MagneticPipePlug 15 4 ThrustWasher
1Q 1 SealCarrier 16 2 ThrustBearing
1R 6 Bolt 17 16 Bolt
1S 1 Oring 18 4 ShoulderBolt
1T 1 PipePlug 22 20 Lockwasher
24 1 I.D.Plate

25 4 Drivescrew
CutawayViewOf20071
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
14May2011
ReductionGearbox
4:1Ratio
PartNo.20078
Description
This pancake style reduction gearbox is positioned between each slew motor and its respective
gearbox in order to amplify the motors torque for more effective slew gearbox function.
RepairandMaintenance
This gearbox is not field-serviceable so no repair information is provided. In the event it requires
replacement, please contact the Seatrax service department.
Please refer to the Lubrication section of Data Book 1 for suggested maintenance intervals and oils.
If removed for replacement or to facilitate the Emergency Slewing Procedure, upon reinstallation
ensure that mounting bolts are torqued in accordance with the Bolt Installation and Inspection
Procedure under the Inspection and Maintenance section of Data Book 1.
Lubrication
The reduction gearbox is filled automatically when the slew gearbox is topped off via the day tank.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
18May2011
ParallelShaftGearbox,Hoist
PartNo.
20163and20164(400Series)
20165and20166(700Series)
Service
Seatrax does not recommend servicing this parallel shaft gearbox in the field, therefore no repair
information is given. If problems occur, the customer is advised to contact the Service Department for
assistance.
Lubrication
For lubrication intervals and recommendations see the Lubrication section of Data Book 1. Some
general guidelines include:
Higher temperatures require more frequent oil changes.
Change the oil after the first 50 hours of operation and every 1,000 hours or one (1) year thereafter.
Change the oil if there are any traces of contamination, particles or discoloration.
Capacities
400 Series: Approximately twenty-four (24) gallons. (Same for boom, main or aux. installation)
700 Series: Approximately thirty-two (32) gallons. (Same for boom, main or aux. installation)
RefillingGearboxLubricant
1. Drain the old oil by removing the lowest plug on the gearbox, then removing the one at the highest
point.
2. NOTE: Drain oil when hot to help remove any sludge buildup.
3. Inspect the old oil for sand size or larger particles. If these are present, the unit may require repair
or replacement in the near future.
4. After draining, replace the lower plug and remove the plug located 3/4 of the way up the unit.
5. Slowly fill the unit through the highest plug until oil runs out of the other plug.
6. Reinstall the plugs. Test for leaks.
7. Recheck fluid level after one day of operation.
20163201642016520166_R02.doc Page1of5
Page 2 of 5
Page 3 of 5
Page 4 of 5
Page 5 of 5
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
21September2011
QuadPumpDriveGearbox
1,000Horsepower
PartNo.
20258 20259 20261 20265 20289 20387 20405 20412
20413 20414 20415 20421 20422 20430 20431 20452
GeneralInformation
These quad pump drive gearboxes all share similar capacity
approximately 1,000 horsepower - with part numbers
differentiated based on gear ratio and pump pad
configuration.
Lubrication
Fill until proper level shows on dipstick.
Capacity: Approximately two (2) gallons.
Maintain proper oil change intervals using approved
lubricants in accordance with the Lubrication section of
Data Book 1 Installation, Operation and Maintenance.
InspectionandMaintenance
Regular operational maintenance for the quad pump drive
gearboxes is covered in Data Book 1:
Inspect periodically for leaks, loose fasteners and fluid levels per the Inspection Checklist
under Inspection and Maintenance.
Step-by-step disassembly and assembly instructions are beyond the scope of this data sheet. If the
gearbox is disassembled, the following general guidelines apply:
Install Loctite #5127, #515 or equivalent at all machined split-lines unless a gasket is furnished.
Gaskets cannot be replaced with sealants or vice versa.
The gearbox should be oriented so that shafts are vertical during assembly and disassembly.
The case and cover are dowel-pinned together, with threaded puller holes provided to aid
separation.
If heat is applied when reassembling or pressing gear, do not exceed 300 degrees F on any
component.
When shimming tapered roller bearings on gearboxes so-equipped, endplay setting and
checking should be done with the shaft oriented vertically. On shafts using tapered roller
bearing kits (two bearings and two spacers) do not replace individual components in the kit
without ensuring proper bench endplay.
QuadPumpDrivesC1000HP_R04.doc Page1of4
PartsList
PartNo. Description Qty. PartNo. Description Qty
PumpDriveBaseUnit 47 Bearing,Ball 1
2 Key5/8X5/8 1 48 Bearing,Ball 1
3 Key3/4X3/4 1 49 Bearing,Ball 8
4 Spacer 1 51 DowelPin 2
10 Bracket 1 52 Elbow,90 1
11 Shaft 1 53 Bushing,TaperLock 1
12 Gear 1 54 Plug 1
13 Gear 4 55 Connector 1
14 Cover 1 57 Tube,SS 26
15 Case 1 59 Elbow,45 1
16 PumpPad(Varies) 1 61 Plug1 2
18 PumpPad(Varies) 1 62 PlugMagnetic 2
19 PumpPad(Varies) 2 63 Elbow,90 1
22 PumpHousing 1 65 SnapRing 1
23 SealHousing 1 69 Seal 1
24 Dipstick 1 70 ORing
32 Bolt 6 74 Plug,9/1618ORing 1
33 Bolt 4 76 Breather 1
34 Bolt 28 77 Tag,OilEmpty 1
36 Bolt 4 78 Pump 1
38 Nut 28 79 Bushing,TaperLock 1
40 LockWasher 4 82 Nameplate 1
42 LockWasher 10 83 Tube,SS 11.5
Pumps
Bombas
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
18July2012
Pump,Conditioning
FixedDisplacement(180cc)
PartNo.40344
Service
Seatrax recommends replacing these pumps
rather than repairing them. Seatrax suggests
that a spare be kept on hand in case of failure
or as a normal-wear replacement part.
Please contact the Seatrax Service department
for information on installation, adjustment and
pressure setting of replacement units.
Installation
It may be necessary to clock a new pump so the suction and discharge sides are positioned
differently than shipped. To do this:
1. Remove the 4 bolts from the back of the
housing. DO NOT pull the sections apart.
2. Gently rotate the sections to the correct
positions and reinstall the bolts.
3. Torque the bolts to 187 Newton meters.
4. Install new O-ring or gasket before installing
conditioning pump onto pump drive.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
18July2012
Pump,HighPressure
VariableVolume(260cc/Rev.Max)
PartNo.40387

Service
Because of the close tolerances of this pump, rebuilding in the field is NOT recommended: this
pump should be replaced.
Information follows on setting pressure for this pump, however please contact the Seatrax Service
department for further information on installation, adjustment and pressure setting of replacement
units.
SettingPressure
Locate the pump, corresponding control valve and brake actuator.
1. On the brake actuator, disconnect and plug the line running from the brake release valve to the
brake release actuator.
2. Figure 1. shows the pressure regulator assembly which includes the pressure compensator.
Locate the compensator on the pump there may be a cone-shaped cover over it that must be
removed. Loosen the jam nut and screw this in all the way.
3. On the control valve, locate the pressure relief valve cartridge this may be covered by a
disposable cap. Loosen the jam nut and back out the adjustment screw one full turn.
4. Start the engine and let it run for five minutes. Have the operator drive the corresponding hoist
in the full down position at full throttle. The pressure should read about 2,000 psi, which should
be maintained during the complete adjustment process. Since the brake release line has been
disconnected, the hoist should not move.
5. On the control valve, slowly turn in the screw until the pressure reaches 5,800 psi. Lock the jam
nut at this pressure.
6. Return to the pump and back out the adjustment screw until the pressure drops to 5,400 psi.
Lock down the jam nut. Note: 60 Series boom hoist pumps are set to 5,000 psi.
7. Reconnect the brake release line. Recheck pressures.
Pressure adjustment on the pump and valve is now complete.

Part# Description
A PumpDischargePort11/2
G ControlPressurePort9/16
LG1 LoadLimitingControl,Negative
M HighPressureGaugePort9/16
R CaseVentPort9/16
S SuctionPort4
T1 CaseDrainPort15/16
T2 CaseDrainPort15/16
Y PilotPressurePort9/16
Z PowerSettingControlPort
Pump Parts List
Item No. Description

1 Rotary Group
2 Port Plate with Adapter
3 Regulator
4 Hydraulic Control
5 Hydraulic Control
7 Cover with Accessories
40 Shuttle Valve
10 Housing
12 Impeller, Left Hand Rotation
13 Seal Disk
30 Shaft Key
20 Threaded Pin
21 Threaded Pin
22 Seal Lock Num
23 Cylinder Pin
24 Locking Screw
28 Retaining Ring
29 Retaining Ring
31 Shim, 42 X52 X0,1
31 Shim, 42 X52 X0,2
31 Shim, 42 X52 X1
Page 4 of 12
Rotary Group
Item No. Description Item No. Description

1 Cylinder with Control Plate 24 Retaining Plate
2 Piston-Slipper Pad 25 Retaining Ball
11 Cup-Spring Stack 30 Retaining Segment
12 Cradle 31 Plain Roller Bearing
14 Drive Shaft 32 Cradle Bearing Assembly (Set)
15 Bearing Flange 36 Retaining Ring
16 Cover 37 Retaining Ring
17 Wire 38 Shaft Seal Ring
18 Joint Pin 39 O-Ring
20 1.2 Shim 40 O-Ring
20 1.0 Shim 46 Clamping Pin
20 0.8 Shim 47 Socket-Head Screw
20 0.6 Shim
Page 5 of 12
Port Plate w/Accessories

5 Port Plate, Left-Hand Rotation
6 Valve Bushing
10 Plain Roller Bearing
11 O-Ring
12 Cylinder Pin
13 Cylinder Pin
14 Socket-Head Screw
15 Double Break-Off Pin
16 Locking Screw
17 Locking Screw
18 Orifice
Page 6 of 12
Regulator

1 Control Element 50 Socket-Head Screw
2 Control Element 51 Clamping Pin
4 Measuring Piston 52 Double Break-Off Pin
5 Control Element 53 O-Ring
10 Control Housing 54 O-Ring
20 Angle Lever 60 Retaining Ring
21 Bearing Bolt 61 O-Ring
22 Bearing Bushing 66 Orifice
Page 7 of 12
Control Element No. 1

1 Control Bush
2 Control Piston
4 Spring Collar
5 Pressure Spring
6 Pressure Spring
7 Connecting Piece
8 Threaded Pin
9 Control Piston
11 Seal Lock Nut
12 O-Ring
13 O-Ring
15 Socket-Head Screw
Page 8 of 12
Control Element No. 2 Control Element No. 3

1 Locking Screw 1 Locking Screw
2 Control Piston 2 Control Piston
3 Spring Bolt 3 Spring Bolt
5 Pressure Spring 5 Pressure Spring
6 Pressure Spring 10 Threaded Pin
10 Threaded Pin 11 Seal Lock Nut
11 Seal Lock Nut 12 O-Ring
12 0-Ring
Page 9 of 12
Measuring Piston Shuttle Valve

1 Measuring Piston 1 Connecting Piece
2 Setting Bush 2 Bush
3 Bolt 3 Valve Poppet
10 Roller 5 O-Ring
11 Retaining Disk
Page 10 of 12
Hydraulic Control No. 1
Hydraulic Control No. 2
Hydraulic Control No. 1 Hydraulic Control No. 2

1 Positioning Piston 1 Return Piston
2 Rod 161,80 2 Return Rod
2 Rod 162,00 2 Return Rod
2 Rod 161,60 2 Return Rod, 184,60
2 Rod 161,20 2 Return Rod, 184,80
2 Rod 161,00 2 Return Rod,
2 Rod 160,80 3 Pressure Spring
3 Pressure Spring
Page 11 of 12
Cover Plate w/Accessories

1 Cover
3 Socket-Head Screw
5 O-Ring
Page 12 of 12
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
18July2012
Pump,Piston
VariableVolume(140cc/Rev.Max)
PartNo.40926
Service
Seatrax does not recommend attempting to service this pressure-compensated pilot pump in the
field; therefore, no repair information is given. If problems occur, customers are advised to contact
the Seatrax service department for assistance.
Please contact the Seatrax Service department for information on installation, adjustment and
pressure setting of replacement units.
Filters
Filtros
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
26July2005
FilterAssembly,HighPressure
PartNo.40577
Maintenance
The filter unit is equipped with a visual filter condition indicator
that turns red when the filter becomes clogged. The housing is
equipped with a manual reset monitor that will stay red until reset
by hand. The indicator should be checked daily.
If the element becomes clogged, the flow diverts via a bypass
valve around the element.
Once the indicator changes to red replace the filter immediately,
check the tank for contamination and check the pressure from the
corresponding pump.
40577.doc Page1of2
Service
The following procedure covers changing the filter element:
1. Stop the cranes power unit/primer mover.
2. Relieve pressure in the system.
3. Use a wrench on the hexagon-fitting cast into the bottom
of the filter bowl to loosen the bowl. Unscrew the filter
bowl from the filter head.
4. Remove and discard filter element: it is NOT re-useable.
5. Center new element in filter bowl.
6. Inspect cover O ring and back-up ring; replace if
necessary. Apply a light coat of grease on seals and
install.
7. Replace bowl and tighten with a wrench.
8. Start prime mover. Maximize the pressure in the system to
check for leaks.
PartsList
PART# DESCRIPTION
1 ContaminationIndicator
2 FilterHead
3 BypassValve
4 FilterElement
PartNo.40309for10MicronElement(Option)
PartNo.40582for5MicronElement(Standard)
5 SealKit(2part)
6 FilterBowl
40577.doc Page2of2
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
16March2006
FilterAssembly,MainReturn
PartNo.40585
Maintenance
This filter unit is equipped with a visual filter
condition indicator that turns from green to red as the
filter becomes clogged. The operator should check the
filter condition on a daily basis and schedule
replacement once the indicator begins to change from
green to red.
NOTE: the filter indicator should be checked with the
engine/prime mover running.
Service
When servicing a filter, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the cranes power unit.
2. Relieve pressure in the filter and line
3. Drain the filter by cautiously removing the drain
port.
4. Rotate cover counter-clockwise, and lift carefully
to remove it.
5. Remove and DISCARD the filter element: it is
NOT re-useable.
6. Center new element (P/N: 40133) in filter
housing.
7. Inspect cover O-ring and replace if necessary.
8. Apply a light coat of grease on O-ring and install.
9. Replace cover and torque hand tight.
10. Start prime mover and check for leaks.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
16March2006
FilterAssembly,ControlCircuit
PartNo.40587
Maintenance
Replace the filter element when the visual indicator is red instead of green.
Service
When servicing the filter, use the following
procedure:
1. Stop the cranes power unit/prime mover.
2. Relieve pressure in the filter line
3. Drain bowl by carefully removing the drain
plug.
4. Rotate bowl counter-clockwise and remove.
5. Remove filter element from bowl and
DISCARD: the element is not re-useable.
6. Inspect bowl seal and replace if necessary.
Grease and install seal.
7. Insert new element (P/N: 40135) in housing.
8. Replace bowl and hand tighten.
9. Replace and tighten drain plug.
10. Start engine/prime mover and check for
leaks.
Motors
Motores
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
23July2009
Motor,Slew
1.5Gears
PartNo.40113

Service
Seatrax recommends replacing these motors rather than attempting repairs in the field. If a fault
develops, please contact our Service Department for service or replacement. This motor is suggested
typically as part of the Two Year Spares List.
Customers who choose to order parts should refer to the Specific Assembly Drawings for item
numbers and part descriptions.
PartNo.40113
Order Parts by using motor part number and required item numbers with descriptions listed below.
Notes
This motor is ported through the rear cover (2) - not the gear housing (3) but the parts are similar.
#21: Lip seal must be flush with face of recess. For adhesive instructions see HE-STD 35-21
1/4 NPT drain must be connected to low pressure tank return unless the motor is used in one
direction and back pressure is less than 100 psi.
#35: Torque the plug per HE-STD 30-1.1 For adhesive instructions see HD STD 35-20.1
#36: Flat side of seal retainer must face seal.
OrderPartsfora40113Motorwith1.5Gears
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY
1 Housing,SEC 1 25 RingSeal 2
2 Housing,PEC 1 26 Bearing,Roller 4
3 Housing,Gear 1 27 Seal,SQR 2
10 Set,GearShaft 1 28 Seal,SQRSTR 4
15 Washer 4 29 THRPL 2

16 CapScrew 4 30 NamePlate 1
20 BOM,Component 1 31 DriveScrews 2
21 LipSeal 1 34 DowelPin 4
22 CheckAssembly 2 35 NPTPlug 1
23 BallBearing 1 36 RetainerSeal 1
24 SnapRing 1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
29July2003
Motor,Hoist
PartNo.40410
Service
All piston motors have a micro-finished interior surface. Any damage to this surface will affect
motor performance.
develops, please contact our Service Department for service or replacement. This motor is
suggested typically as part of the Two Year Spares List.
When installing a new unit, replace the O-ring (80031) and lubricate the splines with anti-seize
compound.
Customers who choose to order parts should refer to the Specific Assembly Drawings for
item numbers and part descriptions.
FunctionalDescription
This Fixed Displacement Bent Axis Piston Motor is designed to produce torque at the shaft in
open or closed hydraulic circuits. The motor basically consists of the housing (1), the port
plate (2), and the rotary group (3-8).
The cylinder barrel (6) rotates on the control plate (7) which has two kidney shaped slots, one
inlet and outlet. The motor is rotated with a fluid flow to the inlet port A or B. This fluid via
the inlet kidney in control plate (7) extends the piston. In the bent axis principle, at any given
instant three pistons are open to the inlet kidney, three to the outlet kidney and one in the cross
over position. As the pistons (5) move in and out of their bore, the cylinder barrel (6) rotates
producing output torque to the PTO shaft (3) which is supported by the heavy duty tapered
roller bearings (4). The shaft speed is directly proportional to the input flow and inversely
proportional to the displacement (size). The output torque is dependent on the maximum
operating pressure. The center pin (8) keeps the barrel aligned and the forces balanced. The
upper most of the two ports, which varies depends on the particular installation, (9) is used as a
case drain port (T) and the lowest port accepts low-pressure hydraulic oil which acts as a motor
coolant.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
29July2003
Motor,Hoist
PartNo.40418
Service
All piston motors have a micro-finished interior surface. Any damage to this surface will affect
motor performance.
develops, please contact our Service Department for service or replacement. This motor is
suggested typically as part of the Two Year Spares List.
When installing a new unit, replace the O-ring (80031) and lubricate the splines with anti-seize
compound.
Customers who choose to order parts should refer to the Specific Assembly Drawings for
item numbers and part descriptions.
FunctionalDescription
This Fixed Displacement Bent Axis Piston Motor is designed to produce torque at the shaft in
open or closed hydraulic circuits. The motor basically consists of the housing (1), the port
plate (2), and the rotary group (3-8).
The cylinder barrel (6) rotates on the control plate (7) which has two kidney shaped slots, one
inlet and outlet. The motor is rotated with a fluid flow to the inlet port A or B. This fluid via
the inlet kidney in control plate (7) extends the piston. In the bent axis principle, at any given
instant three pistons are open to the inlet kidney, three to the outlet kidney and one in the cross
over position. As the pistons (5) move in and out of their bore, the cylinder barrel (6) rotates
producing output torque to the PTO shaft (3) which is supported by the heavy duty tapered
roller bearings (4). The shaft speed is directly proportional to the input flow and inversely
proportional to the displacement (size). The output torque is dependent on the maximum
operating pressure. The center pin (8) keeps the barrel aligned and the forces balanced. The
upper most of the two ports, which varies depends on the particular installation, (9) is used as a
case drain port (T) and the lowest port accepts low-pressure hydraulic oil which acts as a motor
coolant.
When installing a new unit, replace the O-ring (80031) and lubricate the splines with anti-seize.
Starters
Motores de arranque
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
18August2011
Starter,Electric
12VDCor24VDC
PartNo.Varies
RepresentativePhoto
Description
The diesel engine in this crane utilizes either a 12 or 24 volt DC electric starting motor actuated by
Engine Start buttons situated in both the Operators Cab and Engine House.
The exact model of starter varies it can be any of several as supplied by the engine manufacturer so
specific diagnostic and repair information cannot be provided. For repair or replacement information,
please contact the Seatrax service department for assistance determining the model.
For voltage, wiring and connection information, please refer to the Electrical Schematic and Bill of
Material' included in the General Documentation section of Data Book 1.
ElectricStarter_R01.doc Page1of1
Valves
Vlvulas
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
12March2001
DirectionalControlValve
SingleSpool
PartNo.40371
Function
This single-spool directional control valve has a spring that centers the spool when the controls are
returned to neutral. Pressure from the pump enters through port P. When the spool is centered, any
remaining pressure will be vented through the tank port T.
As the joystick is moved from neutral to pay out rope, pilot pressure will flow from the joystick to the
b port on the control valve. As pressure is applied through port b, the spool will shift from the neutral
position (upper view) toward the other side of the valve (lower view). This allows pressurized fluid to
flow from port P through the spool and out through port B.
Since Seatrax uses an open loop system, the fluid flows from port B through the motor and
counterbalance valve and returns through port A. From here it runs through the spool and out of the
valve through port T. The fluid then returns to the hydraulic oil tank.
When the joystick is released, pressure no longer flows to port b, and the control valve internal spring
will automatically center the spool.
40371.doc Page1of3
3
4
1 6
5
A. Up Port Output to Motor a. Up Signal Input from Joystick

B. Down Port Output to Motor b. Down Signal Input from
P. Pressure Input from Pump Joystick
T. Output to Tank
PartsList
ITEM# DESCRIPTION
1 Housing
2 ControlSpool
3 Seal
4 Spring
5 SpringCover
6 PressureReliefValve
40371.doc Page 2 of 3
Service
This valve does not require periodic preventative service.
If the valve requires service, this is easily accomplished by removing the Spring Cover and sliding out
the spool assembly and relief valve. Thoroughly clean the spool assembly, relief valve, and housing
(after removing the hoses) and reinstall. The spool can be lightly polished but do not round the edges
of the valve, these should stay sharp. If the spool has lengthwise groves, it may need replacement.
Since the spool is matched to the housing, if the spool requires replacement, the whole valve must be
replaced.
Adjustment
The only adjustment is the relief valve pressure. To check the pressure:
1. Disconnect the brake release hoses on the hoist controlled by this valve.
2. Pressure this hoist by operating its joystick in the down position.
3. The gauge in the cab should read between 5,300 and 5,500 psi.
If adjustment is necessary:
1. Remove the cap covering the pressure relief valve (if fitted).
2. Loosen the jam nut and use an Allen wrench to adjust the set screw: turn in to increase
pressure, or back out to lower pressure.
3. Once the pressure is set at 5,400 psi, tighten the jam nut and reconnect the brake hoses.
Pressure will vary with fluid temperature.
40371.doc Page 3 of 3
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
12March2001
DualSpool
PartNo.40372
Function
This dual-spool directional control valve has a spring that centers the spool when the controls are
returned to neutral. Pressure from the pump enters through port P. When the spool is centered, any
remaining pressure will be vented through the tank port T.
As the joystick is moved from neutral to pay out rope, pilot pressure will flow from the joystick to the
b port on the control valve. As pressure is applied through port b, the spool will shift from the neutral
position (upper view) toward the other side of the valve (lower view). This allows pressurized fluid to
flow from port P through the spool and out through port B.
Since Seatrax uses an open loop system, the fluid flows from port B through the motor and
counterbalance valve and returns through port A. From here it runs through the spool and out of the
valve through port T. The fluid then returns to the hydraulic oil tank.
When the joystick is released, pressure no longer flows to port b, and the control valve internal spring
will automatically center the spool.
40372.doc Page1of3
A. Up Port Output to Motor a. Up Signal Input from Joystick
B. Down Port Output to Motor b. Down Signal Input from
P. Pressure Input from Pump Joystick
T. Output to Tank
PartsList
ITEM# DESCRIPTION
1 Housing
2 ControlSpool
3 Seal
4 Spring
5 SpringCover
6 PressureReliefValve
40372.doc Page2of3
Service
This valve does not require periodic preventative service.
If the valve requires service, this is easily accomplished by removing the Spring Cover and sliding out
the spool assembly and relief valve. Thoroughly clean the spool assembly, relief valve, and housing
(after removing the hoses) and reinstall. The spool can be lightly polished but do not round the edges
of the valve: these should stay sharp. If the spool has lengthwise groves, it may need replacement.
Since the spool is matched to the housing, if the spool requires replacement, the whole valve must be
replaced.
Adjustment
The only adjustment is the relief valve pressure. To check the pressure:
1. Disconnect the brake release hoses on the hoist controlled by this valve.
2. Pressure this hoist by operating its joystick in the down position.
3. The gauge in the cab should read between 5,300 and 5,500 psi.
If adjustment is necessary:
1. Remove the cap covering the pressure relief valve (if fitted).
2. Loosen the jam nut and use an Allen wrench to adjust the set screw: turn in to increase
pressure, or back out to lower pressure.
3. Once the pressure is set at 5,400 psi, tighten the jam nut and reconnect the brake hoses.
Pressure will vary with fluid temperature.
40372.doc Page3of3
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
02October2012
24VDCSolenoidOperated
PartNo.40809
Description
This solenoid-operated directional spool valve assembly controls the start, stop and direction of
hydraulic fluid flow.
The assembly consists basically of a housing (1), one or two solenoids (2), control spool (3), and one
or two return springs (4).
In the de-energized condition, the control spool (3) is held in the central position or in the initial
position by the return springs (4). The control spool (3) is actuated by 24VDC wet-pin solenoids (2)
with detachable coils.
To ensure proper functioning, make sure that that the pressure chamber of the solenoid is filled with
oil.
The force of solenoid (2) acts via plunger (5) on control spool (3) and pushes the latter from its rest
position to the required end position. This enables the necessary direction of flow from P to A and B to
T or P to B and A to T.
After solenoid (2) is de-energized, return spring (4) pushes control spool (3) back to its rest position.
An optional manual override (6) allows control spool (3) to be moved without the solenoid being
energized.
ServiceandReplacement
Field servicing of this item is not recommended.
Please contact the Seatrax service department for a replacement part as well as procedures for any
necessary adjustments.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
02October2012
PressureReliefValve
PartNo.40952
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Description
This pressure relief valve bolts to the pilot circuit manifold and acts as a secondary relief against
excess pressure in the pilot circuit.
ServiceandMaintenance
This item has no regular required maintenance.
Seatrax does not recommend attempting to service this item in the field. If problems occur, please
contact the Seatrax service department for a replacement part as well as information on any necessary
adjustments and pressure setting.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
02October2012
ProportionalValve,PressureReducing
DualValve(Coil)
PartNo.40975
Description
This dual proportional pressure relief valve assembly is directly operated by means of proportional
solenoids. The valve assembly converts electrical input signals into a proportional pressure output
signal and is used for limiting the pressure in a system. The proportional solenoids are controllable via
wet pin 24VDC solenoids. They convert electrical currents proportionally into a mechanical force. An
increase in the current results in a corresponding increase in solenoid force. The set solenoid force
remains constant over the entire control stroke.
The proportional pressure relief valve assembly consists basically of two proportional solenoids (1, 2),
a housing (3), spool (4) and two valve poppets (5, 6). The force of the proportional solenoids (1 or 2)
acts on the valve poppet (5). The pressure building up in port A acts on the valve poppet (5) via the
radial drilling in the spool (4). The resulting pressure force acts in opposition to the solenoid force.
If the pressure force is larger than the solenoid force, then the valve poppet (5) is pushed to the left.
Hence the connection from port A to T is opened. Pilot oil is allowed to flow until both forces -
pressure force and solenoid force - are again balanced.
The relief pressure may be steplessly adjusted via the proportional solenoid (1). Please contact the
Seatrax service department for the adjustment procedure.
In the rest position - i.e., the proportional solenoid de-energized - ports A or B and P are open to T
allowing oil to flow to tank without restriction. The orifices (7) in spool (4) limit the flow from P to A
or B.
Field servicing of this item is not recommended; please contact the Seatrax service department for a
replacement part as well as procedures for any necessary adjustments. If the valve is ever removed or
replaced, it must be bled before operating the crane in order to optimize function. When servicing this
valve, avoid draining the tank lines.
The bleeding procedure is as follows:
1. Remove items 8 and 9,
2. Fill hydraulic fluid into the open drillings of items 8 and 9,
3. Refit items 8 and 9 when air bubbles no longer appear.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
02October2012
ProportionalValve,PressureReducing
SingleValve(Coil)
PartNo.40976
Description
This proportional pressure relief valve assembly is directly operated by means of proportional
solenoids. The valve assembly converts electrical input signals into a proportional pressure output
signal and is used for limiting the pressure in a system. The proportional solenoid is controllable via a
wet pin 24VDC solenoid. It converts electrical currents proportionally into a mechanical force. An
increase in the current results in a corresponding increase in solenoid force. The set solenoid force
remains constant over the entire control stroke.
The assembly consists basically of one proportional solenoid (1, 2), housing (3), spool (4) and one
valve poppet (5, 6). The force of the proportional solenoid (1 or 2) acts on the valve poppet (5). The
pressure building up in port A acts on the valve poppet (5) via the radial drilling in the spool (4). The
resulting pressure force acts in opposition to the solenoid force.
If the pressure force is larger than the solenoid force, then the valve poppet (5) is pushed to the left.
Hence the connection from port A to T is opened. Pilot oil is allowed to flow until both forces -
pressure force and solenoid force - are again balanced.
The relief pressure may be steplessly adjusted via the proportional solenoid (1). Please contact the
Seatrax service department for the adjustment procedure.
In the rest position - i.e., the proportional solenoid de-energized - ports A or B and P are open to T
allowing oil to flow to tank without restriction. The orifices (7) in spool (4) limit the flow from P to A
or B.
Field servicing of this item is not recommended; please contact the Seatrax service department for a
replacement part as well as procedures for any necessary adjustments. If the valve is ever removed or
replaced, it must be bled before operating the crane. When servicing this valve, avoid draining the tank
lines.
1. Remove items 8 and 9.
2. Fill hydraulic fluid into the open ports of items 8 and 9.
3. Refit items 8 and 9 when air bubbles no longer appear.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
02October2012
PartNo.40985
Description
This is a direct-operated directional spool valve, actuated by 24VDC solenoids with manual override.
The directional control valve is two position, four-way and uses wet pin DC solenoids with removable
coils; it controls the start, stop and direction of a flow. The directional valve consists basically of a
housing (1), one or two solenoids (2), control spool (3) and one or two return springs (4).
In the non-operated condition, the control spool (3) is held by return springs (4) in the central position
or the initial position. The control spool (3) is actuated by wet-pin solenoids (2).
To ensure proper functioning, care must be taken that the pressure chamber of the solenoid is filled
with oil.
The force of solenoid (2) acts via plunger (5) on control spool (3) and pushes it from its rest position to
the desired end position. As a result of this, the required direction of flow from P to A and from B to T
or P to B and A to T opens.
After solenoid (2) is de-energized, a return spring (4) returns the control spool (3) to its rest position.
An optional manual override (6) allows control spool (3) to be operated even when the solenoid is not
energized.
ServiceandMaintenance
This item has no regular required maintenance.
Seatrax does not recommend attempting to service this item in the field. If problems occur, please
contact the Seatrax service department for a replacement part as well as information on any necessary
adjustments.
Controls
Controles
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
13October2008
ElectronicJoystick,SingleAxis
HoistControl
PartNo.32208
Specifications
Electrical
Input 5 VDC (30%)
Output Max (+) Travel: 4.0 VDC 0.15V
Max (-) Travel: 1.0 VDC 0.15V
Centered: 2.5 VDC 0.05V
Output Impedance: 220 Ohms
Mechanical
Travel Bidirectional 30 from center
Description
This single-axis electronic joystick utilizes contact-less Hall
Effect sensors to convert operators physical control inputs into
analog electrical signals. This output ultimately directs electro-
hydraulic systems via a pulse width modulation (PWM) valve
drive board.
A spring-actuated mechanism centers the joystick automatically
when the operator removes his or her hands from the handle.
Silicone-dipping and epoxy potting protect sensitive electronic components from the effects of weather
and corrosive environments.
This joystick assembly is not field-serviceable and should be replaced if it develops a fault. A
replacement unit is typically included in the Spares or Two Year Spares inventory. For wiring and
connection information refer to the Electrical Schematic and Bill of Material' included in the General
Documentation section of Data Book 1. Please contact the Seatrax service department with any
questions.
When reinstalling a joystick on the Operators Console, ensure that the supplied mounting gasket is
used to preserve its weather resistant seal.
Adjustment
All adjustments are made at the PWM Valve Control Board. For instructions, please refer to Seatrax
part number 32210 in the Component Data section of Data Book 1.
32208_SingleAxis_R00.doc Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
10October2008
ElectronicFootPedal,Proportional
PartNo.32209
Specifications
Electrical
Input 5 VDC (30%)
Output Max (+) Travel: 4.0 VDC 0.15V
Max (-) Travel: 1.0 VDC 0.15V
Centered: 2.5 VDC 0.05 V
Mechanical
Travel Unidirectional 20
Description
This single-axis proportional control device utilizes
contact-less Hall Effect sensors to convert operators
physical control inputs into electrical signals. This output
ultimately directs electro-hydraulic systems via a pulse
width modulation (PWM) valve drive board. The half-
treadle foot pedal is sprung to return to the Neutral (Off)
position when the operator lifts his or her foot.
Silicone-dipping and epoxy potting protect sensitive electronic components from the effects of weather
and corrosive environments.
This foot pedal assembly is not field-serviceable and should be replaced if a fault develops. A
replacement unit is typically included in the Spares or Two Year Spares inventory.
For wiring and connection information refer to the Electrical Schematic and Bill of Material' included
in the General Documentation section of Data Book 1. Please contact the Seatrax service department
with any questions.
Adjustment
32209_FootPedal_R00.doc Page1of1
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
28February2014
CCM7000CraneControlModule
PWMValveControlBoard
PartNo.32210
InitialSetupandHoistSpecificAdjustment
Description
The PWM valve control board accepts analog Figure1. PWMBoardLayout
operator inputs from command sources (e.g.,
joysticks and foot pedals) and outputs pulse width
modulated signals to control electro-hydraulic
valves or pumps. The PT+ and PT- terminals
supply 5VDC of regulated electricity
LEDs
to power the attached command INDICATE
source. FUNCTION
AorB
NNNLNLLLLN
S/N NNNNNN
LEDs light whenever command/input OUTPUT
CAL # N
signals exceed the boards SIGNAL
deadband (20% of full signal
swing or change of 0.3 VDC) and
the board begins to produce an TRIM
POTS:
output signal. As a safety feature, ADJUST
board outputs will shut down Lo(A&B)
automatically should any become and
Mid(A&B) CALIBRATIONNUMBER
shorted. There is one PWM valve ONLY
control board per crane function
(e.g., boom, slew, aux, main, etc.).
The control boards are located in the cab electrical enclosure. Table 1 maps controls and functions to
their associated trim pots.
Table1.Control,FunctionandAssociatedTrimPot
Control Function LoA MidA LoB MidB
Joystick,Single Min.Downward Max.Downward Min.Upward Max.Upward
Hoist
Axis SpeedSetting SpeedSetting SpeedSetting SpeedSetting
Min.Downward Max.Downward Min.Upward Max.Upward
Boom
SpeedSetting SpeedSetting SpeedSetting SpeedSetting
Joystick,DualAxes
Min.Rightward Max.Rightward Min.Leftward Max.Leftward
Slew
SpeedSetting SpeedSetting SpeedSetting SpeedSetting
LowIdleSpeed HighIdleSpeed
FootPedal(Right) Throttle
Setting Setting N/A N/A
FootPedal(Left) Slew Min.Braking Max.Braking
(IfEquipped) Brake PressureSetting PressureSetting N/A N/A
CCM7000_PWMBoardAdjust_32210_R03.doc Page1of3
RepairandAdjustment
The valve control board assembly is not field-serviceable, and should be replaced if a fault develops.
Please contact the Seatrax service department with any questions.
If the board has been replaced or requires adjustment, then carefully review the following step-by-step
instructions for both initial setting of the PWM drive boards and hoist-specific fine-tuning. It is
important that you read this entire manual prior to attempting set-up.
GeneralGuidelines
Adjustment requires two people: an operator to run the crane and an electrically knowledgeable
technician to perform the adjustments.
Make all adjustments with the crane running.
Fine-tuning is accomplishing by adjusting trim pots, each of which has a 25-turn range.
o Turning trim pots counterclockwise will decrease the output and clockwise will increase the
output.
Joysticks: four trim pots need to be adjusted on each board: LO A, LO B, MID A & MID B
Foot pedals: these command sources use only LO A for their low-side adjustments and MID A for
their high-side adjustment.
Do NOT adjust the RMP, FREQ, Hi A and Hi B trim pots!
InitialAdjustment
With the crane running, adjust each PWM board as follows:
1. Identify the PWM board and Output A or B for each item (e.g., boom, main, aux, etc.) being
adjusted.
2. Disconnect power before proceeding.
3. Hook up a multimeter in series on the PWM output (A or B) (see Figure 2) and set it to read mA.
4. Turn power back on to the system.
5. Have someone move the joystick until the LED associated with the output comes on and hold it in
this position.
6. While holding the joystick adjust the trim pot LO (A or B) until the current (mA) reading is 460.
7. Move the joystick to max output and hold it in this position, and adjust MID (A or B) trim pot until
the current reading is 733mA.
Figure2.MultimeterConnectionstoPWMBoardInitialAdjustment
This procedure is a good starting point for these boards. However, additional LO and MID trim pot
adjustments will probably be needed to achieve the desired low and high speeds of the hoist.
HoistSpecificFineTuningAdjustment
With the crane running, fine-tune each PWM board as follows:
1. Calibrate the LO A & B:
a. If the hoist moves too fast at low speed:
i. Have the operator move the joystick until the light turns on for the associated output and
hold it in this position.
ii. Turn the LO trim pot counter clockwise until the desired low speed is achieved.
b. If the hoist moves too slow at low speed:
i. Have the operator move the joystick until the light turns on for the associated output and
ii. Turn the Low trim pot clockwise until the desired low speed is achieved.
2. Calibrate the MID A & B:
a. If the hoist moves too fast at high speed:
i. Have the operator move the joystick full stroke in the direction needing adjustment and
ii. Turn the MID trim pot counter clockwise until the desired high speed is achieved.
b. If the hoist moves too slow at high speed:
i. Have the operator move the joystick full stroke in the direction needing adjustment and
ii. Turn the MID trim pot clockwise until the desired high speed is achieved.
3. Run the hoist at high and low speeds once this procedure is complete to ensure proper operation.
Thehighandlowtrimpotsaffecteachothersoitmaytakeafewtriestoachievethe
desiredresults.
4. Repeat this procedure as necessary for each hoist.
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
08March2011
ElectronicJoystick,DualAxes
BoomandSlewControl
PartNo.32207,30722&32551
Specifications
Electrical
Input 5 VDC (30%)
Output Max (+) Travel: 4.0 VDC
Max (-) Travel: 1.0 VDC
Centered: 2.5 VDC
Mechanical
Travel On-Axis 20
Between Axes 27
Description
This dual-axes electronic joystick with trigger and rocker switch
utilizes contact-less Hall Effect sensors to convert operators
physical control inputs into electrical signals. This output
ultimately directs electro-hydraulic systems via two separate
pulse width modulation (PWM) valve drive boards. These joysticks are available in several part
numbers - identical externally - differing only in internal wiring of trigger and rocker switches to suit
control variations.
A spring-actuated mechanism centers the joystick automatically when the operator removes his or her
hands from the handle. Silicone-dipping and epoxy potting protect sensitive electronic components
from the effects of weather and corrosive environments.
This joystick assembly is not field-serviceable and should be replaced if a fault develops. A
replacement unit is typically included in the Spares or Two Year Spares inventory. For wiring and
connection information refer to the Electrical Schematic and Bill of Material' included in the General
Documentation section of Data Book 1. Please contact the Seatrax service department with any
questions.
When reinstalling a joystick on the Operators Console, ensure that the supplied mounting gasket is
used to preserve its weather resistant seal.
Adjustment
322073072232551_DualAxes_R02.doc Page1of1
Additional Equipment
Equipo adicional
Phone: 713 896 6500 Fax: 713 896 6611
21April2009
KickspaceHeater
PartNo.32005
Description
This crane is equipped with one or more thermostat-controlled, fan-forced kickspace heaters.
Each heater is rated at 3,840 BTU per hour. For operator comfort, the element heats up before
the fan turns on.
If problems occur, customers are advised to contact the Seatrax service department.
Operation
Turn the thermostat knob clockwise to increase temperature to a comfortable level and
counter-clockwise to decrease it. As a safety measure, the heaters are equipped with thermal
protection which stops the heater during overheat conditions and automatically resets once the
temperature has decreased to a safe level.
32005_KickspaceHeater.doc Page1of1
Seatrax Part No. 32006
Installation and Operation Manual
Room Air Conditioners
AUTO FAN
CONTINUOUS
AUTO
C F
SYSTEM FAN MODE
POWER
FAN SPEED SCHEDULE
Standard Chassis Models

115-Volt: S S 08 , S S10, S S12, S S14, SM15
208-230-Volt: S S12, S S15 , SM18 , SM21, SM24
SL 22, SL 24, SL 28, SL 36
115-Volt: Y S10
208-230-Volt: E S12, E S15 , Y S12 , E M18
Y M18, E M24, E L 36, Y L 24
your unit to assure quiet operation, the greatest circulation of cool, dry air, and the most economic operation.
THANK YOU, on behalf of our entire company,

for making such a wise purchase.
Register your air conditioner

Model information can be found on the name
plate behind the front cover.
Please complete and mail the owner
registration card furnished with this product,
or register online at www.friedrich.com.
For your future convenience, record the
model information here.
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
PURCHASE DATE
MODEL NUMBER VOLTS 115 COOLING HEATING REFRIGERANT XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX FUSE PROTECTED
AIR CONDITIONING CO. YS10M10A 60 HZ / 1 PH BTH/HR 6500 BTH/HR 6500 30.1 OZ R410A 600 PSIG HS XXXXXXXXX CIRCUITS USE 15A X
UL XX
SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS SERIAL NUMBER VOLTS MIN 108 EER 12.0 EER 10.4 300 PSIG LS XXXXXXXXXX TIME DELAY FUSE XXXXX
ASSEMBLED IN MEXICO LICY00008 AMPS 8.0 AMPS 7.0 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
MODEL NUMBER
AIR CONDITIONING CO. YS10N10
SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS SERIAL NUMBER
ASSEMBLED IN MEXICO LICY00008
2
Safety Precautions
Your safety and the safety of others are very important.

We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all
safety messages.
This is a safety Alert symbol.
This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others.
All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol with the word WARNING
or CAUTION. These words mean:
Indicates a hazard which, if not avoided, can result in severe personal injury or
WARNING death and damage to product or other property.
Indicates a hazard which, if not avoided, can result in personal injury and
CAUTION damage to product or other property.
All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you
what will happen if the instructions are not followed.
NOTICE Indicates property damage can occur if instructions are not followed.
WARNING
Refrigeration system
under high pressure
Do not puncture, heat, expose to flame or
incinerate.
Only certified refrigeration technicians should
service this equipment.
R410A systems operate at higher pressures
than R22 equipment. Appropriate safe
service and handling practices must be used.
Only use gauge sets designed for use with
R410A. Do not use standard R22 gauge sets.
3
WARNI NG: Before Operating Your Unit
WARNING NOTICE
Electrical Shock Hazard Do not use the LCDI device as an ON/OFF switch.
Make sure your electrical receptacle has the
same configuration as your air conditioners
plug. If different, consult a Licensed Electrician.
Failure to adhere to this precaution may cause
premature equipment malfunction.
Do not use plug adapters.
Do not use an extension cord.
Do not remove ground prong.
Once plugged in, the unit will operate normally without the need to reset
Always plug into a grounded 3 prong oulet. the LCDI device. If the LCDI device fails to trip when tested or if the power
Failure to follow these instructions can result in supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced with a new power supply cord
death, fire, or electrical shock.
from the manufacturer. Contact our Technical Assistance Line at (800)
541-6645. To expedite service, please have your model number available.
M ake sure the wiring is adequate for your unit. Table 1.
If you have fuses, they should be of the time delay type. Before you install CIRCUIT RATING REQUIRED
or relocate this unit, be sure that the amperage rating of the circuit breaker OR TIME DELAY WALL
or time delay fuse does not exceed the amp rating listed in Table 1. MODEL FUSE RECEPTACLE
NEMA
DO NOT use an extension cord. AMP VOLT
NO.
The cord provided will carry the proper amount of electrical power to the SS08, SS10
unit; an extension cord may not. SS12, SS14 15 125 5-15R
YS10, SM15
M ake sure that the receptacle is compatible with SS12, SS15
SM18, SM21 15 250 6-15R
the air conditioner cord plug provided. SL22, SL24
Proper grounding must be maintained at all times. Two prong receptacles SM24, SL28
ES12, ES15 20 250 6-20R
The grounded receptacle should meet all national and local codes and YS12
ordinances. You must use the three prong plug furnished with the air SL36, EM18
conditioner. Under no circumstances should you remove the ground EM24, EL36 30 250 6-30R
prong from the plug. YM18, YL24
Test the power cord
All Friedrich room air conditioners are shipped from the factory with a Figure 1
Leakage Current Detection Interrupter (LCDI) equipped power cord. The
LCDI device on the end of the cord meets the UL and NEC requirements
for cord connected air conditioners. RESET
To test your power supply cord:

1. Plug power supply cord into a grounded 3 prong outlet. TEST
2. Press RESET (See Figure 1).

WARNING:
3. Press TEST, listen for click; the RESET button trips and pops out. TEST BEFORE EACH USE!
1. PRESS REST BUTTON.
2. PLUG LCDI INTO POWER
RECEPTACLE.
4. Press and release RESET (Listen for click; RESET button latches 3. PRESS TEST BUTTON,
RESET BUTTON SHOULD
and remains in). The power cord is ready for use. POP UP.
4. PRESS RESET BUTTON
FOR USE.
DO NOT USE IF ABOVE TEST
FAILS.
WHEN GREEN LIGHT IS ON.
IT IS WORKING
PROPERLY!
FRR072
4
Standard Filter Cleaning / Installation Instructions
STEP 1. STEP 2.
NOTE:
Figure 2 Figure 4
FILTER
FILTER
GRIP
FRR071
Figure 3
FRR047
STEP 3. Swing the front frame open. Clean the front frame by washing
Figure 5
FILTER
GRIP
TOP TAB
HANDLE
FRONT
FRR052
FRAME WITH
STANDARD
MESH FILTER
FRR048
STEP 4.
NOTE:
the tab in the frame stops the handle from sliding in, slide the
handle from the other direction. Do not force the handle into
the frame.
STEP 5.
the inside of the front door.
5
Premium Carbon Filter Installation Instructions
STEP 1. STEP 4.
STEP 2.
in Figure 4. NOTE:
STEP 3.
STEP 5.
as shown in Figure 6. and slide the assembly into the unit as per the instructions
on the door.
NOTE: Make sure the frame with the mesh is facing towards you.
NOTE:
the tab in the frame stops the handle from sliding in, slide the
handle from the other direction. Do not force the handle into
the frame.
Figure 6 Figure 7
FRONT FRAME WITH

MESH FILTER
FRR050 FRR051
6
Control Panel Operation
Lets check out how to control your air conditioner. On the control panel, just above the POWER , is a liquid crystal display (LCD). All of the control panel function
buttons and mode icons can be viewed in Figure 8.
Power On Press the button to turn on the air conditioner. The power button illuminates to indicate that the power is on. The backlight on the power switch
will automatically dim to 20% intensity after 15 seconds of inactivity. The remote control can also be used to turn power ON / OFF (See Remote Control).
Display
inactivity, the display dims to 20% intensity. After an additional 120 seconds, the display switches off. Touching any button automatically changes the display
to full brightness.
There are three control push buttons on each side of the display.
Figure 8
SYSTEM FAN MODE FAN SPEED TEMPERATURE TIMER / SCHEDULE

Cycles between Sets fan to either: Sets fan speed: Increment UP Turns ON or OFF
AUTO, HEAT, - Cycle automatically LOW, MED,
COOL, or FAN - Run continuously HIGH or AUTO TEMPERATURE: IR WINDOW
: ON / OFF
ONLY (if equipped) Increment DOWN Do not block Turns unit on/off
(if equipped)
SYSTEM
FAN
MODE
SET POINT
FAN TIMER
AUTO SPEED
SPEED SCHEDULE
COOL HEAT FAN CONTROL MAINTENANCE

ONLY LOCKED REQUIRED
WI-FI
OPERATING
(if equipped)
AUTO
WAIT
Automatically switches
between cool & heat AUTO
F 2 DIGIT DISPLAY
AUTO FAN C Shows Setting for:
CONTINUOUS AM
- Set Point (Temperature)
PM - Room Temperature
- Clock (AM/PM)
ON OFF
SET POINT SCHEDULE
ROOM TEMP SCHEDULE ON
FAN SPEED
Selected fan speed AUTO SPEED CHECK $MART
FILTER TIMER ON
AUTO SPEED FILTER $MART OPERATING

Automatically Check / Clean (if equipped)
selects best fan
cooling speed
7
Khl Control Options
The Khl gives you a variety of options for control, programming, and The Residential (40 Hr. Work Week) Schedule has four (4) time periods: 06:00,
scheduling including wireless capabilities 08:00, 18:00, and 22:00. This option will cause your Khl Q unit to raise the room
temperature temporarily to 85F during the hours when most people are away
Wireless Programming and Control: at work, lower them again to 78F prior to the time when most people will return
. The new FriedrichLink Adapter (sold seperately) allows you to conviently home, and then raise slightly to 82F to maintain a comfortable temperature
control, program and monitor your air conditioning unit remotely from a overnight.
smartphone or computer. The Commercial (5-Day Business Week) Schedule has two (2) time periods:
FriedrichLink Adapter accessory available through Friedrich authorized 07:00 and 18:00. This option will cause your air conditioner to raise temperatures
retailers or www.friedrich.com. See FriedrichLink Adapter section on to 84F after typical working hours and on weekends when commercial spaces
www.friedrich.com for complete details. are typically unoccupied.
(See Control Panel Operation Instructions Section)
Pre-Programmed Scheduling Options:
Customizable Programming Options:
Your units digital control comes equipped with a 24-hour timer and two pre-
programmed 7-day energy management options. Customizable schedules, with up to four temperature adjustments per day, can
either be uploaded to the unit via the air conditioners built-in micro USB interface
24-Hour Timer or conveniently transmitted wirelessly using the new FriedrichLink Adapter
The 24-hour timer allows you to turn the unit off and on at pre-set times by accessory, greatly simplifying the programming of one or multiple units.
setting an on and off time on the unit control panel. (See page 10 for details on See Figure 9.
timer set-up.)
See www.friedrich.com for complete Customizable
Pre-programmed Energy Management
Programming instructions.
Your unit comes from the factory with two (2) Pre-programmed Energy
Management settings are shown in Addendum 1 (Residential & Commercial
Schedule Table).
Energy Management Schedule Options are:
1. Residential Schedule 40 Hr. Work Week
2. Commercial Schedule 5-Day Business Week
Figure 9
MODEL NUMBER VOLTS 115 COOLING HEATING REFRIGERANT XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX FUSE PROTECTED
AIR CONDITIONING CO. YS10M10A 60 HZ / 1 PH BTH/HR 6500 BTH/HR 6500 30.1 OZ R410A 600 PSIG HS XXXXXXXXX CIRCUITS USE 15A X
UL XX
SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS SERIAL NUMBER VOLTS MIN 108 EER 12.0 EER 10.4 300 PSIG LS XXXXXXXXXX TIME DELAY FUSE XXXXX
ASSEMBLED IN MEXICO LICY00008 AMPS 8.0 AMPS 7.0 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
FriedrichLink Adapter
8
FAN ONLY MODE
Control Panel Operation Instructions
SYSTEM - The button allows you to sequentially select up to four
SYSTEM
modes of operation:
AUTO - AUTO - Not available on some models
COOL
HEAT Not available on some models
FAN ONLY
AUTO MODE
FRR105
- AUTO -
When in the - AUTO-, COOL or HEAT or FAN ONLY mode,
F
you can also select FAN MODE, FAN SPEED, TIMER SCHEDULE,
AUTO FAN
and . The SYSTEM MODE does not change.
FA N
SET POINT FAN MODE The MODE button allows you to select between AUTO FAN and
CONTINUOUS modes.
AUTO FAN (No Cooling Demand)
FRR204
COOL MODE
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR112
When in the AUTO FAN mode, the fan only operates when the system has
a demand to cool or heat the room. Note: the fan is off (no fan speed icon),
indicating no command for cooling or heating.
FRR103
HEAT MODE AUTO FAN (Cooling Demand)
F F
AUTO FAN AUTO FAN
SET POINT SET POINT
FRR104 FRR106
System has a demand for cooling. The fan is operating at a medium speed.
N
SPEED
FAN
FAN SPEED - Depending on your model, the SPEED
button allows you to toggle between four or five modes of operation: LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH and AUTO.
4 Speed
AUTO
3 Speed
AUTO
When fan speed AUTO FAN mode (SYSTEM mode AUTO, COOL or HEAT) is selected, fan speed automatically varies depending on the difference between
the units set point on the control panel and the actual room temperature. When the system detects a wide difference between the set point and the actual
room temperature the fan speed increases to HIGH for a period of time. The fan speed decreases, in step, as the temperature difference decreases. When the
room temperature matches the system's set point, fan speed returns to the original setting.
9
CONTINUOUS
The
CONTINUOUS
SET POINT
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR113
In the CONTINUOUS fan mode, the fan operates all the time. The system
FRR123
UP and DOWN - arrows - Pressing either or button changes
the system's set point (desired room temperature). These buttons are also The icon illuminates.
used to make system parameter changes latter in this manual.
system ON and OFF time window. For example, you can command the
system to turn ON at 8:15 am and turn OFF at 1:30 pm everyday.
The SCHEDULE function allows you to choose either Residential (option
F
2) or Commercial (option 3). The Residential and Commercial options are
AUTO FAN
described later in this manual.
SET POINT
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Figure 10
FRR100
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR101
One press equals 1 degree of change. Holding the button down for more
than 0.6 seconds starts the fast increment/decrement change of the set SET TIME- To adjust the unit's time press and hold the HOUR and the MIN
point. buttons for three seconds (Refer to Figure 10).
TIMER SCHEDULE - The button allows you to select the TIMER

or SCHEDUL E function.
The
AM
FRR128
The unit's current hour displays. Use the or buttons to adjust the
hour. To change from AM to PM continue to increment (roll) the display.
Press TIMER SET (Refer to Figure 10) button to display the unit's current
FRR122
The icon illuminates. minutes.
10
To switch from degrees Fahrenheit (F) to Celsius (C), press or
buttons for three seconds.
FRR129
Use the or buttons to adjust the minutes. The clock is now set FRR133
for 11:25 AM. Press TIMER SET (Refer to Figure 10) button to display the
unit's day setting. from F to C, press the or button within 5 seconds.
FRR134
FRR130
Use the or buttons to adjust the day (1 to 7). The day setting is up
to the you the user. If you set the current day = 1, and today is Tuesday,
then Day 1 = Tuesday.
C
AUTO FAN
F
SET POINT
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR135
The F icon goes away and the C icon illuminates on the normal display.
FRR131
DIM Function
Press TIMER SET (Refer to Figure 10) button to exit and save the SET
TIME function. The TIMER SET button must be pressed within 15 second. There are three separate display brightness levels, AUTO, 20% and full
Button inactivity for more than 15 seconds causes the display to time out (100%). To change the DIM setting, press the Power button for three
and return to the normal operating display. seconds.
F - C Select
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR192
FRR132
The 1 indicates a DIM setting of Auto (factory default). Use the or
buttons to change the setting.
11
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR193 FRR120
The 2 indicates a DIM setting of 20%. Press the TIMER SET button within This means there is a compressor demand but the system is not ready
15 seconds to save the setting. Button inactivity for more than 15 seconds for the compressor to operate. For example a short power outage, the
causes the display to time out and return to the normal operating display. compressor will not restart until the internal pressures of the compressor
are at the proper level.
FRR179
FRR194 If the room freeze protection is active, the display indicates this by showing
The 3 indicates a DIM setting of 100% (full brightness). Press the TIMER
SET (Refer to Figure 10) button within 15 seconds to save the setting. SET (Figure 10) button overrides the freeze protection alert for 5 minutes.
Button inactivity for more than 15 seconds causes the display to time out This alert appears when the room is too cold for the air conditioner to
and return to the normal operating display. operate properly. Another cause of alert occurs when to much ice builds
up on the unit's condenser.
Alerts Lock Control Panel

FA N
To lock the front panel controls, press and hold the SPEED + buttons
CHECK
FI LT ER icon displays. for 3 seconds. The lock icon illuminates to indicate the locked status.
F
AUTO FAN
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
SET POINT
FILTER
16
FRR1
FRR118
FA N To unlock, presses and hold the FA N
SPEED + buttons for 3 seconds.
The alert can be dismissed by pressing the MODE and for 3 seconds.
When maintenance is required, a service icon appears on screen.
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR117
The lock icon disappears to indicate unlocked status.
12
External Control Status 3. Commercial Schedule - When selected the unit follows a pre-
programmed set of operational parameters that covers 7 days of
The $MART icon illuminates to indicate that the system is being controlled the week with 2 time windows during each day. Each time window
remotely. !" #
$
79
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
$MART
1 SCHEDULE
FRR125
FRR137
To change the
*
<>?#@J?VXZ?
79
F
button for 3 sec.
AUTO FAN If the Schedule function is available, the system displays the icon +
SCHEDULE icon. The display indicates the schedule function that is active.
SET POINT To change to an alternate schedule (2 or 3), press the or button.

If the Schedule function is not available, the Timer icon shows without
the SCHEDULE icon.
[\
* <>?#?]^ $_`
FRR126 If there is no button activity for 15 seconds, the function will time out and
The icon illuminates to indicate that the system is receiving a Wi-Fi
[

[ *
connection. display reverts to the normal display.
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
Z
![^ *
2
Schedule, Error Mode, Test Mode, and Maintenance Menu). The functions
mentioned in the following section may or may not be available depending
on the air conditioner model.
Timer/Schedule Select SCHEDULE
79
FRR138
F
AUTO FAN or button, within 15 second of pressing the

] {*

SET POINT |[\
* <>?#?]^ $_`
79
FRR136
F

AUTO FAN
1. Timer (factory default)

SET POINT
the start, stop and day window can be found latter in this manual.
2. Residential Schedule - When selected the unit follows a pre-
programmed set of operational parameters that covers 7 days of
the week with 4 time windows during each day. Each time window FRR136
!" #
$ The display reverts to the normal display.
13
79
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR139 FRR143
\ button is pressed the system operates in the The display returns to normal once the settings are saved.
mode (1, 2 or 3) you programmed.
Timer Stop Time
Modify the TIMER Function
Timer Start Time
79
F
AUTO FAN
79
F
AUTO FAN SET POINT
SET POINT
FRR144

}
><]^
FRR140 $_` { ][
the system is in the Schedule mode.

}
JX#]
^ $_` { ][
when the system is in the Schedule mode.
11
4
AM
OFF
AM
ON
FRR145
Use the or ]~ } <>?#?]

FRR141 ^ $_`~
Use the or ]~ } <>?#?]
^ $_$_`~
21 ON
55 OFF
FRR146
Use the or ]~ } <>?#?

FRR142 ]^ $_`$\[
Use the or ]~ } <>?#? $$>
]^ $_`$\[
|$>
14
79 79
F F
AUTO FAN AUTO FAN
SET POINT SET POINT SCHEDULE
FRR147 FRR151
The display returns to normal once the settings are saved. The Timer ]
{ [
Timer - Scheduler Control Block
]
are made, press the button to re-activate Timer or Schedule mode.
79 79
F
F
AUTO FAN
AUTO FAN
SET POINT SCHEDULE

SET POINT
FRR148
FRR152
< <>?# @J?VXZ? *
]\ button, the Timer icon begins to Schedule ON Scenarios
]

]]

79
F
AUTO FAN
SCHEDULE
SET POINT SCHEDULE
FRR153
The display shows a normal system.
FRR149
The Timer ]

{ [ <

* SCHEDULE

] and Timer icons illuminates. The control system immediately runs the
are made, press the button to re-activate Timer or Schedule mode. current period schedule parameters.
< <>?# @J?VXZ? *

]\ button, the Timer icon begins to blink.
79
F
AUTO FAN
79
F
SET POINT
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR154
FRR150

]]

15
79 79
F F
AUTO FAN AUTO FAN
SET POINT SET POINT

SCHEDULE
FRR155 FRR159
<
* SCHEDULE < * icon
and Timer icons illuminates. The control system immediately runs the illuminates. The control system continues to run.
previous (non-skip) period schedule parameters.
Scheduler OFF Scenarios
Timer ON Scenarios
79 79
F
F
AUTO FAN
AUTO FAN
SET POINT SCHEDULE

SET POINT
FRR160
FRR156
The display shows a normal system. The display shows the unit in Schedule mode.
79
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR157 FRR161
< * icon <
[^`*

Timer and SCHEDULE icons turn off. The control stays in the current state.
79
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
SCHEDULE
FRR158
The display shows a normal system. FRR162

[^`
period.
16
79 79
F F
AUTO FAN AUTO FAN
SET POINT SET POINT
FRR163 FRR167
<
[^` * < [^` *
the Timer and SCHEDULE icons turn off. The unit wakes up in the last Timer icon turns off. The display shows a normal system.
known non-schedule state.
79
F
79
AUTO FAN
F
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
SET POINT SCHEDULE
FRR168
< icon

FRR164
turns off. The control stays in the current state.
<
* and
SCHEDULE icons turn off. The unit wakes up in the last known non-schedule
state.
79
F
AUTO FAN
79
F SET POINT
AUTO FAN
SET POINT
FRR169
FRR165
Timer OFF Scenarios
FRR166

[^`
17
FAN SPEED Button - Used to sequentially select new fan speed, plus
Remote Control Operation AUTO operation. When the SPEED FA N
button is pressed, the fan speed icon
Remote Control - Refer to Figures 12 and 13 during operation description. (triangle) changes to indicate the new speed level. Fan speed automatically
varies depending on the set temperature on the control panel and the actual
Getting Started - Install two (2) AAA batteries in the battery compartment room temperature. For example if there is a big difference between your
located on the back of the unit. set temperature and the actual room temperature, the system fan speed
Operation - The remote control should be within 25 feet of the air increases to HIGH. It remains at this speed until the room temperature
conditioner for operation. (Refer to Figure 11 for effectiveness). Press the matches the set temperature.
power button to turn the remote on. The remote will automatically power SCHEDULE Button The SCHEDULE button turns the schedule function
off after 15 seconds if the buttons are not being pressed. The remote must on and off. Press the Schedule button once to turn on the Schedule
be on to control the unit. (Residential, Commercial, Timer, or Customized) that has already been
POWER Button - Turns remote and unit on and off. selected on your unit. Pressing the SCHEDULE button a second time turns
the schedule function off.
SYSTEM Button - Allows the user to sequentially select the
following: AUTO - AUTO -, COOL , HEAT , and FAN ONLY UP and DOWN Arrows - Pressing either the (UP) or (DOWN)
operations. When the button is pressed, the display indicates which mode button changes the desired room temperature. The factory preset lower
has been selected via a display message.Note that when the heating and upper limits are 60F (16C) and 99F (37C). These buttons are also
function is not available, the system will automatically skip the HEAT mode. used to navigate between function options when using the User Menu or
Maintenance Mode.
FAN MODE Button - Selects between automatic ( AUTO FAN ) or CONTINUOUS
operation. In the AUTO FAN mode, the fan only turns on and off when the
compressor operates or the heat function is enabled.
Remote Effectiveness
Hand Held Remote - Has an operating range of up to 25 ft. The infrared
NOTE: AUTO FAN is not available in the FAN ONLY Mode, the display remote control signal must have a clear path to transmit the command to
indicates CONTINUOUS . In the CONTINUOUS mode, fan speed is the air conditioning unit. The remote signal has some ability to "bounce"
determined by your selection on the SPEED
FA N
button. off of walls and furniture similar to a television remote control. The diagram
below shows the typical operating range of the control in a standard room
with 8 ft high ceilings.
Figure 11
TOP VIEW
25ft
25ft
7.5ft
SIDE VIEW 30
4ft 60 60
6ft
45
60 45 45
8ft
25ft
60
45 30 30
30
16ft
8ft
25ft
25ft 25ft
25ft
25ft
FRR080
18
Figure 12
AUTO DISPLAY
AUTO FAN
CONTINUOUS
AUTO
C F
SYSTEM FAN MODE

SYSTEM FAN MODE
POWER
TEMPERATURE POWER
TEMPERATURE
UP DOWN
FAN SPEED SCHEDULE
FAN SPEED SCHEDULE
FRR081
Figure 13
COOL HEAT FAN ONLY
ICON ICON ICON
SYSTEM
MODE
AUTO
FAN AUTO FAN

MODE CONTINUOUS
AUTO
C F
FAN
SPEED
F / C
ICONs
SCHEDULE
ICON
FRR082
19
Airflow Selection and Adjustment Figure 14
Air flow direction adjustment
left or right side of the discharge opening. Each of the banks of louvers
can be directed left, right, up or down in order to achieve the most optimum
move it in the direction that you would like the air to be directed. Please
louvers than the other.

Fresh air and exhaust control
Your air conditioner has the ability to bring fresh air into the room or exhaust
stale air out of the room. The control slide is found on the upper part of
the unit (See Figure 14).
TO BRING IN FRESH AIR Move the lever to the Fresh Air position
which allows outside air to enter the room. This is useful in fall and spring as
a means of bringing in fresh outside air when using FAN ONLY . It can also FRR008
be used in the summer with the compressor in the Cooling Mode if you wish.
TO EXHAUST INDOOR AIR Move the lever to the Exhaust
position. This will allow stale air to be expelled to the outside of the dwelling.
This is especially handy in the spring or fall when indoor air tends to get
stale, or after a social gathering involving smokers, or to remove cooking
odors.
BEST PERFORMANCE Move the lever to the Re-Circulate Position
Remote Thermostat
Remote Thermostat - An external thermostat may be added to the air
conditioner to provide remote temperature sensing and control. For
details and installation instructions, please visit www.Friedrich.com or
contact Friedrich Service at 1-800-541-6645.
20
Final Inspection & Start-up Checklist
Inspect and ensure that all components and accessories have been Heat pumps operate differently
installed properly and that they have not been damaged during the
installation progress. If your unit is a "Y", or heat pump model, there are some things that you
will want to be aware of. Some functions of a heat pump differ from your
Check the condensate water drain(s) to ensure that they are adequate unit when it is used for heating:
for the removal of condensate water, and that they meet the approval
of the end user. 1. It is normal for ice to form on the outdoor coil of the heat pump.
Moisture in the outside air, passing over the coil when very cold,
Ensure that all installation instructions concerning clearances around will form ice.
indoor coil, and outdoor coil are free from any obstructions. 2. If the outdoor temperature drops below 37 F (3 C), your heat
pump will automatically turn on the electric resistance heat. When
Ensure that the circuit breaker(s) or fuse(s) and supply circuit wire the temperature rises to 40 F (4 C), the compressor will resume
size have been sized correctly. If the unit was supplied with a power the heat pump operation. If your unit is a 115 volt model (YS10),
supply cord, insure that it is stored properly. it is designed for use in warmer climates and does not have an
Ensure that the entire installation is in compliance with all applicable electrical heat feature, and will not provide adequate heat below
national and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. 37 F (2.8 C).
Secure components and accessories, such as a decorative front Control Panel Battery Change Procedure
cover.
Remove the grille, by loosening four (4) captive screws (See Figure 45). In
Start the unit and check for proper operation of all components in
the upper left corner, remove one (1) screw on the battery retaining door
each mode of operation.
(See Figure 46). Remove and replace the battery (CR2450). Reinstall
Instruct the owner or operator of the units operation, and the the battery retaining door. Align the grille guide pins then tighten the four
manufacturer's Routine Maintenance.
Clean or replace it as necessary.
NOTE: A log for recording the dates of maintenance and/or service is
recommended.
Present the owner or operator of the equipment with the Installation Figure 45
& Operation Manual, all accessory installation instructions, and the
name, address and telephone number of the Authorized Friedrich
Warranty Service Company in the area for future reference if
necessary.
This is a warm weather appliance

Your air conditioner is designed to cool in warm weather when the outside USE HAND TOOLS
temperature is above 60 F (15.6 C) and below 115 F (46.1 C), so it won't DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN
cool a room if it is already cool outside. If you want to cool a room in the
spring or fall, select the FAN ONLY mode and set the Fresh Air/Exhaust
air control to Fresh Air. This will bring in a supply of cooler outside air.
Condensation is normal
Air conditioners actually pump the heat and humidity from your room to the
outside. Humidity becomes water, and your air conditioner will use most
of the water to keep the outside coil cool. If there is excessive humidity, 1. USE HAND TOOLS WHEN INSTALLING AND
REMOVING FRONT PANEL.
there may be excess water that will drip outside. This is normal operation.
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN SCREWS.
Frosting 2. DISCONNECT POWER AND FOLLOW ALL
LABELED WARNINGS WHEN FRONT PANEL
IS REMOVED.
FRR010
ONLY and the frost will disappear. Setting the thermostat a little warmer
will probably prevent the frosting from recurring. Figure 46
Noises
All air conditioners make some noise. Friedrich units are designed to
operate as quietly as possible. An air conditioner mounted in a wall is
quieter than one mounted in a window. It is important to ensure that the
chassis seal gasket (Item 13) is properly installed (refer to installation
instructions).
21
Routine Maintenance Service and Assistance
Before calling for service, please check the Troubleshooting Tips section
monthly, and more frequently if conditions warrant. The unit must be turned 23 24
avoid unnecessary service calls, and save you the cost of a service call
if the problem is not due to the product itself. If you have checked the
To Remove, Wash and Replace Filter Basic Troubleshooting section and still need help, it is available as follows:
our web site at www.friedrich.com.
If you require further assistance

You can call the Customer Support Call Center at 1-800-541-6645.
Coils & Chassis
NOTE: Do not use a caustic cleaning agent on coils or base pan.. Before calling, please make sure that you have the complete model and
Use a biodegradable cleaning agent and degreaser. The use serial number, and date of purchase of your equipment available. By
of harsh cleaning materials may lead to deterioration of the providing us with this information, we will be better able to assist you.
Our specialists are able to assist you with:

The indoor coil and outdoor coils and base pan should be inspected
periodically (annually or semi-annually) and cleaned of all debris (lint, dirt,
leaves, paper, etc.) as necessary. Under extreme conditions, more frequent Referrals to dealers, and distributors.
cleaning may be required. Clean the coils and base pan with a soft brush Use and Care Information.
and compressed air or vacuum. A pressure washer may also be used, Recommended maintenance procedures.
Installation information.
pack when pressure cleaning coils. Referrals to Authorized Service Providers and Parts depots.
NOTE: It is extremely important to insure that none of the electrical
and/or electronic parts of the unit get wet. Be sure to cover all
Available Accessories
electrical components to protect them from water or spray. DC-2 Drain Kit Part No. 01900235
In some installations, excess condensate water caused by extremely humid
Decorative Front conditions, may result in an undesirable water drip such as on a patio or
Use a damp (not wet) cloth when cleaning the control area to prevent over an entryway. MODEL DC-2 DRAIN KIT (Part No. 01900-235) can be
water from entering the unit, and possibly damaging the electronic control. installed to drain excess condensation to an alternate location.
The decorative front and the cabinet can be cleaned with warm water
and a mild liquid detergent. Do NOT use solvents or hydrocarbon based Carbon Filter Kits
cleaners such as acetone, naphtha, gasoline, benzene, etc. The kits vary depending on the chassis size (small, medium, large). Each
The indoor coil can be vacuumed with a dusting attachment if it appears
to be dirty. DO NOT BEND FINS. The outdoor coil can be gently KWCFS
sprayed with a hose if you can get to it. If not, you might call your dealer KWCFM
for a more thorough cleaning when needed.
KWCFL
vacuuming with a dust attachment or by cleaning in the sink using warm

FriedrichLink Adapter Accessory:
reinstalling. Use caution the coil surface can be sharp. KWIFI - FriedrichLink Adapter Accessory for wireless control and
additional programming options
Fan Motor & Compressor Decorative Color Front Panel Kits:
The fan motor & compressor are permanently lubricated, and require no The kits vary depending on the chassis size (small, medium, large.) 2
additional lubrication. KWBGE(S/M/L)A- S/M/L Decorative Front Cover in Classic Beige
KWBLK(S/M/L)A - S/M/L Decorative Front Cover in Black Onyx
Wall Sleeve KWBLU(S/M/L)A - S/M/L Decorative Front Cover in Cobalt Blue
Inspect the inside of the wall sleeve and drain system periodically (annually
or semi-annually) and clean as required. Under extreme conditions, more KWPNK(S/M/L)A - S/M/L Decorative Front Cover in Pink Diamond
frequent cleaning may be necessary. Clean both of these areas with an KWRED(S/M/L)A- S/M/L Decorative Front Cover in Deep Red
antibacterial and antifungal cleaner. Rinse both items thoroughly with
water and ensure that the drain outlets are operating correctly. Check the KWWHT(S/M/L)A- S/M/L Decorative Front Cover in Designer White
sealant around the sleeve and reseal areas as needed.
Window Installation Kits (Standard in Khl Models withoutHeat)
KWIKS For all ES and YS models.
KWIKM For all EM and YM models.
KWIKL For all EL and YL models.
See www.friedrich.com for additional accessories for your unit.
22
Troubleshooting Tips
@>}Z< @X? ZX<
The unit is turned to the off position, Turn the unit to the on position and raise or lower
temperature setting (as appropriate) to call for
operation.
Z@V<
Plug into a properly grounded 3 prong receptacle.
?

#]

proper receptacle type for your unit.
Unit does not operate. Z@V< }
#??^

#
^#]` button latches and remains in) to resume operation.
The circuit breaker has tripped or # ] *

the supply circuit fuse has blown. applicable. If the problem continues, contact a
licensed electrician.
There has been a local power The unit will resume normal operation once power
failure. has been restored.

] The unit requires a dedicated outlet circuit, not
the same circuit. shared with other appliances.
\ ] V\
other air conditioner.
X @
The circuit breaker or time-delay #
]

fuse is not of the proper rating. ?

#]

]
for your unit. If the problem continues, contact a
licensed electrician.
Z@V< ^# }
#??^

#
button pops out) due to disturbances button latches and remains in) to resume normal
on your power supply line. operation.
Electrical overload, overheating, or ]
]
Z@V<} @ ^#}` ^#] *
#??^

`Z@V<
#]
`
resume normal operation.
?
]

]
from the product manufacturer and must not be repaired.

?

blocked. are not blocked by curtains, blinds, furniture, etc.
Windows or doors to the outside are Ensure that all windows and doors are closed.
open.
The temperature is not set at a cool ~

warmer setting as necessary.

] @

*^#>`*
XV@
J#
* remove obstruction.
@

The indoor coil or outdoor coil is @

*^#>`*
dirty or obstructed. remove obstruction.
\[ \[

(cooking, showers, etc.) in the room. or bathing and, if possible, try not to use heat
producing appliances during the hottest part of the
day.
The temperature of the room you

\
off a very hot room.
23
@>}Z< @X? ZX<
The outside temperature is below V
_^$@` cooling mode when the outside temperature is
]
_^$@`

*
and the unit may be damaged.
The digital control is set to fan Since the fan does not circulate the room air
cycling mode. continuously at this setting, the room air does not
\
^
`

Using the continuous fan setting is recommended
to obtain optimum comfort levels.
XV@
J#
*
@

^` @

cooling capacity to match the heat

gain of the room. #

multiple rooms.
@
heating capacity to match the heat

*
loss of the room.

<\
*
air conditioners may not be able to be used as a
primary source of heat.
]\[ If there are heat producing appliances in use in the
heat load in the room. room, or if the room is heavily occupied, the unit will
need to run longer to remove the additional heat.
It may also be due to an improperly \[

or bathing and, if possible, try not to use heat
producing appliances during the hottest part of the
day.
This may be normal for higher
^??#` new air conditioner may result in the unit running
X#> longer than you feel it should. This may be more
*

*
*
model. The actual energy usage, however, will be

^??#`

air temperature of your new air ^`

conditioner may not seem as cold
]
as you may be accustomed to from
older units. This does not, however,
indicate a reduction in the cooling
capacity of the unit.
24
Addendum 1
Schedule Table with Energy Saving Values
Residenal Schedule
Period Sun Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat
Start Time 600 Start Time 600 Start Time 600 Start Time 600 Start Time 600 Start Time 600 Start Time 600
System Mode Cool System Mode Cool System Mode Cool System Mode Cool System Mode Cool System Mode Cool System Mode Cool
Fan Mode Auto Fan Mode Auto Fan Mode Auto Fan Mode Auto Fan Mode Auto Fan Mode Auto Fan Mode Auto
1
Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Low Fan Speed Low
Set Point Cool 78 Set Point Cool 78 Set Point Cool 78 Set Point Cool 78 Set Point Cool 78 Set Point Cool 78 Set Point Cool 78
Set Point Heat 70 Set Point Heat 70 Set Point Heat 70 Set Point Heat 70 Set Point Heat 70 Set Point Heat 70 Set Point Heat 70
2
3
4
Commercial Schedule
Period Sun Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat
1
Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med
2
Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med Fan Speed Med
25
Friedrich Air Conditioning Company
10001 Reunion Place, Suite 500
San Antonio, TX 78216
1-800-541-6645
www.friedrich.com
ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
LIMITED WARRANTY
FIRST YEAR
ANY PART: <
] #<?V#<@J
]

[

* #<?V#<@J
* [ ]
]
[

]
[ ]

[
] [ \ |

]
]
\
] \
[
[

SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR

SEALED REFRIGERANT SYSTEM:<
# ^ *
*[
* [ -
[
[*[
[*
*
*
]`

]#<?V#<@J # @
]

\ *#<?V#<@J

]

# }#<V?V #<?V#<@J
]

* [
* *
[*

#

]

]
\
]\
[ \

APPLICABILITY AND LIMITATIONS:
]

X*V @
]*@

]

1.

2. Products on which the model and serial numbers have been removed.
3. Products which have defects or damage which results from improper installation, wiring, electrical current characteristics, or maintenance; or caused by
* ]* **

[ *

] *[ * *
]
#<?V#<@J*
OBTAINING WARRANTY PERFORMANCE: [
] []#<?V#<@J V

[

}< ] * # @ [> * @@
LIMITATIONS: THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES *<>}Z<?V##<?
<?#}#<@XZ#}X#}?V#>?#@J<Z<JZZ?Z<><?VJ?VX#<J<?}#?##
>X@X#?#?}#?ZV<@Z<>V?@ZXV?Z<<Z<#@?X?<Z#<@<V?ZV>?##?@J
?}#??V#<>}Z<?V##
NOTE:

*

\

* \

OTHER: [

*
[ [
PROOF OF PURCHASE: [ [
[

[
\

]
]

[ ] [] #<?V#<@J [*

]#<?V#<@J ]
26
Friedrich Air Conditioning Co.
10001 Reunion Place, Suite 50San Antonio, Texas 78216
1-800-541-66450
www.friedrich.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
93001000_00
27

4699 - DB1 - OpsMan - R0a 3.7.14

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

4699 - DB1 - OpsMan - R0a 3.7.14

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

TITLEPAGEANDDESCRIPTIONOFEQUIPMENT

on the jib to receive the auxiliary hook weight as

manner without causing any damage.

causados por el contacto entre el bloque del gancho,

Un tipo doble bloqueo, a menudo descrito como LINEADE

medida que la pluma se baja, haciendo que el bloque

de las gras estndar, Seatrax utiliza un diseo

En pocas palabras, las gras Seatrax estn Figura 3

Item No. Item Description Yes No N/A

2 Lube Oil Tank 3/4 Full

4 Anti Two Block Frame

5 Boom Heel Pins

7 Gearbox Lube Level. (Lubrication: Data Book 1)

8 Shaft Bearing Greased

9 Tool & Debris Removal

11 Ladders, Safety Cages & Platforms

13 Tool & Debris Removal

COMPLETED BY CLIENT APPROVED C.A. APPROVED

Item No Item Description Yes No N/A

16 Hyd. Tank Level (2 3 Below Top of Tank)

17 Fuel Tank Level 1/4 1/2 3/4 Full

22 Tool & Debris Removal

24 Load & Auxiliary Rope

25 Main Block Assembly

26 Headache Ball Assembly

COMPLETED BY CLIENT APPROVED C.A. APPROVED

Item No. Item Description Yes No N/A

2 Engine Oil Level (Check Dipstick)

3 Pump Drive Fluid Level (Check Dipstick)

6 Main Hoist Lever Pull, Load Up

7 Main Hoist Lever Push, Load Down

8 Auxiliary Hoist Lever Pull, Load Up

9 Auxiliary Hoist Lever Push, Load Down

10 Slew Brake Parking Brake (Console-Mounted)

11 Slew Brake Dynamic (Foot Pedal (If Equipped)

12 Engine Start Switch

13 Engine Throttle Control

14 Engine Stop Handle

16 Up and Down Limit Switches, Main

17 Up and Down Limit Switches, Aux

COMPLETED BY CLIENT APPROVED C.A. APPROVED

Item No. Item Description Yes No N/A

2 Bridle Block Assembly

4 Air Receiver (If Equipped)

6 Safe Load Indicator (CCM7000, MIPEG, etc.) Function

7 Hoist Limit Switch Function

8 Slew Limit Switch Function

12 Telephone/Alarm System Function

13 Radio Antennas Damage

14 VHF/UHF Radio Function

15 Loud Hail Amp Function

18 Aircraft Warning Lights

COMPLETED BY CLIENT APPROVED C.A. APPROVED

Item No. Item Description Yes No N/A

22 Engine Compartment Lights

24 Circuit Breakers, Function

25 Heater Fan, Function

26 Hydraulic Oil Heater

28 Audible Alarm Function

29 Fire Alarm System

34 Earth Continuity Test

35 A/C Unit Function

36 Load Indicator Function